GTN Xi: Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual

GTN Xi
Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual
190-01007-D0 May 2023 Revision 8

©2023 Garmin International or its subsidiaries
All Rights Reserved
Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted,
disseminated, downloaded, or stored in any storage medium, for any purpose, without the express prior
written consent of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission to download a single copy of this manual and
of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed and to
print one copy of this manual or of any revision hereto, provided that such electronic or printed copy of this
manual or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright notice and provided further that any
unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited.
Garmin®, FliteCharts® and SafeTaxi® are registered trademarks of Garmin International or its subsidiaries.
Connext™, SVT™, GDU™, GTN™, and Telligence™ are also trademarks of Garmin International or its
subsidiaries. These trademarks may not be used without the express permission of Garmin.
NavData® is a registered trademark of Jeppesen, Inc.; ChartView™ is a trademark of Jeppesen, Inc.;
Skywatch® is a registered trademark of L-3 Communications. SD and SDHC Logos are trademarks of
SD-3C, LLC.
©2023 Sirius Satellite Radio®, Sirius®, SiriusXM, XM®, the dog logo, SiriusXM Internet Radio, and the
XM logo are trademarks, service marks or registered marks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. (“Marks”). All other
marks and logos are property of their respective owners. All rights reserved.
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use
of such marks by Garmin is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective
owners.
At Garmin, we value your opinion. Please send questions or comments about Garmin aviation products to
Avionics@garmin.com. Please send questions or comments about this manual or other Garmin
publications to Techpubs.Salem@garmin.com.
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 E. 151st Street
Olathe, KS 66062 USA
Telephone: (913) 397-8200
Aviation Dealer Technical Support Line (Toll Free): (888) 606-5482
www.garmin.com
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House
Bull Copse Road
Hounsdown Business Park
Southampton, SO40 9LR, UK
Telephone: +44 (0) 23 8052 4000
Fax: +44 (0) 23 8052 4004
Aviation Support +44 (0) 370 850 1243
www.garmin.co.uk
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Rd., SE
Salem, OR 97302 USA
Telephone: (503) 581-8101
Fax: (503) 364-2138
190-01007-D0 GTN Xi Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual

Rev. 8 Page A
INFORMATION SUBJECT TO EXPORT CONTROL LAWS
This document may contain information that is subject to the Export Administration Regulations (EAR) issued by the United
States Department of Commerce (15 CFR, Chapter VII, Subchapter C) and may not be exported, released, or disclosed to foreign
nationals inside or outside of the United States without first obtaining an export license.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. For updates and supplemental information regarding the
operation of Garmin products, visit flyGarmin.com.
Software License Notification

AES Encryption
The product may include AES file encryption software, © 2002 DR. Brian Gladman, subject to the following license:
The free distribution and use of this software in both source and binary form is allowed (with or without changes) provided:
• Distributions of this source code include the above copyright notice, this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer.
• Distribution in binary form include the above copyright notice, this list of conditions, and the following disclaimer in the
documentation and/or other associated materials.
• The copyright holder’s name is not used to endorse products built using this software without specific written permission.
Alternatively, provided this notice is retained in full, this product may be distributed under the terms of the GNU General Public
License (GPL) in which case the provisions of the GPL apply instead of those given above.
Disclaimer
The AES file encryption software is provided “as is” with no explicit or implied warranties in respect of its properties, including,
but not limited to, correctness and/or fitness for purpose.

Rev. 8 Page B
SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR GARMIN AVIATION PRODUCTS
The software embedded in your Garmin product (the “Licensed Software”) is owned by Garmin International, Inc. (“Garmin” or
“us”). The Licensed Software is protected under copyright laws and international copyright treaties. The Licensed Software is
provided under this Software License Agreement (hereinafter the “Agreement”) and is subject to the following terms and
conditions which are agreed to by End User (“Licensee”, “you” or “your”), on the one hand, and Garmin and its licensors and
affiliated companies of Garmin and its licensors, on the other hand. The Licensed Software is licensed, not sold, to you. Garmin
and Licensee may be referred to individually as a “Party” or jointly as the “Parties.”
IMPORTANT: CAREFULLY READ THIS ENTIRE AGREEMENT BEFORE USING THIS PRODUCT. INSTALLING,
COPYING, OR OTHERWISE USING THIS PRODUCT INDICATES YOUR ACKNOWLEDGMENT THAT YOU HAVE
READ THIS AGREEMENT AND AGREE TO ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THESE
TERMS AND CONDITIONS, YOU MAY NOT USE THIS PRODUCT.
1. Definitions. The following capitalized terms shall have the meanings set forth below:
a. “Device” means any Garmin device that is delivered by or on behalf of Garmin to Licensee onto which the Licensed
Software is installed.
b. “Documentation” means Gamin's then-current instructional, technical or functional documentation relating to the
Devices or Licensed Software which is delivered or made available by Garmin in connection with this Agreement.
c. “Licensed Software” means the software in binary executable form that is embedded in the Devices and/or made
available for use on the Devices via a software loader card.
d. “Permitted Purpose” means operating and using the Device on which the Licensed Software is installed for the
Device's intended use.
2. License.
a. License Grant. Subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement and Licensee's compliance with the terms and
conditions of this Agreement, Garmin hereby grants to Licensee a limited, royalty-free, non-exclusive, non-
sublicenseable, non-transferable and revocable right and license to use and perform the Licensed Software as installed
on the Devices and the Documentation solely for the Permitted Purpose and only during the term of this Agreement,
provided that the Licensed Software may only be used by Licensee on Devices on which the Licensed Software has
been installed or otherwise made available by Garmin.
b. Reservation of Rights. Garmin retains exclusive ownership of all right, title and interest in and to the Licensed
Software and Documentation. All of Gamin's rights in and to the Licensed Software and Documentation not expressly
licensed to Licensee under Section 2.1 are expressly reserved for Garmin. Nothing contained in this Agreement shall
be construed as conferring by implication, acquiescence, or estoppel any license or other right upon Licensee. Without
limiting the foregoing, the Parties acknowledge and agree that this Agreement grants Licensee a license of the
Licensed Software under the terms of Section 2.1, and shall not in any manner be construed as a sale of the Licensed
Software or any rights in the Licensed Software.
3. Restrictions; Protection and Third Party Devices.

a. Prohibited Uses. Licensee shall not, shall not attempt to and shall not permit any third party to:
(a) sublicense, lease, loan, sell, resell, market, transfer, rent, disclose, demonstrate, or distribute the Licensed Software
or Documentation to any third party; (b) uninstall the Licensed Software from the Device on which it was originally
installed; (c) make any use of or perform any acts with respect to the Licensed Software or Documentation other than
as expressly permitted in accordance with the terms of this Agreement; (d) use the Licensed Software or
Documentation in any manner that violates any applicable law; (e) reproduce or copy the Licensed Software; (f)
modify, adapt, alter, translate, port, create derivative works of, reverse engineer, decompile or disassemble the
Licensed Software or Documentation or otherwise derive the source code or other proprietary information or trade
secrets from the Licensed Software; (g) remove, alter, or obscure any proprietary notices from the Licensed Software
or Documentation; (h) use the Licensed Software or Documentation to provide services to third parties (such as
business process outsourcing, service bureau applications or third party training); (i) use the Licensed Software on any
equipment, hardware or device other than a Device; or (j) export, re-export or otherwise distribute, directly or
indirectly, the Licensed Software or Documentation to a jurisdiction or country to which the export, re-export or
distribution of such Licensed Software or Documentation is prohibited by applicable law.

Rev. 8 Page C
b. Protection of Software and Documentation. Licensee shall use its best efforts to protect the Licensed Software and
Documentation from unauthorized access, distribution, modification, display, reproduction, disclosure or use with at
least the same degree of care as Licensee normally uses in protecting its own software and documentation of a similar
nature from unauthorized access, distribution, modification, display, reproduction, disclosure or use. Licensee shall
limit access to the Licensed Software and Documentation to only those employees of Licensee who require access to
the Licensed Software or Documentation for the Permitted Purpose and who have been made aware of the restrictions
set forth in this Agreement. Licensee shall take prompt and appropriate action to prevent unauthorized use or
disclosure of the Licensed Software and Documentation.
4. Term and Termination.

a. Term. The term of this Agreement shall commence on the Effective Date, and shall continue in perpetuity thereafter,
unless terminated earlier as provided in this Section 4.
b. Termination by Garmin. Garmin may immediately terminate this Agreement upon written notice to Licensee if
Licensee commits a material breach of this Agreement or breaches a material term of this Agreement.
c. Effect of Termination. Upon any termination of this Agreement for any Party: (a) Licensee shall immediately cease all
use of the Licensed Software and Documentation; (b) all rights and licenses granted to Licensee to the Licensed
Software and Documentation and Gamin's related obligations shall immediately terminate; and (c) Sections 4.3, 5 and
6 shall survive.
5. Disclaimer; Limitations of Liability; Indemnity.

a. DISCLAIMER. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE LICENSED
SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION (INCLUDING ANY RESULTS TO BE OBTAINED FROM ANY USE OF
THE LICENSED SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION) ARE PROVIDED “AS IS” AND “AS AVAILABLE”
WITH NO WARRANTIES, GUARANTEES OR REPRESENTATIONS AND NEITHER GARMIN NOR ITS
AFFILIATES MAKE ANY REPRESENTATION, WARRANTY OR GUARANTEE, STATUTORY OR
OTHERWISE, UNDER LAW OR FROM THE COURSE OF DEALING OR USAGE OF TRADE, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING ANY WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, NON-INTERFERENCE, NON-INFRINGEMENT, TITLE, OR SIMILAR, UNDER THE LAWS OF
ANY JURISDICTION. GARMIN DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE LICENSED SOFTWARE OR
DOCUMENTATION WILL MEET LICENSEE'S REQUIREMENTS OR THAT OPERATION OF THE
SOFTWARE WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE. LICENSEE ASSUMES THE ENTIRE RISK AS
TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LICENSED SOFTWARE AND DOCUMENTATION. THE
LICENSED SOFTWARE IS NOT INTENDED FOR USE IN ANY NUCLEAR, MEDICAL, OR OTHER
INHERENTLY DANGEROUS APPLICATIONS, AND GARMIN DISCLAIMS ALL LIABILITY FOR ANY
DAMAGE OR LOSS CAUSED BY SUCH USE OF THE LICENSED SOFTWARE.
b. EXCLUSION OF DAMAGES; LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. NOTWITHSTANDING ANYTHING TO THE
CONTRARY HEREIN, TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES AND REGARDLESS OF THE NATURE OF ANY CLAIM SHALL GARMIN BE LIABLE
TO LICENSEE FOR AN AMOUNT IN EXCESS OF USD $100, OR BE LIABLE IN ANY AMOUNT FOR ANY
SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR INDIRECT DAMAGES, LOSS OF GOODWILL
OR PROFITS, LIQUIDATED DAMAGES, DATA LOSS, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION,
ATTORNEYS' FEES, COURT COSTS, INTEREST OR EXEMPLARY OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES, ARISING
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OR NON-PERFORMANCE OF THE
LICENSED SOFTWARE OR DOCUMENTATION, EVEN IF GARMIN HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH LOSS OR DAMAGES.
c. Indemnity. Licensee shall indemnify, defend and hold Garmin and its affiliates harmless against any and all losses,
claims, actions, causes of action, liabilities, demands, fines, judgments, damages and expenses suffered or incurred by
Garmin or its affiliated companies in connection with: (a) any use or misuse of the Licensed Software or
Documentation by Licensee or any third party in Licensee's reasonable control; or
(b) Licensee's breach of this Agreement.
6. General.
a. No Devices or Services. Licensee acknowledges and agrees that nothing in this Agreement shall be construed as
requiring Garmin to: (a) provide or supply the Devices or any other devices or hardware to Licensee; (b) grant any

Rev. 8 Page D
licenses to any software other than the Licensed Software; or (c) provide any services, such as support, maintenance,
installation or professional services for the Licensed Software.
b. Non-Exclusive. Each Party's rights and obligations under this Agreement are non-exclusive. Garmin is not precluded
from marketing, licensing, providing, selling or distributing the Licensed Software or Documentation, or any other
products, software, documentation or services, either directly or through any third party.
c. Assignment. Licensee may not assign this Agreement or any of its rights, interests or obligations hereunder without
the prior written consent of Garmin. Any purported assignment in violation of this Section 6.3 shall be null and void.
Subject to the foregoing, this Agreement shall be binding upon and shall inure to the benefit of the Parties and their
respective successors and permitted assigns and transferees.
d. Feedback and Data. Licensee may from time to time provide feedback, comments, suggestions, questions, ideas, or
other information to Garmin concerning the Licensed Software or Documentation or Gamin's products, services,
technology, techniques, processes or materials (“Feedback”). Garmin may in connection with any of its products or
services freely use, copy, disclose, license, distribute and otherwise exploit such Feedback in any manner without any
obligation, payment, royalty or restriction whether based on intellectual property rights or otherwise.
e. Governing Law. The validity, interpretation and enforcement of this Agreement will be governed by the substantive
laws, but not the choice of law rules, of the state of Kansas. This Agreement shall not be governed by the 1980 UN
Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods.
f. Legal Compliance. You represent and warrant that (i) you are not located in a country that is subject to a U.S.
Government embargo, or has been designated by the U.S. Government as a “terrorist supporting” country, and (ii) you
are not listed on any U.S. Government list of prohibited or restricted parties.
g. Injunctive Relief. The Parties acknowledge and agree that irreparable damage would occur if any provision of this
Agreement was not performed in accordance with its specific terms or was otherwise breached and as such, the Parties
will be entitled to an injunction or injunctions to prevent breaches of this Agreement and to enforce specifically the
performance of the terms and provisions of this Agreement without proof of actual damages, this being in addition to
any other remedy to which any Party is entitled at law or in equity.
h. Amendments and Waivers. This Agreement may be amended and any provision of this Agreement may be waived,
provided that any such amendment or waiver will become and remain binding upon a Party only if such amendment or
waiver is set forth in a writing by such Party. No course of dealing between or among any persons having any interest
in this Agreement will be deemed effective to modify, amend or discharge any part of this Agreement or any rights or
obligations of any Party under or by reason of this Agreement. No delay or failure in exercising any right, power or
remedy hereunder will affect or operate as a waiver thereof; nor will any single or partial exercise thereof or any
abandonment or discontinuance of steps to enforce such a right, power or remedy preclude any further exercise
thereof or of any other right, power or remedy. The rights and remedies hereunder are cumulative and not exclusive of
any rights or remedies that any Party would otherwise have.
i. Severability. The provisions of this Agreement will be severable in the event that for any reason whatsoever any of the
provisions hereof are invalid, void or otherwise unenforceable, any such invalid, void or otherwise unenforceable
provisions will be replaced by other provisions which are as similar as possible in terms to such invalid, void or
otherwise unenforceable provisions but are valid and enforceable and the remaining provisions will remain valid and
enforceable to the fullest extent permitted by applicable law, in each case so as to best preserve the intention of the
Parties with respect to the benefits and obligations of this Agreement.
j. No Third-Party Beneficiaries. This Agreement is solely for the benefit of the Parties and does not confer on third
parties any remedy, claim, reimbursement, claim of action or other right in addition to those existing without reference
to this Agreement.
k. Entire Agreement. This Agreement shall constitute the entire agreement between Garmin and you with respect to the
subject matter hereof and will supersede all prior negotiations, agreements and understandings of Garmin and you of
any nature, whether oral or written, with respect to such subject matter.
l. Interpretation. In this Agreement: (a) headings are for convenience only and do not affect the interpretation of this
Agreement; (b) the singular includes the plural and vice versa; (c) the words 'such as', 'including', 'particularly' and
similar expressions are not used as, nor are intended to be, interpreted as words of limitation; (d) a reference to a
person includes a natural person, partnership, joint venture, government agency, association, corporation or other
body corporate; a thing includes a part of that thing; and a party includes its successors and permitted assigns; and (e)
no rule of construction applies to the disadvantage of a Party because that Party was responsible for the preparation of
this Agreement. Any translation of this Agreement from English is provided as a convenience only. If this Agreement
is translated into a language other than English and there is a conflict of terms between the English version and the
other language version, the English version will control.

Rev. 8 Page E
RECORD OF REVISIONS
Revision Revision Date Description
6 10/18/22 Minor change to correct error.
7 02/06/23 Revised to address changes for software v20.30.
8 05/05/23 Minor change to add new Flight Stream 510 part numbers.
DESCRIPTION OF CHANGES
Section Change Description
Added new Flight Stream 510 part numbers and [1] to Table 3-6 Flight Stream Part
3.2.1
Number.

Rev. 8 Page F
DEFINITIONS OF WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING
A Warning means injury or death is possible if the instructions are not obeyed.
CAUTION
A Caution means that damage to the equipment is possible.
NOTE
A Note gives more information.
WARNING
This product, its packaging, and its components contain chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer, birth defects, or reproductive harm. This notice is being
provided in accordance with California's Proposition 65. If you have any questions or
would like additional information, refer to our website at www.garmin.com/prop65.
WARNING
Perchlorate Material – special handling may apply.
Refer to www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
CAUTION
GTN Xi units have a special anti-reflective coated display that is sensitive to waxes and
abrasive cleaners. CLEANERS CONTAINING AMMONIA WILL HARM THE COATING.
It is important to clean the display using a clean, lint-free cloth and a cleaner that is safe
for anti-reflective coatings.
NOTE
All screen shots used in this document are current at the time of publication. Screen shots
are intended to provide visual reference only. All information depicted in screen shots,
including software file names, versions, and part numbers, is subject to change and may
not be up-to-date.

Rev. 8 Page i
Acronyms/Abbreviations
AC Alternating Current / Advisory Circular ICS Intercom System
ADC Air Data IFR Instrument Flight Rules
ADF Automatic Direction Finder ILS Instrument Landing System
ADLP Airborne Data Link Processor INS Inertial Navigation System
Automatic Dependent Surveillance- IRU Inertial Reference Unit
ADS-B
Broadcast LED Light Emitting Diode
AFCS Aircraft Flight Control System LOC Localizer
AGC Automatic Gain Control LOI Loss of Integrity
AGCS Automatic Ground Clutter Suppression LRU Line Replaceable Unit
AHRS Altitude and Heading Reference System MDL Master Drawing List
AML Approved Model List NAV Navigation
ANR Active Noise Reduction OBS Omni-Bearing Selector (Selected Course)
ARP Aerospace Recommended Practice OEM Original Equipment Manufacturer
ATC Air Traffic Control PA Passenger Address
ATIS Automatic Terminal Information Service PCB Printed Circuit Board
AWG American Wire Gauge POH Pilot’s Operating Handbook
BIT Built-In Test PTC Push-to-Command
BNC Bayonet Neill-Concelman PTT Push-to-Talk
CDI Course Deviation Indicator R/T Radar Transceiver
CFR Code of Federal Regulations RF Radio Frequency
COM Communications RFMS Rotorcraft Flight Manual Supplement
CRG Cockpit Reference Guide Radio Magnetic Indicator (Bearing to
RMI
CSA Conflict Situational Awareness Waypoint)
DME Distance Measuring Equipment RTV Room-Temperature Vulcanizing
EFIS Electronic Flight Instrument System RX Receive
EHSI Electronic Horizontal Situation Indicator SAE Society of Automotive Engineers
ELA Electrical Load Analysis SBAS Satellite Based Augmentation System
EQF Environmental Qualification Form SDI Source/Destination Identifiers
ES Extended Squitter SSM Sign/Status Matrix
FAA Federal Aviation Administration STC Supplemental Type Certificate
FAF Final Approach Fix SVT Synthetic Vision Terrain
FIS-B Flight Information System-Broadcast TAS Traffic Advisory System
FPGA Field-Programmable Gate Array TCAS Traffic Collision Avoidance System
GS Glideslope TCAD Traffic Collision Avoidance Device
GAD Garmin Interface Adapter TIS Traffic Information Service
GDL Garmin Data Link TSO Technical Standard Order
GDU Garmin Display Unit TVS Transient Voltage Suppressors
GMA Garmin Audio Panel TX Transmit
GNS Garmin Navigation System UAT Universal Access Transceiver
GNSS Global Navigation Satellite System UTC Coordinated Universal Time
GPS Global Position System VDC Volts Direct Current
GRS Garmin Services VFR Visual Flight Rules
GTN Garmin Touch Navigator VHF Very High Frequency
GTS Garmin Traffic System VLOC VOR/LOC
GTX Garmin Transponder VOR VHF Omni-directional Range

Rev. 8 Page ii
HSDB High-Speed Data Bus VSWR Voltage Standing Wave Radio
HTAWS Helicopter Terrain Awareness System WAAS Wide Area Augmentation System
ICA Instructions for Continued Airworthiness WX Weather Radar
ICAO International Civil Aviation Organization XPDR Transponder

Rev. 8 Page iii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 GTN XI DESCRIPTION...................................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Introduction ...............................................................................................................................1-2
1.2 STC Applicability .....................................................................................................................1-3
1.3 System Overview ......................................................................................................................1-4
1.4 Documentation ........................................................................................................................1-12
1.5 GTN Xi Databases ..................................................................................................................1-14
1.6 Fault Detection and Exclusion (FDE) .....................................................................................1-17
1.7 STC Permission .......................................................................................................................1-17
2 LIMITATIONS ..................................................................................................................................2-1
2.1 Installation Limitations .............................................................................................................2-2
2.2 Operational Limitations .............................................................................................................2-4
3 PREPARATION ................................................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Pre-Installation Checklist ..........................................................................................................3-2
3.2 Materials and Parts ....................................................................................................................3-4
3.3 Installation Considerations ......................................................................................................3-14
4 INSTALLATION ...............................................................................................................................4-1
4.1 Wiring Routing and Installation ................................................................................................4-2
4.2 Antenna Installation ..................................................................................................................4-4
4.3 Electrical Bonding ...................................................................................................................4-10
4.4 GTN Xi Installation .................................................................................................................4-13
4.5 GMA 35 Installation ................................................................................................................4-23
4.6 Flight Stream 510 Installation .................................................................................................4-26
4.7 Electrical Installation ...............................................................................................................4-27
4.8 Placards and Labels .................................................................................................................4-51
4.9 Weight and Balance ................................................................................................................4-52
5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION .........................................................................................................5-1
5.1 System Configuration Overview ...............................................................................................5-3
5.2 Mounting, Wiring, and Power Checks ......................................................................................5-4
5.3 Connector Engagement Check ..................................................................................................5-4
5.4 Configuration Mode Operation .................................................................................................5-5
5.5 Flight Stream 510 ....................................................................................................................5-98
6 SYSTEM CHECKOUT .....................................................................................................................6-1
6.1 Ground Checks (Configuration Mode) .....................................................................................6-2
6.2 Ground Checks (Normal Mode) ................................................................................................6-9
6.3 Flight Checks ...........................................................................................................................6-24
6.4 Documentation Checks ...........................................................................................................6-27
APPENDIX A CONNECTOR INFORMATION ................................................................................A-1
A.1 GTN Xi .....................................................................................................................................A-2
A.2 GMA 35 .................................................................................................................................... A-9
APPENDIX B INTERCONNECT DRAWINGS................................................................................. B-1
B.1 GTN Xi Interconnect Drawings ............................................................................................... B-2
B.2 GMA 35 Interconnect Drawings ............................................................................................ B-50
APPENDIX C EQUIPMENT COMPATIBILITY AND CONFIGURATION ................................C-1
C.1 GTN Xi Equipment .................................................................................................................. C-2
C.2 GMA 35 Equipment Compatibility ........................................................................................ C-12

Rev. 8 Page iv
APPENDIX D MODEL-SPECIFIC INSTALLATION DATA..........................................................D-1
D.1 Bell 206 .................................................................................................................................... D-2
D.2 Bell 407 .................................................................................................................................... D-4
D.3 Eurocopter AS350 ....................................................................................................................D-6
D.4 Eurocopter EC130 .................................................................................................................. D-10
D.5 Airbus EC120B ......................................................................................................................D-16
D.6 MD 369E ................................................................................................................................D-17
D.7 Enstrom 280 ........................................................................................................................... D-19
D.8 Enstrom 480B ......................................................................................................................... D-21

Rev. 8 Page v
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 1-1 GTN Xi System Interface Overview ...................................................................................1-6
Figure 1-2 GMA 35 System Interface Overview ..................................................................................1-7
Figure 1-3 Interface Between One GTN Xi and One GTX...................................................................1-8
Figure 1-4 Interface Between One GTN Xi and Two GTXs ................................................................1-8
Figure 1-5 Interface Between Two GTN Xi Units and One GTX ........................................................1-9
Figure 1-6 Interface Between Two GTN Xi Units and Two GTXs ......................................................1-9
Figure 1-7 Interface Between Two GTN Xi Units and Two GTXs with TIS Traffic.........................1-10
Figure 1-8 Interface Between Two GTN Xi Units and One GTX 345 and GTX 3XX ......................1-10
Figure 3-1 Power and Ground Distribution — Single GTN Xi ..........................................................3-16
Figure 3-2 Power and Ground Distribution — Dual GTN Xi.............................................................3-16
Figure 3-3 HTAWS Annunciator Acceptable Field-of-View .............................................................3-24
Figure 4-1 Teardrop Antenna Footprint ................................................................................................4-5
Figure 4-2 ARINC Antenna Footprint ..................................................................................................4-5
Figure 4-3 Bluetooth Antenna Installation Example.............................................................................4-7
Figure 4-4 GMA 35 Marker Beacon Coaxial Cable D-Sub Termination .............................................4-9
Figure 4-5 Electrical Bonding Preparation - Bolt/Nut Joint................................................................4-10
Figure 4-6 Electrical Bonding Preparation - Nutplate.........................................................................4-10
Figure 4-7 Electrical Bonding Preparation - Terminal Lug ................................................................4-11
Figure 4-8 GTN 6XX Xi Panel Cutout Detail.....................................................................................4-14
Figure 4-9 GTN 7XX Xi Panel Cutout Detail.....................................................................................4-14
Figure 4-10 GTN 6XX Xi Dimensions and Center of Gravity .............................................................4-17
Figure 4-11 GTN 6XX Xi Mounting Rack Assembly (GTN 650Xi Installation Shown) ....................4-18
Figure 4-12 GTN 7XX Xi Dimensions and Center of Gravity .............................................................4-19
Figure 4-13 GTN 7XX Xi Mounting Rack Assembly (GTN 750Xi Installation Shown) ....................4-20
Figure 4-14 GTN Xi Mounting Rack Tab Alignment...........................................................................4-21
Figure 4-15 HTAWS Annunciator Installation Example......................................................................4-22
Figure 4-16 GMA 35 Dimensions and Center of Gravity .....................................................................4-23
Figure 4-17 GMA 35 Mounting Rack Assembly ..................................................................................4-24
Figure 4-18 GTN 7XX Xi with GMA 35 Mounting Rack Assembly...................................................4-25
Figure 4-19 GTN 6XX Xi Backplate Connector Layout — Rear View ...............................................4-28
Figure 4-20 GTN 7XX Xi Backplate Connector Layout — Rear View ...............................................4-28
Figure 4-21 GMA 35 Rear Connectors .................................................................................................4-29
Figure 4-22 Shield Termination Methods .............................................................................................4-32
Figure 4-23 Shield Termination on Backshell Assembly......................................................................4-35
Figure 4-24 Connector Backshell Assembly.........................................................................................4-36
Figure 4-25 Backshell Assembly (Potted Configuration Module)........................................................4-38
Figure 4-26 Backshell Assembly (Configuration Module with Spacer) ...............................................4-39
Figure 4-27 Fan Cable Assembly Installation .......................................................................................4-40
Figure 4-28 Sample Net Electrical Load Change Calculation ..............................................................4-43
Figure 4-29 Ammeter Placement...........................................................................................................4-45
Figure 4-30 Blank Rotorcraft Electrical Load Tabulation Form...........................................................4-47
Figure 4-31 Example Electrical Load Tabulation .................................................................................4-49
Figure 4-32 Example Weight and Balance Calculation ........................................................................4-53
Figure 5-1 Software Update Installer ....................................................................................................5-6
Figure 5-2 System and Software Version..............................................................................................5-7
Figure 5-3 Software Loader Card License Agreement..........................................................................5-7
Figure 5-4 Software Loader Card Drive................................................................................................5-8
Figure 5-5 Software Loader Card Progress Window ............................................................................5-8

Rev. 8 Page vi
Figure 5-6 Software Loader Card Completion......................................................................................5-9
Figure 5-7 System Information Page...................................................................................................5-12
Figure 5-8 GTN Setup Page ................................................................................................................5-13
Figure 5-9 ARINC 429 Configuration Page........................................................................................5-14
Figure 5-10 RS-232 Configuration Page...............................................................................................5-18
Figure 5-11 HSDB Port Utilization Page ..............................................................................................5-24
Figure 5-12 Interfaced Equipment Page................................................................................................5-25
Figure 5-13 Main Indicator (Analog) Configuration Page....................................................................5-26
Figure 5-14 V-Flag State .......................................................................................................................5-27
Figure 5-15 Lighting Configuration Page .............................................................................................5-28
Figure 5-16 Photocell Configuration Page ............................................................................................5-29
Figure 5-17 Lighting Bus Configuration Page ......................................................................................5-30
Figure 5-18 Enhanced Lighting Configuration Page.............................................................................5-31
Figure 5-19 Source Settings Page..........................................................................................................5-32
Figure 5-20 Day Mode Operation Page.................................................................................................5-33
Figure 5-21 Configure Curve Page........................................................................................................5-34
Figure 5-22 Vertex Adjustment.............................................................................................................5-34
Figure 5-23 Audio Configuration Page .................................................................................................5-37
Figure 5-24 Traffic Configuration Page ................................................................................................5-38
Figure 5-25 Main System Configuration Page......................................................................................5-39
Figure 5-26 Measurement of GPS Antenna Vertical Offset .................................................................5-40
Figure 5-27 COM Configuration Page ..................................................................................................5-45
Figure 5-28 VOR/LOC/GS Configuration Page ...................................................................................5-48
Figure 5-29 Discrete Configuration Page..............................................................................................5-49
Figure 5-30 Vertical Navigation Configuration Page ...........................................................................5-50
Figure 5-31 Ownship Configuration Page.............................................................................................5-51
Figure 5-32 Connext Configuration Page..............................................................................................5-52
Figure 5-33 GTN Options Page.............................................................................................................5-53
Figure 5-34 Terrain Configuration Page ...............................................................................................5-54
Figure 5-35 Chart Configuration Page ..................................................................................................5-56
Figure 5-36 COM Transmit Power Configuration Page .......................................................................5-57
Figure 5-37 Search and Rescue Configuration Page .............................................................................5-58
Figure 5-38 GTN Diagnostics Page ......................................................................................................5-59
Figure 5-39 External Systems Page.......................................................................................................5-62
Figure 5-40 GDL 69/69A Configuration Page......................................................................................5-62
Figure 5-41 Traffic Test Page................................................................................................................5-63
Figure 5-42 XPDR Configuration Page ................................................................................................5-64
Figure 5-43 XPDR Inputs/Outputs Page ...............................................................................................5-65
Figure 5-44 XPDR Installation Settigs Page .........................................................................................5-73
Figure 5-45 XPDR Audio Configuration Page .....................................................................................5-77
Figure 5-46 Test Tone Selection ...........................................................................................................5-78
Figure 5-47 Test Message Selection......................................................................................................5-78
Figure 5-48 XPDR Configuration Page - Force Airborne Test.............................................................5-79
Figure 5-49 Audio Panel Configuration Page .......................................................................................5-81
Figure 5-50 Audio Panel Sidetone Settings...........................................................................................5-82
Figure 5-51 Audio Panel Volume Settings............................................................................................5-83
Figure 5-52 Audio Panel Squelch Threshold Settings ..........................................................................5-84
Figure 5-53 Audio Panel Other Settings ...............................................................................................5-85
Figure 5-54 Audio Panel Discrete Configuration Page .........................................................................5-86
Figure 5-55 Audio Panel Connected Radios Page ................................................................................5-87

Rev. 8 Page vii
Figure 5-56 GDL 88 Diagnostics Page .................................................................................................5-88
Figure 5-57 GDL 88 Configuration Page..............................................................................................5-89
Figure 5-58 GDL 88 Aircraft Configuration Page ................................................................................5-90
Figure 5-59 GDL 88 Antenna Configuration Page ...............................................................................5-93
Figure 5-60 GDL 88 Audio Configuration Page...................................................................................5-94
Figure 5-61 GDL 88 Port Configuration Page ......................................................................................5-94
Figure 5-62 GDL 88 Port Selection.......................................................................................................5-94
Figure 6-1 Discrete Inputs Page ............................................................................................................6-3
Figure 6-2 Discrete Outputs Page..........................................................................................................6-3
Figure 6-3 HSDB Diagnostics Page ......................................................................................................6-4
Figure 6-4 Audio Configuration Page ...................................................................................................6-5
Figure 6-5 Lighting Bus Configuration Page ........................................................................................6-7
Figure A-1 GTN Xi Rear Connectors ...................................................................................................A-2
Figure A-2 GMA 35 Rear Connectors ..................................................................................................A-9
Figure B-1 GTN Xi System Interface Diagram .................................................................................... B-2
Figure B-2 GTN 650Xi/750Xi Typical Installation Interconnect......................................................... B-3
Figure B-3 GTN 625Xi/725Xi Typical Installation Interconnect......................................................... B-5
Figure B-4 Power, Lighting, Configuration Module, HSDB Interconnect........................................... B-7
Figure B-5 CDI Interconnect ................................................................................................................ B-9
Figure B-6 VOR-ILS Indicator Interconnect ...................................................................................... B-12
Figure B-7 Transponder Interconnect ................................................................................................. B-14
Figure B-8 Traffic Interconnect .......................................................................................................... B-20
Figure B-9 Audio Panel Interconnect ................................................................................................. B-24
Figure B-10 GDL 69 Interconnect ........................................................................................................ B-27
Figure B-11 GDL 88H Interconnect ..................................................................................................... B-28
Figure B-12 Antenna Interconnect........................................................................................................ B-30
Figure B-13 HTAWS Annunciator Interconnect .................................................................................. B-35
Figure B-14 Switches Interconnect....................................................................................................... B-38
Figure B-15 RS-232 Serial Data Interconnect ...................................................................................... B-40
Figure B-16 Air Data Interconnect ....................................................................................................... B-42
Figure B-17 GTN Xi - GTN Xi or GTN 6XX/7XX Crossfill Interconnect.......................................... B-44
Figure B-18 GSR 56 Interconnect......................................................................................................... B-45
Figure B-19 GDU 620 Interconnect...................................................................................................... B-46
Figure B-20 GDU 700/1060 Interconnect............................................................................................. B-48
Figure B-21 Radar Altimeter Interconnect ........................................................................................... B-49
Figure B-22 GMA 35 COM/NAV Interconnect ................................................................................... B-50
Figure B-23 GMA 35 Power Interconnect............................................................................................ B-52
Figure B-24 GMA 35 Microphone and Headset Interconnect.............................................................. B-54
Figure B-25 GMA 35 Other Audio Sources Interconnect .................................................................... B-56
Figure B-26 GMA 35 Discretes Interconnect ....................................................................................... B-58
Figure D-1 GTN Xi Example Installation - Bell 206B .........................................................................D-2
Figure D-2 HTAWS Annunciator Example Installation - Bell 206 Series ...........................................D-3
Figure D-3 GTN Example Installation - Bell 407.................................................................................D-4
Figure D-4 HTAWS Annunciator Example Installation - Bell 407......................................................D-5
Figure D-5 GTN Xi Example Installation - Eurocopter AS350B2, B3 ................................................D-6
Figure D-6 GTN Xi Example Installation - Eurocopter EC130 Series...............................................D-10
Figure D-7 GTN Xi Example Installation - Airbus EC120B..............................................................D-16
Figure D-8 GTN Xi Example Installation - MD 369E........................................................................D-17
Figure D-9 GTN Xi Example Installation - Enstrom 280FX / F-28F ................................................. D-19
Figure D-10 HTAWS Annunciator Example Installation - Enstrom 280 .............................................D-20

Rev. 8 Page viii
Figure D-11 GTN Xi Example Installation - Enstrom 480B ................................................................D-21

Rev. 8 Page ix
LIST OF TABLES
Table 1-1 GTN Xi Feature Sets by Model ..............................................................................................1-4
Table 1-2 Technical Specifications Documents ....................................................................................1-12
Table 1-3 GTN Xi Series and GMA 35 Environmental Qualification..................................................1-12
Table 1-4 Garmin STC Documentation ................................................................................................1-12
Table 1-5 Garmin Reference Documentation........................................................................................1-12
Table 1-6 Other Reference Documentation...........................................................................................1-13
Table 1-7 GTN Xi Database Summary .................................................................................................1-14
Table 3-1 Pre-Installation Checklist........................................................................................................3-2
Table 3-2 Replacement Pre-installation Checklist ..................................................................................3-3
Table 3-3 GTN Xi Part Numbers ............................................................................................................3-4
Table 3-4 GTN Xi Options......................................................................................................................3-4
Table 3-5 GMA 35 Part Numbers ...........................................................................................................3-5
Table 3-6 Flight Stream Part Number .....................................................................................................3-5
Table 3-7 GPS/WAAS Antennas ............................................................................................................3-5
Table 3-8 GTN 625Xi, Black Installation Kit (P/N 010-01997-01) .......................................................3-5
Table 3-9 GTN 635Xi, Helicopter, Black Installation Kit (P/N 010-01998-02).....................................3-6
Table 3-10 GTN 635Xi, Helicopter, Black, Standard Installation Kit (P/N 010-01998-06) ....................3-6
Table 3-11 GTN 650Xi, Helicopter, Black Installation Kit (P/N 010-01999-02) ....................................3-6
Table 3-12 GTN 650Xi, Helicopter, Black, Standard Installation Kit (P/N 010-01999-06) ...................3-6
Table 3-13 GTN 650Xi, Gray Installation Kit (P/N 010-01999-31).........................................................3-6
Table 3-14 GTN 650Xi, Gray, Standard Installation Kit (P/N 010-01999-35).........................................3-7
Table 3-15 GTN 650Xi, NV, Helicopter, Black (P/N 010-01999-62) ......................................................3-7
Table 3-16 GTN 650Xi, NV, Helicopter, Black, Standard (P/N 010-01999-66)......................................3-7
Table 3-17 GTN 725Xi, Black Installation Kit (P/N 010-02000-01) .......................................................3-7
Table 3-18 GTN 750Xi, Helicopter, Black (P/N 010-02002-02)..............................................................3-8
Table 3-19 GTN 750Xi, Helicopter, Black, Standard (P/N 010-02002-06) .............................................3-8
Table 3-20 GTN 750Xi, Gray Installation Kit (P/N 010-02002-31).........................................................3-8
Table 3-21 GTN 750Xi, Gray, Standard Installation Kit (P/N 010-02002-35).........................................3-8
Table 3-22 GTN 750Xi, NV, Helicopter, Black Installation Kit (P/N 010-02002-62).............................3-9
Table 3-23 GTN 750Xi, NV, Helicopter, Black, Standard Installation Kit (P/N 010-02002-66).............3-9
Table 3-24 Replacement Fan Part Numbers..............................................................................................3-9
Table 3-25 GMA 35 Installation Kit (P/N 010-00831-01)........................................................................3-9
Table 3-26 GMA 35 Installation Kit (P/N 010-00831-21)........................................................................3-9
Table 3-27 GMA 35c Installation Kit (P/N 010-00831-41)......................................................................3-9
Table 3-28 Aerospace Optics ..................................................................................................................3-10
Table 3-29 Korry Electronics ..................................................................................................................3-10
Table 3-30 Standard Parts (Commercially Available) ............................................................................3-11
Table 3-31 Recommended Crimp Tools .................................................................................................3-12
Table 3-32 Circuit Breaker Labeling.......................................................................................................3-15
Table 3-33 Uncorrected Pressure Altitude Sources.................................................................................3-19
Table 3-34 Baro-Corrected Pressure Altitude Sources ...........................................................................3-19
Table 3-35 Heading Sources ...................................................................................................................3-20
Table 3-36 Indicated Airspeed Sources...................................................................................................3-20
Table 3-37 True Airspeed Sources ..........................................................................................................3-21
Table 3-38 VLOC Selected Course Sources ...........................................................................................3-21
Table 3-39 GPS Selected Course Sources...............................................................................................3-21
Table 3-40 Total Air Temperature Sources.............................................................................................3-22
Table 3-41 Static Air Temperature Sources ............................................................................................3-22

Rev. 8 Page x
Table 3-42 Switches ................................................................................................................................3-23
Table 4-1 Socket Contact Part Numbers ...............................................................................................4-30
Table 4-2 GTN Xi and GMA 35 Backshell and D-Subminiature Connector Assembly ......................4-30
Table 4-3 Configuration Module Wire Color Reference Chart.............................................................4-37
Table 4-4 Configuration Module Kit P/N 011-00979-03......................................................................4-38
Table 4-5 Configuration Module Kit P/N 011-00979-00......................................................................4-39
Table 4-6 Fan Cable Wire Color Reference ..........................................................................................4-40
Table 4-7 Fan Kit...................................................................................................................................4-40
Table 4-8 STC Installed Equipment Current Specifications .................................................................4-41
Table 4-9 LRU Weights ........................................................................................................................4-52
Table 5-1 ARINC 429 Speed Selections ...............................................................................................5-14
Table 5-2 ARINC 429 DATA IN Selections ........................................................................................5-15
Table 5-3 ARINC 429 DATA OUT Selections ....................................................................................5-16
Table 5-4 ARINC 429 SDI Selections ..................................................................................................5-17
Table 5-5 RS-232 Channel Input Selections .........................................................................................5-18
Table 5-6 RS-232 Channel Output Selections.......................................................................................5-21
Table 5-7 GPS Selected Course ............................................................................................................5-27
Table 5-8 VLOC Selected Course.........................................................................................................5-27
Table 5-9 Display and Key Lighting Adjustable Fields........................................................................5-28
Table 5-10 Enhanced Lighting Configuration Sub-Pages.......................................................................5-31
Table 5-11 Air/Ground Discrete Selections ............................................................................................5-39
Table 5-12 Fuel Type Selections.............................................................................................................5-40
Table 5-13 Synchro Heading Input Selections (GTN 7XX Xi Only) .....................................................5-40
Table 5-14 Heading Source Input Selections ..........................................................................................5-40
Table 5-15 Radar Altimeter Input Selections..........................................................................................5-41
Table 5-16 Altitude Source Input Selections...........................................................................................5-41
Table 5-17 Enhanced Lighting Mode Selections ....................................................................................5-41
Table 5-18 Pilot Position Selections........................................................................................................5-41
Table 5-19 Crossfill Status Alert Selections ...........................................................................................5-42
Table 5-20 Database SYNC Selections...................................................................................................5-42
Table 5-21 Airspace Labels Selections ...................................................................................................5-42
Table 5-22 Checklist Page Title Selections.............................................................................................5-43
Table 5-23 Blackout Mode Selections ....................................................................................................5-43
Table 5-24 External Flight Plan Selections .............................................................................................5-43
Table 5-25 Remote Database Confirmation Selections...........................................................................5-43
Table 5-26 Remote Radio Control Selections .........................................................................................5-44
Table 5-27 RX Squelch Mode Selections ...............................................................................................5-45
Table 5-28 COM RX Squelch Levels .....................................................................................................5-46
Table 5-29 Carrier Squelch Selections ....................................................................................................5-46
Table 5-30 COM Carrier Squelch Levels................................................................................................5-46
Table 5-31 COM Sidetone Source Selections .........................................................................................5-47
Table 5-32 Sidetone Pilot Control Settings .............................................................................................5-47
Table 5-33 ARINC 429 Configuration Speed (TX) ................................................................................5-48
Table 5-34 SDI ........................................................................................................................................5-48
Table 5-35 Configurable Discrete Functions ..........................................................................................5-49
Table 5-36 Vertical Navigation Type......................................................................................................5-51
Table 5-37 Transition to Approach .........................................................................................................5-51
Table 5-38 Stream Active Flight Data Selections ...................................................................................5-52
Table 5-39 Transfer Past Flight Data Logs Selections............................................................................5-52
Table 5-40 TAWS Airframe-Specific Configuration Data .....................................................................5-55

Rev. 8 Page xi
Table 5-41 RS-232 Channel 1 Inputs and Outputs..................................................................................5-66
Table 5-42 RS-232 Channel 2 Inputs and Outputs..................................................................................5-66
Table 5-43 Transponder ARINC 429 Input Settings...............................................................................5-68
Table 5-44 AHRS Labels ........................................................................................................................5-68
Table 5-45 Air Data Computer (ADC) Labels ........................................................................................5-69
Table 5-46 Garmin Display Labels .........................................................................................................5-69
Table 5-47 Garmin TAS Labels ..............................................................................................................5-69
Table 5-48 EFIS Display System (EFIS/ADC) Labels ...........................................................................5-70
Table 5-49 GPS/FMS Navigation System (GPS) Labels ........................................................................5-70
Table 5-50 AFCS Labels .........................................................................................................................5-70
Table 5-51 Transponder ARINC 429 Output Settings ............................................................................5-71
Table 5-52 Garmin Format Output Labels (1) ........................................................................................5-71
Table 5-53 Garmin Format Output Labels (2) ........................................................................................5-72
Table 5-54 Aircraft Weight .....................................................................................................................5-73
Table 5-55 Air/Ground Logic..................................................................................................................5-74
Table 5-56 Maximum Airspeed (GTX 33 Only).....................................................................................5-74
Table 5-57 Address Type (GTX 33 Only) ..............................................................................................5-75
Table 5-58 Flight ID Type.......................................................................................................................5-75
Table 5-59 Radio Types ..........................................................................................................................5-87
Table 5-60 GDL 88 Air/Ground Discrete Configuration ........................................................................5-92
Table 5-61 RS-232 Input Selections........................................................................................................5-95
Table 5-62 RS-232 Output Selections.....................................................................................................5-95
Table 5-63 ARINC 429 Input Selections ................................................................................................5-96
Table 5-64 ARINC 429 Output Selections..............................................................................................5-96
Table 5-65 ARINC 429 Speed Selections ...............................................................................................5-96
Table 6-1 Self-Test Values ......................................................................................................................6-9
Table 6-2 Marker Beacon Annunciator Light Duration ........................................................................6-26
Table 6-3 GTN Xi Checkout Log..........................................................................................................6-29
Table C-1 Compatible Audio Panel Models ........................................................................................... C-2
Table C-2 Compatible Air Data Computer Models ................................................................................ C-3
Table C-3 Compatible Altitude Serializer and Fuel/Air Data Models.................................................... C-4
Table C-4 Garmin G500H EFIS Display ................................................................................................ C-5
Table C-5 Garmin G500H TXi EFIS Display......................................................................................... C-6
Table C-6 Compatible Transponder Models........................................................................................... C-7
Table C-7 Compatible NAV Indicator Models....................................................................................... C-9
Table C-8 Compatible Weather, Traffic, and Terrain........................................................................... C-10
Table C-9 Compatible Iridium Transceiver .......................................................................................... C-10
Table C-10 Compatible Traffic and Weather Sources............................................................................ C-11
Table C-11 Compatible Radar Altimeters............................................................................................... C-11
Table C-12 Compatible Flight Stream Models ....................................................................................... C-11
Table C-13 Approved COM Radios ....................................................................................................... C-12
Table C-14 Approved NAV Radios........................................................................................................ C-12

Rev. 8 Page xii
1 GTN Xi DESCRIPTION
1.1 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................1-2

1.2 STC Applicability ............................................................................................................................1-3
1.3 System Overview .............................................................................................................................1-4
1.3.1 GTN Xi ..................................................................................................................................1-4
1.3.2 GMA 35 Audio Panel (Optional) ...........................................................................................1-5
1.3.3 GTN Xi Interface Summary ...................................................................................................1-6
1.3.4 GMA 35 Interface Summary ..................................................................................................1-7
1.3.5 GTN Xi/GTX Interface Overview .........................................................................................1-8
1.4 Documentation ...............................................................................................................................1-12
1.5 GTN Xi Databases .........................................................................................................................1-14
1.5.1 Basemap Database ...............................................................................................................1-15
1.5.2 Navigation Database ............................................................................................................1-15
1.5.3 FliteCharts® Database (GTN 7XX Xi Only) ......................................................................1-15
1.5.4 ChartView™ Database (GTN 7XX Xi Only) ......................................................................1-15
1.5.5 SafeTaxi® Database ............................................................................................................1-15
1.5.6 Terrain Database(s) ..............................................................................................................1-16
1.5.7 Obstacle Database ................................................................................................................1-16
1.6 Fault Detection and Exclusion (FDE) ............................................................................................1-17
1.7 STC Permission .............................................................................................................................1-17

Rev. 8 Page 1-1
1.1 Introduction
This manual applies to installation of GTN Xi system with main software v20.30 or later. The software
version and the content of this manual are subject to change without notice. Visit www.garmin.com for
current updates and supplemental information concerning the operation of this and other Garmin products.
This manual describes the physical, mechanical, and electrical characteristics, as well as instructions,
conditions, and limitations for installation and approval, of the GTN Xi navigators and the optional GMA
35 and Flight Stream 510.
Except where specifically noted, references made to:
• “GTN Xi” refer to GTN 625Xi, GTN 635Xi, GTN 650Xi, GTN 725Xi, and GTN 750 Xi
• “GTN 6XX Xi” refer specifically to the GTN 625Xi, GTN 635Xi, and GTN 650Xi
• “GTN 7XX Xi” refer specifically to the GTN 725Xi and GTN 750Xi
• “GMA 35” will be synonymous with the GMA 35 and GMA 35c
“GTN AML STC” refers to STC SR02120SE
Satellite-Based Augmentation System (SBAS) refers to a system that supports wide-area augmentation
through the use of broadcast messages from satellites to improve the GPS navigation system accuracy.
SBAS is a general term used to describe systems such as Wide Area Augmentation System (WAAS) and
European Geostationary Navigation Overlay Service (EGNOS).

Rev. 8 Page 1-2
1.2 STC Applicability
This manual defines aircraft modifications required to install the GTN Xi system under the SR02120SE
GTN Xi Part 27 AML STC and is applicable only to rotorcraft models listed on the Approved Model List
(AML). Aircraft modifications per this STC involve installation of components specified on the STC
Equipment List and additional components specified in Section 4. Installation of components not included
on the STC Equipment List require a separate airworthiness approval.
Aircraft makes and models listed on the AML are eligible for the GTN Xi system installation under this
STC. Based on the data contained in the manual, STC applicability to a particular aircraft must be verified
before the aircraft is modified. Some aircraft may have been modified or equipped with systems to which
the GTN Xi interface is not defined nor approved. The installer must make the final determination if this
STC is applicable to a given aircraft.
The installation of the GTN Xi system in accordance with this STC is a major alteration to the aircraft.
Following a major alteration, the aircraft must be returned to service in a means acceptable to the cognizant
aviation authority. An example would be compliance with 14 CFR 43.9, 14 CFR 91.417, and submission
of an FAA Form 337 “Major Repair and Alteration Airframe, Powerplant, Propeller, or Appliance”
completed in accordance with advisory circular AC 43.9-1F, Instructions for Completion of FAA
Form 337.
Consistent with FAA Order 8110.4B and AC 21-40, a permission letter to use this STC data is available for
download from the Garmin Dealer Resource Center.

Rev. 8 Page 1-3
1.3 System Overview
The GTN Xi navigators are a family of aviation panel-mounted units. The GTN 6XX Xi product family
consists of the GTN 625Xi GPS/SBAS navigator, the GTN 635Xi GPS/SBAS/COM navigator, and the
GTN 650Xi GPS/SBAS/NAV/COM navigator. The GTN 7XX Xi product family consists of the
GTN 725Xi GPS/SBAS navigator and the GTN 750Xi GPS/SBAS/NAV/COM navigator. Refer to Figure
1-1 for an overview of the system interfaces to the GTN Xi unit.
The optional GMA 35 Audio Panel is both a marker beacon receiver and an audio panel that interfaces to
the GTN 7XX Xi, communications and navigation radios, headsets, microphones, and speakers. The
GMA 35 is a remote-mounted audio panel that interfaces via RS-232 to the GTN 7XX Xi for control and
display of audio panel functions.
The addition of a Flight Stream 510 brings wireless connectivity to the cockpit by enabling portable
electronic devices (PEDs) to stream data to and from the installed avionics. Flight Stream products are
compatible with select iOS and Android devices.
1.3.1 GTN Xi
Table 1-1 shows the attributes of each GTN Xi unit.
Table 1-1 GTN Xi Feature Sets by Model
GTN 625Xi GTN 635Xi GTN 650Xi GTN 725Xi GTN 750Xi
GPS/SBAS     
COM Radio   
NAV Radio  
GMA 35 Control  
1.3.1.1 GTN 6XX Xi Series

The GTN 6XX Xi WAAS navigators are a family of panel-mounted products that include the GTN 625Xi,
GTN 635Xi, and GTN 650Xi. GTN 6XX Xi units are 6.25 inches wide and 2.65 inches tall. They feature a
834 × 370 pixel color LCD touchscreen.
The GTN 625Xi is a GPS/SBAS unit that meets the requirements of TSO C146c. The GTN 635Xi includes
all of the features of the GTN 625Xi in addition to an airborne VHF communications transceiver. The GTN
650Xi includes all of the features of the GTN 635Xi in addition to an airborne VOR/localizer (LOC) and
glideslope (GS) receivers.
1.3.1.2 GTN 7XX Xi Series

The GTN 7XX Xi WAAS navigators are a family of GPS/NAV/COM aviation panel-mounted products
that include the GTN 725Xi and GTN 750Xi. GTN 7XX Xi units are 6.25 inches wide and 6.00 inches tall.
They feature a 834 × 986 pixel color LCD touchscreen.
The GTN 725Xi is a GPS/SBAS unit that meets the requirements of TSO-C146c. The GTN 750Xi
includes all of the features of the GTN 725Xi in addition to an airborne VHF communications transceiver
and airborne VOR/localizer (LOC) and glideslope (GS) receivers. GTN 7XX Xi units also have the ability
to remotely control GMA 35 Audio Panel functions.

Rev. 8 Page 1-4
1.3.2 GMA 35 Audio Panel (Optional)
The GMA 35 is a remote-mounted audio panel that interfaces via RS-232 to the GTN 7XX Xi for control
and display of audio panel functions. The system delivers reliability and versatility for all audio controlling
functions. The GMA 35 can be optionally installed with the GTN 7XX Xi.
Additionally, the GMA 35 includes a 6-position intercom system (ICS) with electronic cabin noise
de-emphasis, two stereo music inputs, and independent pilot/co-pilot/passenger volume controls. To
further simplify cockpit workload, the intercom provides three selectable isolation modes. A pilot-
selectable cabin speaker output can be used to listen to the selected rotorcraft radios or to broadcast PA
announcements.
The GMA 35 also includes a marker beacon receiver with dual sensitivity and audio muting with
automatic re-arming. The GMA 35c adds the capability of pairing telephone or music audio from a
Bluetooth device.
Features Summary
• User-friendly, intuitive control via the GTN 7XX Xi touchscreen navigator
• 6-position intercom: pilot, co-pilot, and four passengers
• 3D Audio
• Three stereo headset amplifiers: one for pilot, one for co-pilot, and one for the passengers
• Two stereo music source inputs
• Three selectable intercom operational modes
• Independent pilot, co-pilot, and passenger volume controls
• Individual VOX circuits for each of six (6) microphone inputs
• Automatic selection of radio audio source when corresponding microphone is selected
• Split COM transceiver function. Co-pilot may transmit and receive on COM2 while pilot transmits
and receives on COM1
• COM swap function
• TX indication via GTN 7XX Xi
• Speaker output for radios or PA function
• Power-off fail-safe to connect Pilot PTT, microphone, and Headset to COM1 if unit is turned off or
loses power
• Power loss fail-safe warning audio
• Bluetooth audio and phone connectivity (GMA 35c only)

Rev. 8 Page 1-5
1.3.3 GTN Xi Interface Summary
The GTN Xi utilizes ARINC 429, RS-232, discrete inputs/outputs, and Garmin High Speed Data Bus
(HSDB) interfaces to communicate with other LRUs and systems on the rotorcraft. A summary of the
GTN Xi interfaces are shown in Figure 1-1. For more detail, refer to Appendix B.
Crossfill
(from another GTN Xi GPS/WAAS Antenna
or GTN 6XX/7XX[1])
Switches/
Annunciators NAV Antenna
(GTN 650Xi/750Xi)
Air Data
COM Antenna
(GTN 635Xi/650Xi/750Xi)
Fuel Management
System
Altitude Encoder
Audio Panel
GTN Xi
Transponder
PFD/MFD
(G500H/G500H TXi)
Radar Altimeter
CDI/HSI
Traffic System
GSR 56
Datalink
(XM Radio, NEXRAD,
etc.) Flight Portable
Stream Electronic
510 Device
GDL 88H
Notes:
[1] GTN Xi – GTN 6XX/7XX Crossfill
requires GTN software v6.70 or
later.
Figure 1-1 GTN Xi System Interface Overview

Rev. 8 Page 1-6
1.3.4 GMA 35 Interface Summary
The GMA 35 utilizes RS-232, discrete inputs/outputs, and analog audio inputs/outputs to communicate
with other systems on the rotorcraft. A summary of the GMA 35 interfaces is shown in Figure 1-2. For
more detail, refer to Appendix B.
GTN 7XX Xi RS-232

Control Head Marker Beacon
Antenna
COM 1
Transceiver
COM 2
Transceiver Cockpit Speaker
COM 3
Transceiver
NAV 1 Radio
GMA 35 Pilot/Co-pilot
Headsets (x2)
Audio Panel
NAV 2 Radio
Passenger
Headsets (x5)
Marker
Unswitched,
Beacon
Unmuted Audio
Annunciators
Input (x4)
Telephone
Audio Music Input (x2)
Bluetooth
Audio [1] Notes:
[1] GMA 35c only.
Figure 1-2 GMA 35 System Interface Overview

Rev. 8 Page 1-7
1.3.5 GTN Xi/GTX Interface Overview
This section contains considerations for connecting GTN Xi units with the GTX 32/33/327/328/330/3X5
transponders. The GTN Xi utilizes RS-232 to communicate with the GTX transponders. Additionally, the
GTN Xi utilizes HSDB to communicate with GTX 345 transponders. Refer to Section 1.3.5.2 if GTN Xi
control of the transponder is desired. If GTN Xi control of the GTX 327 or 330 is not desired, refer to
Section 1.3.5.3 for more information.
Pressure altitude is transmitted from the GTN Xi to the GTX over the RS-232 connections discussed
below. Pressure altitude is not transmitted from the GTX to the GTN Xi over these RS-232 connections
(except for some GTX 327 installations; refer to Section 1.3.5.2 for more information). For this reason, it is
recommended that the rotorcraft’s pressure altitude source be connected directly to the GTN Xi.
If there is only one GTN Xi and one GTX, they communicate over a direct RS-232 connection, as shown
in Figure 1-3.
RS-232
GTN Xi GTX 3X/3XX
Figure 1-3 Interface Between One GTN Xi and One GTX
If there are two GTX units, they must both be connected to the GTN Xi, as shown in Figure 1-4. In this
case, the GTN Xi can control both GTX #1 and GTX #2.
GTX 3X/3XX
#1
RS-232
GTN Xi
RS-232
GTX 3X/3XX
#2
Figure 1-4 Interface Between One GTN Xi and Two GTXs

Rev. 8 Page 1-8
Similarly, to connect one GTX to dual GTN Xi units, each of the GTN Xi units needs to have an RS-232
connection to the single GTX, as shown in Figure 1-5. In this case, both GTN Xi #1 and GTN Xi #2 can
control the transponder.
RS-232
GTN Xi #1
HSDB GTX 3X/3XX
GTN Xi #2
RS-232
Figure 1-5 Interface Between Two GTN Xi Units and One GTX
If there are two GTX units connected to dual GTN Xi units, GTN Xi #1 should be connected to GTX #1
and GTN Xi #2 should be connected to GTX #2, as shown in Figure 1-6. In this configuration, each of the
GTN Xi units is capable of controlling either GTX through the HSDB interface.
RS-232 GTX 3X/3XX

GTN Xi #1
#1
HSDB
GTX 3X/3XX
GTN Xi #2
RS-232 #2
Figure 1-6 Interface Between Two GTN Xi Units and Two GTXs

Rev. 8 Page 1-9
To enable TIS traffic for the combination of two GTXs connected to dual GTN Xi units, each of the GTX
units must be connected to both GTN Xi units because the TIS data is not transmitted over HSDB. Also,
only the GTX 33 and the GTX 330 are capable of receiving TIS traffic data. This arrangement is shown in
Figure 1-7. The pressure altitude source must also be connected to both GTN Xi units.
RS-232 GTX 33/330/335

GTN Xi #1
RS-232
#1
HSDB
RS-232
GTX 33/330/335
GTN Xi #2
RS-232 #2
Figure 1-7 Interface Between Two GTN Xi Units and Two GTXs with TIS Traffic
1.3.5.1 GTN Xi/GTX 345 Interface Overview

This section contains considerations for connecting GTN Xi units to GTX 345 transponders. The GTN Xi
utilizes HSDB to communicate with GTX 345 transponders. Air data and ADS-B compliant GPS position
data, including heading and pressure altitude, are sent from the GTN Xi to the GTX 345 over HSDB.
ADS-B IN data, including TIS-B traffic and FIS-B data, is transmitted to the GTN Xi from the GTX 345
over HSDB. If an active traffic system is connected to the GTX 345, correlated traffic is provided to the
GTN Xi over HSDB. RS-232 is required only if control of the GTX 345 is desired from the GTN Xi.
For dual transponder installations, if one is a GTX 345 (ADS-B IN), the other must be a GTX 32/33/327/
328/330/335. The GTX 345 can be either Transponder #1 or Transponder #2.
RS-232
GTN Xi #1 GTX 345

HSDB
HSDB
GTN Xi #2 GTX 33/330/335

RS-232
Figure 1-8 Interface Between Two GTN Xi Units and One GTX 345 and GTX 3XX

Rev. 8 Page 1-10
1.3.5.2 Installation with GTN Xi Control of GTX Transponder
When connected to a GTX 32/33/327/328/330, the GTN Xi can control the transponder as well as transmit
pressure altitude (if a pressure altitude source is connected to the GTN Xi). GTN Xi and GTX
configuration settings can be found in Section 5 and Appendix Section C.1.5.
1.3.5.3 Installation without GTN Xi Control of GTX Transponder

The GTX 327, 328, and 330 can be connected to the GTN Xi without allowing the GTN Xi to control the
transponder functions. GTN Xi and GTX configuration settings can be found in Section 5 and Appendix
Section C.1.5.
If the GTN Xi is not set to control the GTX 327, the interface to the GTX 327 is not required. However, the
GTN Xi can send GPS groundspeed to the transponder. Also, if the GTN Xi is not controlling the
GTX 327, the GTN Xi can optionally receive pressure altitude from the GTX 327.
NOTE
When the GTN Xi is not controlling the GTX 327 transponder, pressure altitude data is not
sent from the GTN Xi to the GTX 327. Instead, the pressure altitude source must be
connected to the transponder.
For the GTX 330, TIS traffic can still be sent to the GTN Xi even if the GTN Xi is not controlling the
transponder. If GTN Xi control of the GTX 330 and display of TIS traffic from the transponder on the
GTN Xi is not desired, GPS position, track, and velocity can still be sent to the transponder.

Rev. 8 Page 1-11
1.4 Documentation
For GTN Xi technical specifications, refer to the manuals listed in Table 1-2.
Table 1-2 Technical Specifications Documents
Document P/N
GTN Xi Series TSO Installation Manual 190-02327-02
GMA 35/35c Installation Manual 190-00858-11
The latest revision of the EQF for the GTN Xi and the GMA 35/35c is available from Garmin under the
part numbers listed in Table 1-3. Copies of these forms can be obtained from the Garmin Dealer Resource
Center.
Table 1-3 GTN Xi Series and GMA 35 Environmental Qualification
Document P/N
GTN 625Xi/635Xi/650Xi Environmental Qualification Form 005-01269-0A
GTN 725Xi/750Xi Environmental Qualification Form 005-01269-0B
GMA 35 Environmental Qualification Form 005-00567-01
Table 1-4 Garmin STC Documentation

Document P/N
GTN 6XX/7XX Part 27 AML STC Master Drawing List 005-00533-H0
Equipment List, GTN Xi Part 27 AML STC 005-00533-M1
GTN Xi Part 27 AML STC Maintenance Manual 190-01007-D1
RFMS, Garmin GTN Xi GPS/SBAS Navigation System 190-01007-D2
Table 1-5 Garmin Reference Documentation

Document P/N
G500H STC Installation Manual 190-01150-06
G500H TXi Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual 190-02401-00
GA 35, GA 36, GA 37 Antenna Installation Instructions 190-00848-00
GDL 69/69A Installation Manual 190-00355-02
GDL 84H/88H Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual 190-01310-H0
GDU 620 Installation Manual 190-00601-04
GMA 350/350H Installation Manual 190-01134-11
GTN Xi Series Pilot’s Guide 190-02327-03
GRA 5500 Installation Manual 190-01277-00
GSR 56 Installation Manual 190-00836-00
GTX 32 Transponder Installation Manual 190-00303-60

Rev. 8 Page 1-12
GTX 330/330D Transponder Installation Manual 190-00207-02
GTX 3X5 Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual 190-00734-20
Table 1-6 Other Reference Documentation

Document P/N
Aerospace Systems Electrical Bonding and Grounding for Electromagnetic
SAE ARP1870
Compatibility and Safety
FAA Advisory Circular, Airborne VHF Communications Equipment Installations FAA AC 20-67B
FAA Advisory Circular, Certification of Normal Category Rotorcraft FAA AC 27-1B
FAA Advisory Circular, Airworthiness Approval of Global Navigation Satellite
FAA AC 20-138D
System (GNSS) Equipment
FAA Advisory Circular, Acceptable Methods, Techniques, and Practices –
FAA AC 43.13-1B
Aircraft Inspection and Repair
FAA Advisory Circular, Acceptable Methods, Techniques, and Practices –
FAA AC 43.13-2B
Aircraft Alterations
Standard Guide for Aircraft Electrical Load and Power Source Capacity
ASTM F2490-05e1
Analysis

Rev. 8 Page 1-13
1.5 GTN Xi Databases
The GTN Xi utilizes various databases. All databases are loaded to the GTN Xi via a data card that is
inserted into the vertical slot on the left side of the unit.
Database updates can be applied in Normal mode at power-up. Alternatively, the databases can be updated
in Configuration mode via the Updates page. The GTN Xi, by default, will only update to effective
databases. If loading databases that are not yet effective, or if the GTN Xi GPS time is out-of-date, press
and hold the dual-concentric knob during power-up to install all database updates from the data card.
Databases are updated by removing the database card from the GTN Xi, updating the database on the card,
and re-inserting the card. Databases can also be updated using a Flight Stream 510 wireless data card and a
portable device. When powering on in Normal mode with a Flight Stream 510 inserted into the database
card slot, the GTN Xi will provide on-screen instructions on how to transfer databases from a portable
device (with a compatible application) over Wi-Fi.
Database cards and the Flight Stream 510 should not be swapped between GTN Xi units, if multiple units
are installed.
GTN Xi Database Cards are updated by purchasing database subscription updates from Garmin. The
database card is programmed using an SD card reader. Contact Garmin at (866) 739-5687 or go to
flyGarmin.com for more information and instructions. Refer to
Table 1-7 for a summary of the update rate.
The GTN Xi Database Card (Garmin P/N 010-02045-XX) includes the following databases: Basemap,
Obstacle, SafeTaxi, Navigation, Terrain, and FliteCharts.
CAUTION
The databases on the Supplemental Data Card are locked to specific GTN Xi installations.
The first time the Supplemental Data Card is inserted into a GTN Xi, it associates
exclusively with that particular GTN Xi and will not work in other installations.
Table 1-7 GTN Xi Database Summary
Database Update Rate Stored Location
Terrain Database Periodic (When available) Internal
FliteCharts Database 28 Days Internal
ChartView Database 14 Days Internal
Obstacle Database 56 Days Internal
SafeTaxi Database 56 Days Internal
Basemap Database Periodic (When available) Internal
Navigation Database 28 Days Internal

Rev. 8 Page 1-14
1.5.1 Basemap Database
Basemap provides ground-based references, such as major roads and bodies of water. The database is
stored in the GTN Xi internal memory. Basemap does not have a scheduled update cycle and as such does
not have an expiration date. The Basemap database is updated infrequently.
1.5.2 Navigation Database

The Navigation database provides the GTN Xi with the required information for displaying flight plan
information.
NOTE
There are multiple navigation databases available for use in the GTN Xi. For operators in
North America, the “America, Helicopters” database is recommended.
The navigation database on the GTN Xi Database Card is generated from current Jeppesen Sanderson data
and converted to a format that is used by the GTN Xi. The data conversion process is performed using
software that is developed and maintained under Garmin configuration management according to RTCA/
DO-200A, Level 1, 2, Standards for Processing Aeronautical Data. GTN Xi users update their database
card by purchasing database subscription updates from Garmin. The database card is programmed using an
SD card reader. Contact Garmin at (866) 739-5687, flyGarmin.com, or www.jeppdirect.com/Garmin for
more information and instructions.
1.5.3 FliteCharts® Database (GTN 7XX Xi Only)

FliteCharts resemble the paper version of AeroNav Services (formerly named National Aeronautical
Charting Office) terminal procedures charts. The charts are displayed with high-resolution and in color for
applicable charts. FliteCharts database subscription is available from Garmin. The FliteCharts database is
stored on the GTN Xi SD card. When viewing these charts on the GTN Xi, the rotorcraft position is not
depicted on the chart.
1.5.4 ChartView™ Database (GTN 7XX Xi Only)

ChartView resembles the paper version of Jeppesen terminal procedures charts. The charts are displayed in
full color with high-resolution. The GTN Xi depiction shows the rotorcraft position on the moving map in
the plan view of approach charts and on airport diagrams. GTN Xi users update their ChartView data by
purchasing database subscription updates from Jeppesen Sanderson. The database card is programmed
using an SD card reader and Jeppesen-provided software. Contact Jeppesen at (800) 621-5377 or
www.jeppesen.com for more information and instructions.
ChartView is an optional feature that must be activated for use. Instructions for activating the ChartView
function are found in Section 5.4.4.2.
1.5.5 SafeTaxi® Database

SafeTaxi diagrams provide detailed taxiway, runway, and ramp information at more than 900 airports in
the United States. The data conversion process is performed using software that is developed and
maintained under Garmin configuration management according to RTCA/DO-200A, Level 2, Standards
for Processing Aeronautical Data.

Rev. 8 Page 1-15
1.5.6 Terrain Database(s)
The Terrain database is used to provide basic terrain awareness functionality. The Terrain database is
required for terrain proximity functionality and is used by the system for HTAWS alerting (HTAWS
enablement is required for functionality). Additionally, a database with 2.5 arc-second resolution is
required for the HTAWS alerting function. All 2.5 arc-second databases are regionalized by geographic
location. The data conversion process is performed using software that is developed and maintained under
Garmin configuration management according to RTCA/DO-200A, Level 2, Standards for Processing
Aeronautical Data.
1.5.7 Obstacle Database

The Obstacle database provides identification of known obstacles and powerlines (optional).
NOTE
The Obstacle database includes ONLY those obstacles reported to the FAA.
This database is also used with Terrain awareness and HTAWS functionality. The data conversion process
is performed using software that is developed and maintained under Garmin configuration management
according to RTCA/DO-200A, Level 2, Standards for Processing Aeronautical Data.

Rev. 8 Page 1-16
1.6 Fault Detection and Exclusion (FDE)
The GTN Xi, when installed as defined in this manual, complies with the requirements for GPS primary
means of navigation in oceanic and remote airspace when used in conjunction with the provided FDE
prediction program.
The GTN Xi includes internal Fault Detection and Exclusion (FDE) software that is active for all flight
phases, including oceanic and remote operations, en route and terminal, and precision and non-precision
approaches. FDE does not require any pilot interaction. The FDE consists of two parts:
• The fault detection function detects a satellite failure that can affect navigation
• The exclusion function is the capability to exclude one or more failed satellites and prevent them
from affecting navigation
The FDE Prediction program is used to predict FDE availability. This program must be used prior to all
oceanic or remote area flights for all operators using the GTN Xi as a primary means of navigation under
FAR parts 91, 121, 125, and 135. The FDE program is part of the GTN Xi trainer, which is available for
download at www.garmin.com.
1.7 STC Permission

Consistent with Order 8110.4B and AC 21-40, a permission letter to use this STC data is available for
download from the Garmin Dealer Resource Center on Garmin’s website.

Rev. 8 Page 1-17
2 LIMITATIONS
2.1 Installation Limitations ....................................................................................................................2-2

2.1.1 Equipment Interfaced to the GTN Xi/GMA 35/Flight Stream 510 .......................................2-2
2.1.2 STC Installations ....................................................................................................................2-2
2.1.3 Preservation of Previous Systems ..........................................................................................2-2
2.1.4 HTAWS Annunciatiors ..........................................................................................................2-2
2.1.5 Traffic Sensor Interfaced to the GTN Xi ...............................................................................2-2
2.1.6 Major Alterations ...................................................................................................................2-3
2.1.7 Aircraft Radio Station License ...............................................................................................2-3
2.1.8 GPS/WAAS Antenna Limitations .........................................................................................2-3
2.1.9 Other Garmin Equipment Installation Limitations ................................................................2-3
2.1.10 Vertical Airspace Labels ........................................................................................................2-3
2.1.11 Telligence™ (Automated Speech Recognition) ....................................................................2-3
2.1.12 Flight Stream 510 ...................................................................................................................2-3
2.1.13 External CDI Interface ...........................................................................................................2-3
2.1.14 GPS Antenna Replacement Limitations ................................................................................2-3
2.2 Operational Limitations ...................................................................................................................2-4
2.2.1 Operations ..............................................................................................................................2-4
2.2.2 Previous Operational Approvals ............................................................................................2-4
2.2.3 SVT and HTAWS Limitation ................................................................................................2-4

Rev. 8 Page 2-1
2.1 Installation Limitations
2.1.1 Equipment Interfaced to the GTN Xi/GMA 35/Flight Stream 510
Interfaces between GTN Xi, GMA 35, or Flight Stream 510 and rotorcraft systems other than those
specified in Appendix C are beyond the scope of this installation manual. Certification and/or other FAA
airworthiness approval of those interfaces requires further evaluation.
2.1.2 STC Installations

The physical mounting of the GTN Xi and GMA 35/Flight Stream 510 and annunciators for optional
HTAWS is covered within the data for this STC. However, relocation of any required instrumentation to
make room for the GTN Xi and optional HTAWS annunciators is beyond the scope of this installation
manual. The installer should reference the rotorcraft manufacturer's data, or other approved data, to make
this alteration.
Instruments relocated in accordance with this manual should use the original type design lighting system.
Installer must modify the lighting overlay in accordance with the manufacturer’s data or replace it with an
approved lighting covered by the TC, applicable STC, or other approved method when modifying existing
or fabricating new instrument panel.
2.1.3 Preservation of Previous Systems

It is the installer’s responsibility, using data provided in this manual and data identified in the GTN AML
STC, to preserve the essential characteristics of the rotorcraft systems in accordance with the rotorcraft
manufacturer’s original type design and the requirements of 14 CFR Part 27. This includes the
preservation of multiple power buses, which reduces the probability of interrupting power to essential
instruments and avionics.
2.1.4 HTAWS Annunciatiors

HTAWS annunciator(s) must be installed if HTAWS is enabled in a GTN Xi installed in a location outside
of the primary field-of-view. HTAWS annunciators are not required if the GTN Xi is installed in a location
within the primary field-of-view or is interfaced to an existing G500H or G500H TXi system.
Installation of optional HTAWS annunciators is restricted to rotorcraft with a 28V DC electrical system.
2.1.5 Traffic Sensor Interfaced to the GTN Xi

The GTN Xi is certified to interface to no more than one traffic sensor in a rotorcraft. The unit supports
multiple types (e.g., TCAD, TAS, TCAS I, TIS) of traffic systems, but only one system may be configured
for use. For installations with dual GTN Xi units, this STC does not approve interfacing a different traffic
sensor to each GTN Xi. Use of the GTX 345 or GDL 88 to correlate traffic from another traffic sensor is
acceptable and does not violate this limitation.

Rev. 8 Page 2-2
2.1.6 Major Alterations
The installation of the GTN Xi and GMA 35/Flight Stream 510 is a major alteration to the rotorcraft type
design. Following a major alteration, the rotorcraft must be returned to service in a means acceptable to the
cognizant aviation authority. An example would be an FAA Form 337, Major Repair and Alteration
Airframe, Powerplant, Propeller, or Appliance, properly executed to describe the major alteration,
including the equipment and systems to which the GTN Xi and GMA 35 is interfaced, submitted to the
appropriate FAA office.
2.1.7 Aircraft Radio Station License

An aircraft radio station license is not required when operating the GTN Xi in U.S. airspace but may be
required when operating internationally.
2.1.8 GPS/WAAS Antenna Limitations

The GTN Xi GPS/SBAS receivers are limited to using one of the GPS/WAAS antennas listed in Table 3-7.
2.1.9 Other Garmin Equipment Installation Limitations

Refer to the appropriate equipment specific installation document listed in Table 1-5.
2.1.10 Vertical Airspace Labels

Under this STC, vertical airspace labels must be configured Off. The setting is described in Section 5.4.3.1.
2.1.11 Telligence™ (Automated Speech Recognition)

Under this STC, Telligence Voice Commands must be configured Off. This setting is described in
Section 5.4.3.8.1.
2.1.12 Flight Stream 510

The Flight Stream 510 interface and data provided to a PED is not approved to replace any required or
installed rotorcraft display equipment, including navigation or traffic/weather display equipment.
Flight Stream 510 is not approved for use under this STC on rotorcraft registered in countries under EASA
or UK-CAA oversight
2.1.13 External CDI Interface

An analog course deviation indicator must not be interfaced to the GTN Xi main board connector (P1001)
when the GTN Xi is also interfaced to an electronic display that provides GPS selected course. It is
acceptable to interface the analog CDI to the GTN Xi navigation board connector (P1004). Refer to
Appendix C for a list of currently approved electronic display interfaces.
2.1.14 GPS Antenna Replacement Limitations

The GPS antenna location is limited to the fuselage or tailboom. The GPS antenna may not replace an
existing GPS antenna installed on a vertical or horizontal fin.

Rev. 8 Page 2-3
2.2 Operational Limitations
2.2.1 Operations
This STC provides data for GTN Xi and GMA 35/Flight Stream 510 installation into rotorcraft that are
limited to VFR operations only and are included on the AML. The installation instructions in this manual
must be followed in order to ensure an airworthy installation for rotorcraft operating under Title 14 CFR
Parts 91, 121, and 135 with the limitations of those installations listed here. The rotorcraft must be
placarded in accordance with Section 4.8.
2.2.2 Previous Operational Approvals

The installation of a GTN Xi or GMA 35/Flight Stream 510 into a rotorcraft does not alter the operational
approvals previously granted to that rotorcraft. Additional operational approvals may require FAA
evaluation of all the systems installed in a particular rotorcraft and is outside the scope of the GTN AML
STC.
2.2.3 SVT and HTAWS Limitation

If the GTN Xi with HTAWS is installed with a G500H or G500H TXi, then SVT and HTAWS cannot be
enabled at the same time.
This limitation is not applicable if the following conditions are met:
G500H
• Interfaced G500H software v7.00 or later is installed
• EXT TAWS on the G500H Terrain-HSVT Setup page is set to Installed (HSDB)
G500H TXi
External TAWS on the Terrain/TAWS page is set to Installed (HSDB)

Rev. 8 Page 2-4
3 PREPARATION
3.1 Pre-Installation Checklist .................................................................................................................3-2

3.1.1 Replacement of GTN 6XX/7XX with GTN Xi .....................................................................3-3
3.2 Materials and Parts ...........................................................................................................................3-4
3.2.1 Garmin ...................................................................................................................................3-4
3.2.2 Other Suppliers ....................................................................................................................3-10
3.2.3 Special Tools Required ........................................................................................................3-12
3.2.4 Manufacturer Information ....................................................................................................3-13
3.3 Installation Considerations ............................................................................................................3-14
3.3.1 Minimum System Configuration .........................................................................................3-14
3.3.2 Unit Mounting ......................................................................................................................3-14
3.3.3 Power Distribution ...............................................................................................................3-15
3.3.4 GTN Xi Cooling ...................................................................................................................3-17
3.3.5 GMA 35 Cooling .................................................................................................................3-17
3.3.6 GMA 35 Failsafe Operation .................................................................................................3-17
3.3.7 GDL 88H Interface ..............................................................................................................3-18
3.3.8 External Sensors and Devices ..............................................................................................3-18
3.3.9 Switches ...............................................................................................................................3-23
3.3.10 External HTAWS Annunciators ..........................................................................................3-24
3.3.11 Audio Electrical Noise .........................................................................................................3-24
3.3.12 Transmit Interlock and Split COM Operation .....................................................................3-25

Rev. 8 Page 3-1
3.1 Pre-Installation Checklist
It should be verified that GTN Xi system installation in a particular rotorcraft can be accomplished in
accordance with this STC. This checklist helps to assure the rotorcraft is eligible for GTN Xi system
installation.
If replacing an existing GTN 6XX/7XX with an equivalent GTN Xi unit, refer to Section 3.1.1.
Table 3-1 Pre-Installation Checklist
GTN 625Xi
GTN 635Xi
GTN 650Xi
GTN 725Xi
GTN 750Xi
Complete
GMA 35
Item Reference
STC Certificate
Rotorcraft is on Approved Model List (AML).       
with AML
Installation/operational limitations reviewed to
Section 2       
ensure no adverse impact to the installation.
Mechanical installation of the GTN Xi can be
accomplished in accordance with approved Section 4.4      
design data.
Mechanical installation of the GMA 35 can be
accomplished in accordance with approved Section 4.5  
design data.
External HTAWS annunciations can be
installed in accordance with approved type Section 3.3.10      
design data.
Acceptable COM antenna installed.    
Acceptable NAV antenna(s) installed. Table 3-30   
Acceptable splitter or diplexer installed

  
(GTN 650Xi/750Xi installations only).
Required type of GPS/SBAS antenna
Table 3-7      
installed.
Power distribution requirements can been met. Section 3.3.3       
Marker beacon antenna installed for GMA 35 Section 4.1.1.1,

 
installations. Section 4.2.5
Rotorcraft electrical system is sufficient for
Section 3.3.3       
GTN Xi and optional GMA 35 installation.
Planned equipment interfaces are approved
under the STC or have other airworthiness Appendix C       
approval.

Rev. 8 Page 3-2
3.1.1 Replacement of GTN 6XX/7XX with GTN Xi
When replacing an existing GTN 6XX/7XX that was installed per STC SR02120SE with an equivalent
GTN Xi unit, use this checklist to determine the required procedures to replace the unit.
Table 3-2 Replacement Pre-installation Checklist
GTN 625Xi
GTN 635Xi
GTN 650Xi
GTN 725Xi
GTN 750Xi
Complete
Step Item Reference
GTN 6XX/7XX Part 27

Upgrade GTN 6XX/7XX software to      
1 AML STC Installation
v6.70 or later prior to removal.
Manual
Verify that the GTN 6XX/7XX GTN 6XX/7XX Part 27
2 Configuration Log is available and AML STC Maintenance      
correctly filled out. Manual Appendix A
Remove the GTN 6XX/7XX unit and
GTN Xi Part 27 AML
install the GTN Xi unit per the      
3 STC Maintenance
instructions in the maintenance manual.
Manual
Update the software if needed.
Verify that the removed GTN 6XX/7XX
installation meets the installation
4 limitations contained in Section 2 of this Section 2      
manual. Modify the installation as
necessary to satisfy these limitations.
Configure COM and VOR/LOC/GS Section 5.4.3.11
5 settings on the GTN Setup page using    
the guidance in this manual. Section 5.4.3.12
Verify Lighting/Enhanced Lighting GTN 6XX/7XX Part 27

6 settings match the GTN 6XX/7XX AML STC Maintenance      
Configuration Log. Manual Appendix A
In dual GTN Xi or a GTN Xi-GTN 6XX/
7XX installation, configure the      
7 Section 5.4.3.4
Cross-side Navigator setting
appropriately on both units.
GTN 6XX/7XX Part 27
Verify all configuration settings using the      
8 AML STC Maintenance
GTN 6XX/7XX Configuration Log.
Manual Appendix A
Complete the Configuration Log in the GTN Xi Part 27 AML
9 GTN Xi Part 23 AML STC Maintenance STC Maintenance      
Manual. Manual Appendix A
Update all databases (existing database      
10 Section 1.5
cards are usable).
Complete all applicable checkout      
11 Section 6
procedures.

Rev. 8 Page 3-3
3.2 Materials and Parts
This section provides a description of equipment and installation kits available from Garmin and
commercially available parts and their requirements.
3.2.1 Garmin
GTN Xi system components and applicable installation kits are supplied by Garmin. Refer to the Aviation
Price Catalog on the Garmin Dealer Resource Center for details once the selection for a particular aircraft
installation is determined.
Table 3-3 GTN Xi Part Numbers
Model Unit P/N Catalog P/N Upgrade P/N [1] Voltage (VDC)
GTN 625Xi 011-04629-00 010-01997-00 010-01997-03
011-04630-00 010-01998-00 010-01998-04
GTN 635Xi
011-04630-01 [4] 010-01998-04 [4] 010-01998-07 [4]
011-04631-00 010-01999-00 010-01999-04
011-04631-01 [4] 010-01999-04 [4] 010-01999-07 [4]
011-04631-30 [2] 010-01999-30 [2] 010-01999-33 [2]
GTN 650Xi
011-04631-31 [2][4] 010-01999-34 [2][4] 010-01999-37 [2][4]
011-04631-60 [3] 010-01999-60 [3] 010-01999-64 [3] 11-33
011-04631-61 [3][4] 010-01999-64 [3][4] 010-01999-67 [3][4]
GTN 725Xi 011-04632-00 010-02000-00 010-02000-03
011-04634-00 010-02002-00 010-02002-04
011-04634-01 [4] 010-02002-04 [4] 010-02002-07 [4]
011-04634-30 [2] 010-02002-30 [2] 010-02002-33 [2]
GTN 750Xi
011-04634-31 [2][4] 010-02002-34 [2][4] 010-02002-37 [2][4]
011-04634-60 [3] 010-02002-62 [3] 010-02002-63 [3]
011-04634-61 [3][4] 010-02002-64[3][4] 010-02002-67 [3][4]
Notes:
[1] Upgrade kits include only unit and product information kit. Recommended for installations
where a GTN 6XX/7XX unit is being replaced by a GTN Xi unit.
[2] Indicates gray bezel part number.
[3] Indicates NV filtered display units.
[4] Requires COM software v2.10 and later.
Table 3-4 GTN Xi Options

Item P/N
GTN 6XX/7XX 16 Watt COM Enablement Card [1] 010-00878-04
GTN 7XX ChartView Enablement Card [1] 010-00878-40
GTN 6XX/7XX Helicopter TAWS Enablement Card [1] 010-00878-02
GTN 6XX/7XX Search and Rescue Enablement Card [2] 010-00878-03
Notes:

Rev. 8 Page 3-4
[1] An SD enablement card is required to enable the indicated feature. Each enablement card can
only be used one time, and, once used, the card will only work with that particular installation.
[2] This card works for both GTN Xi units in dual GTN Xi installations.
Table 3-5 GMA 35 Part Numbers

Model LRU P/N Garmin P/N Voltage (VDC)
011-02299-00 010-00831-01
GMA 35
011-02299-20 010-00831-21 11-33
GMA 35c 011-02299-40 010-00831-41
Table 3-6 Flight Stream Part Number

Model LRU P/N Garmin P/N Voltage (VDC)
011-03595-00 010-01322-01
Flight Stream 510 N/A
011-03595-10 [1] 010-01322-11
Notes:
[1] Requires Flight Stream software v2.80 or later.
Table 3-7 GPS/WAAS Antennas

Garmin Order
Manufacturer Model, Description Connector Type P/N
Number
GA 35, GPS/WAAS [1] TNC 013-00235-( ) 013-00235-( )
GA 36, GPS/WAAS TNC 013-00244-( ) 013-00244-( )
Garmin
GA 37, GPS/WAAS/XM TNC 013-00245-( ) 013-00245-( )
A33W, WAAS Antenna TNC 013-00261-( ) 013-00261-( )
GPS/VHF Antenna TNC/BNC [2] CI-2580-200 N/A
Comant
GPS/XM/VHF Antenna TNC/BNC [2] CI-2580-410 N/A
Notes:
[1] Same mounting hole pattern as GA 56, but GA 35 antenna has a physically larger
footprint.
[2] The GPS/WAAS connector is a TNC type. The VHF connector is a BNC type.
Table 3-8 GTN 625Xi, Black Installation Kit (P/N 010-01997-01)

Used With Item P/N
Connector kit, GTN 625 011-02325-00
SMP, mounting rack, GTN 6XX 115-01293-00 [1]
GTN 625Xi
Backplate sub-assembly, GTN 625 011-02245-00
(Black)
Sub-assembly, configuration module, potted 011-00979-03
Product information kit, GTN Xi K00-01079-00
Notes:
[1] The helicopter mounting rack (P/N 115-01293-A0) is not included in this installation kit and
must be requested at time of purchase.

Rev. 8 Page 3-5
Table 3-9 GTN 635Xi, Helicopter, Black Installation Kit (P/N 010-01998-02)
Used With Item P/N
SMP, helicopter mounting rack, GTN 6XX 115-01293-A0
GTN 635Xi
(Black)
Table 3-10 GTN 635Xi, Helicopter, Black, Standard Installation Kit (P/N 010-01998-06)
Used With Item P/N
GTN 635Xi
(Black) Backplate sub-assembly, GTN 635 011-02245-01
-X1
Table 3-11 GTN 650Xi, Helicopter, Black Installation Kit (P/N 010-01999-02)
Used With Item P/N
GTN 650Xi
(Black)
Table 3-12 GTN 650Xi, Helicopter, Black, Standard Installation Kit (P/N 010-01999-06)
Used With Item P/N
GTN 650Xi
-X1 Sub-assembly, configuration module, potted 011-00979-03
Table 3-13 GTN 650Xi, Gray Installation Kit (P/N 010-01999-31)

Used With Item P/N
GTN 650Xi
(Gray)

Rev. 8 Page 3-6
Notes:
Table 3-14 GTN 650Xi, Gray, Standard Installation Kit (P/N 010-01999-35)
Used With Item P/N
GTN 650Xi SMP, mounting rack, GTN 6XX 115-01293-00 [1]

(Gray) Backplate sub-assembly, GTN 650 011-02245-02
Notes:
Table 3-15 GTN 650Xi, NV, Helicopter, Black (P/N 010-01999-62)

Used With Item P/N
GTN 650Xi
(NV, Black)
Table 3-16 GTN 650Xi, NV, Helicopter, Black, Standard (P/N 010-01999-66)
Used With Item P/N
GTN 650Xi
(NV, Black) Backplate sub-assembly, GTN 650 011-02245-02
Table 3-17 GTN 725Xi, Black Installation Kit (P/N 010-02000-01)

Used With Item P/N
GTN 725Xi
(Black)
Notes:

Rev. 8 Page 3-7
Table 3-18 GTN 750Xi, Helicopter, Black (P/N 010-02002-02)
Used With Name P/N
SMP, installation rack, helicopter, GTN 7XX 115-01294-A0
GTN 750Xi
(Black)
Table 3-19 GTN 750Xi, Helicopter, Black, Standard (P/N 010-02002-06)

Used With Name P/N
GTN 750Xi
Table 3-20 GTN 750Xi, Gray Installation Kit (P/N 010-02002-31)

Used With Name P/N
GTN 750Xi
(Gray)
Notes:
Table 3-21 GTN 750Xi, Gray, Standard Installation Kit (P/N 010-02002-35)
Used With Name P/N
GTN 750Xi SMP, mounting rack, GTN 7XX 115-01294-00 [1]

(Gray) Backplate sub-assembly, GTN 750 011-02246-02
Notes:

Rev. 8 Page 3-8
Table 3-22 GTN 750Xi, NV, Helicopter, Black Installation Kit (P/N 010-02002-62)
Used With Name P/N
GTN 750Xi
(NV, Black)
Table 3-23 GTN 750Xi, NV, Helicopter, Black, Standard Installation Kit (P/N 010-02002-66)
Used With Name P/N
GTN 750Xi
(NV, Black) Backplate sub-assembly, GTN 750 011-02246-02
Table 3-24 Replacement Fan Part Numbers

Used With Item P/N
Fan, w/connector 371-00014-01
GTN Xi
Fan mounting screws, qty 4 211-60234-23
Table 3-25 GMA 35 Installation Kit (P/N 010-00831-01)

Used With Item P/N
Sub-assembly, GMA 35 011-02299-00
Backplate assembly, GMA 35 011-02300-00
GMA 35
Connector kit, GMA 35 011-02302-00
Sub-assembly, install rack, GMA 35 011-02645-00
Table 3-26 GMA 35 Installation Kit (P/N 010-00831-21)

Used With Item P/N
Sub-assembly, GMA 35 011-02299-00
GMA 35
Sub-assembly, install rack, GMA 35 011-02645-00
Table 3-27 GMA 35c Installation Kit (P/N 010-00831-41)

Used With Item P/N
GMA 35c
Install rack, SMP 115-01464-00
Sub-assembly, Bluetooth antenna kit 011-03909-00

Rev. 8 Page 3-9
3.2.2 Other Suppliers
The GTN Xi system installation requires standard parts and accessories, most of which are not supplied.
Number of parts must be procured from Aerospace Optics or Korry Electronics.
Table 3-28 Aerospace Optics

Part Number Description
LED-41-11-KB-E11RF SWITCH, RP MODE, HTAWS, NVIS
OR
LED-41-11-BB-E11ND SWITCH, RP MODE, HTAWS
LED-DM-17-XX-BBAKH BODY, DEFINED LOGIC, MFB (0;DL2/NN/UU;0)
LED-XX-17-11-E14G0 CAP, INDICATOR, HTAWS, STATUS
LED-40-17-KB-E12XT INDICATOR, HTAWS, CAUTION AND WARNING, NVIS
OR
LED-40-17-BB-E11R9 INDICATOR, HTAWS, CAUTION AND WARNING

18-440 PLUG, KEYED, QUICK CONNECT
18-200 PLUG, QUICK CONNECT
Table 3-29 Korry Electronics

SWITCH, 4-POLE, PUSH-BUTTON, CHROMALUX 389, INTEGRATED LED,
49202-043
GPS/COM 1
OR
49202-042 SWITCH, 4-POLE, PUSH-BUTTON, CHROMALUX 389, INTEGRATED LED, GPS 1

Rev. 8 Page 3-10
Table 3-30 Standard Parts (Commercially Available)
MIL-W-22759/16
OR
Electrical Wire
MIL-W-22759/18 [1]
M27500-22TG2T14 MIL-C-27500 shielded cable with M22759/16 wire (TE) or M22759/18 wire
M27500-22TG3T14 (TG) and ETFE jacket (14)
392404 OR Category 5 Ethernet Cable, Mfg. Carlisle IT
10424 Category 5 Ethernet Cable, Mfg. PIC Wire and Cable
RG-400
OR
Coaxial cable
RG-142B
RG-188
OR
Coaxial cable (GMA 35)

RG-179
M39012/26-0503 MIL-PRF-39012 connector, RF coaxial, TNC straight plug
MS26574 [2] Push-pull manually resettable circuit breakers. Circuit breaker ratings specified
OR
MS22073 [2] in Appendix B.

MS25036
OR
Ring terminals
MS20659
QQB575R30T437 7/16” Tubular Braid
OR
QQB575F36T781 ¾” Flat Braid

HTAWS Annunciator bonding strap, A-A-59569 braid, wire, tin-coated, tubular,
AA59569R34T0375
0.375 ID [4]
9M23053/4-301-X Heat shrink tubing
A-A-59163 MIL-I-46852C Silicon Fusion Tape
MS3367 A-A-52080
Cable ties or lacing cord
(MIL-T-43435)
Supplies Wire bundle routing, securing, and management supplies, as required.
NASM24693 [MS24693] screw, machine, flat countersunk head 100°, cross-
recessed with 1380-32 UNC-2A thread, corrosion resistant steel and
NASM21071 nut, self-locking, plate, one lug, reduced rivet spacing, low
Standard fasteners height, steel 0.138-32 UNJC-3B qty 8 per GTN 6XX Xi or 10 per GTN 7XX Xi
each.
MS20426AD3 rivet, solid, countersunk 100°, precision head, 3/32” OD (qty 16
per GTN 6XX Xi; qty 20 per GTN 7XX Xi)
MIL-DTL-25561 flight control grip kit to utilize the optional remote HTAWS and/
G2-0048 [3]
or COM controls on pilot and co-pilot cyclic stick grips. Mfg. Otto Controls
Antenna, GPS/SBAS TSO-C144( ). Refer to Table 3-6 for part numbers.
TSO-C37( ) and C38( ) or TSO-C169( ). 50 Ω, vertically polarized with coaxial
Antenna, COM
cable
TSO-C40( ) and C36( ). 50 Ω, horizontally polarized with coaxial cable. Must
Antenna, NAV
meet TSO-C40( ), C36( ), and C34( ) if combined VOR/LOC/GS antenna

Rev. 8 Page 3-11
TSO-C34( ). 50 Ω, horizontally polarized with coaxial cable or low-loss splitter
Antenna, Glideslope
used with the VOR/LOC antenna
Antenna Marker Beacon TSO-C35( )
ZFSC-2-1B+ Antenna Splitter, Mfg. Mini-Circuits (Garmin P/N 013-00112-00)
CI-507 Antenna Diplexer VOR/GS, Mfg. Cobham
Headphones 500 Ω nominal impedance
Microphone Low impedance, carbon or dynamic, with transistorized pre-amp
A-A 55126 Hook and loop fastener tape
2024-T3 Aluminum sheet per AMS-QQ-A-250/5, varying thickness
MIL-PRF-55182 Fixed, hermetically-sealed resistors
MIL-DTL-83731/9 switch, toggle, single pole (ON-NONE-ON) (for Day/Night
M83731/10-231
HTAWS Annunciator light switching)
MS-25089-1C Switch, momentary action, for HTAWS Alert Acknowledge
Notes:
[1] MIL-W-22758/18 wire is recommended due to the insulation diameter more compatible
with high-density connectors.
[2] Or other trip-free, push-pull circuit breaker type as specified in the aircraft parts catalog.
[3] Applicable to selected rotorcraft models only.
[4] Maximum length of 3 inches. Use #6 and #10 terminal lugs and washers for installation.
3.2.3 Special Tools Required

Crimp tools necessary for consistent, reliable crimp contact connections are listed in Table 3-31.
A milliohm meter with an accuracy of ±0.1 mΩ or better is required to measure the electrical bonding
between the GTN Xi and GMA 35 system components and rotorcraft ground.
Table 3-31 Recommended Crimp Tools
Hand Standard Density High Density
Manufacturer Crimping20-24 AWG (Power/Ground) 22-28 AWG (P1001-P1005)
Tool Positioner Insert/Ext Tool Positioner Insert/Ext Tool
M81969/14-02 M81969/14-01
MIL Spec M22520/2-01 M22520/2-08 M22520/2-09
M81969/1-02 M81969/1-04
Positronic 9507 9502-5 M81969/1-02 9502-3 M81969/1-04
ITT Cannon 995-0001-584 995-0001-604 980-2000-426 995-0001-739 N/A
AMP 601966-1 601966-5 91067-2 601966-6 91067-1
Daniels AFM8 K13-1 M81969/1-02 K42 M81969/1-04
Astro 615717 615724 M81969/1-02 615725 M81969/1-04

Rev. 8 Page 3-12
3.2.4 Manufacturer Information
NOTE
Manufacturer information is provided for convenience only. It was current at the time of
initial publication and may change at any time.
Aluminum Foil Tape Resistor

3M Vishay Americas (Vishay Dale)
3M Corporate Headquarters One Greenwich Place
3M Center Shelton, CT 06484
St. Paul, MN 55144-1000 Phone: (402) 563-6866
Phone: 1-888-364-3577 Fax: (402) 563-6296
www.3m.com www.vishay.com
Tinned Copper Braid GPS 1 ON/OFF Switch (Korry Switch)

Alpha Wire Company Korry Electronics
711 Lidgerwood Avenue City Center Bellevue
Elizabeth, NJ 07207-0711 500 108th Ave NE Suite 1500
Phone: 1-800-522-5742 Bellevue, WA 98004
Fax: (908) 925-6923 Tel: 425-453-9400
www.alphawire.com www.esterline.com
OR
Daburn Electronics & Cable
44 Richboynton Road
Dover, NJ 07801
Phone: (973) 328-3200
Fax: (973) 328-3130
www.daburn.com
4-Pin Connector & Contacts HTAWS Annunciators

Tyco Electronics Corporation Aerospace Optics, Inc.
1050 Westlakes Drive 3201 Sandy Lane
Berwyn, PA 19312 Fort Worth, TX 76112
Phone: (610) 893-9800 Telephone: (888) 848-4786
www.tycoelectronics.com Fax: (817) 654-3405
www.vivisun.com
Cyclic Control Grip
Otto Engineering, Inc.
2 East Main Street
Carpentersville, IL 60110
Phone: (847) 428-7171
www.ottoexcellence.com

Rev. 8 Page 3-13
3.3 Installation Considerations
3.3.1 Minimum System Configuration
A minimum VFR installation of the GTN Xi system includes:
• GTN Xi unit
• GPS/WAAS antenna required for GPS navigation functions
• COM antenna for COM functions (GTN 635Xi/650Xi/750Xi only)
• NAV antenna for VHF NAV functions (GTN 650Xi/750Xi only)
• External CDI for installations using VOR navigation and glideslope information
Installation of the GTN Xi system for IFR operations is not approved per this STC.
3.3.2 Unit Mounting

The GTN Xi must be installed in either the instrument panel or in the instrument panel support (console)
within view and reach of the pilot. The primary unit location should minimize pilot head movement when
transitioning between looking outside of the cockpit and viewing or operating the GTN Xi. The location
should be such the GTN Xi unit is not obscured by the glare shield or interfere with the flight controls or
control lock devices.
The GTN Xi must be mounted in the location designated by the rotorcraft manufacturer for installation of
similar equipment. This location must meet the spatial requirements in Section 4.4.1.
For dual installations, if a GTN Xi is installed in the instrument panel it must be GTN #1. If both units are
installed in the instrument panel support, GTN #1 must be installed in the uppermost position in the
console, and directly above GTN #2. If a GTN 7XX Xi is present in a dual installation in the instrument
panel support, it must be GTN #1.
Refer to Appendix D for model specific installation examples.

Rev. 8 Page 3-14
3.3.3 Power Distribution
For the purpose of this section, an avionics bus is considered to be any group of circuit breakers fed from a
common source or multiple sources with a remote switch for the intent of controlling the power to avionics
equipment.
Circuit protection devices for the GTN Xi and GMA 35 must be push-pull manually resettable circuit
breakers (MS26574/SAE-AS26574 circuit breaker, trip-free, push-pull, type I) unless otherwise specified
by the rotorcraft manufacturer. The circuit breakers must be labeled and rated as specified in Table 3-32.
Unit circuit breakers shall be located next to each other. GTN Xi installations may use existing circuit
breakers if the current rating is as shown in Table 3-32, otherwise existing breakers must be replaced.
A single circuit breaker must be dedicated to the GTN Xi Main and NAV power inputs, as shown in
Figure B-2. A single circuit breaker must also be dedicated to the COM input for the GTN 635Xi/650Xi/
750Xi. Do not combine more than one unit on the same circuit breaker. The circuit breakers must be
readily accessible to the pilot while in a normal seated position. If they are not readily accessible, a
dedicated switch must be used to provide power to the GTN Xi. In this case, power can be provided to the
GTN Xi through the Avionics Master switch if the navigator is connected to the avionics bus. Refer to
Section 3.3.9 for dedicated switch requirements.
If the GMA 35 circuit breaker is not readily accessible to the pilot while in the normal seated position,
power is provided through the Avionics Master switch.
Table 3-32 Circuit Breaker Labeling

Circuit Breaker Label Circuit Breaker Rating
LRU Single LRU Dual LRU 14V System 28V System
GPS 1
GTN 625Xi GPS 7.5A
GPS 2
GPS 1
GPS 7.5A
GPS 2
GTN 635Xi
COM 1
COM 10A
COM 2
GPS/NAV 1
GPS/NAV 7.5A
GPS/NAV 2
GTN 650Xi 5A
COM 1
COM 10A
COM 2
GPS 1
GTN 725Xi GPS 7.5A
GPS 2
GPS/NAV 1
GPS/NAV 7.5A
GPS/NAV 2
GTN 750Xi
COM 1
COM 10A
COM 2
GMA 35 Audio 3A

Rev. 8 Page 3-15
3.3.3.1 Power Distribution — Single GTN Xi
In single GTN Xi installations, connect the GTN Xi to the avionics power bus. The GPS/NAV and COM
circuit breakers must be connected to the same avionics bus. When the GTN Xi is the second NAV/COM,
it should still be connected to the avionics bus and the GPS/NAV and COM circuit breakers must also be
connected to the same avionics bus.
It is also acceptable to connect the GTN Xi to the essential power bus.
The GTN Xi and other NAV/COM must be grounded at separate ground terminal locations on the
rotorcraft. The power and ground wiring for the GTN Xi should be routed separately from the power and
ground wiring for the other NAV/COM. This method will maximize system redundancy if the ground
connection on one radio fails.
Avionics Bus
COM
Other NAV/COM GTN ;L
Ground Plane
Figure 3-1 Power and Ground Distribution — Single GTN Xi
3.3.3.2 Power Distribution — Dual GTN Xi

In dual GTN Xi installations, connect GTN 1 to the avionics bus. The GPS/NAV and COM circuit breakers
for GTN 1 must be connected to the same avionics bus. If a second avionics bus is available, connect
GTN 2 to that bus; otherwise, GTN 2 should be connected to the same avionics bus as GTN 1. The GPS/
NAV and COM circuit breakers for GTN 2 must be connected to the same avionics bus.
It is also acceptable to connect GTN 1 to the essential power bus.
The GTN Xi units must be grounded at separate ground terminal/stud locations on the rotorcraft. Power
and ground wiring for GTN 1 should be routed separately from the power and ground wiring for GTN 2, as
shown in Figure 3-2. This will maximize system redundancy if the ground connection for one GTN Xi
fails.
Preferred Alternate
Avionics Bus 1 Avionics Bus 2 Avionics Bus
COM
COM
COM
COM
GTN ;L GTN ;L GTN ;L GTN ;L
Ground Plane Ground Plane
Figure 3-2 Power and Ground Distribution — Dual GTN Xi

Rev. 8 Page 3-16
3.3.3.3 Power Distribution — GMA 35
The GMA 35 Audio Panel must be connected to the same electrical bus as the interfaced GTN Xi if GTN 1
and GTN 2 are on separate buses. If GTN 1 and GTN 2 are on the same bus, any avionics bus can be used
for the GMA 35.
3.3.4 GTN Xi Cooling

The GTN Xi has a cooling fan integrated into the backplate to draw air through the unit. There are inlets
along the left, right, and bottom sides of the bezel that allow air to flow through the unit.
If a fan is installed within the proximity of the GTN Xi, the installer must ensure the fan exhaust does not
point directly at the GTN Xi integrated cooling fan and that the unit cooling inlets on the side of the front
bezel are not blocked after the unit is installed.
CAUTION
Ensure there are no obstructions to the air inlets or fan exhaust. Airflow should be
unrestricted from the bezel inlets to the fan outlet in the backplate on the rear of the unit.
3.3.5 GMA 35 Cooling

The GMA 35 does not generate an excessive amount of heat during typical operations and does not have
provisions for attaching a cooling fan. Limiting thermal build up, by means of an external fan or natural
convection, is always a good practice and is recommended to increase the product life.
3.3.6 GMA 35 Failsafe Operation

The GMA 35 includes a failsafe circuit that connects the pilot’s headset and microphone directly to COM1
in the event that power is interrupted or RS-232 communication with the GTN Xi is lost.
When the GMA 35 is installed with a GTN 750Xi and a second COM radio, the GTN 750Xi COM must be
connected to the COM 2 pins (J3501-13,-14,-15) on the GMA 35. The other radio should be connected to
the COM 1 pins. This will prevent the loss of both COM radios if power to the GMA 35 or RS-232
communication to the GMA 35 is lost. The GTN Xi includes a configuration setting to allow the
GTN 750Xi COM radio to appear as COM 1 in the user interface. COM 1 IS CONNECTED AS COM 2
should be set to True in this case. Refer to Section 5.4.6.6 for information about this setting.
If the GMA 35 is installed with a GTN 725Xi (no COM) and two other COM radios, wire COM 1 to the
COM 1 pins on the GMA 35 and COM 2 to the COM 2 pins. COM 1 IS CONNECTED AS COM 2 should
be set to False in this case. Refer to Section 5.4.6.6 for information about this setting.
If the GMA 35 is installed with dual GTN 750Xi units, wire GTN 750Xi #1 to the COM 2 pins on the
GMA 35, and wire GTN 750Xi #2 to the COM 1 pins on the GMA 35. COM 1 IS CONNECTED AS
COM 2 should be set to True in this case.

Rev. 8 Page 3-17
3.3.7 GDL 88H Interface
When a GDL 88H is interfaced with a GTN Xi, altitude data can be forwarded from sources connected to
the GTN Xi to the GDL 88H. The GTN Xi is also capable of forwarding Gray code received from an
altimeter connected to a GTX transponder. All of these sources must meet the minimum performance
requirements of TSO-C10 or TSO-C106, or altitude digitizers/encoders must meet TSO-C88 (refer to
AC 20-165, Section 3-4(a)(1) and (2)).
Heading data from the following sources will not be forwarded from the GTN Xi to the GDL 88H:
• ARINC 429 label 320 from Data Concentrator
• ARINC 429 label 320 from Traffic Format 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6
• RS-232 FADC Format 1 or Airdata Format 1
• RS-232 bus from Lightning Detector 1
If a compatible TAS system and the GDL 88H are installed in an rotorcraft, the compatible TAS system
should be directly connected to the GDL 88H. The traffic data is then sent from the GDL 88H to the
GTN Xi over HSDB.
NOTE
When a GDL 88H is connected to a TAS/TCAS traffic sensor, a heading source is required to
display traffic on the moving map. Refer to Section B-11 for more information on the connection.
Refer to GDL 88 TSO Installation Manual and GDL 84H/88H Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual for
more information on configuration of the GDL 88H and systems connected to the GDL 88H.
3.3.8 External Sensors and Devices

When the GTN Xi is interfaced to external sensors, these sensors must be installed in accordance with the
sensor manufacturer's data or other approved installation data. Refer to Appendix C for a list of sensors
approved to interface with the GTN Xi. This manual does not provide data for the mounting, installation,
or approval of any external sensors or devices.
The GTN Xi can accept data from multiple sources. If multiple sources are used, the GTN Xi will accept
data as described in Table 3-33 through Table 3-41. The input priority of each external data source cannot
be configured. If available, ensure the higher priority sources are connected to the GTN Xi.
If multiple sources for a specific data type are supplied to the GTN Xi, only valid data from the highest
priority source is used. If the highest priority source becomes unavailable, data is taken from the next
highest priority source. The data sources listed in Table 3-33 through Table 3-41 are prioritized from
highest to lowest.

Rev. 8 Page 3-18
NOTE
Only certain altitude sources are acceptable for providing altitude to the GDL 88H. Refer
to Section 3.3.7 for more information.
Table 3-33 Uncorrected Pressure Altitude Sources

Priority Altitude Source
1 HSDB from G500H TXi
2 ARINC 429 label 203 from Airdata
3 ARINC 429 label 203 from Airdata/AHRS
4 ARINC 429 label 203 from GDU Format 1
5 ARINC 429 label 203 from EFIS Format 2
6 ARINC 429 label 203 from Data Concentrator
7 ARINC 429 label 203 Traffic Format 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6
8 RS-232 FADC Format 1 or Airdata Format 1
9 RS-232 Altitude Format 1 or 3
NOTE
Baro-corrected altitude is not required by the GTN Xi to meet the requirements of
TSO-C146c; however, to take full advantage of the GTN Xi capabilities, an optional baro-
corrected altitude source is recommended for automatic sequencing of altitude leg types.
If no baro-corrected altitude data is provided to the GTN Xi, altitude leg types must be
manually sequenced.
Table 3-34 Baro-Corrected Pressure Altitude Sources

Priority Altitude Source

Rev. 8 Page 3-19
NOTE
Heading is not required by the GTN Xi. To take full advantage of the GTN Xi capabilities,
an optional heading source is recommended. This lets the map orient to heading up, to
display TAS traffic data on the moving map, and to calculate winds if airspeed is also
available.
Table 3-35 Heading Sources

Priority Heading Source
2 ARINC 429 label 314 from EFIS Format 1 or Format 3
3 ARINC 429 label 320 from EFIS Format 1 or Format 3
6 ARINC 429 label 314 from INS/IRU
8 ARINC 429 label 320 from INS/IRU
10 ARINC 429 label 320 from GAD Format 1
13 XYZ Synchro
15 ARINC 429 label 320 from Traffic Format 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6
17 RS-232 bus from Lightning Detector 1
Table 3-36 Indicated Airspeed Sources

Priority Airspeed Source
5 RS-232 bus from FADC Format 1 or Airdata Format 1

Rev. 8 Page 3-20
NOTE
True Airspeed is not required for the GTN Xi; however, the GTN Xi uses true airspeed to
calculate winds aloft if heading is also available.
Table 3-37 True Airspeed Sources

Priority Airspeed Source
Table 3-38 VLOC Selected Course Sources

Priority Selected Course Source
4 TO/FROM course from an Omni-Bearing Selector (OBS) control
Table 3-39 GPS Selected Course Sources

Priority Selected Course Source
2 ARINC 429 label 100 from EFIS Format 1 or 3
8 TO/FROM course from an Omni-Bearing Selector (OBS) control

Rev. 8 Page 3-21
Table 3-40 Total Air Temperature Sources
Priority Air Temperature Source
Table 3-41 Static Air Temperature Sources

Priority Air Temperature Source

Rev. 8 Page 3-22
3.3.9 Switches
Existing switches on pilot and co-pilot cyclic grips can be repurposed to utilize the optional remote
HTAWS and/or COM controls. Other optional switches can be installed as part of the GTN Xi system. All
switches must be readily accessible to the pilot and labeled in accordance with Section 4.8. Summary of
the optional switches, including function, switch type, location, and labels in provided in Table 3-42.
Table 3-42 Switches

Description Switch Type Location Label
HTAWS Alert
MIL-Spec MS-25089-1C Pilot cyclic grip
Acknowledge
Mark on Target Instrument panel or avionics
MIL-Spec MS-25089-1C
(MOT) pedestal and readily accessible to
HTAWS Reduced MIL-Spec MS-25089-1C or the pilot while in the normal seated
Protection Mode [1] Aerospace Optics [2] position
MIL-DTL-83731( ) Cyclic or collective control,
COM Channel ON-OFF-MOMENTARY instrument panel, or avionics Section 4.8 and
ON action toggle pedestal and readily accessible to Figure B-14
COM and NAV the pilot while in the normal seated
Remote Transfer position
MS-25089-1C
CDI Source Select
MOMENTARY action Instrument panel or avionics
OBS/SUSP Mode
pedestal and readily accessible to
Select
the pilot while in the normal seated
Enhanced Lighting MIL-DTL-83731( ) ON-OFF position
Day/Night action toggle
Korry 44258-102 [4] Existing switch panel in instrument
alternate action integrated panel support (console) and
GPS ON/OFF [3]
LED, Chromalux 389 series readily accessible to the pilot while
[5] in the normal seated position
Notes:
[1] RP Mode switch is required for MD 369 series rotorcraft if optional HTAWS is installed.
[2] Refer to Section 3.3.10 for details.
[3] Must be installed if the GTN Xi circuit breaker is not readily accessible to the pilot while in
the normal seated position. Refer to Appendix D for installation details.
[4] Airbus helicopters use Korry 49202-043 or 49202-042 instead.
[5] For rotorcraft with a Geneva console, an MS24524-23 toggle switch can be used.

Rev. 8 Page 3-23
3.3.10 External HTAWS Annunciators
External annunciators must be installed if HTAWS annunciations integrated into GTN Xi display are
outside the primary field-of-view, as depicted in Figure 3-3. Rotorcraft equipped with a Garmin G500H or
G500H TXi system do not require external HTAWS annunciators because annunciations are provided by
the GDU.
NOTE
Optional HTAWS must be enabled in a GTN Xi installed in the primary field-of-view if one
is present.
1. The allowable horizontal offset from the pilot's view centerline is the distance from pilot’s face to
the instrument panel multiplied by 0.27.
2. The allowable vertical offset below the pilot’s view horizontal line is the distance from pilot’s face
to the instrument panel multiplied by 0.58.
3. GTN Xi location is considered to be within primary field-of-view if the unit display is within the
allowable horizontal and vertical range.
Example: The instrument panel is 30 inches away. The maximum horizontal offset from the center line is
(30 inches x 0.27) 8.1 inches. The maximum vertical offset below the centerline is (30 inches x 0.58)
17.4 inches.
Figure 3-3 HTAWS Annunciator Acceptable Field-of-View
Existing annunciator panel or space on the instrument panel within primary field-of view are acceptable
locations for installation of external HTWAS annunciators. Some rotorcraft models may require an
annunciator bracket.
3.3.11 Audio Electrical Noise

Because the audio panel is a point in the rotorcraft where signals from many pieces of equipment are
brought together, take care to minimize effects from coupled interference and ground loops. Coupled
interference can creep into audio system interconnecting cables when they are routed near large AC
electrical fields, AC voltage sources, and pulse equipment (e.g., strobes, spark plugs, magnetos, EL
displays, CRTs, etc.). Interference can also couple into audio system interconnecting cables by magnetic
induction when they are routed near large AC current-carrying conductors or switched DC equipment
(e.g., heaters, solenoids, fans, etc.).
Ground loops are created when there is more than one path that return currents flow or when signal returns
share the same path as large currents from other equipment. These large currents create differences in
ground potential between the various equipment operating in the rotorcraft. These differences in potential
can produce an additive effect on audio panel input signals. The audio panel may “hear” the desired input
signal plus an unwanted component injected by ground differentials, a common cause of alternator or
starter/generator-related noise. This is the main reason why all audio jacks should be isolated from ground.
Terminating audio shields at one end eliminates a potential ground loop injection point. The audio shields

Rev. 8 Page 3-24
should only be grounded at one end to prevent ground loops. The wiring diagrams and accompanying
notes in this manual should be followed closely to minimize noise effects.
3.3.12 Transmit Interlock and Split COM Operation

In some rotorcraft, COM and NAV receiver interference is affected by both the distance between antennas
and the tuned frequency separation. With transmit interlock activated in the COM transceivers, split COM
operation between a flight crew of more than one pilot is affected.
In COM radios that have a transmit interlock feature, when either transmitter is keyed, all other receivers
are muted so they won’t pick up interference from the active COM transmitter. This is the preferred option
for single pilot operation. The GTN Xi COM includes a desensitizer circuit that precludes the need for a
COM interlock connection between COM radios.
For rotorcraft with two flight crew members, transmit-interlock would likely interfere with
communications. When the pilot or the co-pilot transmits, no audio is heard on any other receiver. This
means that if the pilot is communicating with ATC while the co-pilot transmits on another radio, all pilot
reception is cut off during the time of co-pilot transmission.
If the installation does not have transmit-interlock activated, all the receivers are listening all the time
whether any radio is transmitting or not. Split COM performance varies significantly across installations. If
the transceivers interfere with each other, transmission by one radio produces static or squeal, thus loss of
communication from any other radio.

Rev. 8 Page 3-25
4 INSTALLATION
4.1 Wiring Routing and Installation ......................................................................................................4-2

4.1.1 Cable and Wiring Considerations ..........................................................................................4-2
4.2 Antenna Installation .........................................................................................................................4-4
4.2.1 GPS/WAAS Antenna .............................................................................................................4-4
4.2.2 COM Antenna ........................................................................................................................4-6
4.2.3 NAV Antenna ........................................................................................................................4-6
4.2.4 GMA 35c Bluetooth Antenna Installation .............................................................................4-7
4.2.5 Marker Beacon Antenna Cable Termination .........................................................................4-9
4.3 Electrical Bonding .........................................................................................................................4-10
4.3.1 Equipment Bonding Procedure ............................................................................................4-10
4.3.2 Instrument Panel and/or Pedestal Bonding Procedure .........................................................4-11
4.4 GTN Xi Installation .......................................................................................................................4-13
4.4.1 Requirements for GTN Xi Installations ...............................................................................4-13
4.4.2 Instrument Panel ..................................................................................................................4-15
4.4.3 GTN Xi Preparation .............................................................................................................4-16
4.4.4 GTN Xi Installation Drawings .............................................................................................4-17
4.4.5 GTN Xi Unit Insertion .........................................................................................................4-21
4.4.6 HTAWS Annunciator Installation .......................................................................................4-22
4.5 GMA 35 Installation ......................................................................................................................4-23
4.5.1 GMA 35 Unit Insertion ........................................................................................................4-25
4.6 Flight Stream 510 Installation ........................................................................................................4-26
4.7 Electrical Installation .....................................................................................................................4-27
4.7.1 Wire Harness Construction Guidelines ................................................................................4-27
4.7.2 Backshell and D-Subminiature Connector Assembly ..........................................................4-30
4.7.3 Power Requirements ............................................................................................................4-41
4.7.4 Electrical Load Analysis ......................................................................................................4-42
4.8 Placards and Labels .......................................................................................................................4-51
4.9 Weight and Balance .......................................................................................................................4-52

Rev. 8 Page 4-1
4.1 Wiring Routing and Installation
4.1.1 Cable and Wiring Considerations
During installation, observe the following precautions:
• Reference the aircraft manufacturer (electrical) standard practices manual and equipment
manufacturer documentation for guidance on wire type, gauge, routing, and wire identification.
Methods, techniques, and practices defined in AC 43.13-1B Chapter 11, Aircraft Electrical
Systems, are acceptable
• Refer to the equipment manufacturer for any specific shield requirements, or follow general
practices and guidance in this manual if none exist
• It should not be possible for the cable harness to be exposed to wire chafing
• It should not be possible for a cable harness to be routed such that both GPS units fail
simultaneously due to wire chafing
• The cable harness should be located in a protected area of the rotorcraft (i.e., isolated from engine
rotor burst)
• Ensure the wiring does not contact sources of heat or RF/EMI interference (power sources) and is
not routed near moving components of aircraft controls or other systems. Wire routing must
preclude accidental impact or damage
• Provide adequate space for the LRU or sensor connector(s). Include additional wire length to
create a service loop for maintenance, where appropriate
• Wiring that is required to be shielded per the interconnect diagrams in Appendix B must be
shielded
• Shield terminations must be as short as possible and not exceed 3.0 inches unless otherwise
specified. Shields may be connected to the metal connector backshell when the backshell is
grounded to the airframe chassis ground, unless otherwise specified by equipment manufacturer.
Alternately, the shield termination may be directly connected to the airframe ground
• Pigtail lengths must be less than 3.0 inches
• The cable harness should be routed such that it does not obstruct the flow of the GTN Xi fan
For dual GTN Xi or GTN Xi and GTN 6XX/7XX installations, care should be taken to ensure separation
between wires of redundant systems to reduce the possibility of loss of navigation due to a single event.
Refer to Appendix B for interconnect drawings.
4.1.1.1 Coaxial Cable Considerations

When routing marker beacon antenna cables, observe the following precautions:
• All cable routing should be kept as short and as direct as possible
• Avoid sharp bends
• Avoid routing cables near power sources (e.g., 400 Hz generators, trim motors, etc.) or near power
for fluorescent lighting
• Avoid routing the marker beacon antenna cable near other antenna cables (e.g., ADF, COM, NAV,
GS). Refer to Section 4.2.5 for marker beacon antenna termination technique
Refer to Table 3-30 for recommended coaxial cable types.

Rev. 8 Page 4-2
4.1.1.2 Shield Termination Considerations
Shield termination at non-Garmin equipment end must be as short as possible and not to exceed 3.0 inches,
taking into consideration any non-Garmin equipment’s installation requirements. When there are no
requirements given by the non-Garmin equipment installation manual, then the shields may be connected
to the metal connector backshell when the backshell is grounded to airframe ground. Alternately, the shield
termination may be directly connected to airframe ground. Although the interconnects in Appendix B do
not show intermediate connectors, all shields must have continuity at any intermediate connectors used
unless otherwise specified. When shields are terminated to the rotorcraft ground or metal backshell to
provide this continuity, the shield drain wire must be no longer than 3 inches, unless non-Garmin
equipment requires shorter length. The termination method from Section 4.7.2.2 may be used at these
locations unless this conflicts with the requirement of non-Garmin equipment.
Intermediate connections must be minimized to maintain certified electromagnetic compatibility. All
shields must have continuity at intermediate connections (e.g., bulkhead connectors, terminal blocks,
splices, etc.). If intermediate connectors are installed, unless otherwise specified, the shield must be
terminated at both sides of the intermediate connector backshells (if metal connector) or to airframe ground
on both sides of the intermediate connectors. If intermediate connectors are used on an audio line, run the
shields through a pin on all intermediate connectors. Audio line shields should be continuous from end to
end and be grounded only at one end to prevent ground loops.
NOTE
Interconnect diagrams in this manual only show end-to-end connections and do not show
intermediate connections that may be present in an aircraft.
If wiring from the GTN Xi goes to a unit that uses overbraided wires, then the GTN Xi wiring to that unit
must also be overbraided. If the wiring passes through bulkhead connectors, then each segment must be
overbraided and the overbraid must be grounded at both ends, unless otherwise shown in the equipment’s
installation manual. The overbraid must be terminated as close to the connector as possible and in
accordance with manufacturer’s installation requirements.
Shield splicing should be done at the GTN Xi end close to the connector, similar to other non-spliced
shields, unless this conflicts with requirements from remote-end equipment.

Rev. 8 Page 4-3
4.2 Antenna Installation
4.2.1 GPS/WAAS Antenna
NOTE
The internal GTN Xi COM transceiver does not interfere with its own GPS receiver.
However, placement of the GTN Xi GPS antenna relative to other COM transceivers and
antennas (including the GTN Xi COM antenna) is critical.
NOTE
GPS/WAAS antenna cable loss must be between 1.5 dB and 6.5 dB in order to maintain
proper rejection of interference signals.
NOTE
GPS antennas listed in Section 1.5 require a cable loss between 1.5 dB and 6.5 dB. If
RG-142B or RG-400 is used, 1.5 dB equates to a length of approximately 6.5 feet of cable
with a connector on each end. RG-142B or RG-400 cable can be used as long as the
length is less than 35 feet. For longer lengths, use low-loss double or triple-shielded, 50W
coaxial.
Previously installed RG-400, RG-142B, or similar 50W coaxial cable may be used for connection of the
antenna to GTN Xi. Proper selection of coaxial cable and assembly of connectors is critical to GPS signal
performance, therefore installation of a new antenna cable maybe required.
Additional loss from coaxial connectors and adapters, such as TNC to BNC, should be considered when
computing cable loss. A typical loss of 0.2 dB can be used for each connection. To maintain integrity of the
WAAS signal, the GPS antenna coaxial cable must have a minimum of two shields (e.g., RG-400 or
RG-142B).
For very short runs, where the loss is less than 1.5 dB, additional cable should be used to increase the loss
to within 1.5 dB and 6.5 dB. This additional cable may be coiled, taking into account the minimum bend
radius of the cable.
During the post-installation checkout, susceptibility to harmonics of VHF COM transmitters will be
evaluated. If problems arise, better isolation or distance may be required between the GPS and COM
antennas, or a 1575.42 MHz notch filter may be installed in series with the antenna coaxial of the VHF
COM transceiver to reduce or eliminate the harmonic interference. A notch filter (P/N 330-00067-00) for
this use is available from Garmin.
If a VHF COM transmitter causes problems with the GPS on the selected frequencies as listed in the post-
installation checkout, the problem may be due to the ELT. This can be verified by disconnecting the ELT
antenna coaxial at the ELT unit. If the ELT is found to cause the problem, then contact the ELT
manufacturer or replace the ELT.

Rev. 8 Page 4-4
An existing GPS antenna must be replaced if different
from the antennas listed in Table 3-7. Selected
replacement antenna should have the same size fastener
holes and fastener hole pattern as the existing antenna.
Instructions in this manual apply only to replacement of
the existing antenna. Installation of new antennas is not
approved by this STC.
Removal of the existing antenna is accomplished in the
following steps:
1. Remove power to the LRU connected to the
existing antenna.
2. Disconnect antenna cable from the coaxial
antenna connector(s). Figure 4-1 Teardrop Antenna Footprint
3. Remove sealant around the antenna base while
taking care not to scratch or gouge the fuselage
skin.
4. Remove antenna fasteners and retain for
installation of replacement antenna.
5. Remove antenna from the fuselage.
Installation of the replacement antenna is accomplished
in the following steps:
1. Remove excess sealant and clean the area of
debris.
2. Secure the O-ring in the O-ring groove on the
underside of the antenna (GA 36 and GA 37 Figure 4-2 ARINC Antenna Footprint
antennas only).
3. Install the antenna fasteners. MS21044C08
self-locking nuts and NAS1149FN832P washers are used to secure GA 35 teardrop footprint
antenna. MS24693-C276 stainless steel countersunk head machine screws are used to secure GA
36 and GA 37 ARINC 743 footprint antennas.
4. Torque antenna fasteners in a star pattern applying torque evenly across all fasteners to avoid
deformation of the mounting area. Recommended torque is 12 to 15 in-lbf for 0.1640-36UNF-2A
(#8) fasteners, and 15 to 20 in-lbf for 0.1900-32UNF-2A (#10) fasteners.
5. Ensure the antenna base and aircraft skin are in continuous contact with the gasket or O-ring, as
appropriate to the antenna model. Verify electrical bonding of the antenna by inspection using a
calibrated milliohm meter. Any metallic part of the antenna or its fasteners may be used to verify
the electrical bond to the antenna doubler.
6. Seal the antenna and gasket by running a bead of the MIL-A-46146 non-corrosive RTV silicone
adhesive-sealant along the edge of the antenna base where it meets the exterior skin of the
rotorcraft. MIL-S-8802 sealing compound, temperature-resistant, high adhesion can be used as an
alternative. Use caution to insure the antenna connectors are not contaminated with sealant.
CAUTION
Do not use construction grade RTV sealant or sealants containing acetic acid. These
sealants may damage the electrical connections to the antenna.

Rev. 8 Page 4-5
4.2.2 COM Antenna
The GTN 635Xi/650Xi/750Xi requires a standard 50 Ω vertically polarized antenna.
For optimum performance, the antenna should be mounted on a metal surface or a ground plane with a
minimum area of 18 × 18 inches. The antenna coaxial cable must be made of RG-142B, RG-400, or similar
50 Ω coaxial cable.
Check for insertion loss and VSWR. VSWR should be checked with an in-line type VSWR/wattmeter
inserted in the coaxial transmission line between the transceiver and the antenna. The VSWR/wattmeter
should be inserted as close to the transceiver as possible. When rack and harness buildup is performed in
the shop, the coaxial termination may be provisioned by using a 6-inch inline BNC connection. This would
be an acceptable place to insert the VSWR. Any problem with the antenna installation is most likely seen
as high reflected power. A VSWR of 3:1 may result in up to a 50% loss in transmit power. Previously
installed coaxial cable can be used for connection to GTN Xi COM board. New cable replacing the
existing one should have the same routing.
4.2.3 NAV Antenna

The NAV antenna is a standard 50 Ω horizontally polarized NAV/VOR/LOC/GS antenna. The NAV
antenna receives VOR frequencies between 108.00 and 117.95 MHz and localizer frequencies between
108 and 112 MHz and glideslope information between 328.6 and 335.4 MHz. RG-142B, RG-400, or other
50 Ω coaxial cable with similar performance should be used for the NAV antenna connection.
Certain GTN Xi system configurations require the use of NAV antenna cable splitter (P/N 013-00112-00),
or Cobham CI-507 diplexer. Adequate location for mounting the splitter and the diplexer should:
1. Minimize the length of the coaxial cable used in the installation. In general, this will be as close to
the GTN Xi as practical.
2. Place the splitter and a diplexer on a flat surface in a location free from excessive vibration.
Cable splitter is installed with four 0.1120-40UNC-2A (#4) screws and cable diplexer is installed with two
0.1900-32 UNF-2A (#10) screws. These should be standard aircraft fasteners. Recommended torque is
5-6 in-lbf for (#4) screws and 22 to 25 in-lbf for #10 screws.
Wire the splitter and diplexer in accordance with Appendix A and Appendix B.
After the coaxial cable is trimmed to the desired length, TNC or BNC connectors should be terminated per
the following procedure:
NOTE
The following instructions reference dimensions for P/N 31-4452 connectors and RG-142
or RG-400 cable. If using another connector and/or cable, refer to the manufacturer’s
recommendations for the stripping dimensions.
1. Strip cable jacket 0.593 inches (15.1 mm), the braid 0.250 inches (6.4 mm), and the dielectric
0.156 inches (4.0 mm). All cuts are to be sharp and square. It is important to not nick braid,
dielectric, and center conductor.
2. Slide outer ferrule onto cable.
3. Flare slightly the end of the cable braid to facilitate insertion of inner ferrule. It is important to not
comb out braid.
4. Place contact on cable center conductor so that it butts against cable dielectric. Crimp contact in
place using Die Set Cavity of 0.068 inches (1.7 mm).

Rev. 8 Page 4-6
5. Install cable assembly into body assembly so that inner ferrule portion slides under braid.
6. Push cable assembly forward until contact snaps into place in insulator.
7. Slide outer ferrule over braid and up against connector body. Crimp outer ferrule using Die Set
Cavity of 0.213 inches (5.4 mm).
4.2.4 GMA 35c Bluetooth Antenna Installation

Antenna location should consider each seat that may utilize Bluetooth audio routing and should have a
clear line of sight to the audio source for best reception. Location on the underside of the instrument panel
glareshield or behind the instrument panel typically yields acceptable reception.
NOTE
Complete a Bluetooth Audio Checkout to determine if the location of the antenna is
suitable before permanently attaching the antenna. Refer to Section 6.2.7.8.
The GMA 35c installation kit includes a 2.4 GHz 90° antenna (Garmin P/N 700-00076-00) and a cable
assembly (Garmin P/Ns 325-00458-00 or 325-00458-01). Install the antenna with the supplied cable
assembly to optimize antenna performance.
Installation can be accomplished using an existing hole in the instrument panel or a bracket, as shown in
Figure 4-3.

72*0$

&$%/($66(0%/<5*5360$)(0$/(%8/.+($'67</(
$$ 7$3()$67(1(5/2236<17+(7,&$'+(6,9(%$&.('%/$&.,1:,'(
$$ 7$3()$67(1(5+22.6<17+(7,&$'+(6,9(%$&.('%/$&.,1:,'(
$06 $1*/(,1(48$//(*(;758'(',17+,&.
:/$1678%$17(11$*+='%,:,7+5,*,''(*5360$3/8*&211(&725
47< ,7(0 3$57180%(5 '(6&5,37,21
EKd^
',0(16,216$5(,1,1&+(681/(6627+(5:,6(63(&,),('
5(029($'+(6,9(%$&.,1*$1'$77$&++22.7$3()$67(1(572%$6(2)%5$&.(7,7(075,07$3(,)1(('('
720$7&+&2172852)7+(%$6(
5(029($'+(6,9(%$&.,1*$1'$77$&+/2237$3()$67(1(5$77+('(6,5('$17(11$/2&$7,21)25$,5&5$)7
,167$//$7,2135()(55('/2&$7,21,6217232581'(51($7+7+(,167580(173$1(/*/$5(6+,(/'
187$1'/2&.:$6+(5,1&/8'(':,7+&$%/($66(0%/<,7(0
$17(11$$1'&$%/($66(0%/<$5(3$572)%/8(7227+$17(11$.,7*$50,13$5712
)$67(1(56$5(7<3(,&/$6625&/$66&2/25%/$&.:29(11</21+22.$1'/2237$3(:,7+$'+(6,9(7$3(
72548(816$%5$66)$67(1(5672,1/%6
Figure 4-3 Bluetooth Antenna Installation Example

Rev. 8 Page 4-7
The bracket may be fastened using A-A-55126 hook and loop tape or a mechanical fastener (rivet or
screw). The bracket must be corrosion protected using methods detailed in the rotorcraft maintenance
manual or coated with MIL-P-23377 epoxy primer. The bracket mounted on top of the instrument panel
glareshield must have the same color as the glareshield. The antenna cable must be secured and routed
clear from the rotorcraft controls or moving parts of other systems. Once the antenna is installed, torque
cable connectors 8 to 10 in-lbf using a 5/16” SMA torque wrench. Cable strain should be releived with tie
wraps or by other means.
To install the cable assembly to mounting bracket, perform the following steps:
CAUTION
Failure to fully engage the right angle connector will prevent the GTN Xi from properly
seating.
1. Secure the right angle connector of the cable assembly to the GMA 35c Bluetooth connector.
2. Torque the right angle connector to 8-10 in-lbf using a 5/16” SMA torque wrench.
3. Attach the other end of the cable assembly to the bracket or mounting location with supplied
locking washer and nut.
4. Torque the brass nut to 28-32 in-lbf.
5. Torque the antenna onto cable assembly to 8-10 in-lbf using a 5/16” SMA torque wrench.

Rev. 8 Page 4-8
4.2.5 Marker Beacon Antenna Cable Termination
MS17/128-RG400 coaxial cable is recommended for the marker beacon antenna. This STC considers that
the marker beacon antenna cable is already installed in the rotorcraft. Termination of this cable into the
GMA 35 D-Sub connector requires a cable assembly constructed from MS17/94-RG179 or RG188 cable
with BNC connector used for connection to antenna cable. BNC-F connector is used at the antenna end of
the RG400 coaxial cable.
Recommendation for cable termination the into the D-Sub (refer to Figure 4-4) include:
• Distance from the end of the exposed shield to D-Sub connector is as short as practical
• Distance from the beginning of the exposed shield to D-Sub connector is 1.5 inches or shorter
• Center conductor is terminated directly in the D-sub connector through a crimp pin without a
pigtail
Refer to Figure 3-31 for crimp tool, pin, and crimp tool insert part numbers.
GPN
336-00021-00
USE ON SHIELD
PIGTAIL
F
E O OR
E DG NECT
CK N
BA B CO
U
DS X
MA
H ES
INC
1.5
SOLDER
PIGTAIL
TO SHIELD
D
H IEL
DS LD
SE
X PO S HIE
FE SED
GPN DO XPO
EN FE
336-00044-00 O
ING
USE ON CENTER INN
BEG
CONDUCTOR ING
T UB D
LE E RG-188
AB POS AIL
CENTER
R INK D EX IGT
CONDUCTOR SH UN P
O ED
AR ELD DER
H I O L
S
DS
AN
TO BNC
Connector
Figure 4-4 GMA 35 Marker Beacon Coaxial Cable D-Sub Termination

Rev. 8 Page 4-9
4.3 Electrical Bonding
4.3.1 Equipment Bonding Procedure
Electrical equipment chassis, shield/ground terminations, antennas, supporting brackets, and racks must be
electrically bonded to the rotorcraft’s main structure or instrument panel. Refer to SAE ARP 1870
Section 5 when surface preparation is required to achieve electrical bond. The electrical bond must achieve
direct current (DC) resistance less than or equal to 2.5 mΩ to local structure in equipment mounting
locations for metallic rotorcraft.
The antenna ground plane must be electrically bonded to the antenna baseplate. The electrical bond must
achieve direct current (DC) resistance less than or equal to 2.5 mΩ. Do not remove paint on outer skin of
rotorcraft under the footprint of the antenna baseplate unless necessary to meet bonding requirements.
Painted surfaces prevent corrosion and should be left intact if possible
Brackets installed to main structure or instrument panel with four or more rivets can provide sufficient
electrical bond to allow equipment chassis or install rack to be bonded to the bracket. More rivets or
surface preparation may be needed for brackets that will carry large DC/AC or lightning currents
The correct material finish is important when mating untreated or bare dissimilar metals. They should be
galvanically compatible. When corrosion protection is removed to make an electrical bond, any exposed
area after the bond is completed should be protected again. Additional guidance can be found in FAA
AC 43.13-1B and SAE ARP 1870
Typical electrical bonding preparation examples are shown in Figure 4-5, Figure 4-6, and Figure 4-7.
0.50 INCH E-BOND PREP
E-BOND PREP
Figure 4-5 Electrical Bonding Preparation - Bolt/Nut Joint
0.50 INCH
E-BOND PREP
Figure 4-6 Electrical Bonding Preparation - Nutplate

Rev. 8 Page 4-10
0.50 INCH
E-BOND PREP
Figure 4-7 Electrical Bonding Preparation - Terminal Lug
Aluminum Surface Preparation

To prepare an aluminum surface for proper bonding, this general procedure should be followed. For a more
detailed procedure, refer to SAE ARP 1870 Sections 5.1 and 5.5.
1. Clean grounding location with solvent.
2. Remove non-conductive films or coatings from the grounding location.
3. Apply a chemical conversion coat, such as Alodine 1200, to the bare metal.
4. Once the chemical conversion coat is dry, clean the area.
5. Install bonding aluminum tape or equipment at grounding location.
6. After the bond is complete, any films or coatings removed from the surface must be reapplied.
Refer to the model-specific maintenance manual and Standard Practices Manual for surface
protection requirements applicable to affected areas.
4.3.2 Instrument Panel and/or Pedestal Bonding Procedure
NOTE
This section contains generalized guidelines for instrument panel and pedestal bonding.
For some rotorcraft, the instrument panel is attached with vibration mounts. For these rotorcraft, it must be
verified that the vibration-isolated instrument panel is grounded to the airframe metallic structure with a
bonding jumper the same or equivalent to the specification below.
If the instrument panel and/or pedestal is not electrically bonded to the primary structure that forms the
airframe ground plane through faying surfaces (i.e., joint to joint contact), additional bonding is required
for the installation. A copper bonding strap with cross-sectional area greater than 0.016 square inches
(approximately 20800 circular mils) is required to be installed between the instrument panel and/or
pedestal and the airframe ground plane. A 7/16-inch or wider (QQ-B-575B,24120 circular mils) overbraid
or 3/4-inch or wider flat braid (QQB575F36T781, 20800 circular mils) meet this requirement. The strap
length should be as short as possible and must not exceed 6 inches in length. The installation shall be such
that it avoids the bonding strap looping back on itself. Refer to Section 3.2.2 for hardware specifications.
Construct a bonding strap by attaching 5/16-inch inside diameter terminal lugs to both ends of the
overbraid.
Prepare the bonding strap installation on the instrument panel or pedestal with following procedure:
1. Drill a 5/16-inch hole in the instrument panel or pedestal.

Rev. 8 Page 4-11
2. Drill a 5/16-inch hole in an existing structure, gusset, or tab of minimum dimensions 1.5"L ×
1.5"W × 0.063"T on the rotorcraft structure.
3. The bonding strap must be electrically bonded to the instrument panel or pedestal and to the gusset
or tab via a spot face at least 0.125 inches larger in diameter than the bonding strap terminal lug
and washer. Refer to “Bonding Jumper Installations” in FAA AC 43.13-1B Chapter 11 for
guidance on attaching the bonding strap to structure.
Install the bonding strap with the following procedure:
1. Secure one end of the bonding strap to the instrument panel or pedestal with a 5/16” bolt, washers,
and nut in accordance with bonding requirements in Section 4.3.1. The washers must seat fully
against the panel or pedestal without overhang or interference from other hardware.
2. Secure the other end of the bonding strap to the tab with a 5/16” bolt and nut in accordance with
bonding requirements in Section 4.3.1. The washers must seat fully against the tab without
overhang or interference from other hardware.
3. Measure the resistance between the instrument panel or pedestal and the airframe ground plane
and ensure the resistance is less than or equal to 2.5 mΩ. An equivalent OEM procedure may also
be substituted.

Rev. 8 Page 4-12
4.4 GTN Xi Installation
4.4.1 Requirements for GTN Xi Installations
The GTN Xi navigators are designed to be installed in the mounting rack attached to the back of the
instrument panel or in the avionics console. In many cases, the supporting structure of an existing
instrument panel can provide adequate means to attach the GTN Xi mounting racks and may be used with
no modifications to the instrument panel. In order to satisfy the structural requirements for the installation,
the following conditions must be met:
1. If existing structure is to be used for mounting the GTN Xi unit:
a. Sheet aluminum instrument panel structure must be at least 0.062 inches thick.
b. Instrument panel support structure or avionics console structure to which unit install racks
are mounted must be at least 0.032 inches thick.
2. Minor modifications can be made to existing instrument panel support or avionics console
structures when drilling GTN Xi mounting rack fastener holes. Location of these holes must:
a. Maintain an edge distance of at least 2d (center of hole to edge of part) for all new holes.
b. Maintain a minimum of 3d (center to center) for all new holes.
c. Unit mounting rack must be attached using all featured fastener holes (at the front and at the
back of the rack).
3. Existing instrument panel or avionics console support structures may contain holes from
previously installed equipment. If existing holes do not match, GTN Xi install racks fastener holes
and the existing instrument panel or avionics console support structures cannot be modified to
meet hole placement requirements, new parts need to be procured from the rotorcraft manufacturer
or repaired in accordance with the rotorcraft manufacturer’s standard practices manual or repair
manual.
Some instrument panels may require minor modification to increase width or height of the existing cutout
to accommodate installation of the GTN 6XX Xi, GTN 7XX Xi, or both.
The following requirements apply to a GTN Xi cutout in the instrument panel or avionics console:
1. A cutout cannot be made into rotorcraft primary structure.
2. Cutout area must not affect any subpanel structure.
3. Some stationary instrument panels are considered primary structure. Modification of such panels
is not covered by this STC and requires additional approval.
4. Refer to Figure 4-8 (GTN 6XX Xi) and Figure 4-9 (GTN 7XX Xi) for cutout dimensions.
5. Radius corners and remove burrs from cut edges. Finish paint the cut edge or apply corrosion
protection as specified above.

Rev. 8 Page 4-13
$)-%.3)/.3 ).#(%3

Figure 4-8 GTN 6XX Xi Panel Cutout Detail
',0(16,216,1&+(6

Figure 4-9 GTN 7XX Xi Panel Cutout Detail

Rev. 8 Page 4-14
4.4.2 Instrument Panel
In some cases GTN Xi installations may require a new instrument panel purchased from the rotorcraft
manufacturer or an STC or PMA holder. Under certain conditions, it may be possible to fabricate an
identical instrument panel to allow installation of the GTN Xi.
New instrument panel(s) may be fabricated if the existing instrument panel is not part of the aircraft
primary structure.
NOTE
The GTN Xi cutout must be the only differences between the new and the old (replaced)
instrument panel assembly. This STC is not the basis for airworthiness approval of any
other instrument panel modifications.
If the existing instrument panel is replaced with a new instrument panel, the new panel must:
1. Use the same material type, thickness (but not less than 0.062 inches), and corrosion protection as
the original instrument panel.
a. If existing instrument panel material isn’t known, 2024-T3 aluminum per AMS-QQ-A-250/5,
or 6061- T6 aluminum per AMS 4025, AMS 4027, or AMS-QQ-A-250/11 must be used.
b. Corrosion protection must be in accordance with rotorcraft model-specific standard practices
or repair manual, or alternatively chemical conversion coating per MIL-DTL-5541 Type II,
or MIL-DTL-81706 Type II, and high-solids chemical and solvent resistant epoxy primer per
MIL- PRF-23377, Class N.
2. Be manufactured using methods and procedures defined in the rotorcraft standard practices
manual, maintenance manual, or structural repair manual. Methods, techniques, and practices
defined in AC 43.13- 1B Chapter 4, Section 4 Metal Repair Procedures are acceptable.
3. Maintain the form of the existing instrument panel, including the location of fasteners, and retain
all elements of the instrument panel structure (if comprised of multiple parts assembled together),
such that every feature of the instrument panel is preserved or duplicated.
a. Multiple individual pieces of instrument panel assembly must not be combined.
4. Remain at the location where it was originally installed, use the same type of fasteners as specified
in the model-specific parts catalog, and retain the same instrument panel installation method as
defined by rotorcraft type design.
5. Retain the lighting for all previously installed instrument(s) that will be re-installed.
6. Movement or consolidation of instruments, gauges, annunciators, placards, lighting, etc., is
beyond the scope of this STC and will require separate approval.
7. The only intended difference between the new and the old instrument panel assembly is the
installation of the GTN Xi. Every other feature of the panel, including aspects of the structure
invisible to the pilot, must be duplicated. Modification of the instrument panel that will not comply
with these requirements is not approved under this STC.

Rev. 8 Page 4-15
4.4.3 GTN Xi Preparation
Use the dimensions shown in Figure 4-8 (GTN 6XX Xi) or Figure 4-9 (GTN 7XX Xi) to prepare the
mounting holes for the GTN Xi unit. The GTN Xi mounting rack itself may also be used as a template for
drilling the mounting holes.
1. The backplate of the rack may optionally be removed for ease of mounting in the instrument panel.
To do so, remove the two #4-40 screws, tilt the backplate away from the tray, and then slide the
backplate to the side.
2. If used, drill holes in the mounting brackets to match the location of the fastener holes in the
installation rack. Attach the mounting brackets to the installation rack.
NOTE
Rivets are installed per MIL-R-47196 (NASM47196) rivet, buck type, preparation for and
installation, or per MIL-STD-403 preparation for and installation of rivets and screws,
rocket missile, and rotorcraft structures.
3. Drill holes in the instrument panel structure or console assembly to match the location of fastener
holes in the GTN Xi installation rack (or attached mounting brackets) with the rack in its final
installation position.
NOTE
The installation rack should be positioned such that the edge tab on the bottom shelf of the
rack is flush with the face of the instrument panel or console. If the front lip of the
mounting rack is behind the surface of the instrument panel, the GTN Xi connectors may
not fully engage. Refer to Figure 4-14.
4. If nuts are used, include washers under nuts and prepare an area on the existing structure 0.125
inches larger than the diameter of the washers per Section 4.3.1. If nutplates are used, refer to
MIL-STD-403 for preparation procedures.
5. Ensure that no screw heads or other obstructions prevent the unit from fully engaging in the rack
(refer to Section 5.3). Exercise caution when installing the rack into the instrument panel or
console. Deformation of the rack may make it difficult to install and remove the GTN Xi.
6. Install the rack using #6-32 flat head screws (qty 8 per GTN 6XX Xi, qty 10 per GTN 7XX Xi)
and self-locking nuts or nutplates. The screws are inserted from the inside through holes in the
sides of the rack. Torque screws to 12-15 in-lbf.
7. Using a milliohm meter, verify that the electrical bond between the installation rack and the
existing rotorcraft instrument panel or console is less than 2.5 mΩ. Ensure all connectors are
removed prior to measurement.
8. If the backplate was previously removed (refer to step 1), replace the backplate by positioning the
tabs on the backplate into the slots on the left side of the rack (viewing from the cockpit) and
attaching it by replacing the two #4-40 screws. Torque to 5-6 in-lbf.

Rev. 8 Page 4-16
4.4.4 GTN Xi Installation Drawings
.894 [22.71] .575 [14.61]
6.300
6.250 [158.75] 5.800 [160.02]
BEZEL [147.32] RACK
"A"
1.815 "B" .250 [6.35]

[46.10]
1.10 [264.41] TO COAX
11.264 [286.11] TO STRAIN RELIEF GTN 650;L SHOWN
Ø.213 [Ø5.41] .331 [8.41]

100° CSK INSIDE RACK TO .0" DIMPLES
.125 [3.18]
(5 PER SIDE)
.985
2.640 [67.06] 25.02 2.665
1.970 67.69
BEZEL .985 50.04 TO .0"
"C" 25.02 DIMPLES
.364
8.000
.437 [11.10] [203.20] TO .0"
DIMENSIONS: INCHES [MILLIMETERS]

1
WEIGHT: POUNDS [KILOGRAMS]
2 CG LOCATION INCLUDES UNIT WITH CONNECTOR KIT, MOUNTING RACK, AND BACKPLATE ASSEMBLY.
DIMENSIONS [1] WEIGHT

MODEL UNIT +
A B C UNIT
CONNECTOR KIT
GTN 625Xi 3.06 [77.8] 4.50 [114.3] 1.31 [33.3] 4.1 [1.88] 5.9 [2.66]
GTN 635Xi 3.13 [79.4] 4.72 [119.9] 1.25 [31.8] 4.8 [2.18] 6.7 [3.05]
GTN 650Xi 3.16 [80.3] 4.91 [124.7] 1.03 [26.2] 5.5 [2.48] 7.6 [3.45]
Notes:
[1] Dimensions to CG include GTN 6XX Helicopter Mounting Rack (P/N 115-01293-A0).
Figure 4-10 GTN 6XX Xi Dimensions and Center of Gravity

Rev. 8 Page 4-17
211-60234-08
SCREW, 4-40 x .25 (4X) 1
330-00053-02
BNC/TNC CONNECTOR 1
330-00053-01
BNC CONNECTOR 1
212-00022-00
SHOULDER WASHER 1

115-01293-A0
GTN 6XX MOUNTING RACK
211-60234-23
SCREW, 4-40 x 1.375 (4X) 1
253-00421-00
1
CHASSIS GASKET
330-00053-01
1 BNC CONNECTOR
125-00220-10
1 GTN 6XX BACKPLATE
371-00014-01
1 FAN
011-02325-0X
CONNECTOR KIT
NOTES
PART OF P/N 011-02245-00 (GTN 625), P/N 011-02245-01 (GTN 635), AND P/N 011-02245-02 (GTN 650)
1 BACKPLATE ASSEMBLY KITS. REFER TO TABLE BELOW KIT CONTENT DIFFERENCES.
GTN 6XX HELICOPTER INSTALLATION RACK (P/N 115-01293-A0) NOT INCLUDED IN EVERY INSTALLATION
2 KIT AND MUST BE REQUESTED AT THE TIME OF PURCHASE IF NOT INCLUDED. REFER TO TABLE BELOW
FOR INCLUDED MOUNTING RACK.
3 TORQUE TO 4.5 - 5.2 IN-LBF.
INSTALLATION KITS CONTAIN THE UNIT, CONNECTOR KIT, BACKPLATE ASSEMBLY KIT, MOUNTING RACK,
4 AND CONFIGURATION MODULE.
BACKPLATE KIT
CONTENT DIFFERENCES
UNIT INSTALL CONNECTOR MOUNTING BACKPLATE
WASHER QTY BNC CONN QTY
DESCRIPTION KIT P/N KIT P/N RACK P/N KIT P/N
GTN 625Xi,
010-01997-01 011-02325-00 115-01293-00 011-02245-00 1 0
Black
GTN 635Xi,
010-01998-02 011-02325-01 115-01293-A0 011-02245-01 2 1
Helo, Black
GTN 650Xi,
010-01999-02 011-02325-02 115-01293-A0 011-02245-02 212-00022-00 3 330-00053-01 2
Helo, Black
GTN 650Xi,
010-01999-31 011-02325-02 115-01293-00 011-02245-02 3 2
Gray
GTN 650Xi,
010-01999-62 011-02325-02 115-01293-A0 011-02245-02 3 2
NV, Helo, Black
Figure 4-11 GTN 6XX Xi Mounting Rack Assembly (GTN 650Xi Installation Shown)

Rev. 8 Page 4-18
.892 [22.65]
6.250 [158.] 6.300 [160.02]

BEZEL RACK
“A”
1.820 [46.23] “B”

1.10 [264.41] TO COAX
11.264 [286.11] TO STRAIN RELIEF
1.000 [25.40]
GTN 750;L SHOWN
.125 [3.17]
Ø.213 [Ø5.41]
2.385 100° CSK INSIDE RACK
[60.57] (5 PER SIDE)
6.000 [152.4] 6.010 [152.65]

BEZEL TO .0" DIMPLES
3.811 [96.80]
2.220 [56.39]
“C” 1.970 [50.04]
0.39 [.] TO 0.0" DIMPLES
.437 [11.10] 8.000 [203.20]
DIMENSIONS: INCHES [MILLIMETERS]

1
WEIGHT: POUNDS [KILOGRAMS]
2 CG LOCATION INCLUDES UNIT WITH CONNECTOR KIT, MOUNTING RACK, AND BACKPLATE ASSEMBLY.
DIMENSIONS [1] WEIGHT

MODEL UNIT +
A B C UNIT
CONNECTOR KIT
GTN 725Xi 3.19 [81.0] 4.09 [104.0] 1.97 [50.0] 5.7 [2.60] 8.1 [3.67]
GTN 750Xi 3.22 [81.8] 4.66 [118.3] 1.75 [44.5] 7.1 [3.22] 9.8 [4.45]
Notes:
[1] Dimensions to CG include GTN 6XX Helicopter Mounting Rack (P/N 115-01294-A0).
Figure 4-12 GTN 7XX Xi Dimensions and Center of Gravity

Rev. 8 Page 4-19
211-60234-08
SCREW, 4-40 x .25 (4X) 1
330-00053-01
BNC CONNECTOR 1
330-00053-02
BNC/TNC CONNECTOR 1
212-00022-00
SHOULDER WASHER 1
115-01294-$0
2 GTN 7XX MOUNTING RACK
330-00053-01
1 BNC CONNECTOR
253-00421-00
1 CHASSIS GASKET
125-00221-10
1 GTN 7XX BACKPLATE
371-00014-01
1 FAN
011-02326-0X
211-60234-23 CONNECTOR KIT
1 SCREW, 4-40 x 1.375 (4X)
NOTES
PART OF P/N 011-02246-00 (GTN 725) AND P/N 011-02246-02 (GTN 750) BACKPLATE ASSEMBLY KITS. REFER
1 TO TABLE BELOW KIT CONTENT DIFFERENCES.
GTN 7XX HELICOPTER MOUNTING RACK (P/N 115-01294-A0) NOT INCLUDED IN EVERY INSTALLATION KIT
2 AND MUST BE REQUESTED AT THE TIME OF PURCHASE IF NOT INCLUDED. REFER TO TABLE BELOW FOR
INCLUDED MOUNTING RACK.
3 TORQUE TO 4.5 - 5.2 IN-LBF.
INSTALLATION KITS CONTAIN THE UNIT, CONNECTOR KIT, BACKPLATE ASSEMBLY KIT, MOUNTING RACK,
4 AND CONFIGURATION MODULE.
BACKPLATE KIT
CONTENT DIFFERENCES
UNIT INSTALL CONNECTOR MOUNTING BACKPLATE
WASHER QTY BNC CONN QTY
DESCRIPTION KIT P/N KIT P/N RACK P/N KIT P/N
GTN 725Xi,
010-02000-01 011-02326-00 115-01294-00 011-02246-00 1 1
Black
GTN 750Xi,
010-02002-02 011-02326-02 115-01294-A0 011-02246-02 3 2
Helo, Black
212-00022-00 330-00053-01
GTN 750Xi,
010-02002-31 011-02326-02 115-01294-00 011-02246-02 3 2
Gray
GTN 750Xi,
010-02002-62 011-02326-02 115-01294-A0 011-02246-02 3 2
NV, Helo, Black
Figure 4-13 GTN 7XX Xi Mounting Rack Assembly (GTN 750Xi Installation Shown)

Rev. 8 Page 4-20
Figure 4-14 GTN Xi Mounting Rack Tab Alignment
4.4.5 GTN Xi Unit Insertion
CAUTION
To avoid damage to the GTN Xi unit, take precautions to prevent electro-static discharge (ESD)
when handling the unit, connectors, fan, and associated wiring. ESD damage can be prevented by
touching an object that is of the same electrical potential as the GTN Xi unit before handling the
unit itself.
CAUTION
The Bluetooth antenna port on the GMA 35c has a tight clearance between the GMA unit and the
GTN Xi unit. Ensure the GMA 35c unit and antenna cable are fully seated before inserting the
GTN Xi. The GMA 35c is seated when the face of the unit is flush with the mounting rack.
It may be necessary to insert the hex drive tool into the access hole and rotate the cam mechanism 90°
counterclockwise to ensure correct positioning prior to placing the unit in the rack. The GTN Xi is installed
in the rack by sliding it straight in until it stops about 1 inch short of the final position. Then insert a 3/32”
hex drive tool into the access hole at the bottom of the unit face. Rotate the hex tool clockwise while
pressing on the left side of the bezel until the unit is firmly seated in the rack.
CAUTION
Be sure not to overtighten the unit in the rack. The application of hex tool torque
exceeding 15 in-lbf can damage the locking mechanism.

Rev. 8 Page 4-21
4.4.6 HTAWS Annunciator Installation
Refer to Section 3.3.10 to determine whether the installation of external HTAWS annunciators is required
for HTAWS enablement. If so, the HTAWS annunciators must be located in the primary field-of-view as
defined in Section 3.3.10. The HTAWS annunciators should be installed in the rotorcraft instrument panel
or existing annunciator panel and should provide the pilot with a clear, unobstructed, and undistorted view
of the annunciators. In some cases, fabrication of an annunciator bracket may be required if the rotorcraft
instrument panel or existing annunciator panel cannot accommodate the HTAWS annunciators. Refer to
Section 3.2.2 for acceptable materials for bracket fabrication.
Using a milliohm meter, verify that the electrical bond between each annunciator mounting sleeve and
existing rotorcraft instrument panel or pedestal is less than 10mΩ. A grounding strap may be used to bond
an existing annunciator panel to the rotorcraft instrument panel or pedestal if necessary. Refer to
Section 3.2.2 for an acceptable A59565 braid used in the fabrication of a grounding strap. Surface
preparation for grounding strap attachment points must be done in accordance with rotorcraft-specific
standard practice/maintenance manual.
Refer to the Figure 4-15 for an example HTAWS annunciator installation.
INSTRUMENT PANEL (REF)
MOUNTING SLEEVE
PLUG
ANNUNCIATOR
1
NOTES
PREPARE ELECTRICAL BOND BETWEEN ANNUNCIATOR MOUNTING SLEEVE AND THE BACK SIDE OF THE
1 EXISTING INSTRUMENT PANEL SUPPORT IN ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 4.3.1.
2 REFER TO APPLICABLE DRAWING IN APPENDIX D FOR CUTOUT DIMENSIONS.
Figure 4-15 HTAWS Annunciator Installation Example

Rev. 8 Page 4-22
4.5 GMA 35 Installation
Use the six #6-32 screws that are included in the GMA 35 Installation Kit to install the GMA 35 Mounting
Rack to a GTN 7XX Xi Mounting Rack. The screws are installed from the bottom side of the GTN 7XX Xi
rack using through-holes to access the mounting locations on the GMA 35 rack. Refer to Figure 4-17 and
Figure 4-18.
8.07 [204.9]
6.25 [158.7]
6.00 [152.3]
"B"
1.48 [37.5]
1.16 [29.5]
.92 [23.4] 1.10 [27.9] 1.52 [38.5]
.65 [16.4]
.20 [5.1]
2X 4.5 [114.3]
.81 [20.5]
2X 2.25 [57.2]
2X .800 [20.3]
1.15 [29.2]
SEE NOTE 4
3X 5.360 [136.1]
6.29 [159.8]
"A"
DIMENSIONS WEIGHT
UNIT, RACK,
MODEL P/N A B UNIT BACKPLATE, AND
CONNECTOR KIT
GMA 35 011-02299-00 3.1 [79.2] 3.6 [92.2] 1.4 lb [.64 kg] 2.2 lb [1.00 kg]
GMA 35 011-02299-20 3.1 [78.5] 3.8 [95.3] 1.3 lb [.59 kg] 2.1 lb [.95 kg]
GMA 35c 011-02299-40 3.2 [80.3] 3.7 [93.0] 1.3 lb [.61 kg] 2.1 lb [.95 kg]
NOTES:
1. DIMENSIONS: INCHES[mm]. METRIC VALUES ARE FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
2. DIMENSIONS ARE NOMINAL AND TOLERANCES ARE NOT IMPLIED UNLESS SPECIFICALLY STATED.
3. CG MEASURED WITH UNIT, RACK, BACKPLATE, AND CONNECTORS.
4. BLUETOOTH ANTENNA CABLE IS ONLY REQUIRED FOR GMA 35c INSTALLATIONS.
Figure 4-16 GMA 35 Dimensions and Center of Gravity

Rev. 8 Page 4-23
211-60234-08
1 5
SCREW, 4-40 X .250
115-01464-00
GMA 35 MOUNTING RACK 3
211-63234-11
5 2
SCREW, 4-40 X .437
125-00040-00
1
GMA 35 BACKPLATE
011-00950-02 BACKSHELL (2X)
011-01169-00 GROUND ADAPTER (4X)
2
330-00185-44 CONNECTOR (2X)
336-00021-00 PINS (A/R)
1 PART OF 011-02300-00 BACKPLATE KIT

2 PART OF 011-02302-00 CONNECTOR KIT
3 PART OF 010-00831-01 INSTALLATION KIT
4 SEE TABLE FOR KIT REFERENCE INFORMATION
5 TORQUE 4.5 – 5.2 IN-LBS
UNIT DESCRIPTION INSTALLATION KIT CONNECTOR KIT 3 BACKPLATE KIT 3
GMA 35 010-00831-01 011-02302-00 011-02300-00

GMA 35 010-00831-21 011-02302-00 011-02300-00
GMA 35c 010-00831-41 011-02302-00 011-02300-00
Figure 4-17 GMA 35 Mounting Rack Assembly

Rev. 8 Page 4-24
1 115-01294-A0
011-02645-00 2
GTN 7XX INSTALL RACK
GMA 35 INSTALL RACK
211-62237-09 2 3
SCREW, 6-32 X .312 (6X)
NOTES:
1 GTN 7XX HELICOPTER INSTALL RACK (P/N 115-01294-A0) IS NOT INCLUDED IN ALL GTN 7XX Xi
INSTALLATION KITS AND MUST BE SPECIAL REQUESTED AT TIME OF PURCHASE IF NOT INCLUDED.
2 PART OF P/N 011-02645-00 (GMA 35) KIT.
3 TORQUE 8.5 – 9.5 IN-LBS
Figure 4-18 GTN 7XX Xi with GMA 35 Mounting Rack Assembly
4.5.1 GMA 35 Unit Insertion

The GMA 35 is installed in the rack by sliding it straight in until it stops. A 3/32” hex drive tool is then
inserted into the hex hole at the bottom-center of the unit. Rotate the hex tool clockwise while pressing the
unit from the front until the GMA 35 is firmly seated in the rack.
Be sure not to overtighten the unit into the rack. The application of hex drive tool torque exceeding
15 in-lbf can damage the locking mechanism.

Rev. 8 Page 4-25
4.6 Flight Stream 510 Installation
To install the Flight Stream 510, insert the Flight Stream 510 data card into the GTN Xi data card slot until
it stops. The label should be facing to the right.

Rev. 8 Page 4-26
4.7 Electrical Installation
4.7.1 Wire Harness Construction Guidelines
CAUTION
Check wiring connections for errors before inserting the unit into the tray. Incorrect
wiring could cause component damage.
The installation kit for the GTN Xi and optional GMA 35 includes connectors and crimp contacts. Make
the crimp connections with a crimp tool specified in Table 3-31.
For the appropriate connections, refer to the interconnect diagrams in Appendix B. Use wire specified in
Section 3.2.2 for all connections. For power and ground, use the wire gauge specified in the interconnect
drawing in Appendix B, then 22 AWG for the short length from the splice to the connector for high-density
connectors only. For inter-LRU wiring, use wire gauge specified in interconnect drawings in Appendix B.
Install the configuration module as described in Section 4.7.2.3.2. Once the cable assemblies have been
made, use anti-chafe tape and attach the backshell/connector to the rear of the mounting unit. Route the
wiring bundle as appropriate in accordance with Section 4.1.1. Avoid sharp bends that may damage the
wire bundle.
Allow adequate space for installation of cables and connectors. The installer supplies and fabricates all of
the cables. All electrical connections to the GTN Xi are made through the following connectors provided
by Garmin:
• J1001 Main – 78-pin high-density D-Sub connector (male)
• J1002 Main – 26-pin high-density D-Sub connector (male)
• J1003 COM – 44-pin high-density D-Sub connector (male) (GTN 635Xi/650Xi/750Xi only)
• J1004 NAV – 62-pin high-density D-Sub connector (male) (GTN 650Xi/750Xi only)
• J1005 I/O – 62-pin high-density D-Sub connector (male) (GTN 7XX Xi only)
All electrical connections to the GMA 35 are made through the following connectors provided by Garmin:
• J3501 – 44-pin high-density D-Sub connector (male)
• J3502 – 44-pin high-density D-Sub connector (male)
Construct the wiring harness according to the information contained in this and the following sections.
Cable lengths will vary depending upon installation. Strip all wires going to the connectors 0.17 inches.
Insert the wire into the pin and crimp with one of the recommended (or equivalent) crimping tools. Insert
the pin into the connector housing location as specified by the interconnect drawing in Appendix B. For
connector pinout information, refer to Appendix A. Verify the pin is properly engaged into the connector
by gently tugging on the wire. Route and secure the cable runs from the GTN Xi and GMA 35 away from
sources of electrical noise.

Rev. 8 Page 4-27
Figure 4-19 GTN 6XX Xi Backplate Connector Layout — Rear View
Figure 4-20 GTN 7XX Xi Backplate Connector Layout — Rear View

Rev. 8 Page 4-28
Figure 4-21 GMA 35 Rear Connectors

Rev. 8 Page 4-29
Table 4-1 Socket Contact Part Numbers
P1001-P1005, P3501, P3502
Wire Gauge (including P1001 configuration module) [1] [2]
22-28 AWG
Garmin 336-00021-00
Military M39029/58-360 [3]
AMP 204370-2 [3]
Positronic MC8522D [3]
ITT Cannon 030-2042-000 [3]
Notes:
[1] Recommended crimp tools are listed in Table 3-31.
[1] For configuration module pins, ensure the crimp tool is set to crimp 28 AWG wire.
[2] Non-Garmin part numbers shown are not maintained by Garmin and are subject to
change without notice.
4.7.2 Backshell and D-Subminiature Connector Assembly

GTN Xi and GMA 35 connector kits include Garmin backshell assemblies and Garmin ground adapter
assemblies. Backshell connectors give the installer the ability to terminate shield grounds at the backshell
housing using the shield block ground kit. Table 4-2 lists all parts required to properly assemble GTN Xi
and GMA 35 D-sub connectors. Number callouts in Figure 4-24 through Figure 4-27 in the following
sections reference lines of Table 4-2.
Table 4-2 GTN Xi and GMA 35 Backshell and D-Subminiature Connector Assembly
Refer to
Figure 4-22 Garmin P/N
Description [1] Notes
through or MIL Spec
Figure 4-24
Multiple conductor shielded cable (2–conductor
1 As required [2] [3]
demonstrated here)
[2] [3]
2 Wire, insulated (20-22 AWG), 3” max length As required
[4]
3 Shield termination As required [2] [4]
4 Pin contacts, size 22D 336-00021-00 [5]
5 Silicone fusion tape 249-00114-00 [2]
Ring terminal, #8, insulated, 18-22 AWG MS25036-149
6 [2] [6]
Ring terminal, #8, insulated, 14-16 AWG MS25036-153
Connector, D-sub, HD, 15/26-pin (P1002) 330-00185-26
Connector, D-sub, HD, 25/44-pin (P1003, P3501, P3502) 330-00185-44
7 [5]
Connector, D-sub, HD, 37/62-pin (P1004, P1005) 330-00185-62
Connector, D-sub, HD, 50/78-pin (P1001) 330-00185-78
8 Screw, 4-40 x 0.375, FLHP, SS/P 211-60234-10 [7]
Shield block (P1002, P1003, P3501, P3502) 117-00147-00
9 [8]
Shield block (P1001, P1004, P1005) 117-00147-01

Rev. 8 Page 4-30
Refer to
Figure 4-22 Garmin P/N
Description [1] Notes
through or MIL Spec
Figure 4-24
10 Screw, 4-40 x 0.250, FLHP, SS/P 211-63234-08 [8]
Backshell, config module, 15/26-Pin (P1002) 125-00082-00
Backshell, config module, 25/44-Pin (P1003, P3501,
125-00083-00
11 P3502) [7]
Backshell, config module, 37/62-Pin (P1004, P1005) 125-00084-00
Backshell, config module, 50/78-Pin (P1001) 125-00085-00
Strain relief clamp (P1002) 115-00499-01
12 Strain relief clamp (P1003, P3501, P3502) 115-00499-02 [7]
Strain relief clamp (P1001, P1004, P1005) 115-00499-03
13 Screw, 4-40 x 0.375, PHP, SS/P, w/nylon 211-60234-10 [7]
Cover, backshell, 15/26-Pin (P1002) 115-00500-01
Cover, backshell, 25/44-Pin (P1003, P3501, P3502) 115-00500-02
14 [7]
Cover, backshell, 37/62-Pin (P1004, P1005) 115-00500-03
Cover, Backshell, 50/78-Pin (P1001) 115-00500-04
15 Screw, 4-40 x 0.187, FLHP100, SS/P, w/Nylon 211-63234-06 [7]
Screw, PHP, 8-32 x 0.312, Stainless MS51957-42
16 [2] [6]
Screw, PHP, 8-32 x 0.312, Cad-Plated Steel MS35206-242
Split Washer, #8 (0.045" compressed thickness), Stainless MS35338-137
17 Split Washer, #8 (0.045" compressed thickness), Cad- [2] [6]
MS35338-42
plated steel
Flat Washer, Stainless, #8, 0.032" thick, 0.174" ID, 375" NAS1149CN8
OD 32R
18 [2] [6]
Flat washer, Cad-plated Steel, #8, 0.032" thick, 0.174" ID, NAS1149FN8
0.375" OD 32P
Notes:
[1] All items are applicable to GTN Xi and GMA 35 D-subminiature connectors unless
otherwise specified.
[2] Not supplied – must be purchased separately.
[3] Refer to Section 3.2.2 for MIL spec.
[4] Solder sleeve with pre-installed braid strap may be used instead of items 2 and 3.
[5] Supplied as part of GTN Xi connector kits P/Ns 011-02325-00 (GTN 625Xi), 011-02325-01
(GTN 635Xi), 011-02325-02 (GTN 650Xi), 011-02326-00 (GTN 725Xi), and 011-02326-02
(GTN 750Xi), and GMA 35 Connector Kit (P/N 011-2302-00).
[6] Not a Garmin part number.
[7] Supplied as part of Backshell Kits P/Ns 011-00950-04 (P1001), 011-00950-01 (P1002),
011-00950-02 (P1003, P3501, P3502), and 011-00950-03 (P1004 and P1005).
[8] Supplied as part of Ground Adapter Kits P/Ns 011-01169-01 (P1001, P1004, P1005) and
011-01169-00 (P1002, P1003, P3501, P3502).

Rev. 8 Page 4-31
4.7.2.1 Shielded Cable Preparation
NOTE
Solder sleeves with pre-installed shield drains may be used instead of separate shield
terminators and individual wires.
NOTE
For solder sleeves with pre-installed lead, a preferred solder sleeve is the Raychem S03
Series with the thermochromic temperature indicator. These solder sleeves come with a
pre-installed lead and effectively take the place of items (2) and (3). For detailed
instructions on product use, refer to Raychem installation procedure.
Prepare all of the shielded cables in accordance with one of the methods shown in Figure 4-22. When
terminating shield drains, a maximum of two shields can be daisy-chained together. Refer to Figure 4-22.
1. At the end of the shielded cable, strip back a 2.5 inches maximum length of the jacket to expose
the braid. Remove this exposed braid. Carefully score the jacket 1/4 to 5/16 inches from the end
and remove the jacket to leave the braid exposed.
2. Connect a 20 or 22 AWG wire to the exposed shield of the prepared cable assembly. Refer to
Figure 4-22. AC 43.13 maybe a helpful reference for termination techniques.
3. Slide a shield terminator onto the prepared cable assembly and connect the shield wire to the shield
using a heat gun approved for use with solder sleeves. The chosen size of solder sleeve must
accommodate both the number of conductors present in the cable and the shield wire to be
attached.
4. Crimp contacts onto the cable wires.
2." MAX 3
0.17"
0.31" OF EXPOSED SHIELD
2
SHIELD DRAINS AS SHORT AS PRACTICAL

(NO LONGER THAN 3”)
PREFERRED METHOD
2." MAX 3
2
0.17"
0.31" OF EXPOSED SHIELD
SHIELD DRAINS AS SHORT AS PRACTICAL

(NO LONGER THAN 3”)
ALTERNATE METHOD
Figure 4-22 Shield Termination Methods

Rev. 8 Page 4-32
4.7.2.2 Shield Block Assembly Procedure
CAUTION
If a pan head screw (12) connecting a ring terminal (4) to the shield block (7) penetrates
far enough out of the other side of the shield block, it may damage wires in the bundle.
CAUTION
Placing the grooved side of the strain relief across the cable bundle may damage wires.
NOTE
A preferred solder sleeve is the Raychem S03 Series with the thermochromic temperature
indicator. These solder sleeves come with a pre-installed lead and effectively take the
place of items (2) and (3). For detailed instructions on product use, refer to Raychem
installation procedure.
NOTE
Up to three ring terminals (4) may be connected to the shield block with a single screw. A
maximum of two shield drains may be inserted into each ring terminal. Two wires per ring
terminal will necessitate the use of a ring terminal, #8, insulated, 14-16 AWG
(MS25036-153).
Backshell connectors give the installer the ability to terminate shield grounds at the backshell housing
using the Shield Block ground kit. Parts needed for GTN Xi and GMA 35 backshell assembly are listed in
Table 4-2 above. These parts are referenced by numeric callouts in Figure 4-23 and Figure 4-24.
The three tapped holes on the shield block above the GTN Xi fan must not be used for grounding shield
terminal lugs on P1001 due to insufficient clearance between the fan case and the P1001 shield block. If
the remaining three tapped holes on the P1001 shield block are unable to accommodate the shield terminal
lugs, the extra shields can be daisy-chained to allow the shields to be grounded to the shield block. A
maximum of two shields can be daisy-chained together. The daisy-chaining method must only be used if
the three tapped holes are insufficient to ground the shields on P1001.
Skip to step 2 below for wires with no shielding.
1. Install a ring terminal (4) onto the cable shield termination wires (2) in groups of either one or two
wires per ring terminal.
2. Crimp pins (5) onto the wires and terminate in the D-sub connector (6) in accordance with the
pinout information in Appendix A.
3. For P1001, complete the following subassembly procedures in the D-sub connector:
a. Configuration module installation, refer to Section 4.7.2.3.2 for the configuration module
b. Fan cable assembly installation, refer to Section 4.7.2.4 for the fan cable assembly procedure
4. Attach the shield block (7) to the backshell (8) by inserting the flathead screws (9) through the
holes on the Shield Block and threading into the tapped holes on the backshell (8). Refer to
Figure 4-24.
5. Place the D-sub connector and wire bundle in the backshell. Refer to Figure 4-23 and Figure 4-24.
6. Wrap the cable bundle with silicone fusion tape (10, or a similar version) at the point where the
backshell strain relief (14) and backshell (8) will contact the cable bundle. Refer to Figure 4-23.

Rev. 8 Page 4-33
7. Connect each shield drain ring terminal (4) to the shield block (7) using in order a panhead screw
(11), split washer (12), and flat washer (13). Refer to Figure 4-23.
8. Place the backshell strain relief (14) smooth side down across the cable bundle. Ensure that
roughly half the cable bundle is supported by either half of the strain relief. Connect to the
backshell (8) using the three panhead screws (15).
9. For P1001, install the configuration module into the backshell (8). Refer to Section 4.7.2.3 for
configuration module installation procedure.
10. Attach the cover (16) to the backshell using two countersunk screws (17). Refer to Figure 4-24.
11. Insert the assembled connector into the backplate (not shown) and connect using two countersunk
screws (18). Refer to Figure 4-24.

Rev. 8 Page 4-34
1
) 7
* (2 7$&
$54
(' &2
1 ;
(7 0$
&.
62
7
'
+ ,(/
)6
2
,1*
11
*,
%(
3 $5
2
$55 1 $5
;
0$ ('
26 '
3
(; +,(/
6
6 2 $5
8 $5
7 $5
6 $5
NOTES:
1 PLACE SMOOTH SIDE OF STRAIN RELIEF ACROSS CABLE BUNDLE.
DO NOT PLACE GROOVED SIDE ACROSS CABLE BUNDLE.
2 PREFERRED SHIELD TERMINATION METHOD SHOWN.

REFER TO FIGURE 4-2 FOR ALTERNATE SHIELD TERMINATION METHODS.
Figure 4-23 Shield Termination on Backshell Assembly

Rev. 8 Page 4-35
15 2X
14
8 3X
12
11
7
10 2X
10 4X
Figure 4-24 Connector Backshell Assembly

Rev. 8 Page 4-36
4.7.2.3 Configuration Module Installation (P1001 Only)
GTN Xi P1001 connector assemblies serve as the housing for a configuration module. This section lists the
two configuration module assemblies that are approved under this STC. Only Configuration Module Kit
P/N 011-00979-03 is included in the GTN Xi Installation Kits.
Table 4-3 Configuration Module Wire Color Reference Chart

Color Function P1001 Contact
Red Vcc 65
Black Ground 64
Yellow Data 62
White Clock 63
NOTE
The pin contacts supplied with the GTN Xi configuration module are specifically made to
accommodate 28 AWG wire.

Rev. 8 Page 4-37
4.7.2.3.1 Configuration Module Assembly with Potted PCB
Refer to Table 4-4 and Figure 4-25 for details and item numbers referenced in the following procedure.
1. Strip 0.17 inches of insulation from each wire.
2. Crimp pins (4) onto each wire of the 4-conductor wire harness (3).
3. Insert the newly crimped pins and wires (3, 4) into the appropriate connector housing (5) locations
shown in Table 4-3 and Figure B-2 (GTN 650Xi/750Xi) or Figure B-3 (GTN 625Xi/725Xi).
4. Plug the 4-conductor wire harness (3) into the connector on the PCB (1).
5. Insert the PCB (1) into the backshell (6) recess.
6. Attach cover (7) to backshell (6) using screws (8).
Table 4-4 Configuration Module Kit P/N 011-00979-03

Figure 4-25
Description Garmin P/N
Reference
1 Configuration Module, PCB Board Assembly w/EEPROM 011-02178-00
3 4-Conductor Harness 325-00122-00
4 Pin Contact, #22D 336-00021-00
8 2x
Figure 4-25 Backshell Assembly (Potted Configuration Module)

Rev. 8 Page 4-38
4.7.2.3.2 Configuration Module Assembly with Spacer
NOTE
Configuration Module Kit P/N 011-00979-00 is not included with GTN Xi installation kits.
1. Strip 0.17 inches of insulation from each wire of the configuration module (1).
2. Crimp pins (2) onto each wire of the 4-conductor wire harness (3).
3. Insert the newly crimped pins and wires (3, 4) into the appropriate connector housing locations
shown in Table 4-3 and Figure B-2 (GTN 650Xi/750Xi) or Figure B-3 (GTN 625Xi/725Xi).
4. Apply the spacer (2) by wrapping it around the PCB board (1) ensuring to insert the plastic
connector mounted on the board into the hole provided in the spacer.
5. Plug the 4-conductor wire harness (1) into the connector on the configuration module (1).
6. With the spacer (2) in position, insert the PCB board (4) into the recess of the backshell.
7. Orient the connector housing so that the inserted 4-conductor wire harness (3) is on the same side
of the backshell as the inserted PCB board (1).
Table 4-5 Configuration Module Kit P/N 011-00979-00

Figure 4-26
Description Garmin P/N
Reference
1 Configuration Module, PCB Board Assembly w/EEPROM 012-00605-00
2 Spacer, Configuration Module 213-00043-00
3 4-Conductor Harness 325-00122-00
4 Pin Contact, #22D 336-00021-00
Figure 4-26 Backshell Assembly (Configuration Module with Spacer)

Rev. 8 Page 4-39
4.7.2.4 GTN Xi Fan Cable Assembly Installation (P1001 Only)
The cooling fan mounted to the GTN Xi backplate assembly is necessary for proper cooling and air
circulation within the GTN Xi. The fan is powered from the GTN Xi and must be wired to the P1001
connector. Table 4-7 lists components of the GTN Xi fan kit.
Table 4-6 Fan Cable Wire Color Reference

Color Function P1001 Contact
Red Power 59
Black Ground 43
Yellow Fan tach 58
1. Strip 0.17 inches of insulation from each wire of the fan cable assembly (1).
2. Crimp socket contacts (2) onto each wire of the fan cable assembly (1).
3. Insert the newly crimped contacts and wires into the D-sub connector (4) in accordance with
Table 4-6. Refer to Appendix A for detailed connector pinout information.
4. Plug the 3-conductor wire harness (1) into the connector on the fan.
Table 4-7 Fan Kit
Refer to
Description P/N
Figure 4-27
1 Fan Cable Assembly, 3-Conductor Harness 320-00600-00
2 Pin Contact, Crimp, #22D 336-00021-00
3 Silicon Fusion Tape 249-00114-00
8"
MA
X
A/R 3
1
NOTES:
1 WRAP FAN WIRES WITH FUSION TAPE SEPARATELY FROM THE MAIN HARNESS.
Figure 4-27 Fan Cable Assembly Installation

Rev. 8 Page 4-40
4.7.3 Power Requirements
The GTN Xi and GMA 35 are capable of operating at either 14 or 28 VDC. Refer to the individual
Environmental Qualification Forms for details on surge ratings and minimum/maximum operating
voltages. Table 4-8 lists GTN Xi current draw specifications.
Table 4-8 STC Installed Equipment Current Specifications
14 V Current Draw 28 V Current Draw
LRU (Connector)
Typical Maximum Typical Maximum
GTN 6XX Xi (J1001) 1.60 A [1] 2.80 A [2] [5] 0.80 A [1] 1.50 A [2] [5]
1.76 A [3]
GTN 635Xi/650Xi (J1003) 0.45 A 4.02 A [3] 0.21 A
2.33 A [4]
GTN 650Xi (J1004) 0.60 A 0.90 A [2] 0.30 A 0.45 A [2]
GTN 7XX Xi (J1001) 2.40 A [1] 3.40 A [2] [5] 1.20 A [1] 1.80 A [2] [5]
1.76 A [3]
GTN 750Xi (J1003) 0.45 A 4.02 A [3] 0.21 A
2.33 A [4]
GTN 750Xi (J1004) 0.60 A 0.90 A [2] 0.30 A 0.45 A [2]
GMA 35 0.80 A 1.50 A 0.40 A 1.0 A
GMA 35c 0.80 A 1.50 A 0.40 A 1.0 A
HTAWS Annunciators N/A N/A 0.042 A 0.042 A
Notes:
[1] The specified current draw is with the display backlight set to 100% and the fan operating
at low speed. If the superflags are connected, their current draw must be added in addition
to the specified current. The superflags will supply up to 320 mA each regardless of
GTN Xi input voltage.
[2] The specified current draw does not include the superflags. If connected, their current
draw must be added to the specified current. The superflags will supply up to 320 mA
each regardless of GTN Xi input voltage.
[3] 10 W COM transmit power.
[4] 16 W COM transmit power (28V installations only).
[5] The Flight Stream 510 adds 0.10 A to the maximum current draw at both 14 and 28 volts.

Rev. 8 Page 4-41
4.7.4 Electrical Load Analysis
An Electrical Load Analysis (ELA) must be completed on each rotorcraft prior to installation to verify the
rotorcraft electrical system is capable of supporting the GTN Xi, optional GMA 35, and optional HTAWS
annunciators. The purpose of the ELA is to show compliance with 14 CFR 27.1351.
As part of the installation, it must be shown that the maximum electrical system demand does not normally
exceed 80% of the alternator data plate rating. Satisfactory completion of the ELA should be recorded on
FAA Form 337. There are several approaches that could be taken, as described in the following sections.
For each approach, use the values outlined in Table 4-8.
NOTE
Circuits should be protected with circuit breakers rated in accordance with the model-
specific installation drawing.
4.7.4.1 Rotorcraft with Existing Electrical Load Analysis

If there is an existing ELA for the rotorcraft, this must be updated to reflect the modification. It must show
the alternators/generators have adequate capacity to supply power to the modified systems in all
anticipated conditions. Add the applicable typical current draw values to the existing ELA under
continuous operating conditions. Ensure the new rotorcraft electrical load does not exceed the rated
capacity of the installed generator/alternator. After performing the calculations, if the additional load of the
GTN Xi exceeds the rated capacity of the generator/alternator, proceed to the steps in Section 4.7.4.2. If
the additional load still exceeds the generator rated capacity, alternate FAA approval is required for
installation of the GTN Xi and/or GMA 35 in the rotorcraft.

Rev. 8 Page 4-42
4.7.4.2 Rotorcraft without Existing Load Analysis
Prior to undertaking a complete Electrical Load Analysis, the net change to the electrical load resulting
from the GTN Xi installation should be determined (refer to Figure 4-28 for a sample calculation from a
rotorcraft with a 28V electrical system). The results of this analysis will determine how to proceed further.
Items removed from rotorcraft: Electrical Load (A) [1] Comment

GNS 530W (Main Connector) 1.4 A
Used non-transmitting
GNS 530W (COM Connector) 0.015 A
current draw
GNS 530W (NAV Connector) 0.50 A
PMA 7000M 2.50 A
Subtotal: 4.415 A
Electrical Load (A)

Items added to rotorcraft: Comment
[1] [2]
GTN 750Xi (Main Connector) 1.2 A
Used non-transmitting
GTN 750Xi (COM Connector) 0.21 A
current draw
GTN 750Xi (NAV Connector) 0.30 A
GMA 35 0.40 A
Subtotal: 1.91 A
Net Change in Bus Load: -2.305 A [3]
Notes:
[1] Use typical current draw when performing this calculation.
[2] Use 28 V current draw values for this calculation.
[3] To obtain the Net Change in bus load, subtract the Items Removed
subtotal from the Items Added subtotal.
Figure 4-28 Sample Net Electrical Load Change Calculation
4.7.4.2.1 Electrical Load is Reduced Following Modification

In many instances, when older systems are replaced with newer equipment, the electrical load presented to
the power system may be reduced. If the overall load on the electrical system is reduced as a result of the
GTN Xi installation (as shown in the previous example), no further analysis is required. This assumes the
electrical system was within all limits prior to the GTN Xi/GMA 35 installation. The amended electrical
load calculation should be added to the rotorcraft permanent records to document the electrical load
reduction.

Rev. 8 Page 4-43
4.7.4.2.2 Electrical Load is Increased Following Modification
If it is determined the electrical load has increased, a complete Electrical Load Analysis must be performed
to show the capacity of the alternator/generator and battery are sufficient for the additional electrical load.
For guidance on preparing an ELA, refer to ASTM F2490-05: Standard Guide for Aircraft Electrical Load
and Power Source Capacity Analysis.
Alternatively, the loads under various operating conditions may be measured, as described in
Section 4.7.4.3.
4.7.4.3 Performing an Electrical Load Analysis by Measurement

If the installation of the GTN Xi/GMA 35 increases the overall load, an Electrical Load Analysis must be
performed. Due to the age of much of the equipment, adequate information regarding the current draw of
this equipment may not exist. One acceptable method of performing an Electrical Load Analysis is to
determine the electrical loads by measurement. The measurements must account for loads applied to the
electrical system in probable combinations and durations for rotorcraft operation. The maximum electrical
demand should not exceed 80% of the alternator data plate rating. The following section describes how to
perform an ELA for a single alternator/single battery electrical system. This should be modified
accordingly for rotorcraft with multiple batteries or alternators, and it must be shown the maximum
electrical demand for each alternator does not exceed 80% of the alternator data plate rating.
In this section the following definitions are used:
• Normal operation: the primary electrical power generating system is operating normally
• Emergency operation: the primary electrical power generating system is inoperative
An in-circuit or clamp-on, calibrated ammeter with 0.5 A or better accuracy can be used for current
measurement. Record the continuous (e.g., data plate/nameplate) rating for the alternator and battery.
1. Using the blank electrical load tabulation form provided in Figure 4-30, compile a list of electrical
loads on the rotorcraft (generally, this is just a list of circuit breakers and circuit breaker switches).
Refer to the example in Figure 4-31.
2. Identify whether each load is continuous (e.g., GPS) or intermittent (e.g., rotor low RPM warning
horn, landing gear).
3. Using the worst-case flight condition, identify whether each load is used in a particular phase of
flight for normal operation. If some loads are mutually exclusive and will not be turned on
simultaneously (e.g., pitot heat and air conditioning), use only those loads for the worst-case
condition.
4. Identify whether each load is used in a particular phase of flight for emergency operation. As a
minimum, these systems include:
◦ COM radio #1
◦ NAV radio #1
◦ Transponder and associated altitude source
◦ Audio panel
◦ Low Rotor RPM Warning System
◦ Pitot heat
◦ Landing light (switched on during landing only)
◦ Instrument panel dimming

Rev. 8 Page 4-44
NOTE
To avoid damage to equipment, ensure the ammeter is capable of handling the anticipated
load.
5. Insert/attach the calibrated ammeter in the line from the external power source to the master relay
circuit, as shown in Figure 4-29. This placement will eliminate errors due to the charging current
drawn by the battery.
Figure 4-29 Ammeter Placement
6. Ensure that all circuit breakers are closed.

7. Apply external power to the rotorcraft. Power source voltage should be set to nominal alternator
voltage (usually 13.8 VDC or 27.5 VDC).
8. Turn on the battery master switch.
NOTE
Intermittent electrical loads are not measured. It is assumed that if additional current is
required beyond what the alternator can supply, this short-duration demand will be
provided by the battery.
9. Set the lighting as follows (these settings will be used for every current measurement that follows):
• All instrument panel and flood lights should be set to maximum brightness
• The GTN Xi backlight should be set to 50% brightness
• Any other displays with a backlight should be set to 50% brightness
CAUTION
Pitot heat should only be switched on long enough to take an ammeter reading, and then
immediately switched off.
10. Using the tabulation completed above, switch on all continuous electrical loads used in the
warm-up and start phase and record ammeter current reading (measurement (a) in Sheet 2 of
Figure 4-30).
11. Using the tabulation completed above, switch on all continuous electrical loads used in the taxiing
phase and record ammeter current reading (measurement (b) in Sheet 2 of Figure 4-30).
12. Using the tabulation completed above, switch on all continuous electrical loads used in the normal
takeoff/landing phase and record ammeter current reading. Measurements must be taken with the
landing lights ON and OFF (measurements (c1) and (c2) in Sheet 2 of Figure 4-30).

Rev. 8 Page 4-45
13. Using the tabulation completed above, switch on all continuous electrical loads used in the normal
cruise phase and record the ammeter current reading (measurement (d) in Sheet 2 of Figure 4-30).
14. Using the values measured and recorded, complete the ELA using the blank form in Figure 4-31.
Verify the maximum demand does not exceed 80% of the alternator data plate rating with the
landing light off.
NOTE
It is permissible to exceed 80% of the alternator data plate rating during the takeoff/
landing phase of flight when the landing light is switched on. However, for this condition
(i) electrical load must not exceed 95% of the alternator data plate rating with the landing
light and pitot heat on, and (ii) electrical load must not exceed 80% of the alternator data
plate rating with the landing light off.

Rev. 8 Page 4-46
ROTORCRAFT ELECTRICAL LOAD TABULATION FORM
Date: Tail Number:

Phase(s) of flight during which circuit/
Circuit system is used
Breaker Operating Start and Taxiing TO/Land Cruise
Circuit/System Number Time Warmup 10 min 10 min 60 min
Figure 4-30 Blank Rotorcraft Electrical Load Tabulation Form

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 8 Page 4-47
ROTORCRAFT ELECTRICAL LOAD TABULATION FORM (CONTINUED)
Date: Tail Number:

Ldg Lt ON
(c1)
Total current used (amps):
(a) (b) (d)
Ldg Lt OFF
(c2)
÷ Alternator rating (amps):
%
Ldg Lt ON
(< 95%)
x 100% = Percent of alternator capacity used: % % %
(< 80%) (< 80%) (< 80%)
%
Ldg Lt OFF
(< 80%)
Pass/Fail:
Notes:
Figure 4-30 Blank Rotorcraft Electrical Load Tabulation Form

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 8 Page 4-48
ROTORCRAFT ELECTRICAL LOAD TABULATION FORM
Date: Jan 2, 2020 Tail Number: NXXXX

ELT Intermittent
LANDING LT Continuous
INSTRUMENT LT Continuous
COCKPIT LT Continuous
CAUTION LT Continuous
POSITION LT Continuous
ANTI-COLLISION LT Continuous
TOT INDICATOR Continuous
FUEL BOOST FWD Continuous
FUEL QTY/PRESSURE Continuous
FUEL VALVE Intermittent
ENG TRANSMISSION TEMP INDICATOR Continuous
HYDRAULIC BOOST Continuous
GOVERNOR CONTROL Continuous
ENGINE IGNITION Intermittent
ENGINE START Intermittent
ENGINE HEAT Intermittent
GENERATOR FIELD Continuous
GENERATOR RESET Intermittent
PITOT HEAT [1] Continuous
GDU 620 PFD/MFD Continuous
GRS 77H AHRS Continuous
GDC 74 H ADC Continuous
GTN 650Xi Continuous
GTN 750Xi Continuous
GMA 35 Continuous
HTAWS ANNUNCIATORS Continuous
Figure 4-31 Example Electrical Load Tabulation

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 8 Page 4-49
ROTORCRAFT ELECTRICAL LOAD TABULATION FORM (CONTINUED)
Date: Jan 2, 2020 Tail Number: NXXXX

40
Ldg Lt ON
(c1)
Total current used (amps): 34 34 34
(a) (b) 34 (d)
Ldg Lt OFF
(c2)
÷ Alternator rating (amps): 105
38.1 %
Ldg Lt ON
(< 95%)
x 100% = Percent of alternator capacity used: 32.4 % 32.4 % 32.4 %
(< 80%) (< 80%) 32.4 % (< 80%)
Ldg Lt OFF
(< 80%)
Pass/Fail: PASS PASS PASS PASS
Notes:
[1] Pitot heat is turned on when all of the following conditions are present:
a) Visible moisture is present.
b) Ambient temperature is less than 5° F.
Figure 4-31 Example Electrical Load Tabulation

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 8 Page 4-50
4.8 Placards and Labels
If any placards are relocated as a part of the GTN Xi/GMA 35 installation, verify the following:
• New placard font size is at least as large as that of the placard being replaced
• New placard colors are identical to those of the placard being replaced
• New placard text is identical to that of the placard being replaced. Text may be arranged according
to space constraints, but wording must not change
If switches are added as a part of the GTN Xi/GMA 35 installation, verify the following:
• Label font size is legible from the pilot’s seat
• The switch must be labeled as specified in the interconnect drawings in Appendix B
• The label must be adjacent to the switch
Verify that a placard with the following features is installed:
• Placard text reads, “GPS APPROVED FOR DAY/NIGHT VFR”
• Text font is minimum 0.25 inches high
• The placard can easily be read from the pilot’s seat
All placards and labels must be readable in all cockpit lighting conditions. Ambient flood lighting is
acceptable. Placards added as part of the GTN Xi and GMA 35 installation must be displayed in a
conspicuous place and must not be easily erased, disfigured, or obscured.
New circuit breakers and switches installed for the GTN Xi or GMA 35 must be labeled as shown in the
applicable interconnect drawing in Appendix B.

Rev. 8 Page 4-51
4.9 Weight and Balance
Weight and balance computation is required after the installation of the GTN Xi is complete. Make
appropriate entries in the Equipment List indicating items added, removed, or relocated along with the date
the installation was accomplished. Include your name and certificate number in the rotorcraft records.
Include a copy of the updated rotorcraft weight and balance in the rotorcraft POH/RFM. GTN Xi,
GMA 35, and Flight Stream unit weights are listed in Table 4-9.
For unit centers of gravity, refer to Figure 4-10, Figure 4-12, and Figure 4-16.
Refer to Figure 4-32 for a sample calculation.
Table 4-9 LRU Weights

Weight
LRU
lbs [kg]
GTN 625Xi (unit only) 4.1 [1.88]
GTN 625Xi (with rack and backplate) 5.9 [2.66]
GMA 35 (-00 unit only) 1.4 [0.64]
GMA 35 (-00 unit with rack and backplate) 2.2 [1.00]
GMA 35 (-20 unit only) 1.3 [0.58]
GMA 35 (-20 unit with rack and backplate) 2.1 [1.00]
GMA 35c (unit only) 1.3 [0.58]
GMA 35c (with rack and backplate) 2.2 [1.00]
Flight Stream 510 [1] Negligible
Notes:
[1] Flight Stream 510 should be added to the Equipment List as an optional LRU and may be
installed/removed by the owner or operator.

Rev. 8 Page 4-52
Previous Center
Previous rotorcraft of Gravity (inches) Moment
weight and balance Empty Useful
Weight (lb) Load (lb) Longitudinal Lateral Longitudinal Lateral
Date: /8/201 1924.28 1275.72 114.44 1.63 220214 3137
Description of items Arm (Inches) Moment

removed from rotorcraft Weight (lb) Longitudinal Lateral Longitudinal Lateral
EXA
EXAMPLE
AM
AMMPLE
MPL
PLE
PLLE
LE
-- -- -- -- -- --
Total
tal removed 0 0 0
Description
escriptio off item
items Arm
rm (Inches)
nc Moment
added
ded to aircraft Weight (lb)
Weigh b) Longitudinal
Longit Laterall Longitudinal Lateral
GTN
TN 750;L w/rack
w/ra .80 37.00 0 .60
0
GTN 650;L w/rack .60 38.00 0 2.80 0
Total added 1.40 .4 0
Change 1.40 .4 0
New Center
New rotorcraft of Gravity (inches) Moment
weight and balance Empty Useful
Weight (lb) Load (lb) Longitudinal Lateral Longitudinal Lateral
Date: //20 19. 12. 112.26 1.60 220 3137
Figure 4-32 Example Weight and Balance Calculation

Rev. 8 Page 4-53
5 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION
5.1 System Configuration Overview .....................................................................................................5-3

5.2 Mounting, Wiring, and Power Checks .............................................................................................5-4
5.3 Connector Engagement Check .........................................................................................................5-4
5.4 Configuration Mode Operation ........................................................................................................5-5
5.4.1 Updates ...................................................................................................................................5-5
5.4.1.1 GTN Xi Software Loader Card ....................................................................................5-6
5.4.1.2 GTN Xi Software Loading .........................................................................................5-10
5.4.1.3 GMA 35 Software Loading (GTN 7XX Xi Only) .....................................................5-11
5.4.1.4 GMA 35 Boot Block Loading ....................................................................................5-11
5.4.1.5 GDL 69/69A Software Loading .................................................................................5-12
5.4.2 System Information Page .....................................................................................................5-12
5.4.3 GTN Setup Page ...................................................................................................................5-13
5.4.3.1 ARINC 429 Configuration Page ................................................................................5-14
5.4.3.2 RS-232 Configuration Page .......................................................................................5-18
5.4.3.3 HSDB Port Utilization Page .......................................................................................5-24
5.4.3.4 Interfaced Equipment Configuration Page .................................................................5-25
5.4.3.5 Main Indicator (Analog) Configuration Page ............................................................5-26
5.4.3.6 Lighting Configuration Page ......................................................................................5-28
5.4.3.7 Enhanced Lighting Page ............................................................................................5-31
5.4.3.8 Audio Configuration Page ..........................................................................................5-37
5.4.3.9 Traffic Configuration Page ........................................................................................5-38
5.4.3.10 Main System Configuration Page ..............................................................................5-39
5.4.3.11 COM Configuration Page (GTN 635Xi/650Xi/750Xi Only) ....................................5-45
5.4.3.12 VOR/LOC/GS Configuration Page (GTN 650Xi/750Xi Only) .................................5-48
5.4.3.13 ARINC 708 ................................................................................................................5-49
5.4.3.14 Discrete Configuration Page ......................................................................................5-49
5.4.3.15 Navigation Features ...................................................................................................5-50
5.4.3.16 Ownship Configuration Page .....................................................................................5-51
5.4.3.17 Connext Configuration Page ......................................................................................5-52
5.4.4 GTN Options ........................................................................................................................5-53
5.4.4.1 Terrain Configuration .................................................................................................5-54
5.4.4.2 Chart Configuration (GTN 7XX Xi Only) .................................................................5-56
5.4.4.3 COM Transmit Power (GTN 635Xi/650Xi/750Xi Only) ..........................................5-57
5.4.4.4 Weather Radar ............................................................................................................5-58
5.4.4.5 Flight Simulator .........................................................................................................5-58
5.4.4.6 Search and Rescue ......................................................................................................5-58
5.4.5 GTN Diagnostics ..................................................................................................................5-59
5.4.5.1 ARINC Inputs ............................................................................................................5-59
5.4.5.2 Serial Inputs ...............................................................................................................5-59
5.4.5.3 Discrete Inputs ...........................................................................................................5-59
5.4.5.4 Discrete Outputs .........................................................................................................5-60
5.4.5.5 HSDB (Ethernet) ........................................................................................................5-60
5.4.5.6 Main Indicator (Analog) ............................................................................................5-60
5.4.5.7 Analog Inputs .............................................................................................................5-60
5.4.5.8 Power Stats .................................................................................................................5-60
5.4.5.9 WAAS ........................................................................................................................5-60

Rev. 8 Page 5-1
5.4.5.10 Temps .........................................................................................................................5-60
5.4.5.11 Logs ............................................................................................................................5-60
5.4.5.12 Main Data Inputs ........................................................................................................5-61
5.4.5.13 VOR/ILS Indicator (Analog) (GTN 650Xi/750Xi Only) ..........................................5-61
5.4.5.14 Clear Config Settings .................................................................................................5-61
5.4.6 External Systems Configuration ..........................................................................................5-62
5.4.6.1 GDL 69/69A Configuration .......................................................................................5-62
5.4.6.2 Stormscope Configuration .........................................................................................5-63
5.4.6.3 Traffic Configuration .................................................................................................5-63
5.4.6.4 GAD 42 ......................................................................................................................5-64
5.4.6.5 Transponder Configuration (GTX 32 or GTX 33) .....................................................5-64
5.4.6.6 GMA 35 Audio Panel Configuration (GTN 7XX Xi Only) ......................................5-80
5.4.6.7 GDL 88 .......................................................................................................................5-88
5.4.6.8 GSR 56 Configuration ................................................................................................5-97
5.4.6.9 Weather Radar Configuration ....................................................................................5-97
5.5 Flight Stream 510 ...........................................................................................................................5-98

Rev. 8 Page 5-2
5.1 System Configuration Overview
This section contains instructions for configuring the GTN Xi and GMA 35 for each installation, as well as
checks to ensure the system is properly installed and functioning correctly. Steps not applicable to a
particular installation may be skipped. A checkout log, which is included at the end of Section 6, shall be
filled out during the checkout procedures. The completed configuration and checkout log should be
maintained with the rotorcraft permanent records to document the configuration of this installation. A
summary of steps required for configuration and checkout of the GTN Xi and GMA 35 is as follows:
1. Perform installation checks. Refer to Section 5.2 and Section 5.3.
2. If required, load the software into the GTN Xi. Refer to Section 5.4.1.2.
3. If required, load software into the GMA 35. Refer to Section 5.4.1.3 and Section 5.4.1.5.
4. Configure the GMA 35. Refer Section 5.4.6.6.
5. Configure the GTN Xi for the specific installation and record in the configuration and checkout
log. Refer to Section 5.4 and Section 6.4.3.
6. Perform ground checks to verify the interfaces to external sensors. Refer to Section 6.1 and
Section 6.2.
7. Perform the specified flight checks. Refer to Section 6.3.
8. Update the rotorcraft documentation. Refer to Section 6.4.
9. Complete the Checkout log. Refer to Section 6.4.3.

Rev. 8 Page 5-3
5.2 Mounting, Wiring, and Power Checks
CAUTION
Incorrect lighting bus wiring could cause damage to the GTN Xi.
Verify that all cables are properly secured and shields are connected to the shield block of the connectors.
Check the full movement of the flight and engine controls to verify there is no interference between the
cabling and control systems. Ensure that all wiring is installed in accordance with Section 3.3.
Prior to powering up the GTN Xi, the wiring harness must be checked for proper connections to the
rotorcraft systems and other avionics equipment. Point-to-point continuity must be checked on all wiring
to expose any faults, such as shorting to ground. Any faults or discrepancies must be corrected before
proceeding. Also, check the lighting bus wiring to ensure it is wired correctly before applying power to the
GTN Xi.
After accomplishing a continuity check, perform power and ground checks to verify proper power
distribution to the GTN Xi, including the lighting bus and any high level inputs to the GTN Xi. Any faults
or discrepancies should be corrected at this time. Remove power from the rotorcraft upon completion of
the harness checkout.
The GTN Xi can be installed after completion of the continuity and power checks. The GTN Xi should be
installed and secured in its rack in accordance with Section 4.2. The GTN Xi backplate must be connected
to the wiring harness and antenna coaxial cables.
5.3 Connector Engagement Check
NOTE
If power is lost or the red “X” condition occurs with fewer than three turns during the
following procedure, ensure there are no obstructions to the unit fully seating in the rack.
Also, the mounting rack may need to be moved aft (toward the pilot) such that the
rotorcraft panel does not obstruct the unit from properly engaging in the rack.
Prior to configuration and checkout of the GTN Xi, the connector engagement should be checked as
described below:
1. Ensure the GTN Xi GPS/NAV and COM circuit breakers are pulled.
2. Slide the GTN Xi straight into the rack until it stops about 1 inch short of the fully-seated position.
3. Insert a 3/32" hex drive into the unit retention mechanism access hole at the bottom of the unit face
and rotate the tool clockwise while pressing the bezel until the unit is firmly seated in the rack.
4. With the GTN Xi seated, reapply power by closing the circuit breakers and turning on the avionics
master switch (if installed).
5. Again, insert the hex drive into the unit retention mechanism access hole. Rotate the tool
counterclockwise to back out the retention mechanism. Ensure that three complete revolutions of
the Allen screw can be performed without a red “X” indication or loss of power to the GTN Xi.
6. Pull the circuit breakers to remove power from the unit and re-seat the GTN Xi per step 3.
7. Close the circuit breakers to restore power to the unit.

Rev. 8 Page 5-4
5.4 Configuration Mode Operation
NOTE
A Garmin transponder (GTX 32/327/328/33/3XX) controlled by the GTN Xi will reboot
into the same mode as the controlling GTN Xi (i.e., if the GTN Xi boots into Configuration
mode, the transponder will also boot into Configuration mode).
NOTE
The configuration pages shown here reflect main software v20.00. Some differences in
operation may be observed when comparing the information in this manual to earlier or
later software versions. Refer to Equipment List, GTN Xi Part 27 AML STC for actual
GTN Xi software versions.
NOTE
Throughout the next section, many screen shots are shown of the GTN 7XX Xi. The
procedures and methods for accessing pages on the GTN 6XX Xi are similar to what is
described for the GTN 7XX Xi, unless specifically noted.
CAUTION
Before configuring the GTN Xi, ensure that no configuration module service messages are
displayed in the message queue. This would indicate the configuration module is
improperly wired or damaged. Configuration mode is used to configure GTN Xi settings
for each specific installation.
Configuration mode is used to configure the GTN Xi settings for each specific installation. To access
Configuration mode, remove power from the GTN Xi. With the GTN Xi turned off (i.e., circuit breaker
pulled), press and hold the HOME key and re-apply power to the GTN Xi (i.e., push in the circuit
breaker). Release the HOME key when “Garmin” appears fully lit on the display. The first page displayed
is the Configuration mode home page. While in Configuration mode, pages can be selected by touching the
desired key on the display. Some pages may require page scrolling to view all of the information and keys
on the page; this can be done by touching the screen and dragging the page in the desired direction or by
touching the Up or Down keys.
5.4.1 Updates
The GTN Xi comes pre-loaded with software. However, to make sure it is loaded with the software that is
applicable to this STC, a GTN Software Loader Card must be created. Refer to Section 5.4.1.1 for
additional information. For dual GTN Xi installations, the software loading procedures in Section 5.4.1.2
must be carried out on each GTN Xi; however, the same Software Loader Card created in Section 5.4.1.1
may be used.
NOTE
Prior to installing a version of the GTN Xi main board software that is older than the
currently installed version, all RS-232 and ARINC 429 ports should be set to Off.

Rev. 8 Page 5-5
5.4.1.1 GTN Xi Software Loader Card
A GTN Xi Software Loader Card may be created using a GTN Xi Downloadable Software SD Card
(P/N 010-01000-00) in conjunction with a GTN Xi software application downloaded from the Dealer
Resource Center on Garmin’s website. As an alternative, a pre-programmed software loader card may be
purchased from Garmin. Refer to Equipment List, GTN Xi Part 27 AML STC (P/N 005-00533-L1) for the
correct part number of the pre-programmed GTN Software Loader Card.
NOTE
The downloadable application to create the GTN Software Loader Card only runs on
Windows PCs (Windows 2000, XP, Vista, Windows 7, and Windows 10 are supported).
There is no Mac support at this time.
NOTE
An SD card reader is needed to create the GTN Software Loader Card using the
application that is downloaded from Garmin. The approved readers are SanDisk
SDDR-99 and SDDR-93, although other SD card readers may work.
Create a GTN Software Loader Card as follows:

1. Go to the Dealer Resource Center on Garmin’s website.
2. Download the GTN Software Loader Image. Refer to Equipment List, GTN Xi Part 27 AML STC
for the correct Software Loader Image part number.
3. Run the executable file. The window shown in Figure 5-1 will appear. Click Setup.
Figure 5-1 Software Update Installer

Rev. 8 Page 5-6
4. The window shown in Figure 5-2 will appear to guide you through the software loader card
creation process.
Figure 5-2 System and Software Version
5. Make sure you have an SD card reader connected to the PC. Insert the GTN Downloadable
Software SD Card (P/N 010-01000-00) into the card reader. Click Next.
6. Read and accept the license agreement, as shown in Figure 5-3. Click Next when finished.
Figure 5-3 Software Loader Card License Agreement
7. Click Find Drive or select the correct drive from the drop-down menu. Click Next.
CAUTION
In order to create a GTN Software Loader Card, the drive that you select will be
completely erased.

Rev. 8 Page 5-7
Figure 5-4 Software Loader Card Drive
8. The progress window shown in Figure 5-5 will appear while the card is being created.
Figure 5-5 Software Loader Card Progress Window

Rev. 8 Page 5-8
9. After the card has been created, the window shown in Figure 5-6 will appear. Select Finish to
complete the update process.
Figure 5-6 Software Loader Card Completion
10. Eject the card from the card reader (or stop the card reader in Windows). The GTN Software
Loader Card is now ready to use.

Rev. 8 Page 5-9
5.4.1.2 GTN Xi Software Loading
NOTE
If using the GTN Xi internal HTAWS function, leave the unit powered for approximately
5 minutes following the software load. A power cycle may be required before HTAWS
alerts can be tested for configuration.
1. Remove power from the GTN Xi.

2. Insert the correct GTN Software Loader Card into the SD card slot. Refer to Section 3.3 for
instructions on how to create a loader card
3. Power up the GTN Xi in Configuration mode. Refer to Section
4. Touch Updates on the Configuration mode home page to display the Software Updates page. This
page compares versions of the software installed in the GTN Xi and on the loader card.
5. Verify the software version being loaded to the GTN Xi matches the software version listed on the
Equipment List.
6. Verify the available GTN Xi software updates are being displayed by ensuring “GTN Software
Updates” is displayed on the key in the upper edge of the display.
7. To update the GTN Xi with all software available, touch Select All; Otherwise, select the box(es)
next to the software to be updated.
8. Touch the Update key.
9. Touch OK.
10. When finished, remove power from the GTN Xi.
11. Remove the GTN Software Loader Card.
12. Re-insert the database card into the SD card slot.

Rev. 8 Page 5-10
5.4.1.3 GMA 35 Software Loading (GTN 7XX Xi Only)
NOTE
The GMA 35 software will be present on the SD card when creating a GTN Software
Loader Card. A separate card is not required to perform GMA 35 software updates. Refer
to Section 3.3 for instructions to create the GTN Software Loader Card.
1. Remove power from the GTN 7XX Xi.

2. Insert the GTN Software Loader Card into the GTN 7XX Xi data card slot.
3. Power on the GTN Xi in Configuration mode.
4. Ensure the GMA 35 circuit breaker is closed.
5. Touch the Updates key.
6. Touch the GTN Software Updates key and then the GMA 35 Software Updates key.
7. Touch the Select All key and then Update key. Touch the OK key.
8. Remove power from the GTN Xi and GMA 35 when finished.
9. Remove the Software Loader Card.
10. Re-insert the database card in the data card slot.
11. Power on the GTN Xi.
12. Power on the GMA 35.
13. Navigate to the System Information page.
14. Ensure the software version matches what was on the Software Loader Card.
5.4.1.4 GMA 35 Boot Block Loading
NOTE
The GMA 35 Boot Block Loader Card is separate from the GMA 35 Software Loader Card
and is required to update Boot Block software to v4.10. Refer to Section 3.3 for
instructions to create the GTN Software Loader Card.
1. Remove power from the GTN 7XX Xi.

2. Insert the GTN Boot Block Loader Card into the GTN 7XX Xi data card slot.
3. Ensure the GMA 35 circuit breaker is closed.
4. Power on the GTN 7XX Xi.
5. Select all GMA 35 Boot Block updates.
6. Touch the Update key and then touch OK.
7. Remove power from the GTN Xi and GMA 35.
8. Remove the Boot Block Loader Card.
9. Re-insert the database card in the data card slot.
10. Apply power to the GTN Xi, and then apply power to the GMA 35.
11. Navigate to the System Information page.
12. Select GMA 35.
13. Make sure the software version matches what was on the GTN Boot Block Loader Card.

Rev. 8 Page 5-11
5.4.1.5 GDL 69/69A Software Loading
Although the GTN Xi functions as a portal to install software for the GDL 69/69A, this STC does not
cover the installation of the GDL 69/69A or its software. Refer to GDL 69 Series TSO Installation Manual.
1. Remove power from the GTN Xi.
2. Insert the correct GDL 69/69A Loader Card into the SD card slot.
3. Ensure the GDL 69/69A circuit breaker is closed.
4. Power on the GTN 7XX Xi in Configuration mode.
5. Touch the Updates key to display the updates that are available.
6. Touch the GTN Software Updates key on the top edge of the display.
7. Select the update type GDL 69/69A software updates.
8. Touch Select All.
9. Touch the Update key.
10. Touch OK to allow the GTN Xi to update the GDL 69/69A.
11. When finished, remove power from the GTN Xi.
12. Remove the GDL 69/69A Software Loader Card.
13. Re-insert the database card in the SD card slot.
14. Cycle power on the GDL 69/69A and ensure the software was updated correctly by going to the
System Information page on the GTN Xi and selecting the GDL 69/69A.
5.4.2 System Information Page

The System Information page allows information
related to the system to be viewed, such as unit type,
serial number, system ID, and software versions. To
access the System Information page, touch the System
Information key from the Configuration mode home
page. System information for remote LRUs can also be
viewed from this page. To select a remote LRU, touch
the key at the top of the System Information page and
select an LRU from the menu. Select either the GTN Xi
or other LRU to view applicable LRU-specific system
information.
Figure 5-7 System Information Page

Rev. 8 Page 5-12
5.4.3 GTN Setup Page
To access the GTN Setup page, touch the GTN Setup key from the Configuration mode home page. The
Update Config Module key stores the current installation-specific configuration information in the
configuration module. Updating the configuration module is done automatically, so this key will not
normally need to be touched.
GTN 6XX Xi GTN 7XX Xi

Figure 5-8 GTN Setup Page

Rev. 8 Page 5-13
5.4.3.1 ARINC 429 Configuration Page
NOTE
Refer to Appendix C for approved third-party equipment interfaces to the GTN Xi. If the
equipment and interface selections described below are not listed in Appendix C, other
FAA approval is required for that interface.
NOTE
Refer to GTN Xi Series TSO Installation Manual for information about ARINC 429 labels
and other data formats.
NOTE
Only one ARINC 429 output port can be configured to a GAMA Format output at a time. If
more than one interfaced system requires a GAMA Format output, splice the GAMA 429
output wires from the GTN Xi into each system requiring GAMA Format information.
This page allows configuration of the ARINC 429 input

ports and the ARINC 429 output ports. Select the
correct speed for each port depending upon the installed
interfaced equipment by touching the speed key and
toggling the high or low selection. To access the
ARINC 429 Configuration page, touch the GTN Setup
key followed by the ARINC 429 key.
Select the correct speed and Data In/Out settings for
each port. The correct setting is dependent upon the
interfaced equipment. The data selections are described
in Table 5-2 and Table 5-3. Refer to Appendix C for the
correct data format selections for each piece of
interfaced equipment.
NOTE
Data selections not shown in the following
tables are not approved under this STC.
Figure 5-9 ARINC 429 Configuration

Page
Table 5-1 ARINC 429 Speed Selections

Selection Description
Low Standard low-speed ARINC 429 (nominally 12.5 kb per second)
High High-speed ARINC 429 (nominally 100 kb per second)

Rev. 8 Page 5-14
Table 5-2 ARINC 429 DATA IN Selections
GNS
Selection Description Notes
Equivalent
Off Off No unit(s) connected to this ARINC 429 input.
Altitude, temperature, and speed information from the
following Air Data systems:
Airdata Airdata [1]
• B&D 90004-003
• Bendix/King KDC281/481
Heading, altitude, temperature, and speed information
Airdata/AHRS Airdata/AHRS [1]
from Air Data/AHRS systems.
Data
Garmin GTX 330 This format is not used under this STC.
Concentrator
EFIS Format 1 EFIS This format is not used under this STC.
EFIS Format 2 EFIS/Airdata This format is not used under this STC.
EFIS Format 3 Honeywell EFIS This format is not used under this STC.
EFIS Format 4 Sandel EHSI This format is not used under this STC.
Fuel Format 3 N/A This format is not used under this STC.
GAD Format 1 Garmin GAD 42 This format is not used under this STC.
Selected course, magnetic heading, pressure altitude,
baro-corrected altitude, temperature, calibrated
GDU Format 1 Garmin GDU [2]
airspeed, and true airspeed information from the
Garmin GDU 620.
GDU Format 2 Garmin GDU This format is not used under this STC.
INS/IRU INS/IRU This format is not used under this STC.
Radio Altitude (AGL) Radio altimeter height above
Radio Altimeter N/A [4]
ground from radar altimeters.
TAWS VDI
N/A This format is not used under this STC.
Format 1
Traffic Format 1 Traffic Advisory Traffic information from the Garmin GTS 800. [3]
Traffic information from the following traffic systems:
Traffic Format 2 Traffic Advisory • Garmin GTS 820/825 [3]
• Garmin GTS 850/855
Traffic Format 3 Traffic Advisory Traffic information from the Skywatch HP SKY899. [3]
Traffic information from the following traffic systems:
Traffic Format 4 Traffic Advisory • Bendix/King KTA 870/970 [3]
• Bendix/King KMH 880/980

Rev. 8 Page 5-15
Table 5-2 ARINC 429 DATA IN Selections
GNS
Equivalent
Traffic information from the Avidyne TAS
Traffic Format 5 Traffic Advisory [3]
(Ryan 9900BX).
Traffic Format 6 Traffic Advisory Traffic information from the Sky 497 Skywatch.
Traffic Format 9 N/A This format is not used under this STC.
Traffic Format 10 N/A This format is not used under this STC.
Notes:
[1] For more information, refer to Appendix Section C.1.2.
Table 5-3 ARINC 429 DATA OUT Selections

GNS
Equivalent
Off Off No unit(s) connected to ARINC 429 output.
ARINC 429 ARINC 429 This format is not used under this STC.
ARINC 743A N/A This format is not used under this STC.
Filtered
VOR/LOC/GS
ARINC 429 data as defined by the General Aviation
Manufacturers’ Association (GAMA) General Aviation
GAMA Format 1 GAMA 429 Subset, 2nd Edition. The output data includes navigation [1]
and flight plan information to the following systems:
• Garmin GDU 620
ARINC 429 data as defined by the GAMA General
GAMA 429 Aviation Subset, 2nd Edition including GAMA Graphics
GAMA Format 2 Protocol ‘A’. This format outputs intersection symbols as [1]
Graphics
generic waypoint symbols. The output data includes
navigation and flight plan information.
GAMA 429
GAMA Format 3
w/Int Aviation Subset, 2nd Edition. The output data includes [1]
GAMA 429
GAMA Format 4
Pro Line 21 Aviation Subset, 2nd Edition. The output data includes [1]
GAMA 429
GAMA Format 5
Sextant Aviation Subset, 2nd Edition. The output data includes [1]

Rev. 8 Page 5-16
GAMA 429
GAMA Format 6
Bendix King Aviation Subset, 2nd Edition. The output data includes [1]
GAMA Format 7 N/A This format is not used under this STC.
GAMA Format 8 N/A This format is not used under this STC.
Garmin 429 N/A This format is not used under this STC.
Radar Format 1 N/A This format is not used under this STC.
Notes:
Table 5-4 ARINC 429 SDI Selections

RX: Accepts all ARINC 429 inputs
Common
TX: Generates all ARINC 429 outputs with SDI = 0
Number 1 (Pilot) long-range navigator
LNAV 1 RX: Accepts 429 inputs with SDI = 0 or 1
TX: Generates 429 outputs with SDI = 1
Number 2 (Copilot) long-range navigator
LNAV 2 RX: Accepts 429 inputs with SDI = 0 or 2
TX: Generates 429 outputs with SDI = 2

Rev. 8 Page 5-17
5.4.3.2 RS-232 Configuration Page
NOTE
Refer to Appendix C for third-party equipment interfaces to the GTN Xi approved under
this STC.
This page allows configuration of the RS-232 input

ports and RS-232 output ports. Select the RS-232
Configuration page from the GTN Setup page by
touching the RS-232 key. Change the inputs or outputs
to match the equipment that is interfaced to each
channel. Touch the key corresponding to the RS-232
channel and select the applicable input or output setting.
RS-232 input/output settings are described in Table 5-5
and Table 5-6. Refer to Appendix C for interfaced
equipment configuration information.
NOTE
Data selections not shown in the following
tables are not approved under this STC.
More RS-232 Setup (Forward ALT to GTX)

This provides a means to enable or disable the output of
pressure altitude to a Garmin transponder. For this page
to be selectable, a Garmin transponder must be
configured in the RS-232 inputs and outputs.
Figure 5-10 RS-232 Configuration Page
Table 5-5 RS-232 Channel Input Selections
GNS
Equivalent
Off Off No unit(s) connected to input of this channel.
Airdata
Shadin-adc Serial air data information from the Shadin ADC 200/2000. [3]
Format 1
Serial altitude data from the following units:
• Icarus Instruments 3000
Altitude • Sandia SAE5-35
Icarus-alt [3]
Format 1 • Garmin GTX 327 Transponder
• Trans-Cal Industries IA-RS232-X, SSD120
• ACK Technologies A-30 (Mod 8 and above)
Altitude
Shadin-alt Serial altitude data from the Shadin 8800T, 9000T, 9200T. [3]
Format 3
Connext
N/A This format is not used under this STC. [7]
Format 1
Connext
Format 2

Rev. 8 Page 5-18
GNS
Equivalent
Shadin- Serial air data and fuel flow information from the INSIGHT
FADC Format 1 [2]
FADC TAS 1000 Air Data Computer.
Serial fuel flow information from the following units:
Arnav/
Fuel Format 1 • ARNAV FC-10, FT-10 [3]
ei-fuel
• Electronics International FP-5L
Serial fuel flow information from the following units:
Fuel Format 2 Shadin-fuel • Shadin 91053XP, 91204XT(38)D, 91053, 912802-( ) [3]
Digital Fuel Management System
• JP Instruments EDM-700 Engine Monitor
GMA
N/A This input format supports the GMA 35 Audio Panel interface. [1] [7]
Format 1
GMA Format 2 N/A This format is not used under this STC. [7]
GNS Crossfill N/A This format is not used under this STC. [7]
GSR Format 1 N/A Select this format for the Garmin GSR 56. [6] [7]
GTX Mode C Select this format for the GTX 32/327 transponder #1.
N/A [4] [7]
#1 Provides status data and flight ID.
GTX Mode C Select this format for the GTX 32/327 transponder #2.
N/A [4] [7]
#2 Provides status data and flight ID.
Select this format for the GTX 33/33ES/328/330/330ES
GTX Mode S
N/A transponder #1. Provides status data, ICAO address, and [4] [7]
#1
flight ID.
Select this format for the GTX 33ES/330ES transponder #1
with GTX software v7.01 or later and for the GTX 3X5 for
GTX Mode S+
N/A AC 20-165 compliance. Provides status data, ICAO address, [4] [7]
#1
and flight ID. Additional approval is required for ADS-B Out
functions for the GTX.
Select this format for the GTX 33/33ES/328/330/330ES
GTX Mode S
N/A transponder #2. Provides status data, ICAO address, and [4] [7]
#2
flight ID.
with GTX software v7.01 or later and for the GTX 3X5 for AC
GTX Mode S+
N/A 20-165 compliance. Provides status data, ICAO address, and [4] [7]
#2
flight ID. Additional approval is required for ADS-B Out
functions for the GTX.
Select this format for the GTX 33/33ES/330/330ES
GTX w/TIS #1 N/A transponder #1. Provides status data, TIS data, ICAO [4] [7]
address, and flight ID.
with GTX software v7.01 or later or GTX 335/335R
GTX w/TIS+ #1 N/A transponder #1 for AC 20-165 compliance. Provides status [4] [7]
data, TIS data, ICAO address, and flight ID. Additional
approval is required for ADS-B Out functions for the GTX.

Rev. 8 Page 5-19
GNS
Equivalent
Select this format for the GTX 33/33ES/330/330ES
GTX
N/A transponder #2. Provides status data, TIS data, ICAO [4] [7]
w/TIS #2
address, and flight ID.
GTX
N/A transponder #2 for AC 20-165 compliance. Provides status [4] [7]
w/TIS+ #2
data, TIS data, ICAO address, and flight ID. Additional
approval is required for ADS-B Out functions for the GTX.
GTX TCAS II
#1
GTX TCAS II
#2
Lightning
WX-500 This format is not used under this STC.
Detector 1
MapMX
Format 2
Select this format for the GTX 330/330ES transponder #1.
Panel GTX w/ This provides groundspeed, GPS PVT, and pressure altitude [4] [7]
N/A
TIS #1 information to the transponder without controlling the [8]
transponder via the GTN Xi.
with GTX software v7.01 or later or GTX 335 transponder #1
Panel GTX [4] [7]
N/A for AC 20-165 compliance. Provides status data, TIS data,
w/TIS+ #1 [8]
ICAO address, and flight ID. Additional approval is required
for ADS-B Out functions for the GTX.
Select this format for the GTX 330/330ES transponder #2.
Panel GTX w/ This provides groundspeed, GPS PVT, and pressure altitude [4] [7]
N/A
TIS #2 information to the transponder without controlling the [8]
with GTX software v7.01 or later or GTX 335 transponder #2
Panel GTX for AC 20-165 compliance. Provides TIS data from the panel [4] [7]
N/A
w/TIS+ #2 mount GTX 330/330ES transponder without controlling the [8]
transponder via the GTN Xi. Additional approval is required
for ADS-B Out functions for the GTX.
Radio CTRL
Format 1
Ryan Select this format for the Ryan TCAD 9900B Series traffic
Traffic Format 7 [5] [7]
TCAD system.
Ryan Select this format for the Ryan TCAD 9900BX Series traffic
Traffic Format 8 [5] [7]
TCAD system.
Notes:

Rev. 8 Page 5-20
[7] This input setting automatically configures the corresponding channel output to the same setting.
[8] Provides TIS data from the panel mount GTX 330/330ES transponder without controlling
the transponder via the GTN Xi.
Table 5-6 RS-232 Channel Output Selections

GNS
Equivalent
Off Off No unit(s) connected to output of this channel.
ADS-B ADS-B This format is not used under this STC.
ADS-B+
Format 1
ADS-B+
Format 2
Aviation Provides serial position, GPS altitude, velocity, and navigation
Aviation [3]
Output 1 data to the Garmin GTX 327 Transponder.
Aviation Aviation no
This format is not used under this STC.
Output 2 alt
Connext Connext
This format is not used under this STC. [6]
Format 1 Format 1
Connext
Format 2
External HW
This format is not used under this STC.
EGPWS EGPWS
GMA
N/A Control of GMA 35 Audio Panel functions. [1] [6]
Format 1
GMA
Format 2
GNS Crossfill N/A This format is not used under this STC. [6]
GSR
N/A Select this format for the Garmin GSR 56. [5] [6]
Format 1
GTX Control of GTX 32/327 transponder #1 functions, pressure
N/A [3] [6]
Mode C #1 altitude data, and groundspeed data.
GTX Control of GTX 32/327 transponder #2 functions, pressure
N/A [3] [6]
Mode C #2 altitude data, and groundspeed data.
GTX Control of GTX 33/33ES/328/330/330ES transponder #1
N/A [3] [6]
Mode S #1 functions, pressure altitude data, and groundspeed data.

Rev. 8 Page 5-21
GNS
Equivalent
with GTX software v7.01 or later or GTX 3X5 transponder #1
GTX
N/A for AC 20-165 compliance. This format provides control of [3] [6]
Mode S+ #1
transponder functions, pressure altitude data, and
groundspeed data.
GTX Control of GTX 33/33ES/328/330/330ES transponder #2
N/A [3] [6]
Mode S #2 functions, pressure altitude data, and groundspeed data.
with GTX software v7.01 or later or GTX 3X5 transponder #2
GTX
N/A for AC 20-165 compliance. This format provides control of [3] [6]
Mode S+ #2
transponder functions, pressure altitude data, and
groundspeed data.
GTX Control of GTX 33/33ES/330/330ES transponder #1 functions,
N/A [3] [6]
w/TIS #1 pressure altitude data, groundspeed data, and TIS traffic.
GTX transponder #1 for AC 20-165 compliance. Provides status
N/A [3] [6]
w/TIS+ #1 data, TIS data, ICAO addresss, and flight ID. This format
provides control of transponder functions, pressure altitude
data, and groundspeed data.
GTX Control of GTX 33/33ES/330/330ES transponder #2 functions,
N/A [3] [6]
w/TIS #2 pressure altitude data, groundspeed data, and TIS traffic.
GTX transponder #2 for AC 20-165 compliance. Provides status
N/A [3] [6]
w/TIS+ #2 data, TIS data, ICAO addresss, and flight ID. This format
provides control of transponder functions, pressure altitude
data, and groundspeed data.
GTX TCAS II
#1
GTX TCAS II
#2
Lightning
WX-500 This format is not used under this STC. [6]
Detector 1
MapMX
MapMX Used for GDU 620 GPS In. [2]
Format 1
MapMX
Format 2
Select this format for the GTX 330/330ES transponder #1.This
Panel GTX provides groundspeed, GPS PVT, and pressure altitude
N/A [3] [6]
w/TIS #1 information to the transponder without controlling the

Rev. 8 Page 5-22
GNS
Equivalent
with software v7.01 or later or GTX 335 transponder #1 for
Panel GTX
N/A AC 20-165 compliance. Provides status data, TIS data, ICAO [3] [6]
w/TIS+ #1
address, and flight ID. This format provides control of TIS
traffic, pressure altitude data, and groundspeed data.
Select this format for the GTX 330/330ES transponder #2.This
Panel GTX provides groundspeed, GPS PVT, and pressure altitude
N/A [3] [6]
w/TIS #2 information to the transponder without controlling the
Panel GTX with software v7.01 or later or GTX 335 transponder #2 for
N/A [3] [6]
w/TIS+ #2 AC 20-165 compliance. This format provides control of TIS
traffic, pressure altitude data, and groundspeed data.
Radio CTRL
Format 1
Traffic Ryan Select this format for the Ryan TCAD 9900B Series traffic
[4] [6]
Format 7 TCAD system.
Traffic Ryan Select this format for the Ryan TCAD 9900BX Series traffic
[4] [6]
Format 8 TCAD system.
Notes:
[6] This output setting automatically configures the corresponding channel input to the same setting.

Rev. 8 Page 5-23
5.4.3.3 HSDB Port Utilization Page
The HSDB Port Utilization page is accessed from the GTN Setup page. Configure the GTN Xi Ethernet
ports connected to other Garmin equipment as Connected. Configure unconnected GTN Xi Ethernet ports
as Not Connected.
Figure 5-11 HSDB Port Utilization Page

Rev. 8 Page 5-24
5.4.3.4 Interfaced Equipment Configuration Page
To access the Interfaced Equipment configuration
page, touch the Interfaced Equipment key from the
GTN Setup page. This page configures which LRUs are
installed and interfaced to the GTN Xi. From the
available list of LRUs, select either Present or Not
Present. The Transponder Interfaced Equipment
configuration should be pre-populated when the RS-232
data format is selected for each RS-232 channel.
5.4.3.4.1 Cross-Side Navigator

In a single GTN Xi installation, select Not Present. In a
dual GTN Xi installation or GTN Xi-GTN 6XX/7XX
installation, select Present. Under settings, select GTN
if a GTN 6XX/7XX is installed or GTN Xi if a GTN Xi
is installed as the second navigator.
NOTE
In a dual GTN Xi installation, verify that both
units have “GTN Xi” configured. In a GTN Xi-
GTN 6XX/7XX installation, verify that the Figure 5-12 Interfaced Equipment Page
GTN Xi has “GTN” configured and that the
GTN 6XX/7XX has “GTN Xi” configured.
5.4.3.4.2 GDL 69/69A

Select either Present or Not Present. If Present, select either GDL 69 or GDL 69A based upon the installed
LRU.
5.4.3.4.3 GDL 88
Select either Present or Not Present. If Present, touch GDL 88 to select the external traffic source (None,
TCAD, or TAS/TCAS) connected to the GDL 88H and the GDL 88H ADS-B transmit state (Enabled or
Disabled). Configuration of these parameters enables portions of the GDL 88H user interface in Normal
mode and does not configure the GDL 88H. Refer to GDL 84H/88H Part 27 AML STC Installation
Manual for more information on configuring the GDL 88H.
5.4.3.4.4 ADS-B In Source
NOTE
For installations with multiple GTN Xi units, the same source must be selected on each
GTN Xi.
The ADS-B In source setting is used to specify which interfaced LRU is used to provide ADS-B In traffic/
FIS-B weather (if applicable) to the GTN Xi. The GTN Xi is only able to select one source for display.
Select Not Present, GDL 88, GTX #1, GTX #2, or GTS. If an active traffic source is connected to the
interfaced ADS-B In sensor, select the type. Available selections are None, TCAD, or TAS/TCAS.

Rev. 8 Page 5-25
5.4.3.4.5 GDU #1, GDU #2, GDU #3, GDU #4
This setting is used for the Database SYNC functionality. Set GDU #1 to Present if a G500H or
G500H TXi system is installed. Set GDU #2 to Present if a second G500H or G500H TXi display is
installed. Set the type(s) as GDU 620 for G500H or GDU TXi for G500H TXi. Set GDU #3 and GDU #4 to
Not Present.
5.4.3.4.6 Transponder #1 and Transponder #2

Select either GTX Mode C, GTX Mode S, or GTX Mode S+ based upon the interfaced transponder type. If
the type of transponder connected to the cross-side navigator is GTX w/TIS or GTX w/TIS+, select GTX
Mode S or GTX Mode S+, respectively. Note that if the correct data format is selected on the RS-232
Configuration page, this will be filled-in and grayed-out. Ensure the correct transponder type is displayed.
Also, the transponder should be configured as Present even if it is connected to the other installed GTN Xi.
This setting enables the user interface in Normal mode.
5.4.3.4.7 GSR 56
Select either Present or Not Present. In installations with multiple GTN Xi units, this selection must be the
same on all GTN Xi units.
5.4.3.5 Main Indicator (Analog) Configuration Page

Select the Main Indicator (Analog) Configuration
page from the GTN Setup page. This page allows you to
calibrate the OBS resolver, configure the CDI key,
selected course for GPS and VLOC, as well as the
V-Flag state. Configurable fields are described below.
OBS Resolver Calibration

To calibrate the OBS resolver, touch the Calibrate key
from the Main Indicator Configuration page. Next,
select 150˚ on the External CDI/HSI and then touch the
OK key, as prompted on the display. After the OBS
resolver is finished calibrating, the GTN Xi will display
“OBS Resolver Calibration Complete!” Touch OK after
the calibration is complete. Verify OBS operation by
checking the selected course displayed at the top of the
page is within 2° of the selected course at 30°
increments.
CDI Key
To enable or disable the CDI key, touch the key to the
right of CDI key to toggle between enabling and Figure 5-13 Main Indicator (Analog)
disabling the CDI key. Disabling the CDI key causes the Configuration Page
CDI source to always display as GPS and removes the
CDI key. This may be necessary for certain EFIS systems where navigation sensor selection must be
accomplished on the EFIS or its control panel.

Rev. 8 Page 5-26
Selected Course
Table 5-7 GPS Selected Course
Select if it is desired to allow a selected course input from the analog resolver
Allowed (Default)
or ARINC 429 for GPS operation in OBS mode.
Select to cause the GTN Xi to ignore a selected course input (either analog
Ignored
resolver or ARINC 429) for GPS operation in OBS mode.
Table 5-8 VLOC Selected Course

Select if it is desired to allow a selected course input from the analog resolver
Allowed (Default)
or ARINC 429 for VLOC operation in OBS mode.
Select if it is desired to ignore a selected course input such the VOR valid flag
Ignored is dependent only on a valid VOR signal, with lateral deviation calculated by
another display device.
V-Flag State
NOTE
The V-Flag declutter setting should only be set for indicators in which 300 mVDC is
sufficient to drive the vertical deviation bar out of view.
Figure 5-14 V-Flag State
Whenever vertical deviation is invalid, the vertical deviation bar is parked in the
maximum UP position and the vertical flag is removed from view, except in
either one of the following cases:
• The CDI is in VLOC mode and an ILS frequency is tuned
Declutter
• The CDI is in GPS mode and a GPS approach with vertical guidance is
active
In these cases, whenever the vertical deviation is invalid, the vertical deviation
bar parks in the centered position and the vertical flag is shown.
Whenever vertical deviation is invalid, the vertical deviation bar parks in the
Normal (Default)
centered position and the vertical flag is shown.

Rev. 8 Page 5-27
5.4.3.6 Lighting Configuration Page
This section outlines the basic method for configuring
the GTN Xi.
For GTN Xi installations that have a day/night switch
that meets the requirements specified in Figure B-14, it
is recommended to utilize the GTN Xi’s enhanced
lighting configuration functionality to better integrate
the GTN Xi with the cockpit lighting scheme. While
only one lighting source (lighting bus or photocell) may
be configured to control the display, GTN Xi lighting
can be configured for automatic, seamless transition
between dimmer bus and photocell control in response
to changing light conditions.
For enhanced lighting configuration, refer to
Section 5.4.3.7.
Photocell-Only Control
If an installation has no dimmer control such that the
photocell is to be used for control of display brightness
under all conditions (no dimmer input), then the
following procedure is recommended to set the lighting Figure 5-15 Lighting Configuration Page
curve. To configure Night mode, cover the windows of
the rotorcraft with blankets or other window covering and turn off as many lights in the hangar as needed
to ensure the cockpit is not exposed to any external lighting. For best results, the installer should remain in
the dark environment for up to 30 minutes to allow their eyes to adjust before configuring the avionics
lighting.
Begin configuring the unit, starting with the left-most vertex, configure the required brightness for the
current input value (indicated by a vertical white line) under full dark conditions. Repeat this step for the
remaining vertices by removing the window coverings in increments, exposing the cockpit to additional
external lighting and finally full sunlight on the display. Typical acceptable lighting curves have a fairly
flat slope at the lowest levels then become linear as input levels increase.
For detailed information on lighting controls, refer to Section 5.4.3.6 for normal lighting configuration and
Section 5.4.3.7 for enhanced lighting configuration.
From the GTN Setup page, touch the Lighting Configuration button. This page allows you to set display
parameters that affect the display backlight and key lighting brightness. Fields listed in Figure 5-15 are
adjusted separately for both the display and key lighting features. The display source can only be
configured to track the photocell or Lighting Bus #1. The display source cannot be configured to track
Lighting Bus #2.
Table 5-9 Display and Key Lighting Adjustable Fields
Field Description
Backlight or key lighting level is determined by the ambient light level as measured
Photocell
by the photocell on the GTN Xi.
Lighting Bus 1 Backlight or key levels track the Lighting Bus 1 levels.
If a second lighting bus is available, this selection is used to allow the keys to track
Lighting Bus 2
the Lighting Bus 2 levels.

Rev. 8 Page 5-28
Minimum Level
This sets the minimum brightness of the keys or display. Touch the Minimum Level key corresponding to
either the keys or the display to adjust the minimum brightness. The minimum brightness level can be
adjusted in a range from 0.05% to 100.00% when tracking the lighting bus, and from 0.14% to 100.00%
when tracking the photocell, with 100.00% being the maximum brightness level. The default minimum
display brightness level when tracking the lighting bus is 0.05%. The default minimum display brightness
level when tracking the photocell is 0.14%. The default minimum bezel key brightness level is 0.00%.
5.4.3.6.1 Photocell Configuration Page

The Photocell Configuration page is reached by
touching the Configure Photocell button on the
Lighting Configuration page. This page allows
configuration of the photocell parameters.
Response Time
This sets the speed with which the key or display
brightness responds to the input level (bus voltage or
ambient light) changes. The higher the number, the
slower the display responds. This field has a range of
2 to 7 seconds and is set to 2 seconds as a default value.
Slope
This sets the sensitivity the brightness of the display or
keys has to changes in the input level. Adjusting the
slope higher will result in a brighter display for a given
increase in the input level. This field has a range of 0 to
100 and is set to 50 as the default setting.
Offset Figure 5-16 Photocell Configuration

This adjusts the lighting level up or down for any given Page
input level. This field has a range of 0 to 99 and is set to
50 as a default value. This may also be used to match lighting curves with other equipment in the panel.
Key Backlight Cutoff

This parameter configures the point at which key backlighting is switched off in bright light. For example,
a value of 70% results in the key backlights being turned off at photocell source input levels above 70%.
This field has a range of 0% to 100% and is set to 80% as the default setting.
Photocell Transition
This configuration item sets the lighting bus input level where the lighting bus input will be ignored and
the photocell will be used to control the GTN Xi display backlight. The photocell transition is a percentage
of the maximum lighting bus input level. This field has a range of 5 to 50 and is set to 25 as the default
setting.

Rev. 8 Page 5-29
5.4.3.6.2 Lighting Bus Configuration Page
The Lighting Bus Configuration page offers the same Response Time, Slope, and Offset adjustments as
described in Section 5.4.3.6.1.
Figure 5-17 Lighting Bus Configuration Page
Lighting Bus Source Voltage

At the time of publication, only the 28VDC lighting bus source voltage is functional. If a lower voltage is
needed for lighting configuration, use Enhanced Lighting or select Photocell to drive the display/keys
lighting.

Rev. 8 Page 5-30
5.4.3.7 Enhanced Lighting Page
The following sections describe the preferred lighting
configuration method when the GTN Xi is enabled for
enhanced lighting.
NOTE
The Enhanced Lighting Configuration page is
displayed in lieu of the Lighting Configuration
page only if Enhanced Lighting is enabled on
the Main System Configuration page.
Enhanced lighting provides the installer the ability to

configure customized day and night lighting curves.
These custom curves provide improved resolution for
the installer to match the GTN Xi lighting to other
avionics in the cockpit.
From the GTN Setup page, touch the Enhanced
Lighting Configuration button. This page allows you
to set display parameters that affect the display
backlight and key lighting brightness. Fields listed
under the menus described in Table 5-10 are adjusted
Figure 5-18 Enhanced Lighting
separately for both the display and key lighting features.
Configuration Page
The display source can only be configured to track the
photocell or Lighting Bus #1. The display source cannot be configured to track Lighting Bus #2.
Table 5-10 Enhanced Lighting Configuration Sub-Pages
Field Description
Source Settings This selection contains display and key lighting source configuration items.
Day Mode Operation Contains Day mode display and backlight curve configuration items.
Night Mode Operation Contains Night mode display and backlight curve configuration items.

Rev. 8 Page 5-31
5.4.3.7.1 Source Settings Page
The Source Settings configuration page is reached by
touching the Source Settings button on the Enhanced
Lighting Configuration page. This page allows
configuration of the lighting bus and photocell
parameters listed below.
Display Source
This sets the source input for the display backlight. This
may be set to Photocell or Lighting Bus 1. If configured
for Photocell, the photocell sensor will be used to
provide the lighting input level for both day and night
curves. The display source may alternatively be
configured for a dimmer lighting bus.
Keys Source
This sets the source input for the keys backlight. This
may be set to Photocell, Lighting Bus 1, or Lighting Bus
2 (if display source is configured for Lighting Bus 1). If
configured for Photocell, the photocell sensor will be
used to provide the lighting input level for day and night
curves. The keys source may alternatively be Figure 5-19 Source Settings Page
configured for a dimmer lighting bus.
Response Time
This sets the speed that the key or display brightness responds to the input level (bus voltage or ambient
light) changes. The higher the number, the slower the display responds. This field has a range of
2 to 7 seconds and is set to 2 seconds as a default value.
Lighting Bus 1/2

At the time of publication, only the 28 VDC lighting bus source voltage is functional. If a lower voltage is
needed for lighting configuration, use Enhanced Lighting or select Photocell to drive the display/keys
lighting. If a lower DC voltage must be configured, move vertex 4 to the percentage input that is needed
(i.e., 50% for a 14 VDC bus, 18% for 5 VDC). Set the remaining vertices accordingly.

Rev. 8 Page 5-32
5.4.3.7.2 Day/Night Mode Operation Page
The Day Mode Operation (or Night Mode Operation)
configuration page is reached by touching the Day
Mode Operation button on the Enhanced Lighting
Configuration page, shown in Figure . This page allows
configuration of the photocell transition, key backlight
cutoff, and curve parameters listed below.
Photocell Transition
When a lighting bus is used to control the lighting of the
display, this parameter sets the point on the lighting bus
control below which the display brightness tracks the
GTN Xi’s photocell. This field has a range of 5 to 50
and is set to 25 as the default setting. The transition
point is depicted as a purple vertical line on the Display
Curve Configuration page
Key Backlight Cutoff

This parameter configures the point that key
backlighting is switched off in bright light. For
example, a value of 70% results in the key backlights
being turned off at photocell source input levels above Figure 5-20 Day Mode Operation Page
70%. This field has a range of 0% to 100% and is set to
80% as the default setting. The key backlight cutoff is depicted as a purple vertical line on the Keys Curve
Configuration page.
Minimum Level
This sets the minimum brightness of the keys or display. Touch the Minimum Level key corresponding to
either the keys or the display to adjust the minimum brightness. The minimum brightness level can be
adjusted in a range from 0.05% to 100.00% when tracking the lighting bus, and from 0.14% to 100.00%
when tracking the photocell, with 100.00% being the maximum brightness level. The default minimum
display brightness level when tracking the lighting bus is 0.05%. The default minimum display brightness
level when tracking the photocell is 0.14%. The default minimum bezel key brightness level is 0.00%.
Maximum Level
This sets the maximum brightness level for the lighting curve. Values may be between the range 20 and
100.

Rev. 8 Page 5-33
5.4.3.7.2.1 Configure Curve Page
Display or key lighting curves may be customized on
the Configure Curve pages, an example of which is
shown in Figure 5-21.
Vertices
Each of the four curve vertices can be adjusted by
touching and dragging or by touching a the
corresponding key and adjusting axis values, as shown
in Figure 5-22. A vertex may not be adjusted beyond
the positions of its adjacent vertices on either axis or
beyond the limits of either axis.
Swap Curves
This selection item is only available when the lighting
source is configured for Lighting Bus 1 or Lightning
Bus 2. This selection transitions between the source
curve and the photocell curve.
Source Curve
If the Display or Keys source is set to Lighting Bus 1 or Figure 5-21 Configure Curve Page
Lighting Bus 2, then the corresponding Source Curve (Day Mode Display Curve Shown)
graph shows display output as a function of lighting bus
input while lighting bus input level remains above the photocell transition percentage.
If the Display or Keys source is set to Photocell, then the corresponding Source Curve graph shows display
output as a function of photocell input.
Photocell Curve
If the Display or Keys source is set to Lighting Bus 1 or
Lighting Bus 2, then the corresponding Photocell Curve
graph shows display output as a function of photocell
input when lighting bus input level falls below the
photocell transition percentage or the connected
lighting bus fails.
Bezel Color (NVIS Units Only)

This sets the backlight color for the Home and Direct-
To keys and the knobs. The selections are White or
Green for both Day and Night mode. The default is
Green.
Figure 5-22 Vertex Adjustment

Rev. 8 Page 5-34
5.4.3.7.3 Day Lighting Curve Configuration Procedure
NOTE
Garmin recommends configuring the photocell curve such that the display brightness level
reaches 100% output prior to a 100% photocell input level.
To configure the GTN Xi Day Lighting curve, complete the following procedure. When the configuration
procedure has been completed, the GTN Xi must be viewable under all anticipated lighting conditions
including the following:
• In direct sunlight
• Bright light conditions with the GTN Xi photocell in heavy shadow (e.g., flying directly
toward a setting sun)
1. Set the Day/Night Switch to Day.
3. Touch the GTN Setup key.
4. Touch the Enhanced Lighting key.
5. Touch the Source Settings key.
6. Set Display Source and Keys Source to Lighting Bus 1 or Lighting Bus 2, depending on the
rotorcraft installation.
7. Touch the Back key.
8. Touch the Day Mode Operation key.
9. Set the photocell transition point to any value between 5% and 50%. This permits the photocell
control of display brightness when the dimmer switch is in the OFF position or when photocell
input voltage falls below the photocell transition level.
10. To ensure the input level is below the transition level, set the dimmer to OFF or lowest level.
11. Touch the Configure Curve key in the Display column.
12. While exposing the panel to bright lights or sunlight, set the first vertex.
13. Set the remainder of the vertices while progressively shading the interior of the rotorcraft by
shadowing the cockpit with blankets or moving the rotorcraft into the hangar in stages. A linear
curve typically works well for Day mode.
14. Touch the Back key.
15. Repeat steps 11-13 for the keys.
Night Lighting Curve Configuration

To configure Night mode, cover the windows of the rotorcraft with blankets or other window covering and
turn off as many lights in the hangar as needed to ensure the cockpit is not exposed to any external lighting.
For Night mode, it is recommended to set the photocell transition point to the minimum value of 5% and to
set the maximum brightness value to a value of 75% or below. Vary the dimmer switch through its range
and adjust the lighting curve to match the brightness of the GTN Xi display as closely to the lighting levels
of other avionics/lights in the cockpit as possible. It is recommended that most of the vertices be used to
provide adjustment of the display at the lowest lighting levels.
Turn the dimmer switch to OFF to configure the photocell.
• For any anticipated lighting condition, the GTN Xi display is viewable when the dimmer is set to a
level that results in other equipment on the same lighting bus being viewable

Rev. 8 Page 5-35
• In full dark conditions, the transition from the dimmer control to the photocell does not result in a
sudden increase in brightness
• The maximum brightness setting on the dimmer switch will result in a display brightness sufficient
to be seen in sunlight
5.4.3.7.4 Night Lighting Curve Configuration Procedure
NOTE
To allow their eyes to adjust before configuring the avionics lighting, the installer should
remain in the dark environment for up to 30 minutes.
NOTE
Garmin recommends the three input/output vertices be used to govern display output
levels at the lower end of the lighting curve.
To configure the lighting curve for Night mode, complete the following procedure. When the configuration
procedure has been completed, the GTN Xi must be viewable under all anticipated lighting conditions
including the following:
• The GTN Xi display must be viewable in any instrument panel and/or flight deck cabin
lighting level
• In full dark conditions, transition from dimmer control to photocell control does not result in a
sudden increase in GTN Xi display brightness
• The maximum brightness setting of the dimmer switch will allow the GTN Xi display to be
visible in sunlight
1. Set the Day/Night switch to Night.
4. Touch the Enhanced Lighting key.
5. Touch the Night Mode Operation key.
6. Touch the Photocell Transition key
7. Set the Photocell Transition percentage to 5%.
8. In the Display column, touch the Minimum Level key and set the minimum lighting percentage.
9. In the Keys column, touch the Minimum Level key and set the minimum lighting percentage.
10. In the Display column, touch the Maximum Level key and set the maximum lighting percentage
to 75% or less.
11. In the Keys column, touch the Maximum Level key and set the maximum lighting percentage to
75% or less.
12. Minimize cockpit ambient lighting by covering the rotorcraft windows and turning off as many
nearby lights as possible.
13. In the Display column, touch the Configure Curve key.
14. Vary the instrument panel dimmer switch through its range from low to high.
15. Adjust the Source Curve to match instrument panel lighting levels as closely as possible.
16. Turn the instrument panel dimmer switch OFF. If necessary, remove power from the lighting bus.
17. Touch the Swap Curves key.

Rev. 8 Page 5-36
18. Adjust the photocell curve vertices while incrementally increasing ambient light to full daylight.
19. Repeat steps 13 through 19 for the Keys column.
5.4.3.7.5 Photocell-Only Configuration Procedure

If a GTN Xi is installed in an rotorcraft with no dimmer control, then the display must be configured for
photocell control under all lighting conditions. Complete the following procedure to configure the GTN Xi
for photocell-only control. When photocell-only configuration has been completed, the GTN Xi display
must still comply with the display requirements listed in Section 5.4.3.7.3 and Section 5.4.3.7.4.
1. On the Source Settings page, set the Display Source and Keys Source to Photocell.
2. Perform the Day mode configuration procedure in Section 5.4.3.7.3, disregarding the photocell
transition guidance.
3. Perform the Night mode configuration procedure in Section 5.4.3.7.4, disregarding the photocell
transition guidance.
5.4.3.8 Audio Configuration Page

The Audio Configuration page allows the adjustment of alert audio volume.
Adjust Alert Volume by touching the arrows to decrease or increase the volume accordingly. Volume is
displayed as a percentage of maximum volume, with 0% being muted and 100% being maximum volume.
The selected volume can be checked by selecting Altitude, Terrain, Terrain (Quiet), or Test Tone in the
Test Sound field and touching the triangle to the right of the key. Refer to Section 6.1.7 for the HTAWS
audio check procedure.
Figure 5-23 Audio Configuration Page
5.4.3.8.1 Voice Command Configuration

Voice Commands are not approved under this STC. These settings must remain configured Off.

Rev. 8 Page 5-37
5.4.3.9 Traffic Configuration Page
The Traffic Configuration page allows the external
control to be configured for each specific installation.
Access the Traffic Configuration page from the GTN
Setup page.
Configure the traffic intruder symbol color. If the
GTN Xi is installed with other traffic displays, choose
the appropriate symbol color (White or Cyan) to
maintain cockpit consistency.
Configure the GTN Xi control of the traffic system. If
the GTN Xi is used to control the traffic system, select
Yes. If a separate display device is used to control the
traffic system, select No. The default selection is No.
If the GTN Xi is interfaced to the Avidyne TAS (Ryan
9900BX) and configured to ARINC 429 Traffic Format
5, this setting must be configured to No. The Avidyne
TAS does not include provisions for the necessary
discrete signals to be controlled by the GTN Xi.
If the GTN Xi is connected to a GDL 88H that is
interfaced with a TCAD system, the option to configure Figure 5-24 Traffic Configuration Page
GTN Control of the Traffic System is available. If the
GTN Xi is used to control the traffic system, select Yes. If a separate display device is used to control the
traffic system, select No.

Rev. 8 Page 5-38
5.4.3.10 Main System Configuration Page
NOTE
Airframe Type must be set to Rotorcraft before beginning any other GTN Xi configuration.
This page displays miscellaneous configuration options.

Touch Main System from the GTN Setup page.
Airframe Type
Set Airframe Type from the default Fixed-Wing to
Rotorcraft. This setting will make the necessary
configuration settings available throughout the
configuration process, as well as change the ownship
icon to rotorcraft.
Air/Ground Threshold
The air/ground threshold is the groundspeed that the
GTN Xi transitions from a ground state to an airborne
state, and vice versa. To adjust the air/ground threshold,
touch the key to the right and enter a value. This field
has a range of 0 to 99 knots and is set to 30 knots as a
default value. Set this to a value between 1 and 5 knots.
Air/Ground Discrete
For GTN Xi installations with software v20.30 or later, Figure 5-25 Main System Configuration
the air/ground discrete must connected to a squat/ Page
collective switch to signal when the helicopter is
airborne. This is to prevent the GTN Xi from automatically power cycling if the pilot takes off during
database updates.
The Air/Ground discrete is Active-Low, and can be configured to interpret if the rotorcraft is airborne or on
the ground based upon whether the input is grounded or open. If it is desired for the Air/Ground state to be
airborne when the squat switch input is grounded, then toggle the Air/Ground discrete key to Active for
Airborne. If it is desired for the Air/Ground state to be airborne when the squat switch input is open, then
toggle the Air/Ground discrete key to Active for Ground. For installations in which no input is provided for
the Air/Ground discrete, this setting must be set to Active for Airborne. The default configuration is Active
for Airborne.
Table 5-11 Air/Ground Discrete Selections
GTN Xi
AIR/GROUND Discrete Configuration AIR/GROUND Input State
AIR/GROUND Status
Open Airborne
Configured Active for Ground
Grounded On-Ground
Open On-Ground
Configured Active for Airborne (Default)
Grounded Airborne

Rev. 8 Page 5-39
GPS Antenna Height Above Ground
This configures the height of the GPS antenna above ground level while the rotorcraft is sitting on the
ground. Before proceeding, measure the GPS antenna vertical offset (to the nearest tenth of a foot), as
shown in Figure 5-26. Enter the measured value by touching the key and typing the measured value into
the keypad on the display. This field has a range of 0.0 to 99.9 feet.
Figure 5-26 Measurement of GPS Antenna Vertical Offset
Fuel Type
Select the appropriate fuel type for the installation.
Table 5-12 Fuel Type Selections

AV gas (Default) The rotorcraft burns Aviation gas (5.8 lbs/gal.)
Jet A The rotorcraft burns Jet A or Jet A-1 fuel (6.7 lbs/gal.)
Jet B The rotorcraft burns Jet B (JP-4) fuel (6.5 lbs/gal.)
Synchro Heading Input

When installing a GTN 7XX Xi, set Synchro Heading Input to Connected or Not Connected.
Table 5-13 Synchro Heading Input Selections (GTN 7XX Xi Only)
Connected A Synchro heading source is connected to the GTN 7XX Xi.
Not Connected (Default) A Synchro heading source is not connected to the GTN 7XX Xi.
GPS Select
This setting must be set to Auto.
Heading Source Input

If a nuisance heading lost message appears a few minutes after power-up, and no heading source is present,
configure this setting to Not Connected. This setting defaults to Connected.
Table 5-14 Heading Source Input Selections
Connected (Default) A heading source is connected to the GTN Xi.

Not Connected A heading source is not connected to the GTN Xi.

Rev. 8 Page 5-40
Radio Altimeter Input
Select Connected if a radar altimeter will interface directly or indirectly with the GTN Xi. This setting
defaults to Not Connected.
Table 5-15 Radar Altimeter Input Selections
Connected A radar altimeter source is connected to the GTN Xi.

Not Connected (Default) A radar altimeter source is not connected to the GTN Xi.
Altitude Source Input

If a nuisance altitude source lost message appears a few minutes after power-up, and no pressure altitude
source is present, configure this setting to Not Connected. This setting defaults to Connected.
Table 5-16 Altitude Source Input Selections
Connected (Default) A pressure altitude source is connected to the GTN Xi.

Not Connected A pressure altitude source is not connected to the GTN Xi.
Enhanced Lighting Mode

Enabling this feature will change the GTN Setup menu item from Lighting to Enhanced Lighting.
Enhanced Lighting allows the configuration of separate day/night curves for the backlight and keys. This
setting defaults to Disabled.
Table 5-17 Enhanced Lighting Mode Selections

Disabled (Default) Basic lighting configuration options enabled.

Enabled Customizable lighting curves and day/night curve configuration allowed.
Pilot Position
The pilot position setting allows the pilot seating position in the cockpit to be configured for the purposes
of 3D audio.
Table 5-18 Pilot Position Selections
Right (Default) For rotorcraft which the pilot sits in the right seat, this selection is appropriate.
Left For rotorcraft which the pilot sits in the left seat, this selection is appropriate.

Rev. 8 Page 5-41
Crossfill Status Alert
This setting, when enabled, configures the GTN Xi to provide a message when crossfill is not selected in
Normal mode. This setting defaults to Disabled.
Table 5-19 Crossfill Status Alert Selections
Disabled (Default) A message will not be provided when Crossfill is disabled.

Enabled A message will be provided when Crossfill is disabled.
System ID
The system ID setting is used to identify GTN Xi #2 in an installation with more than one GTN Xi. This
input must be set to GTN 2 on the second GTN Xi. This setting will default to GTN 1.
NOTE
When replacing a GTN 6XX/7XX with software earlier than v5.00 with a GTN Xi, this
setting will need to be configured. This setting replaces the SYSTEM ID PROGRAM
discrete.
Database SYNC
The Database SYNC setting controls the ability of the GTN Xi to synchronize databases with other LRUs
when a suitable data card is inserted.
Table 5-20 Database SYNC Selections
Database SYNC is disabled and databases will not be sent or received from this
Disabled
GTN Xi.
Database SYNC is enabled and databases will be sent and received from this
Enabled
GTN Xi when a data card is inserted that supports Database SYNC.
Pilot Control (Default) Database SYNC is controlled by a pilot configurable setting.
Airspace Labels
The airspace label setting determines if altitude labels will display on the moving map display. This feature
must be disabled per this STC.
Table 5-21 Airspace Labels Selections

Enabled (Default) Altitude labels will display on the main map page.
Disabled Altitude labels will not display on the main map page.

Rev. 8 Page 5-42
Checklist Page Title
The title of the Checklist page is changed by this setting.
Table 5-22 Checklist Page Title Selections

Checklist (Default) The Checklist page is titled “Checklist.”

Task List The Checklist page is titled “Task List.”
Blackout Mode
This feature must be disabled per this STC. This Blackout mode setting is used to enable the Blackout
Mode page shortcut option for pilot selection in Normal mode. Blackout mode allows the pilot to blackout
the map.
Table 5-23 Blackout Mode Selections

Enabled Blackout mode user field shortcut is available for pilot selection.
Disabled (Default) Blackout mode is not available.
External Flight Plan

This setting, when enabled, allows the active flight plan to be edited by an external touchscreen display.
The External Flight Plan setting is not approved under this STC. Select Disabled.
Table 5-24 External Flight Plan Selections

Enabled An external touchscreen display can make changes to the active flight plan.
Disabled (Default) External flight plan modification is disabled.
Remote Database Confirmation

This setting enables the confirmation of the remote side GTN Xi databases. Select Disabled when a Flight
Stream 510 is installed in a GTN Xi.
Table 5-25 Remote Database Confirmation Selections

Enabled Allows the confirmation of remote side GTN Xi databases on startup.

The confirmation of remote side GTN Xi databases cannot be performed from
Disabled (Default)
the primary GTN Xi.

Rev. 8 Page 5-43
Remote Radio Control (Software v20.10 or Later)
When installed in tandem cockpits, the Remote Radio Control setting will allow the pilot to send COM/
NAV frequencies from one GTN Xi to the other GTN Xi.
Table 5-26 Remote Radio Control Selections

None (Default) No cross-side control of COM 1/2 and NAV 1/2.

COM Allows tuning of COM 1/2 from another GTN Xi.
COM/NAV Allows tuning of COM 1/2 and NAV 1/2 from another GTN Xi.
Self-Test Page (Software v20.30 or Later)

This setting, when enabled, shows the Self-Test page upon startup of the unit. The options are Enabled
(default) or Disabled.
100Mb Ethernet (Software v20.30 or Later)

This setting, when enabled, allows fast syncing of databases between GTN Xi and a G500H TXi (SW
v3.50 or later) or GI 275 (SW v2.60 or later) while on-ground. It is automatically disabled while airborne.
The options are Enabled (default) and Disabled.
NOTE
Enablement of 100Mb Ethernet is only approved in installations that have an air/ground
determination switch installed and configured per Table 5-11.

Rev. 8 Page 5-44
5.4.3.11 COM Configuration Page (GTN 635Xi/650Xi/750Xi Only)
Touch the COM Configuration key from the GTN
Setup page. These values are set at the factory and
rarely require calibration.
To enable or disable the COM radio, touch the key to
toggle between Enabled and Disabled. The COM radio
defaults to the enabled state.
The GTN Xi COM receiver squelch is intended to
silence the received audio when no signal above a
specific power threshold is detected. Two methods of
measuring the signal power are used: RX Squelch and
Carrier Squelch
COM RX Squelch
RX Squelch is the primary squelch and is the most
sensitive. It functions by calculating the ratio of the
signal power to the background noise power, and
comparing this to the set threshold.
If other rotorcraft equipment is generating noise that
consists of pure tones, those may be interpreted as
Figure 5-27 COM Configuration Page
signals for this calculation, and result in squelch breaks
when the corresponding channel is selected. In this case the RX Squelch adjust percentage should be
increased or the noise source should be isolated until the squelch breaks no longer occur.
Table 5-27 RX Squelch Mode Selections

Basic Applies a COM RX squelch value to all frequencies.
The COM RX Squelch values can be set for low, mid, and high frequencies
Advanced
independently for 25 kHz and 8.33 kHz spacing.
Basic COM RX Squelch Mode configures the RX squelch threshold for all frequencies. The default setting
is 57%. 0% is the most sensitive (i.e., the weakest signal level necessary to break squelch). Decreasing the
value will allow the squelch to be broken with low signal levels. Increasing the value will require higher
signal levels to break squelch.
For Advanced COM Squelch Mode, touch the Configure key to open the Advanced Com RX Squelch
page. The squelch threshold values can be set for Low, Mid, and High frequencies. The squelch thresholds
are adjustable in the range of 0 to 100. Decreasing the value will allow the squelch to be broken with low
signal levels. Increasing the value will require higher signal levels to break squelch. The squelch threshold
value is linearly interpolated for frequencies between the Low (118.000 MHz), Mid (127.000 MHz), and
High (136.975 MHz for 25 kHZ spacing or 136.990 MHz for 8.33 kHz spacing) frequency values. The
COM RX squelch values are adjusted separately for 25 kHz and 8.33 kHz spacing.

Rev. 8 Page 5-45
Table 5-28 lists approximate levels when the auto squelch opens and closes for various RX Squelch
settings. GTN Xi installations will generally use a setting of 57 or higher.
Table 5-28 COM RX Squelch Levels

COM RF Squelch Carrier Squelch Open
Setting [1] Approximation
0 -107.0 dBm
25 -103.5 dBm
50 -99.0 dBm [2]
75 -96.5 dBm
100 -93.0 dBm
Notes:
[1] The COM RX Squelch range (0-100) is a linear response.
[2] Auto squelch opens at approximately -99 dBm is a typical value for many installations.
COM Carrier Squelch

Carrier Squelch is the secondary squelch and is much less sensitive. It functions by calculating the signal
power only, and comparing this to the set threshold.
If other equipment is generating noise of a more random nature (wideband), the combined power may
cause squelch breaks on many channels. In this case the Carrier Squelch adjust percentage should be
increased or the noise source should be isolated until the squelch breaks no longer occur.
Table 5-29 Carrier Squelch Selections

Basic Applies a COM carrier squelch value of 0 to 25 kHz and 8.33 kHz spacing.
Advanced Allows the adjustment of COM carrier squelch values.
Allows the adjustment of COM carrier squelch values for 25 kHz and 8.33 kHz
Spacing
spacing separately.
The COM carrier squelch is adjustable in the range of 0 to 100. The default value is
Squelch 0. Decreasing the value allows the carrier squelch to be broken with low signal
levels. Increasing the value requires higher signal levels to break carrier squelch.
Table 5-30 lists approximate levels when the carrier squelch opens for various carrier squelch settings.
Table 5-30 COM Carrier Squelch Levels

COM RF Squelch Carrier Squelch Open
Setting [1] Approximation
0 -87.0 dBm
25 -84.5 dBm
50 -82.0 dBm
75 -79.5 dBm
100 -77.0 dBm
Notes:
[1] The COM carrier squelch range (0-100) is a linear response.

Rev. 8 Page 5-46
Mic 1 Gain
The MIC 1 Gain can be adjusted from -12 dB to +30 dB in 6 dB increments. The default is +12 dB. For
microphones with low signal levels, this can be adjusted up to increase the signal strength. For
microphones with high signal levels, this can be adjusted down to decrease the signal strength.
Sidetone Source
NOTE
The COM sidetone settings are only applicable when the audio panel is not generating the
sidetone audio.
The Sidetone Source setting is used to select the source of the sidetone audio that the crew hears while
transmitting on the COM.
Table 5-31 COM Sidetone Source Selections

The COM sidetone audio that the pilot hears is the demodulated audio signal
External (Default)
that is actually going to the antenna to be transmitted.
The COM sidetone audio that the pilot hears is the audio signal from the
Internal
headset microphone before it is filtered for transmission.
Sidetone Volume
This parameter sets the audio sidetone output level. Sidetone refers to the audio spoken into the COM
microphone. This setting only affects the volume of the sidetone for the GTN XI COM during PTT. This
value may be set to values between 0.0 dB and 63.0 dB in 0.5 dB increments. The default is 17.5 dB. The
higher the setting, the louder the sidetone will be. The sidetone is only generated in the COM headset (low
level) audio output.
Sidetone Pilot Control

The Sidetone Pilot Control setting is used to enable pilot adjustment of the sidetone audio volume. If
enabled, the pilot can also link the COM and sidetone volumes.
Table 5-32 Sidetone Pilot Control Settings

Settings Description
Enabled (Default) The pilot can adjust the sidetone audio volume or link it to the COM volume.
Disabled The sidetone audio volume is fixed based on the Sidetone Volume setting.
Headphone Volume (Software v20.30 or Later)

This parameter sets the audio headphone output level. Ensure the headphone volume is set to a level that
will be audible in the helicopter operating conditions.

Rev. 8 Page 5-47
5.4.3.12 VOR/LOC/GS Configuration Page (GTN 650Xi/750Xi Only)
Touch the VOR/LOC/GS key from the GTN Setup
page. The VOR/LOC/GS Configuration page provides
the following:
• Verification of CDI outputs from the VOR/
LOC/GS receiver
• Verification of OBS resolver input to the VOR
receiver
• Selection of DME tuning data format.
NAV Radio
To enable or disable the NAV radio, touch the key to
toggle between Enabled and Disabled. The NAV radio
defaults to the enabled state.
Calibrate OBS Resolver

To calibrate the OBS resolver, touch the Calibrate key
from the VOR/LOC/GS Configuration page. Next,
select 150˚ on the external CDI/HSI, then touch the OK
key when prompted by the display. Touch OK after
calibration is complete. Verify OBS operation by Figure 5-28 VOR/LOC/GS Configuration
checking the selected course displayed at the top of the Page
page is within 2° of the selected course.
ARINC 429 Configuration

Table 5-33 ARINC 429 Configuration Speed (TX)
Low Standard low-speed ARINC 429 (nominally 12.5 Kb per second)
High High-speed ARINC 429 (nominally 100 Kb per second)
Table 5-34 SDI

Common Generates all 429 outputs with SDI = 0
VOR/ILS 1 Number 1 (Pilot) VOR/ILS Receiver TX: Generates 429 outputs with SDI = 1
VOR/ILS 2 Number 2 (Copilot) VOR/ILS Receiver TX: Generates 429 outputs with SDI = 2
DME Mode/DME Channel Mode

Interface to a DME is not covered under this STC.
Filtered LOC/GS
The LOC/GS filter can be enabled to address rotor modulation issues that may occur on some airframes.
This configuration setting is disabled by default. Refer to Section 6.3.4 to determine if this configuration
should be enabled.
NAV Radio Display Timeout

This setting must be set to the default Enabled per this STC. When enabled, selection of the NAV radio on
a GTN 650Xi/750Xi will revert to the COM radio after 10 seconds.

Rev. 8 Page 5-48
5.4.3.13 ARINC 708
External weather radars are not approved under this STC.
5.4.3.14 Discrete Configuration Page

Touch the Discretes Configuration key from the GTN
Setup page. The Discrete Configuration page allows
for customized pin assignment of discrete inputs/
outputs on the P1001, P1002, and P1005 connectors
(GTN 7XX Xi only).
To reassign a new discrete function to a particular pin,
select the label and choose the function from the drop-
down menu.
If at any time the user wishes to return to the default
discrete pin configuration, touch Set to Default on the
menu bar. The user will be prompted with a message
stating the configuration will be overwritten with the
default settings. Touch OK and the settings will be
returned to the default configuration values; otherwise,
touch Cancel.
Table 5-35 lists the configurable discrete functions
available in addition to the functions available under the
default configuration.
Figure 5-29 Discrete Configuration Page
Table 5-35 Configurable Discrete Functions

Discrete Name Associated Function
RP Mode (input) HTAWS
Alert Acknowledge (input) HTAWS
Day/Night (input) Enhanced Lighting Configuration
Mark on Target, this momentary discrete input may be used to create
Mark On Target (input)
a target waypoint at the user’s current latitude/longitude.
Missed Approach, this momentary discrete input may be used to
activate the missed approach prior to the Missed Approach Waypoint
Remote Go Around (input)
(MAWP), similarly this discrete may be used to activate the missed
approach following the MAWP popup.
RP Mode Annunciate (output) HTAWS
This discrete interfaces to the GSR 56 to attenuate the telephone
GSR 56 Audio Attenuate ringer volume until a call is answered using the GTN Xi. It is
(output) recommended to use this discrete when the GTN Xi interfaces to the
GSR 56.

Rev. 8 Page 5-49
5.4.3.15 Navigation Features
Mark on Target
When Mark on Target is enabled on this page, additional waypoint filtering options will be available in
Normal mode on the User Waypoints page for Mark on Target. Configuration of a Mark on Target discrete
is required to generate this type of User Waypoint.
RF Procedure Legs
NOTE
This STC does not grant operational approval for RF leg navigation. Additional FAA
approval is required for those operators intending to use the GTN Xi as a means to
provide RNP 1.0 navigation in accordance with FAA AC 90-105.
This setting enables or disables Radius to Fix leg types on the GTN Xi. With this setting enabled, the
GTN Xi will provide display and guidance for these leg types. The GTN Xi supports RF legs up to
Required Navigation Performance 1.0 (RNP 1.0).
Vertical Navigation
Access the Vertical Navigation Configuration page (Figure 5-30) by touching the Options key in the
Vertical Navigation row.
Figure 5-30 Vertical Navigation Configuration Page

Rev. 8 Page 5-50
Table 5-36 Vertical Navigation Type
The Vertical Calculator (VCALC) function will be enabled. VCALC provides advisory
VCALC (Default)
messages and vertical speed required to achieve a simple descent profile.
The vertical navigation (VNAV) function will be enabled. The VNAV function
provides vertical profile guidance during the en route and terminal phases of flight.
Guidance based on specified altitudes at waypoints in the active flight plan or to a
VNAV
Direct-To waypoint is provided. It includes vertical path guidance to a descending
path, which is provided as a linear deviation from the desired path. VNAV requires a
baro-corrected altitude input.
Table 5-37 Transition to Approach

Vertical navigation will automatically adjust the descent path to compensate for
Enabled (Default) temperature changes and provide a continuous descent onto the approach. The
Transition to Approach function requires a static air temperature input.
Vertical navigation will end at the waypoint preceding the final approach fix (FAF)
Disabled
in the flight plan.
The Transition Altitude will set the altitude at which the GTN Xi will transition to displaying altitudes in
flight levels instead of feet. The default is FL 1800 (18,000 feet). The VDI Scale sets the scale for the
VNAV vertical deviation output. The default VDI Scale is 500 feet.
5.4.3.16 Ownship Configuration Page

Access the Ownship Configuration page by touching
the Ownship key from the GTN Setup page. This page
allows the customization of the ownship symbol used
on the moving map display during flight. A rotorcraft
symbol must be chosen. Touch the Color Ownship
toggle to change ownship color to magenta. Per this
STC, the ownship must be configured as a 2-Blade,
3-Blade, or 4-Blade Rotorcraft.
Figure 5-31 Ownship Configuration Page

Rev. 8 Page 5-51
5.4.3.17 Connext Configuration Page
Access the Connext Configuration page by touching
the Connext key from the GTN Setup page. This page
sets controls for the transfer of flight logs to portable
applications. When interfaced to G500H TXi, the GTN
Xi and Connext streams and transfers flight logs from
the TXi, including engine data, to a PED.
Figure 5-32 Connext Configuration Page
Stream Active Flight Data

Table 5-38 Stream Active Flight Data Selections
Enabled (Default) Flight data logs from the current flight will be sent to connected portable devices.
Flight data logs from the current flight will not be sent to the connected portable
Disabled
devices.
Transfer Past Flight Data Logs

Table 5-39 Transfer Past Flight Data Logs Selections
Flight data logs from past flights will be sent to connected portable devices. This
Enabled (Default) feature will help keep an electronic log book up-to-date by sending flight data logs
from previous flights when a portable device was not connected.
Flight data logs from past flights will not be sent to connected portable devices. It
Disabled
is recommended to disable this feature for rotorcraft flown by different pilots.

Rev. 8 Page 5-52
5.4.4 GTN Options
NOTE
Before enabling features, verify that Airframe Type is set to “Rotorcraft” under main
system setup menu.
NOTE
The feature enablement card should be provided to the customer after the GTN Xi
installation.
Touch the GTN Options key on the Configuration mode page. The GTN Options page has optional
features that may be purchased and enabled.
Figure 5-33 GTN Options Page

Rev. 8 Page 5-53
5.4.4.1 Terrain Configuration
This section describes GTN Xi terrain and HTAWS configuration settings.
Figure 5-34 Terrain Configuration Page
5.4.4.1.1 Terrain Mode

Terrain Mode may be set to HTerrain Proximity, HTerrain Alerting, or HTAWS. If HTerrain Proximity is
selected, no further terrain configuration is necessary.
HTerrain Alerting
Terrain Alerting will provide a subset of the TAWS B alerting functionality in addition to the Terrain
Proximity features already provided as a standard feature of the GTN Xi. The Terrain Alerting feature of
the GTN Xi is provided as an additional safety feature to increase situational awareness and help reduce
controlled flight into terrain (CFIT). It does not replace full TAWS capabilities or meet the requirements of
TSO-151c. Refer to GTN Xi Series Pilot’s Guide for additional information regarding this feature.
NOTE
If enabling Terrain Alerting on the GTN Xi, the audio output from the GTN Xi must be
connected to an unswitched and unmuted input on the audio panel. Refer to Figure B-9.
NOTE
Terrain Alerting should only be enabled on one GTN Xi in dual GTN Xi installations to
prevent conflicting audio messages.

Rev. 8 Page 5-54
5.4.4.1.1.1 HTAWS Enablement
HTAWS is an optional feature and must be first be unlocked in order to be enabled.
NOTE
If enabling HTAWS on the GTN Xi, the audio output from the GTN Xi must be connected to
an unswitched and unmuted input on the audio panel. Refer to Figure B-9.
NOTE
HTAWS shall only be enabled on one GTN Xi in dual GTN Xi installations to prevent
conflicting audio messages.
Complete the following procedure to enable HTAWS functionality in the GTN Xi:
1. Power off the GTN Xi by pulling the circuit breaker(s).
2. Remove the database SD card from the SD card slot and insert a Helicopter TAWS Enablement
Card (P/N 010-00878-02).
3. Power on the GTN Xi in Configuration mode. Refer to Section .
4. Go to the Terrain Configuration page from the GTN Options page.
5. Touch the HTAWS key.
6. Touch Yes to enable HTAWS. When the HTAWS feature is activated, the key will be lit green.
5.4.4.1.2 Alert Configuration

For GTN Xi installations with HTAWS enabled, the GTN Xi provides aural and visual terrain alerts. The
alerting algorithm adapts the terrain alerting criteria based on nearby airports. The GTN Xi must be
configured to specify the minimum criteria that an airport must meet to be considered as a nearby airport
for the purpose of Terrain and Obstacle Alerting.
Audio Clips
Alert audio clips may be sampled, but no configuration is necessary.
Alert Settings
Configure TAWS Terrain Alerting and Airport Criteria as follows:
1. Select the applicable Runway Surface type as determined from the information in Table 5-40.
2. Enter the Minimum Runway Length from the information in Table 5-40. This field has a range of
0 to 25,000 ft and defaults to 0.
3. Select the Alert Voice type. Choose from Female or Male. Female is the default.
Table 5-40 TAWS Airframe-Specific Configuration Data
Item Description Note
Set to type of runway surface the rotorcraft will
Runway Type of surfaces the runway must
typically use. Recommended setting is Hard/Soft or
Surface have for the rotorcraft to land.
Any for rotorcraft installations.
Set to the shortest ground roll distance required for
Minimum length that runway must
Minimum takeoff/landing operations. The default length for
have before being considered a
Length rotorcraft is 0 feet and is the recommended
runway by HTAWS alerting.
configuration value.

Rev. 8 Page 5-55
5.4.4.2 Chart Configuration (GTN 7XX Xi Only)
NOTE
The ChartView Enablement Card can only be used on one GTN Xi. For dual GTN Xi
installations, a separate ChartView Enablement Card must be used on each GTN Xi.
NOTE
Navigation or chart data must not be programmed on the ChartView Enablement Card.
The GTN 7XX Xi can be configured to display Garmin FliteCharts or, optionally, Jeppesen ChartView
charts. To configure charts, go to the Chart Configuration page from the GTN Options page.
Figure 5-35 Chart Configuration Page
Select None, FliteCharts, or ChartView. If ChartView is selected, functionality is enabled as follows:

2. Remove the database SD card from the SD card slot and insert a ChartView Enablement Card
(P/N 010-00878-40).
4. Go to the Chart Configuration page from the GTN Options page.
5. Touch the ChartView key.
6. When prompted, touch Yes to enable ChartView.
7. When the ChartView feature is activated, the ChartView key will be lit green.

Rev. 8 Page 5-56
5.4.4.3 COM Transmit Power (GTN 635Xi/650Xi/750Xi Only)
NOTE
16W COM transmit power must not be enabled on a GTN Xi installed in a rotorcraft with
a 14V electrical system.
NOTE
The 16W COM Enablement Card can only be used on one GTN Xi. For dual GTN Xi
installations, a separate Enablement Card must be used on each GTN Xi.
COM transmit power can be set to 10 watts or, optionally, 16 watts. A 10W COM transmit power is
enabled by default.
Figure 5-36 COM Transmit Power Configuration Page
To enable 16W COM transmit power, complete the following procedure:

2. Remove the database SD card from the SD card slot and insert a 16W Enablement Card
(P/N 010-00878-04).
4. Navigate to the COM Transmit Power Configuration page from the GTN Options page. Touch
the 16W key.
5. A window will appear with “Enable 16W COM? This will consume a feature unlock key when
selected.”
6. Touch Yes to enable 16W COM.
7. When the 16W COM feature is activated, the 16W key will be lit green.

Rev. 8 Page 5-57
5.4.4.4 Weather Radar
These options are not approved under this STC and must be left disabled.
5.4.4.5 Flight Simulator

This setting is not approved per this STC. Refer to GTN Xi Series TSO Installation Manual for more
information.
5.4.4.6 Search and Rescue

This option enables up to four unique search and rescue flight plan patterns. Enabling this functionality
provides a means for the crew to easily create Orbit, Expanding Square, Parallel Track, and/or Sector
Search flight plan patterns via the Flight Plan page or Direct-to pop-up menu.
Access the Search and Rescue Configuration page by touching the Search and Rescue key on the GTN
Options page.
Figure 5-37 Search and Rescue Configuration Page

Rev. 8 Page 5-58
5.4.5 GTN Diagnostics
The GTN Diagnostics page is accessed from the Configuration mode home page and is a useful tool for
diagnosing issues and troubleshooting problems that arise during installation. Ground checks are also
performed using the tools in this page.
Figure 5-38 GTN Diagnostics Page
5.4.5.1 ARINC Inputs

The ARINC Inputs diagnostic page allows the display of ARINC 429/708 data being received over each
ARINC input. This is useful for determining if the expected labels are being received and also for
troubleshooting incorrect or swapped wiring to the input ports. Each port can be chosen for display by
touching the Port key and selecting the desired input port. The GTN Xi will then display the label, SSM,
Data, and SDI for the selected port. The data log can be paused by toggling the Pause key. Clear the data
log by touching Clear Log.
5.4.5.2 Serial Inputs

The Serial Inputs diagnostic page allows the display of serial data that is being received. This is useful for
determining if the GTN Xi is receiving data on each connected port. Select the desired port by touching the
key labeled Port and selecting the RS-232 channel from the list. The data log can be paused by toggling
the Pause key. Clear the data log by touching Clear Log.
5.4.5.3 Discrete Inputs

The Discrete Inputs diagnostic page displays the state of each of the discrete input pins on the GTN Xi.
This page is useful for troubleshooting discrete wiring issues. For the discrete inputs checkout procedure,
refer to Section 6.1.3.

Rev. 8 Page 5-59
5.4.5.4 Discrete Outputs
The Discrete Outputs diagnostic page allows the state of each of the discrete outputs to be toggled between
active and inactive. This is useful for ensuring that annunciator and signal outputs are properly connected
to annunciator lights or third-party LRUs and that they are receiving the signal. For the discrete outputs
checkout procedure, refer to Section 6.1.4.
5.4.5.5 HSDB (Ethernet)

The HSDB (Ethernet) diagnostic page allows the status of each HSDB port to be displayed. This page
displays whether or not each port is receiving data and displays whether the port is connected or not
connected. The configuration status of each installed HSDB LRU is also displayed. For the HSDB
checkout procedure, refer to Section 6.1.5.
5.4.5.6 Main Indicator (Analog)

The Main Indicator (Analog) diagnostic page allows the CDI that is connected to the main board (P1001)
to be ground checked and allows the interface to be verified. For the main indicator (analog) checkout
procedure, refer to Section 6.1.1.
5.4.5.7 Analog Inputs

The Analog Inputs diagnostic page displays the bus voltage setting for Lighting Bus 1 and Lighting
Bus 2, as well is the input voltage setting for each bus. It also displays synchro heading input diagnostics
information, such as heading angle, heading valid status, AC voltage, and AC frequency.
5.4.5.8 Power Stats

The Power Statistics page displays the number of times the GTN Xi has powered up, as well as the total
elapsed operating hours for the GTN Xi.
5.4.5.9 WAAS
The WAAS Diagnostics page displays the WAAS engine status, including UTC date/time, current latitude
and longitude, overall navigation status, oscillator temperature, and AGC voltage. This page also allows
the GPS/WAAS engine to be reset. Resetting the GPS/WAAS engine will clear almanac data and satellite
re-acquisition will take approximately 20 minutes.
5.4.5.10 Temps
The Temperatures diagnostic page displays the current, minimum, maximum, and average board
temperatures for the LED Board, Main Board, Display Interface Board, GPS/WAAS Board, COM Board,
and COM Oscillator.
5.4.5.11 Logs
The Logs diagnostic page allows the error log, connection log, WAAS diagnostic log, and flight data log to
be written to the SD card in the front slot. It also allows the error log to be cleared.

Rev. 8 Page 5-60
5.4.5.12 Main Data Inputs
The Main Data Inputs page allows the data on ARINC 429, RS-232, and other electrical inputs to be
monitored. This is used for verifying electrical interfaces during installation and troubleshooting.
Information that is not being received by the GTN Xi is dashed out. The data displayed is prioritized
according to the scheme outlined in Section 3.3.8 if the data is being received on multiple inputs. Refer to
Section 6.1.9 and Section 6.1.10 for checkout procedures utilizing this page.
5.4.5.13 VOR/ILS Indicator (Analog) (GTN 650Xi/750Xi Only)

The VOR/ILS Indicator (Analog) Diagnostics page allows the CDI connected to the NAV board (P1004)
to be ground checked and allows the NAV indicator interface to be verified. Refer to Section 6.1.2 for the
VOR/ILS (analog) ground check.
5.4.5.14 Clear Config Settings
CAUTION
This key should only be touched if the intent is to clear all configuration settings. Touching
the Clear Config Settings key opens a confirmation window to reset all of the settings
stored in the configuration module to their defaults.

Rev. 8 Page 5-61
5.4.6 External Systems Configuration
The following section contains procedures for configuring remote mount units that are connected to the
GTN Xi. To configure external systems using the GTN Xi, touch the External Systems key from the
Configuration mode home page.
Figure 5-39 External Systems Page
5.4.6.1 GDL 69/69A Configuration

The GDL 69/69A XM must be activated before use. If
XM activation has not already been done, refer to
GDL 69/69A Installation Manual and GDL 69 Series
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Activation Instructions.
If installed, the GDL 69/69A must be configured to
match the installation. Perform the following steps:
1. Touch the External Systems key on GTN Xi
Configuration mode home page.
2. Touch the GDL 69 key.
3. Adjust the Antenna Gain to match installation.
4. Adjust the Cable Loss to match the installation.
Refer to GDL 69/69A Installation Manual to
determine the correct values.
5. Enable any GDL 69/69A Ethernet ports as
required by the installation.
Figure 5-40 GDL 69/69A Configuration

Page

Rev. 8 Page 5-62
5.4.6.2 Stormscope Configuration
These settings are not approved under this STC.
5.4.6.3 Traffic Configuration
NOTE
The following pages are only available if one of the ARINC 429 or RS-232 inputs is
configured for a traffic format.
5.4.6.3.1 Traffic Test Page

The Traffic Test page displays the traffic system modes of operation and current traffic situation.
Depending on the type of traffic system installed, the information displayed on the Traffic Test page can
vary.
Figure 5-41 Traffic Test Page
5.4.6.3.2 Ryan TCAD

For Ryan TCAD, the Traffic Test page displays the current shield mode, altitude filter, and barometric
pressure.
By touching Menu, the traffic menu can be displayed. Under Traffic Audio, the mute duration (9900B
only) and traffic audio volume can be set and the TCAD can be toggled between voice and tone alerts.
Under Shield Setup, the shield settings can be configured for the various shield types. Also, Ground Mode
(9900BX only) and APPR Mode can be toggled.

Rev. 8 Page 5-63
5.4.6.3.3 Other Traffic Systems
For traffic systems other than Ryan TCAD, the Traffic Test page displays the following data:
• Altitude filter—Normal, Above, Below, and Unrestricted
• Operating mode—Standby, Operate, or TAS Fail
• Altitude
• Heading
• BARO Alt and RAD Alt status
5.4.6.4 GAD 42
5.4.6.5 Transponder Configuration (GTX 32 or GTX 33)
NOTE
The GTX 335R/345R must be configured via the GTX 3X5 Install Tool. Refer to GTX 3X5
Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual for more information.
NOTE
If the GTN Xi controls any transponder (GTX 32/33/327/328/330/3X5), then that
transponder will boot into the same mode (Normal or Configuration) as the GTN Xi.
NOTE
If the GTN Xi is not communicating with the GTX transponder, all of the editable fields for
the setup items in the following sections will be dashed out. If the fields are dashed out,
check the wiring and pin connections from the GTN Xi to the transponder.
NOTE
The GTN Xi can interface to the GTX 327/328/
330/330 ES/3X5; however, configuration of the
panel-mounted GTX 327/328/330/330 ES is not
supported. These transponders should be
configured per their installation manuals rather
than through the GTN Xi.
A remote transponder can be configured by the GTN Xi

via RS-232 if a transponder is configured for one of the
RS-232 ports. To configure the transponder, it must first
be selected as Present and the type of transponder
installed must be specified. Refer to Section 5.4.3.4.
Next, go to the External Systems page and touch the
XPDR key. This displays the page shown in Figure 5-39,
which allows the remote transponder to be configured.
Figure 5-42 XPDR Configuration Page

Rev. 8 Page 5-64
5.4.6.5.1 Transponder Inputs and Outputs
Access the Transponder Inputs/Outputs page, shown in Figure 5-43, by touching the Inputs and Outputs
key on the XPDR Configuration page, shown in Figure 5-42. The transponder configuration page is
reached through the External Systems page. The transponder RS-232 channel inputs can be configured by
the GTN Xi. RS-232 channel 1 input for the transponder can only be set to Remote and is the default for
channel 1 input. RS-232 channel 1 is used for transponder control and remote configuration.
NOTE
Settings listed in this section are for transponder configuration only and are not approved
under the GTN Part 27 STC.
Figure 5-43 XPDR Inputs/Outputs Page

Rev. 8 Page 5-65
5.4.6.5.1.1 RS-232 Configuration
The following outlines RS-232 channel settings and describes what each setting is used for. Select the
correct input/output setting based upon the installed interfaced equipment. It is not necessary to select the
baud rate for the transponder port to which the GTN Xi is connected.
Table 5-41 RS-232 Channel 1 Inputs and Outputs
Input Remote The RS-232 port is configured for remote control by the GTN Xi.
Remote RS-232 serial output remote data.
Outputs
Remote + TIS RS-232 serial output remote data with TIS.
Table 5-42 RS-232 Channel 2 Inputs and Outputs

OFF DEFAULT. The altitude code input is not from an RS-232 source.
Airdata RS-232 serial air data information from Shadin ADC 200, 200+, 2000 plus
Format 1 altitude data. This input is the same as “ADC W/ALT” in the GTX 330.
Airdata RS-232 serial air data information from Shadin ADC 200, 200+, 2000. This
Format 2 input is the same as “ADC no ALT” in the GTX 330.
Altitude RS-232 serial altitude from an Icarus Instruments 3000. This input is the same
Format 1 as “ICARUS ALT” in the GTX 330.
Altitude Reports Icarus Instruments 3000 altitude in 25-foot increments. This input is the
Format 2 same as “ICARUS ALT 25 FT” in the GTX 330.
Altitude RS-232 serial altitude from Shadin 8800T, 9000T, 9200T. This input is the
Inputs Format 3 same as “SHADIN ALT” in the GTX 330.
Altitude Reports Shadin 8800T, 9000T, 9200T altitude in 25-foot increments. This is the
Format 4 same as “SHADIN ALT 25 Ft” in the GTX 330.
RS-232 serial air data from Shadin 9628XX-X family of Air Data Computers and
FADC
Fuel/Air Data Computers plus altitude data. This input is the same as “FADC w/
Format 1
ALT” in the GTX 330.
RS-232 serial air data from Shadin 9628XX-X family of Air Data Computers and
FADC
Fuel/Air Data Computers. This input is the same as “FADC NO ALT” in the
Format 2
GTX 330.
GPS RS-232 groundspeed from a GPS device.
REMOTE RS-232 serial input remote data.
OFF Default for channel 2. No unit is connected to the output of this channel.
Altitude
RS-232 serial altitude from an Icarus Instruments 3000.
Format 1
Outputs
REMOTE RS-232 serial output remote data.
REMOTE
RS-232 serial output remote data with TIS.
w/TIS

Rev. 8 Page 5-66
Baud Rate Selection
Select the baud rate for each RS-232 channel from one of the following rates:
• 9600
• 19200
• 28800
• 38400
• 57600
Parity Selections
Select the parity for RS-232 channel 2 to one of the following:
• Even Parity
• Odd Parity
• No Parity

Rev. 8 Page 5-67
5.4.6.5.1.2 ARINC 429 Configuration (GTX 33 Only)
Configure the four ARINC 429 input ports and the two ARINC 429 output ports. Select the correct speed
for each port depending upon the installed interfaced equipment by touching the Speed key and toggling
High (nominally 12 kb/sec) or Low (nominally 100 kb/sec). Each port can be configured independently
for the desired functions by selecting the desired data format from the menu.
ARINC 429 Input Selections

Select the correct Data In and Data Out settings for each port. The data selections are described below:
Table 5-43 Transponder ARINC 429 Input Settings
Port Selection Description
All OFF No unit connected to this ARINC 429 input.
GPS Selected waypoint information and GPS groundspeed recognition.
ADC NO ALT Temperature and speed information.
ADC W/ALT Altitude, temperature and speed information.
AHRS Attitude and heading information.
EFIS/ADC NO Selected course, heading, temperature, joystick waypoint and
ALT speed information.
1 through 3 Selected course, heading, temperature, joystick waypoint, and

EFIS/ADC W/ALT
speed information plus altitude data.
GARMIN
Same as GPS with added ability of receiving phase of flight data.
DISPLAY
GARMIN TAS Traffic Advisory System discretes.
Standard GNSS output. Includes position, velocity, and integrity
GARMIN 743A
data.
AFCS Selected altitude, baro setting, and pitch discretes.
Airborne Data Link Processor. ADLP is available only on channel 4.
4 ADLP
Not available with GTX software v8.00 or later.
The GTX 33 receives one of the following sets of ARINC 429 data. The labels are chosen when selected in
ARINC 429 INPUT. Data may be received at either low or high speed. The default is low. The transmit
data labels are as follows:
Table 5-44 AHRS Labels

Label Data
314 True Heading (degrees)
320 Magnetic Heading (degrees)
325 Roll Angle
365 Vertical Rate (feet/min)

Rev. 8 Page 5-68
Table 5-45 Air Data Computer (ADC) Labels
Label Data
203 [1] Pressure Altitude (feet)
204 Barometric Corrected Altitude (feet)
205 Mach Number
206 Indicated Air Speed (knots)
210 True Air Speed (knots)
211 Total Air Temperature (degrees)
212 Vertical Speed (feet/min)
213 Static Air Temperature (degrees)
Notes:
[1] If ADC W/ALT or EFIS/ADC W/ALT format selected.
Table 5-46 Garmin Display Labels

Label Data
310 GPS Latitude (degrees)
311 GPS Longitude (degrees)
261 GPS Discretes
312 GPS Groundspeed (knots)
313 GPS Track Angle (degrees)
314 True Heading (degrees)
Table 5-47 Garmin TAS Labels

Label Data
274 TAS Discretes

Rev. 8 Page 5-69
Table 5-48 EFIS Display System (EFIS/ADC) Labels
Label Data
100 Selected Course (degrees)
102 Selected Altitude (feet)
203 [1] Pressure Altitude (feet)
204 Barometric Corrected Altitude (feet)
205 Mach Number
206 Indicated Air Speed (knots)
210 True Air Speed (knots)
211 Total Air Temperature (degrees)
212 Vertical Speed (feet/min)
213 Static Air Temperature (degrees)
234 Barometric Setting (hPa)
235 Barometric Setting (ºHg)
314 True Heading
325 Roll Angle
Notes:
[1] Only if ADC w/ALT or EFIS/ADC w/ALT formats are selected.
Table 5-49 GPS/FMS Navigation System (GPS) Labels

Label Data
310 GPS Latitude (degrees)
311 GPS Longitude (degrees)
312 Groundspeed (knots)
313 Track Angle (degrees)
Table 5-50 AFCS Labels

Label Data
234 Barometric Setting (hPa)
235 Barometric Setting (“Hg)
271 Pitch Discretes

Rev. 8 Page 5-70
ARINC 429 Input and Output Selections
ARINC 429 Channel 1 defaults to Off. ARINC 429 channel 2 defaults to Garmin w/TIS. The GTX 33 can
be configured to include GPS, Airdata, AHRS, EFIS/Airdata, and ADLP ARINC 429 input, functioning as
an ARINC 429 data concentrator. Each output port can be configured independently for the desired
function. Both ARINC 429 outputs send high speed ARINC 429 data.
Table 5-51 Transponder ARINC 429 Output Settings

Port Data Source Notes
Off [2]
ADLP
1 [1] Garmin
Garmin w/TAS
Garmin w/TIS
Off
Garmin
2
Garmin w/TAS
Garmin w/TIS [2] [3]
Notes:
[1] ARINC 429 input channel 4 sets the ARINC 429 output channel 1 to the same selection.
[2] Default setting.
[3] Do not select GARMIN w/TIS if the rotorcraft contains another traffic detection system.
The Garmin format is a data concentration function. The following data is sent out at specified intervals
using high speed ARINC 429 (100 kHz). The transmit data labels and their rates are listed in Table 5-52.
Table 5-52 Garmin Format Output Labels (1)
Label Data Rate
100 Selected Course (degrees) 200 ms
203 Pressure Altitude (feet) 100 ms
204 Barometric Corrected Altitude (feet) 100 ms
206 Indicated Air Speed (knots) 100 ms
210 True Air Speed (knots) 100 ms
211 Total Air Temperature (degrees) 100 ms
213 Static Air Temperature (degrees) 100 ms
314 True Heading 100 ms
320 Magnetic Heading (degrees) 100 ms
371 GA Equipment Identifier 500 ms
377 Equipment Identifier 500 ms

Rev. 8 Page 5-71
The following data are sent out in packets approximately every 0.5 seconds at high speed (100 kHz), in the
specified sequence:
Table 5-53 Garmin Format Output Labels (2)
Sequence Label Data
1 350 Fault Summary
2 274 Transponder Control
3 313 Own Aircraft Track Angle
4 357 (RTS) Request to Send
5 130 Intruder Range (0 – 8 sets)
6 131 Intruder Altitude (0 – 8 sets)
7 132 Intruder Bearing (0 – 8 sets)
8 357 (EXT) End of Transmission

Rev. 8 Page 5-72
5.4.6.5.2 Transponder Installation Settings Page
VFR Key Code
NOTE
Exercise care when making routine code changes. Enter only valid VFR codes. Avoid
using code 7500 and codes in the 7600-7777 range, as these codes trigger special
indicators in automated facilities.
Figure 5-44 XPDR Installation Settigs Page
Input a VFR transponder code by touching the key and typing the selected code into the keypad. This field
has a range of 0000-7777.
Aircraft Weight
Select Rotorcraft. Refer to Table 5-54.
Table 5-54 Aircraft Weight
<15,500 LBS Configures the rotorcraft weight to less than 15,500 lbs.
>=15,500 LBS Configures the rotorcraft weight to equal to or greater than 15,500 lbs.
ROTORCRAFT Configures to rotorcraft use.
UNKNOWN Rotorcraft weight is unknown.
Auto Standby Delay

This is the number of seconds the rotorcraft must be on the ground before the transponder automatically
switches to GND mode when it has a means of determining the rotorcraft is on the ground. It has a range of
0 seconds to 99 seconds. The default value of 24 seconds is a nominal value for most rotorcraft. This value
can be changed depending on the types of operations the rotorcraft is expected to perform.

Rev. 8 Page 5-73
Altitude Climb Rate for Airborne Transition
This is the climb rate that is required in order to transition from ground to airborne state. This field is
adjustable from 100 fpm to 9999 fpm. This field should be set to the typical vertical speed climb rate of the
rotorcraft. This number determines the rate of climb necessary for the GTX to assume liftoff for detecting
an airborne state. Refer to the Pilot’s Operation Handbook (POH) to determine this value. If the POH does
not include rotorcraft climb rate information, use the default value of 300 fpm.
Air/Ground Logic
Select the source for the air/ground logic.
Table 5-55 Air/Ground Logic
Auto Airborne Off This is not a valid setting.
Squat Switch The transponder is connected to a squat switch to determine airborne state.
The transponder is using GPS data to determine the airborne state. Only select
GPS Data
this setting if a GTX input port is configured to GPS.
Select this setting if a squat switch is not installed and no GTX input ports are
Altitude Data
configured for GPS.
Squat Switch Sense

The squat switch sense field may be set to either High or Low. If the Air/Ground logic field is set to Squat
Switch, the squat switch sense field is used to define the state of the squat switch input. If the squat sense
field is set to High, then when the squat switch input is high, the rotorcraft is considered to be on the
ground. If the squat sense field is set to Low, then when the squat switch input is low, the rotorcraft is
considered to be on the ground.
Maximum Airspeed (GTX 33 Only)

Select the maximum true airspeed for the rotorcraft. The default is <= 150 KTS.
Table 5-56 Maximum Airspeed (GTX 33 Only)
<= 75 KTS Max rotorcraft operating speeds less than or equal to 75 knots TAS.
<= 150 KTS Max rotorcraft operating speeds less than or equal to 150 knots TAS.
<=300 KTS Max rotorcraft operating speeds less than or equal to 300 knots TAS.
>1200 KTS Max rotorcraft operating speeds greater than 1200 knots TAS.
UNKNOWN Max rotorcraft speed is unknown.

Rev. 8 Page 5-74
Address Type (GTX 33 Only)
Select the method of entry of the rotorcraft address.
Table 5-57 Address Type (GTX 33 Only)
US Tail N-Registration Number.
HEX ID Allows technician to enter the rotorcraft registration number in hexadecimal code format.
Flight ID Type (GTX 33 Only)

Select the flight ID type. For operation requiring the flight crew to enter a rotorcraft identification
designator, select the page identified as Pilot Entry. When this choice is selected and the crew enters the
flight ID correctly, the flight number call sign for radio contact with ATC is the same flight identification
the GTX 33 Mode S transponder replies to ATC radar interrogations.
Table 5-58 Flight ID Type
CONFIG ENTRY Allows technician to enter flight ID while in Configuration mode only.
PILOT ENTRY Allows pilot/technician to enter flight ID in the GTN Xi in Normal mode.
SAME AS TAIL If Address Type is US Tail, allows flight ID to use the same number.
Selecting Pilot Entry allows the flight ID to remain the same as that entered during the previous flight until
it is updated, the crew is not prompted to update the flight ID. The selections Same As Tail and Config
Entry are fixed Mode S addresses.
Flight ID (GTX 33 Only)

Enter the flight ID number of the rotorcraft. This field allows eight alphanumeric characters.
Aircraft Length (GTX 33 Only)

This field sets the length of the rotorcraft to less than or equal to 15 meters (49 feet), less than or equal to
25 meters (82 feet), less than or equal to 35 meters (115 feet), less than or equal to 45 meters (148 feet),
less than or equal to 55 meters (180 feet), less than or equal to 65 meters (213 feet), less than or equal to
75 meters (246 feet), less than or equal to 85 meters (279 feet), or more than 85 meters (279 feet). Enter the
rotorcraft’s minimum length category.
Aircraft Width (GTX 33 Only)

This field sets the wingspan of the rotorcraft to less than or equal to 11.5 meters (38 feet), less than or equal
to 23.0 meters (75 feet), less than or equal to 28.5 meters (94 feet), less than or equal to 33.0 meters
(108 feet), less than or equal to 34.0 meters (112 feet), less than or equal to 38.0 meters (125 feet), less than
or equal to 39.5 meters (130 feet), less than or equal to 45.0 meters (148 feet), less than or equal to
52.0 meters (171 feet), less than or equal to 59.5 meters (195 feet), less than or equal to 67.0 meters
(220 feet), less than or equal to 72.5 meters (238 feet), less than or equal to 80.0 meters (262 feet), or more
then 80.0 meters (262 feet). Enter the rotorcraft’s minimum width category.

Rev. 8 Page 5-75
Enhanced Surveillance (GTX 33 Only)
This field sets Enhanced Surveillance (EHS) to Disable or Enable. When EHS is set to Disable, the
enhanced surveillance function is not available.
Surveillance Integrity Level (GTX 33 Only)

This field sets the correct GPS Integrity for the interfaced GPS receiver. Set to 1E-3, 1E-5, or 1E-7. When
interfaced to the GTN Xi, the GPS Integrity must be set to 1E-5.
NOTE
The GPS Integrity configuration field indicates the integrity of the GPS sensor that is
connected to the transponder. It is measured in errors per flight hour, 1E-3 being the worst
and 1E-7 being the best rating. This data is used in ADS-B transmissions.
Temperature Switch/Probe Installed (GTX 33 Only)

This field determines if a temperature switch/probe is connected to the GTX 33. Select Yes if a temperature
switch/probe is connected to the transponder. Select No otherwise.
ADS-B Out (GTX 33ES Only)

This field controls the ADS-B Out function of the transponder. The options are: Enable, Disable, and Pilot
Set.
1090 Input (GTX 33ES Only)

This field determines if the rotorcraft is equipped with 1090 MHz ADS-B In equipment. Select Yes if the
rotorcraft equipped with 1090 MHz ADS-B In equipment; otherwise, select No.
UAT Input (GTX 33ES Only)

This field determines if the rotorcraft is equipped with 978 MHz (UAT) ADS-B In equipment or if the
owner/operator of the rotorcraft will be using a handheld UAT receiver for traffic information. Select Yes if
equipped with 978 MHz (UAT) ADS-B In equipment; otherwise, select No.
GPS Antenna Longitudinal Offset (GTX 33ES Only)

Enter the GPS antenna longitudinal offset distance, rounded to the nearest meter from the nose of the
rotorcraft. This offset is configurable from 2 to 60 meters.
GPS Antenna Lateral Offset (GTX 33ES Only)

Enter the GPS antenna lateral offset distance, rounded to the nearest meter from the centerline of the
rotorcraft (left or right, looking forward). This offset is configurable from 0 to 6 meters.
Auto ALT
This setting determines whether the GTX will automatically transition to ALT mode when it detects a
takeoff.
Aircraft Stall Speed

Sets the stall speed of the rotorcraft to either DEFAULT or a fixed speed between 30 and 200 knots. Enter
the rotorcraft’s minimum stall speed based on the speed documented in the Pilot’s Operating Handbook
(POH) or Rotorcraft Flight Manual (RFM).

Rev. 8 Page 5-76
5.4.6.5.3 Transponder Audio Configuration
Select the Audio Config key from the XPDR Configuration page. The XPDR Audio Configuration page
will display the following information.
Figure 5-45 XPDR Audio Configuration Page
Altitude Monitor
Applies to panel mount GTX units only. Select the desired audio type for the Altitude Monitor alert. The
choices are Off, Tone, or Message.
Count Down Timer

Applies to panel mount GTX units only. Select the desired audio type for the Count Down Timer alert. The
choices are Off, Tone, or Message.
TIS Alert
Select the desired audio type for TIS alerts. The choices are Off, Tone, or Message.
Voice Setting
Set the voice type to Male or Female.
Volume
Adjust the desired volume level for transponder audio. Volume is adjusted from 0 to +63 dB. Ensure the
volume level is sufficient for all anticipated cockpit noise environments.

Rev. 8 Page 5-77
Test Tone
CAUTION
When the GTN Xi is rebooted, the unit will force all connected transponders into the
airborne state.
Select the desired test tone. The choices are 500Hz Tone
or Tone. Touching the play key (triangle) will play the
selected test tone.
Figure 5-46 Test Tone Selection
Test Audio
Select the desired test audio. The choices are Leaving
Altitude, Traffic, Timer Expired, or Traffic Not
Available. Touching the play key (triangle) will play the
selected test audio.
Figure 5-47 Test Message Selection

Rev. 8 Page 5-78
5.4.6.5.4 Emergency Mode
The default Disabled must be selected per this STC.
When the volume knob is held down in Normal mode, the GTN Xi will automatically change the COM
frequency to the emergency frequency. When XPDR Emergency Mode is enabled, holding the knob will
simultaneously change the transponder code to the designated code if the GTN Xi is configured for control
of a transponder. The default transponder code is 7700.
5.4.6.5.5 Transponder In Air Test

Enable the Transponder In Air test by touching the Force Airborne Test key on the XPDR Configuration
page.
The Transponder In Air Test forces the transponder into “airborne” mode during the next power cycle. This
enables the transponder to be checked for proper airborne operation.
Figure 5-48 XPDR Configuration Page - Force Airborne Test

Rev. 8 Page 5-79
5.4.6.6 GMA 35 Audio Panel Configuration (GTN 7XX Xi Only)
The following terms will be used throughout the audio panel configuration sections and are defined here:
• ALERT - Unswitched inputs. These inputs are typically warnings and there is no way for the user
to de-select the audio
• CO-PILOT - The second crew member is considered the CO-PILOT. The co-pilot is typically the
front-left seat for rotorcraft
• CREW - Refers to rotorcraft occupants who can transmit on radios (i.e., PILOT and CO-PILOT).
In certain installations, each crew member may be able to individually select radios.
• ICS (Intercom Communication System) - This refers to the distribution of microphone audio for
each occupant in the rotorcraft.
• PA (Passenger Address) - This refers to a crew member broadcasting audio to the passengers
either through headsets or speakers outside of the ICS distribution.
• PASSENGERS - Occupants considered passengers are not able to transmit or select individual
radios and are treated as a group in that each passenger hears the same audio.
• PILOT - The first crew member is considered the PILOT. The pilot is typically the front-right seat
for rotorcraft. This crew position will always hear Selected Audio (SA).
• PTT (Push-To-Talk) - This refers to keyed microphone transmissions. An input must be activated
before the microphone audio is transmitted.
• PRIMARY RADIO - For a crew member, the PRIMARY RADIO is the radio selected for
transmission. A PUSH-TO-TALK (PTT) by a crew member will transmit over the primary radio.
• SA (Selected Audio) - This refers to the combination of audio sources selected by the crew
member. Note that ALERTS are separate from SELECTED AUDIO.
• SECONDARY RADIOS - For a crew member, any radio selected for monitoring that is not
selected for transmission is considered a SECONDARY RADIO.
• SOFT MUTE - When music audio is muted due to an audio interruption, such as ICS or alerts, the
SOFT MUTE feature allows music audio to fade in gradually to the original volume setting after
muting.
• SIDETONE - SIDETONE refers to the audio spoken into the microphone by an occupant. Many
half-duplex radios provide SIDETONE audio to the radio's received audio output. When
transmitting on these radios, it is not desired for the audio panel to provide the SIDETONE to the
headset since this is usually provided by the transceiver. For PA and telephone audio, SIDETONE
distribution may be adjusted.
NOTE
When configuring volumes and squelches, keys can be touched and held to scroll quickly
through values.
To configure the audio panel, perform the following steps:

1. Navigate to the External Systems page.
2. Touch the Audio Panel key.
3. To access configuration settings for audio routing, volume, and miscellaneous options, touch the
Configure key. Refer to Section 5.4.6.6.1.1 through Section 5.4.6.6.1.4 for descriptions of
settings.
4. To configure connected radios, touch the Connected Radios key. Refer to Section 5.4.6.6.3.
5. Prior to configuring the GMA 35, touch the Set to Default Config key.
6. Touch OK.

Rev. 8 Page 5-80
5.4.6.6.1 Configuration Settings
5.4.6.6.1.1 General Configuration Settings
Mute PASS to CREW intercom during alerts
This option mutes the passenger ICS audio to the crew
during system alerts. Select True to mute passenger
audio during alerts or select False to allow passenger
audio to be audible to the crew during alerts. False is
the default selection.
Mute PASS to CREW intercom during selected

audio
This option mutes the passenger ICS audio to the crew
during selected audio. Select True to mute passenger
audio during selected audio or select False to allow
passenger audio to be audible to the crew during
selected audio. False is the default selection.
Passengers hear selected audio

Select True to allow passengers to hear selected audio.
Select False to disable selected audio routing to the
passengers. False is the default selection.
Figure 5-49 Audio Panel Configuration
Receiver 5 is Passenger Page
This option repurposes the RCVR 5 input for the
microphone audio input for the fifth passenger. Select True to enable the fifth passenger audio input or
False to only allow four passenger headsets. False is the default selection.
Disable PA functionality
Select True to disable the passenger address function. Selecting False will enable the PA functionality.
False is the default selection.
Mute PASS music during intercom

Select True if it is desired for passenger music to be muted while the passengers are hearing microphone
audio from an occupant. Select False if it is desired for passenger music to continue playing during ICS
audio. False is the default selection.
Passengers hear alerts

Select True to allow passengers to hear alert audio. Select False to disable alert audio routing to the
passengers. False is the default selection.
Mute secondary radios on primary radio reception

If True is selected, all secondary COM audio is muted upon receiving primary COM audio. If False is
selected, secondary COM audio will be allowed to play simultaneously with primary COM audio
reception. False is the default selection.
NOTE
It is recommended to set the internal side tone settings to True for better audio quality.

Rev. 8 Page 5-81
Audio Processor generates COM1 internal sidetone
Select True to cause the audio panel to provide COM1
sidetone. Selecting False allows the COM1 radio to
generate its own sidetone. False is the default selection.
Audio Processor generates COM2 internal

sidetone
Audio Processor generates COM3 internal

sidetone
COM 1 is connected as COM 2

Select True if COM 1 is connected as COM 2. Select
False if COM 1 is connected as COM 1. False is the
default selection. This setting allows the GTN 7XX Xi Figure 5-50 Audio Panel Sidetone
to be connected to the COM 2 port, but appear to the Settings
pilot as COM 1. Refer to Section 5.4.3.11 for more
information and wiring instructions for this setting.
Ambient Noise Mic On

This setting enables or disables the ambient noise sensor that is built in to the GMA 35. The ambient noise
sensor allows the GMA 35 to adjust the volume of the speaker based upon the ambient noise environment.
The ambient noise sensor is mounted internal to the GMA 35, with no external wiring. Select either True or
False for both the speaker and headset. False is the default selection.
5.4.6.6.1.2 Volume Configuration Settings

Use the following procedure when adjusting volumes in the GMA 35 to provide the best audio results. This
procedure allows the signal levels in the audio wires to be large so they are more resistant to noise
interference. When audio levels can be controlled at the audio source and the GMA 35 has an input gain
control for the audio source, perform the following procedure:
1. Adjust the source audio level to the minimum and the audio panel input gain control to the
minimum.
2. Adjust the volume settings on the audio panel for normal operation.
3. Increase the audio source level until the desired audio level is reached or the audio source is close
to the maximum specified input level for the audio panel input.
4. If the audio from the audio source is not loud enough, increase the audio panel input gain until the
desired audio level is reached. Repeat this setup for each audio source and audio panel input with
adjustable gains.
5. If the audio source does not have adjustable gain, then adjust the gain for the audio panel input
until the desired audio level is reached. For volume adjustments on the GMA 35, increasing the
gain to +96 will increase the volume and decreasing the gain to -96 will decrease the volume.

Rev. 8 Page 5-82
6. If the audio panel input does not have adjustable gain, then adjust the audio source gain until the
desired audio level is reached. Refer to the audio source manufacturer’s installation documentation
for volume adjustment instructions.
NOTE
For the volume settings described below, higher gain values increase volume and lower
gain values decrease volume.
Alert 1 - 4 input audio volume

These settings allow the unswitched alert input audio to
the GMA 35 to be adjusted. This setting is configurable
from -96 to +96. The default is 0.
NOTE
HTAWS audio volumes must be determined
using specific criteria. Refer to Section 6.1.7.
Failsafe Warn input audio volume

This setting allows the failsafe warn audio input to the
GMA 35 to be adjusted. This setting is configurable
Marker volume
This adjusts the marker beacon volume output to the
crew headsets. This setting is configurable from -96 to
+96. The default is 0. This setting adjusts the maximum
allowable volume range in Normal mode.
Music 1 and Music 2

Figure 5-51 Audio Panel Volume Settings
This adjusts the volume of the two music inputs to the
GMA 35, as well as the maximum allowable volume
range in Normal mode. This setting is configurable from -96 to +96. The default is 0.
Telephone
This adjusts the telephone input volume. This setting is configurable from -96 to +96. The default is 0.
Text to Speech (TTS)

This adjusts the Text to Speech input volume. This setting is configurable from -96 to +96. The default is 0.
Bluetooth Audio
This adjusts the Bluetooth volume. This setting is configurable from -96 to +96. The default is 0.
Bluetooth Telephone
This adjusts the Bluetooth telephone volume. This setting is configurable from -96 to +96. The default is 0.
Audio Clips
This adjusts the audio clips output volume. This setting is configurable from -96 to +96. The default is 0.

Rev. 8 Page 5-83
Pilot PA
This setting adjusts the pilot passenger address to cabin speaker volume. This setting is configurable from
-96 to +96. The default is 0.
Copilot PA
This setting adjusts the co-pilot passenger address to cabin speaker volume. This setting is configurable
Crew Audio
This setting adjusts the crew audio to cabin speaker volume. This setting is configurable from -96 to +96.
The default is 0.
Alert Audio Sum

This setting adjusts the alert audio to cabin speaker volume. This setting is configurable from -96 to +96.
The default is 0.
5.4.6.6.1.3 Squelch Threshold Configuration Settings

COM 1 - 3
These settings adjust the signal strength required to
break squelch for each input. These are configurable
from -96 dB to 0 dB. A value of 0 dB will require high
signal levels to break squelch. Decreasing the value to -
96 dB will allow squelch to be broken with low signal
levels. The default value is -48 dB.
NAV 1 and NAV 2

These settings adjust the signal strength required to
break squelch on the NAV 1 and NAV 2 inputs. These
are configurable from -96 dB to 0 dB. The default value
is -48 dB. A value of 0 dB will require high signal
levels to break squelch. Decreasing the value to -96 dB
will allow squelch to be broken with low signal levels.
RCVR 3
This setting adjusts the signal strength required to break
squelch on the RCVR 3 input. This is configurable from
-96 dB to 0 dB. The default is -48 dB. A value of 0 dB
will require high signal levels to break squelch.
Decreasing the value to -96 dB will allow squelch to be Figure 5-52 Audio Panel Squelch
broken with low signal levels. Threshold Settings
RCVR 4
This setting adjusts the signal strength required to break squelch on the RCVR 4 input. This is configurable
from -96 dB to 0 dB. The default is -48 dB. A value of 0 dB will require high signal levels to break
squelch. Decreasing the value to -96 dB will allow squelch to be broken with low signal levels.

Rev. 8 Page 5-84
RCVR 5
This setting adjusts the signal strength required to break squelch on the RCVR 5 input. This is configurable
from -96 dB to 0 dB. The default is -48 dB. A value of 0 dB will require high signal levels to break
squelch. Decreasing the value to -96 dB will allow squelch to be broken with low signal levels.
WARN1
This setting adjusts the signal strength required to break squelch on the FAILSAFE WARN input. This is
configurable from -96 dB to 0 dB. The default is -48 dB. A value of 0 dB will require high signal levels to
break squelch. Decreasing the value to -96 dB will allow squelch to be broken with low signal levels.
ALERT 1-4
These settings adjust the signal strength required to break squelch on the ALERT1-4 inputs. These are
configurable from -96 dB to 0 dB. The default value is -48 dB. A value of 0 dB will require high signal
levels to break squelch. Decreasing the value to -96 dB will allow squelch to be broken with low signal
levels.
5.4.6.6.1.4 Other GMA 35 Configuration Settings

Marker Beacon high sense threshold
The marker high sensitivity threshold configures the
marker beacon signal strength that is required to
activate the marker beacon signal in Marker High Sense
mode. This is adjustable from -31 to +31. The default
value is 0. A value of -31 will cause the marker beacon
signal to activate at lower signal strength; therefore, the
beacon signal will remain active for a longer period of
time while on approach. A value of +31 will require the
marker beacon signal strength to be much stronger to
activate, which results in the marker beacon activating
for a very short duration while flying directly over the
marker beacon.
Marker Beacon low sense threshold

The marker low sensitivity threshold configures the
marker beacon signal strength that is required to
activate the marker beacon signal in Marker Low Sense
mode. This is adjustable from -31 to +31. The default
value is 0. A value of -31 will cause the marker beacon
signal to activate at a lower signal strength; therefore, Figure 5-53 Audio Panel Other Settings
the beacon signal will remain active for a longer period of time while on approach. A value of +31 will
require the marker beacon signal strength to be much higher to activate, which results in the marker beacon
activating for a very short duration while flying directly over the marker beacon.
Marker external lamp lighting offset

When external marker lamps are connected to the GMA 35, this setting allows the lighting level to be
adjusted up or down. It applies an offset to the lighting input the marker lamps are tracking. If the lamps
are too bright, adjust this number down; if the lamps are too dim, adjust this number up. This setting is
configurable from -31 to +31. The default is 0.

Rev. 8 Page 5-85
5.4.6.6.2 Audio Panel Discretes Configuration
Access the Audio Panel Discrete Configuration page
by touching the Discretes key on the Audio Panel page.
The discrete input pin J3501-16 can be configured for
either Pilot PTC or Pilot ICS. The discrete input pin
J3502-30 can be configured for either Copilot PTC or
Copilot ICS. When configured as Push-To-Command
(PTC), these inputs allow the pilot and co-pilot to enter
voice commands while pressing the appropriate PTC
key. Voice commands are not approved under this STC.
When configured as ICS keys, these inputs allow the
pilot and co-pilot mic audio to be heard on the intercom
system (ICS) while pressing the appropriate ICS key.
The discrete input pin J3502-14 can be configured for
either Passenger Isolate or Passenger ICS. When
configured for Passenger Isolate, pressing this key will
toggle the intercom isolation state of the passengers.
When configured as Passenger ICS, this input allows
the audio from all passenger mics to be heard on the
intercom system (ICS) while pressed.
Figure 5-54 Audio Panel Discrete
Configuration Page

Rev. 8 Page 5-86
5.4.6.6.3 Audio Panel Connected Radios Configuration
From the Audio Panel Configuration page, touch the
Connected Radios key to configure radio and system
connections to the GMA 35. Compare the interfaced
radios in the rotorcraft to the GMA 35 pinout in
Appendix A to determine which radios are connected to
the applicable pins in the GMA 35. The following
radios can be configured as Present or Not Present:
• COM 2
• COM 3
• NAV 1
• NAV 2
• RCVR 3
• RCVR 4
• RCVR 5
• TEL
• Music 1
• Music 2
• Marker Beacon
For RCVR 3, RCVR 4, and RCVR 5, the type of radio
must also be configured. For each connected RCVR Figure 5-55 Audio Panel Connected
source, select the type of radio from those listed in Radios Page
Table 5-59.
Table 5-59 Radio Types
ADF 1 An Automatic Direction Finder (ADF) is connected to the RCVR input.
ADF 2 A second Automatic Direction Finder (ADF) is connected to the RCVR input.
DME 1 Distance Measuring Equipment (DME) is connected to the RCVR input.
DME 2 A second Distance Measuring Equipment (DME) is connected to the RCVR input.
AUX An Auxiliary radio is connected to the RCVR input.
When receiver 5 is connected as passenger input under the audio panel configuration
PASSENGER
page, the receiver 5 input will be configured for passenger mic audio.

Rev. 8 Page 5-87
5.4.6.7 GDL 88
NOTE
This STC does not cover the installation of the GDL 88H; refer to GDL 84H/88H Part 27
AML STC Installation Manual (P/N 190-01310-H0). The following instructions are
provided for reference only.
5.4.6.7.1 GDL 88 Diagnostics

The GDL 88 Diagnostics page is a useful tool for
diagnosing issues and troubleshooting problems that
arise during installation. These pages are also used for
the GDL 88H checkout procedures in the GDL 88H
installation manual, which must be followed.
5.4.6.7.1.1 System Information

This page is the same as the Unit Information page in
the GDL 88 Install Tool. The System Information page
displays device information, including the serial
number and software versions along with system
statistics.
5.4.6.7.1.2 Error Log

This page is the same as the Unit Assert Log page in the
GDL 88 Install Tool. The Error Log page allows the
GDL 88H assert log to be saved to an SD card or
cleared. Figure 5-56 GDL 88 Diagnostics Page
5.4.6.7.1.3 System Status

This page contains a list of GDL 88H system faults and ADS-B faults. A description of each fault and
troubleshooting procedures can be found in the GDL 88H installation manual.
5.4.6.7.1.4 Discrete Inputs

The Discrete Inputs diagnostics page displays the state of each of the discrete input pins on the GDL 88.
5.4.6.7.1.5 Discrete Outputs

The Discrete Outputs diagnostics page allows the state of each of the discrete outputs to be toggled
between active and inactive.
5.4.6.7.1.6 GPS/SBAS Data

The GPS/SBAS Data page displays the WAAS engine information and PPS status information. For
GDL 88 units with an internal WAAS engine, this page allows the GDL 88H internal WAAS engine to be
reset.

Rev. 8 Page 5-88
5.4.6.7.1.7 External Data
This page is the same as the Data Inputs page in the GDL 88 Install Tool. The External Data page
displays the data received on the GDL 88H from the other connected avionics.
5.4.6.7.1.8 ARINC 429 Inputs

The ARINC Inputs diagnostics page allows the display of ARINC 429 data that is being received over
each GDL 88H ARINC 429 port. Each port can be chosen for display by touching the Port key and
toggling between the input ports. Select a port to display. The GTN Xi will then display the label, SSM,
Data, and SDI for each GDL 88H ARINC 429 input port. This is useful for determining if the expected
labels are being received and also for troubleshooting incorrect or swapped wiring to the input ports. The
data log can be paused by toggling the Pause key. Clear the data log by touching Clear Log.
5.4.6.7.1.9 Serial Inputs

The RS-232 Inputs diagnostics page allows the display of serial data that is being received and is useful
for determining if the GDL 88H is receiving data on each connected port. Select the desired port by
touching the Port key and selecting the RS-232 channel from the list. The data log can be paused by
toggling the Pause key. Clear the data log by touching Clear Log.
5.4.6.7.1.10 HSDB (Ethernet)

The HSDB Diagnosis page allows the status of each HSDB port to be displayed. This page displays
whether or not each port is receiving data and displays whether the port is connected or not connected. The
configuration status of each installed HSDB LRU is also displayed.
5.4.6.7.2 GDL 88 Configuration

The GDL 88 Configuration page can be accessed by
touching the GDL 88 button on the External Systems
page and then touching the Configuration button.
Pressing the Set to Default Config key will reset the
GDL 88H to factory default settings.
The GDL 88 Install Tool is used to configure GDL 88H
settings for a specific installation. Changes made in the
configuration pages are immediately committed to the
GDL 88H.
Before configuring the GDL 88H, ensure the
Configuration mode status is “PASS” under the External
Systems → GDL 88 → Diagnostics → System Status
page.
Figure 5-57 GDL 88 Configuration Page

Rev. 8 Page 5-89
5.4.6.7.2.1 Aircraft
The Aircraft Configuration page allows configuration of rotorcraft information and settings. To access
this page, touch External Systems → GDL 88 → Configuration → Aircraft.
Figure 5-58 GDL 88 Aircraft Configuration Page
ICAO Address
Enter the assigned rotorcraft ICAO address code, eight octal digits. This code can be found in either of the
following locations:
 The rotorcraft registration certificate
 The N-number inquiry page of registry.faa.gov/aircraftinquiry.
CAUTION
Correct entry of the assigned rotorcraft ICAO address in the GDL 88H is critical.
Aircraft Call Sign

This allows the entry of the rotorcraft call sign (Tail Number). Typically, this is the US registration number
(N-number). Selections: A-Z, 0-9, #, and trailing space. # should be entered if the call sign is not available.
Mode 3/A VFR Code

Enter the VFR transponder code. This field has a range of 0000-7777.
This setting is used for the UAT anonymous mode feature (if enabled), where the transponder must be
tuned to this code before the GDL 88H is capable of transmitting a temporary address and a call sign of
“VFR.”
NOTE
The code must match the VFR code configured on the transponder. This is typically 1200
for US-registered rotorcraft.

Rev. 8 Page 5-90
Aircraft Category
This setting selects the rotorcraft emitter category for which the GDL 88H is installed. Select Rotorcraft.
Aircraft Length
Enter the length of the rotorcraft. This field has a range of 1 to 300 feet.
Aircraft Width
Enter the width of the rotorcraft. This field has a range of 1 to 300 feet.
Stall Speed
This setting is not used per this STC and should remain set to the default of 30 knots.
ADS-B Transmit
This setting enables or disables the GDL 88 UAT transmitter. If it is desired for the GDL 88 to transmit,
select Enabled; otherwise, select Disabled (default).
NOTE
The GDL 88 is capable of transmitting ADS-B messages while in Configuration mode.
Make sure the rotorcraft-assigned ICAO 24-bit address is entered prior to enabling the
GDL 88 UAT transmitter.
FIS-B Processing
This setting enables or disables the processing of Flight Information Service Broadcast (FIS-B). If it is
desired for the GDL 88 to process FIS-B, select Enabled (default); otherwise, select Disabled.
Internal GPS/SBAS
This setting is not used per this STC.
Transponder Interrogation
This setting enables or disables the transponder interrogation control panel interface. If it is desired for the
GDL 88H to communicate with the transponder wirelessly, select Enabled; otherwise, select Disabled.
Refer to GDL 84H/88H Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual for more information.
UAT Call Sign ID Logic

This setting configures whether the Mode 3/A Code (Squawk Code) is transmitted in the UAT ADS-B Out
message. This setting must be set to Enabled (default), allowing the GDL 88H to transmit the pilot-entered
Mode 3/A Code (Squawk Code) to FAA ground stations.
Equipment Status Annunciators

The equipment status annunciator setting allows the user to select whether single or dual annunciators have
been installed as part of the GDL 88H system.

Rev. 8 Page 5-91
Air/Ground Discrete
The GDL 88H Air/Ground discrete input is Active-Low and can be configured to interpret whether the
rotorcraft is airborne or on the ground based upon whether the input is grounded or open.
If the GDL 88H Air/Ground discrete is not connected, then select Not Installed (default). If the GDL 88H
Air/Ground discrete is connected, and the rotorcraft air/ground state is On-Ground when the input is
grounded, then select Active for Ground. If the Air/Ground discrete is connected, and the rotorcraft air/
ground state is airborne when the input is grounded, then select Active for Airborne.
Table 5-60 GDL 88 Air/Ground Discrete Configuration

Air/Ground Discrete Input
Air/Ground Discrete GDL 88H Air/Ground State
State
Not Installed N/A N/A
Open Airborne
Active for Ground
Grounded On-Ground
Open On-Ground
Active for Airborne
Grounded Airborne
Pressure Altitude Broadcast Inhibit Switch

This setting configures whether the GDL 88H is interfaced with an external switch for controlling pressure
altitude reporting. If an altitude reporting selection switch is installed and interfaced to the Pressure ALT
Broadcast Inhibit discrete, select Installed; otherwise, select Not Installed.
Anonymous Mode
NOTE
If a Mode S Transponder is installed with the GDL 88H, the UAT anonymity feature must
be disabled as to prevent two different rotorcraft addresses from being transmitted
(Transponder Mode S address and the GDL 88H temporary address).
This setting controls whether the UAT anonymity feature is available. Consult the rotorcraft operator for
guidance on whether this feature should be enabled. When enabled, and the flight crew selects the
anonymous mode with the transponder tuned to the VFR Code, the GDL 88H transmits a temporary
address instead of the assigned rotorcraft ICAO 24-bit address, and a call sign of “VFR.”
If it is desired to disable the UAT anonymity feature, select Unavailable (default). If it is desired to enable
the UAT anonymity feature controlled by an interfaced display, select Display Available. If it is desired to
enable the UAT anonymity feature controlled by an anonymous selection switch interfaced to the
Anonymous Mode discrete input, select Switch Available.

Rev. 8 Page 5-92
5.4.6.7.3 Antenna
The antenna page allows configuration of antenna
settings. To access this page, touch External Systems
→ GDL 88 → Configuration → Antenna.
5.4.6.7.3.1 UAT/1090 Antenna

These settings control antenna utilization and self-tests.
The top antenna setting determines utilization of the top
antenna for GDL 88DH units. A GDL 88DH with the
top antenna disabled will perform like a single antenna
unit. The top antenna will not be used for transmission
or reception and will not be self-tested. It is
recommended that GDL 88DH owners enable the top
antenna unless there is reason to do a single antenna
installation. These settings control whether the
GDL 88H antenna self-tests are performed.
If the top UAT/1090 antenna (GDL 88DH models only)
is of the DC grounded type, select Enabled; otherwise,
select Disabled. If the bottom UAT/1090 antenna is of
the DC grounded type, select Enabled; otherwise, select Figure 5-59 GDL 88 Antenna
Disabled. Refer to GDL 84H/88H Part 27 AML STC Configuration Page
Installation Manual for UAT/1090 antenna
information.
5.4.6.7.3.2 GDL 88 GPS/SBAS Antenna

These settings are not used per this STC.
5.4.6.7.3.3 External GPS/SBAS Source Antenna

These settings indicate the horizontal placement of the external GPS source(s) GPS/SBAS antenna(s).
If external GPS #1 is connected to the GDL 88 Time Mark 1, enter the external source’s GPS/SBAS
antenna longitudinal offset distance, rounded to the nearest foot, from the nose of the rotorcraft. Then enter
the lateral offset, as measured in feet (left or right, looking forward), from the centerline of the rotorcraft.
If external GPS #2 is connected to the GDL 88 Time Mark 2, enter the external source’s GPS/SBAS
antenna longitudinal offset, as measured in feet, from the nose of the rotorcraft. Then enter the lateral
offset, as measured in feet (left or right, looking forward), from the centerline of the rotorcraft.

Rev. 8 Page 5-93
5.4.6.7.4 Audio
This page configures the GDL 88H analog audio output
volume level and voice type.
1. Set the audio volume to an acceptable level as
described in GDL 84H/88H Part 27 AML STC
Installation Manual.
2. Select the desired voice gender as Male or
Female.
3. Touch Run Audio Test to check the audio
volume level.
Figure 5-60 GDL 88 Audio Configuration

Page
5.4.6.7.5 Ports
This page allows configuration of RS-232 and ARINC 429 input and output ports and HSDB connections.
Select the applicable interface with the key at the top of the screen to display the list of available and
configured ports.
Figure 5-61 GDL 88 Port Configuration Figure 5-62 GDL 88 Port Selection
Page

Rev. 8 Page 5-94
This page allows configuration of the RS-232 input ports and the RS-232 output ports. Refer to GDL 84H/
88H Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual for approved third-party equipment interfaces to the GDL 88.
Select the inputs and outputs to match the equipment that is interfaced to each channel. Refer to Table 5-61
(inputs) and Table 5-62 (outputs). Refer to GDL 84H/88H Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual for the
correct selections for each piece of interfaced equipment.
Table 5-61 RS-232 Input Selections

Disabled No unit connected to this RS-232 input.
Airdata Format 1 Provides altitude, airspeed, and altitude rate information. [1]
Altitude Format 1 Provides altitude information.
Altitude Format 3 Provides altitude information.
GNS Series #1 Provides GPS data and FIS-B requests.
GNS Series #2 Provides GPS data and FIS-B requests.
Provides Mode 3/A Code (Squawk Code), Ident Status, Transponder
GTX Mode C #1
Mode, and Parallel Gray Code Altitude.
GTX Mode C #2
Mode, and Parallel Gray Code Altitude.
GTX Mode S #1
Mode, Flight ID, and Parallel Gray Code Altitude.
GTX Mode S #2
Mode, Flight ID, and Parallel Gray Code Altitude.
SL Mode C Provides Mode 3/A Code (Squawk Code), Ident Status, Transponder
Format 1 #1 Mode, and Altitude.
Traffic Format 4 Provides traffic system status information.
Notes:
[1] Devices that convert Gillham (Gray) coded altitude data to serial data are not authorized
when using this port setting.
Table 5-62 RS-232 Output Selections

Disabled No unit connected to this RS-232 output.
GNS Series #1 Provides FIS-B and GDL 88 product information.
GNS Series #2 Provides FIS-B and GDL 88 product information.
GTX Mode C #1 Provides transponder #1 control commands.
GTX Mode C #2 Provides transponder #2 control commands.
GTX Mode S #1 Provides transponder #1 control commands.
GTX Mode S #2 Provides transponder #2 control commands.
Traffic Format 4 Traffic system control commands.

Rev. 8 Page 5-95
5.4.6.7.5.2 ARINC 429 Configuration
This page allows configuration of the ARINC 429 input ports and the ARINC 429 output ports. Select the
correct Format and Speed settings for each port. The correct setting is dependent upon the interfaced
equipment. Refer to Table 5-63 (inputs), Table 5-64 (outputs), and Table 5-65 (speed). Refer to GDL 84H/
88H Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual for the correct selections for each piece of interfaced
equipment.
Table 5-63 ARINC 429 Input Selections

Format Description Notes
Disabled No unit connected to the ARINC 429 input.
Select this format for the Air Data system, or the Air Data system #1
Airdata #1 in a dual Air Data system installation. Provides altitude, airspeed,
and altitude rate information.
Select this format for the Air Data system #2 in a dual Air Data
Airdata #2 system installation. Provides altitude, airspeed, and altitude rate
information.
Airdata/Heading
Airspeed, altitude rate, and heading information.
No Alt
Airdata/Heading
Pressure altitude, airspeed, altitude rate, and heading information.
w/Alt
Heading Select this format for heading information.
Radio Altimeter Select this format for radio altimeter information.
Traffic Format 1 Select this format for traffic information. [1]
Traffic Format 2 Select this format for traffic information. [2]
Traffic Format 3 Select this format for traffic information.
Notes:
[1] Traffic Format 1 configures DISCRETE OUT 1* and DISCRETE OUT 2* to function as traffic
system standby/operate and test control discretes.
[2] Traffic Format 2 configures DISCRETE OUT 1* and DISCRETE OUT 2* to function as traffic
system standby/operate and test control discretes.
Table 5-64 ARINC 429 Output Selections

Format Description
Disabled No unit connected to this ARINC 429 output.
Traffic Out Traffic and equipment status output.
Table 5-65 ARINC 429 Speed Selections

Speed Description
Low Standard low-speed ARINC 429 (nominally 12.5 kb per second)
High High-speed ARINC 429 (nominally 100 kb per second)

Rev. 8 Page 5-96
5.4.6.7.5.3 HSDB Configuration
This page configures which LRUs are installed on the GDL 88H HSDB network. From the available list of
LRUs, select either Enabled or Disabled.
GTN 6XX/7XX
Select Enabled.
GTS 8XX
Select Disabled if no GTS 8XX is installed or if a GTS 8XX is installed but the installation is not using the
HSDB interface for traffic correlation. Select Enabled if a GTS 8XX is installed and the HSDB interface is
being used for traffic correlation.
NOTE
GTS 8XX selection of Enabled configures DISCRETE OUT 1* and DISCRETE OUT 2* to
function as traffic system standby/operate and test control discretes.
NOTE
This setting should only be set to Enabled if the GTS 8XX is interfaced to the GDL 88H via
HSDB instead of ARINC 429 for traffic correlation. If the GTX 8XX is interfaced to the
GDL 88H using ARINC 429, select Disabled.

5.4.6.8 GSR 56 Configuration

If the GSR 56 Iridium transceiver is installed and connected to the GTN Xi, the GSR 56 features that will
be used must be enabled.
1. Go to the GSR 56 page from the External Systems page.
2. Touch on the desired features to be activated. When active, the key for the feature will be lit green.
3. Ensure the RUDICS Number setting is 0088160000576. If the RUDICS Number setting is
incorrect, touch Restore Defaults.
4. Ensure the SMS SCA setting is 881662900005. If the SMS SCA setting is incorrect, touch
Restore Defaults.
5.4.6.9 Weather Radar Configuration


Rev. 8 Page 5-97
5.5 Flight Stream 510
NOTE
A compatible portable electronic device with the Garmin Pilot application is required.
Visit Garmin’s website for a list of compatible devices.
NOTE
Flight Stream 510 wireless setup is performed in Normal Mode.
NOTE
If having trouble making a Wi-Fi or Bluetooth connection, cycle power to the unit and
retry.
NOTE
Connext setup (Wi-Fi or Bluetooth) only needs to be performed when connecting to a
device for the first time. Once a connection with a device has been made, the GTN Xi will
automatically connect to the device upon power-up.
NOTE
The Flight Stream 510 can be connected to up to four Bluetooth devices simultaneously
and store up to thirteen Bluetooth device pairings.
It is necessary to have the Garmin Pilot application on a PED if updating databases using a Flight
Stream 510 wireless card. When the GTN Xi is powered on in Normal mode with a Flight Stream 510
inserted into the data card slot, a prompt displays instructions for transferring databases. For more
information, download Garmin Pilot for Android or Garmin Pilot of iOS from garmin.com.
Wi-Fi Setup
1. Power on the GTN Xi in Normal mode.
2. From the home screen, navigate to the Connext Setup page from the System menu.
3. Wait for “Ready” to display on the WiFi Info button.
4. Touch the WiFi Info button.
5. To change the Wi-Fi name:
a. Touch the SSID button.
b. Type the desired Wi-Fi name and touch the Enter button.
6. To change the Wi-Fi password:
a. Touch the Password button.
b. Type the desired password and touch the Enter button.
7. Enable Wi-Fi connectivity on the PED. Once enabled, the Flight Stream 510 will be viewable in
the list of available devices.
8. On the PED, select the Flight Stream 510 from the list of available Wi-Fi networks and enter the
password. The default Wi-Fi name is “510-” followed by the last four digits of the MAC addresss
(e.g., 510-8672).
9. On the Garmin Pilot application, touch the Connext button.
10. Touch GTN under the Devices tab.

Rev. 8 Page 5-98
Bluetooth Setup
2. From the home screen, navigate to the Connext Setup page from the System menu.
3. Enable Bluetooth connectivity on the PED. Once enabled, the Flight Stream 510 will be viewable
in the list of available devices.
4. On the PED, select the Flight Stream 510 from the list of available Bluetooth devices. The default
Bluetooth name is “Flight Stream 510” followed by the last four digits of the MAC addresss
(e.g., Flight Stream 510 8672).
5. A pop-up will appear on the GTN Xi to confirm the new Bluetooth pairing. Select Yes to finish
pairing the device.

Rev. 8 Page 5-99
6 SYSTEM CHECKOUT
6.1 Ground Checks (Configuration Mode) ............................................................................................6-2

6.1.1 Main Indicator (Analog) Check .............................................................................................6-2
6.1.2 VOR/LOC/GS Indicator Checkout (GTN 650Xi/750Xi Only) .............................................6-2
6.1.3 Discrete Inputs Checkout .......................................................................................................6-3
6.1.4 Discrete Outputs Checkout ....................................................................................................6-3
6.1.5 HSDB Wiring Checkout ........................................................................................................6-4
6.1.6 Crossfill Check (Dual GTN Xi and/or GTN 6XX/7XX Installations Only) .........................6-4
6.1.7 HTerrain/HTAWS Audio Check (For Units with HTerrain Alerting or HTAWS Only) ......6-5
6.1.8 Radar Altimeter Check ...........................................................................................................6-6
6.1.9 Lighting Bus Interface Check ................................................................................................6-7
6.1.10 Air/Fuel Data Interface Check ...............................................................................................6-8
6.2 Ground Checks (Normal Mode) ......................................................................................................6-9
6.2.1 Display of Self-Test Data .......................................................................................................6-9
6.2.2 Signal Acquisition Check .....................................................................................................6-10
6.2.3 VHF COM Interference Check ............................................................................................6-10
6.2.4 VHF NAV Checkout (GTN 650Xi/750Xi Only) .................................................................6-11
6.2.5 VHF COM Checkout (GTN 635Xi/650Xi/750Xi Only) .....................................................6-12
6.2.6 Lighting Bus Operation Check ............................................................................................6-12
6.2.7 GMA 35 Audio Panel Checkout (GTN 7XX Xi Only) .......................................................6-12
6.2.8 HTerrain/HTAWS System Check (For Units with HTerrain Alerting/HTAWS Only) ......6-15
6.2.9 Interface Checks ...................................................................................................................6-16
6.2.10 Magnetic Compass Check ....................................................................................................6-21
6.2.11 EMI/RFI Check ....................................................................................................................6-21
6.2.12 Database Check ....................................................................................................................6-23
6.2.13 Magnetic Compass Recalibration ........................................................................................6-23
6.3 Flight Checks .................................................................................................................................6-24
6.3.1 GPS Flight Check .................................................................................................................6-24
6.3.2 VHF COM Flight Check (GTN 635Xi/650Xi/750Xi Only) ................................................6-24
6.3.3 VOR Flight Check (GTN 650Xi/750Xi Only) ....................................................................6-24
6.3.4 ILS Flight Check (GTN 650Xi/750Xi Only) .......................................................................6-25
6.3.5 HTerrain/HTAWS Audio Flight Check (HTerrain/HTAWS-Equipped Units Only) ..........6-25
6.3.6 Marker Beacon Receiver Flight Check (GMA 35) ..............................................................6-26
6.4 Documentation Checks ..................................................................................................................6-27
6.4.1 Rotorcraft Flight Manual Supplement .................................................................................6-27
6.4.2 Instructions for Continued Airworthiness (ICA) .................................................................6-28
6.4.3 Checkout Log .......................................................................................................................6-29

Rev. 8 Page 6-1
6.1 Ground Checks (Configuration Mode)
The following checks are completed in Configuration mode. Refer to Section .
6.1.1 Main Indicator (Analog) Check
NOTE
If the GTN Xi is interfaced to an electronic HSI/EFIS, and the main indicator analog
output is not used, this check is not required.
If the GTN Xi is interfaced to an analog indicator on the main CDI/OBS (P1001), perform the following
steps:
1. Navigate to the GTN Diagnostics page. Refer to Section 5.4.5.
2. Navigate to the Main Indicator (Analog) page.
3. Verify correct operation of the lateral deviation, flag, and TO/FROM flag using the corresponding
selections.
4. Verify correct operation of the vertical deviation and flag using the corresponding selections.
5. Verify correct operation of the OBS knob using the OBS Resolver Setting display. At 30°
increments around the OBS card, ensure the indicated value is within 2° of the value set on the
indicator. If the resolver is not within 2°, calibrate the resolver as described in Section 5.4.3.5.
6.1.2 VOR/LOC/GS Indicator Checkout (GTN 650Xi/750Xi Only)

If the GTN Xi is interfaced to an analog indicator on the VOR/ILS Indicator output (P1004), perform the
following steps:
1. Navigate to the GTN Diagnostics page.
2. Navigate to the VOR/ILS Indicator (Analog) Diagnostics page.
3. Verify correct operation of the lateral deviation, flag, and TO/FROM flag using the corresponding
selections.
4. Verify correct operation of the vertical deviation and flag using the corresponding selections.
5. Verify correct operation of the OBS knob using the Selected Course display. At 30° increments
around the OBS card, ensure the indicated value is within 2° of the value set on the indicator. If the
resolver is not within 2°, calibrate the resolver as described in Section 5.4.3.12.

Rev. 8 Page 6-2
6.1.3 Discrete Inputs Checkout
If the GTN Xi is connected to any external switches,
complete the following checkout procedure:
2. Navigate to the Discrete Inputs page.
3. For each external switch that is connected,
exercise the switch source and check the
“ACTIVE” or “INACTIVE” indication on the
screen correlating to the appropriate input and
ensure it is displayed correctly.
4. If the state of the switch/LRU is not displayed
correctly, check the wiring to the discrete input
and ensure it is not shorted to ground. Also,
ensure the correct type of switch/discrete is
connected to the GTN Xi.
Figure 6-1 Discrete Inputs Page
6.1.4 Discrete Outputs Checkout

If the GTN Xi is connected to any external
annunciators/systems, complete the following checkout
procedure:
2. Navigate to the Discrete Outputs page.
3. For each annunciator output that is connected to
an external system or annunciator, toggle the
output ACTIVE (corresponding box is filled
green and displays “ACTIVE”) and
INACTIVE (corresponding box is not filled
green and displays “INACTIVE”) by touching
the key corresponding to the output.
4. Verify the appropriate external annunciator
illuminates when the output is set to ACTIVE
and extinguishes when the output is set to
INACTIVE. If the output is not connected to an
annunciator, but provides an input to another
system, verify the other system receives the
signal.
5. If the annunciator and/or other system does not Figure 6-2 Discrete Outputs Page
receive the signal, verify the wiring and ensure
it is connected properly and not shorted to ground.

Rev. 8 Page 6-3
6.1.5 HSDB Wiring Checkout
If HSDB wiring has been installed for other Garmin
LRUs that interface via HSDB, follow the procedure
below to ensure it has been installed and configured
correctly:
1. Navigate to the GTN Diagnostics page from
the Configuration mode home page.
2. Touch the HSDB (Ethernet) key.
3. Ensure any LRUs connected via HSDB are
powered on and properly configured.
4. Ensure the port status displays “Connected”
and “Receiving” for each Ethernet port that has
HSDB wiring connected to it.
5. If the previous step did not perform correctly,
check the electrical connections and
configuration setup.
Figure 6-3 HSDB Diagnostics Page
6.1.6 Crossfill Check (Dual GTN Xi and/or GTN 6XX/7XX Installations Only)
1. Power on all GTN Xi and GTN 6XX/7XX units.
2. On each GTN Xi and GTN 6XX/7XX, navigate to the HSDB Diagnostics page shown in
Figure 6-3.
3. For the port connecting the cross-side GTN Xi or GTN 6XX/7XX, check the Ethernet Port Status
and ensure “Connected” is displayed under Connection and “Receiving” is displayed under Data.
4. If the previous steps do not perform correctly, check the electrical connections and configuration
setup. The connected ports must be configured as Connected for each GTN Xi and GTN 6XX/
7XX. On the Interfaced Equipment page, the cross-side navigator must be set to Present.

Rev. 8 Page 6-4
6.1.7 HTerrain/HTAWS Audio Check (For Units with HTerrain Alerting or HTAWS Only)
NOTE
The audio panel must also be powered on for the HTerrain/HTAWS audio check. This
checkout procedure must be performed on the ground with the engine running.
NOTE
If the alert volume necessary to achieve compliance with the criteria is more than 90%,
then increase the gain of the input on the audio panel in accordance with the audio panel
manufacturers data. Refer to Section 5.4.6.6.1.2 for instructions on configuring alert
audio gains for the GMA 35 audio panel. THE MINIMUM ALLOWABLE VOLUME FOR
HTAWS ALERT VOLUME IS 85%. NO VOLUME LEVEL BELOW THIS VALUE MAY BE
SET BY THE INSTALLER.
Figure 6-4 Audio Configuration Page
The audio volume has an initial default of 80% of the maximum value. The HTerrain/HTAWS volume
needs to be set to ensure that aural alerts are audible under all anticipated noise environmental conditions.
This procedure is dependent on the use of aviation headsets and is best accomplished using the same types
of headsets used by the operator of the rotorcraft (e.g., ANR headsets, flight helmets, etc.). Use multiple
headset types when establishing the volume level. If a noise canceling (ANR) headset is used, then noise
canceling must be set to Active. Ensure the ANR headset batteries are charged.
1. Start the engine using normal starting procedures.
2. Set engine/rotor RPM to 100% of maximum. This will allow HTAWS audio volume setting to be
evaluated in an operating cockpit environment.
4. Tune to a local COM frequency with large amounts of audio traffic (e.g.,ATIS, tower, etc.).
5. Set the headset, COM radio volume, and intercom to nominal volume levels.

Rev. 8 Page 6-5
6. Restart the GTN Xi in Configuration mode.
7. Reset the headset volume to the minimum level.
9. Touch the Audio key.
10. From the Audio Configuration page, select Terrain as the test sound.
11. Verify the alert is loud when played, attention-getting, and clearly intelligible. The HTAWS alert
volume should be slightly louder than the volume of COM and intercom transmissions.
12. From the Audio Configuration page, select Terrain (Quiet) as the test sound.
13. Verify the alert remains audible when played. The HTAWS alert volume should be slightly quieter
than the volume of COM and intercom transmissions.
14. If the volume criteria are not achieved, touch the Alert Volume increase or decrease arrows to
change the volume until an acceptable volume is achieved.
15. Re-adjust the volume as needed to ensure the HTAWS audio messages will be heard with headset
volume at minimum.
16. Set the headset, COM radio volume, and intercom to nominal volume levels.
17. Select Terrain as the test sound.
18. Verify the alert is audible and clearly intelligible over the COM radio and intercom
communication.
19. Verify the alert is not too loud or distracting.
20. If the TAWS alert requires adjustment, repeat procedure.
6.1.8 Radar Altimeter Check

If a radar altimeter has been connected to the GTN Xi, the interface should be verified as described in this
section. Verify the radar altimeter is powered on and functioning for this check:
2. Touch the Diagnostics key on the Configuration mode page.
3. Touch the Main Data Inputs key.
4. Scroll to Radio Altimeter Height.
5. Verify a valid height is displayed in the field.
6. If dashed lines are displayed, verify the wiring between the radar altimeter and the GTN Xi.

Rev. 8 Page 6-6
6.1.9 Lighting Bus Interface Check
The display and key backlighting on the GTN Xi can track an external lighting/dimmer bus input and use it
to vary the display and key backlight levels accordingly.
Figure 6-5 Lighting Bus Configuration Page
This check verifies the interface is connected correctly.
CAUTION
When 14 VDC or 28 VDC lighting buses are connected to the GTN Xi, connection of the
rotorcraft lighting bus to the incorrect input pins can cause damage to the GTN Xi. Always
start this test with the dimming bus at the lowest setting and slowly increase the
brightness. If the lighting level displayed on the GTN Xi does not increase as the lighting
is increased in brightness, verify the wiring is correct before proceeding.
1. Ensure the lighting bus is set to its minimum setting.

2. On the Configuration mode home page, touch the GTN Setup key.
3. Touch the Lighting key.
4. Touch the Configure Lighting Bus key.
5. Slowly vary the lighting bus level that is connected to the GTN Xi.
6. Verify the Source Input Level value displayed on the configuration screen tracks the lighting bus
setting.
7. Continue to maximum brightness and verify proper operation.

Rev. 8 Page 6-7
6.1.10 Air/Fuel Data Interface Check
NOTE
The heading displayed on the Main Data Inputs page is TRUE heading.
NOTE
After applying power to an altitude source, it may take several minutes to warm-up.
During the warm-up period, the pressure altitude display on the GTN Xi will be dashed
out.
The GTN Xi can receive fuel and altitude data from an external source. This check verifies the GTN Xi is
receiving data from these sources. Ensure the GTN Xi is powered on and in Configuration mode. If the
following steps do not perform correctly, check the electrical connections (Appendix B) and configuration
setup (Appendix Section C.1.3) for the interfaced data source.
1. Navigate to the GTN Diagnostics page from the Configuration mode home page.
2. Touch the Main Data Inputs key.
3. If there are multiple sources providing data to the GTN Xi, remove power from all but one source.
4. Verify the appropriate data is displayed and agrees with the active source.
5. If there are multiple sources, remove power from the currently active source and apply power to
another source that has not been checked.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all available sources have been checked.

Rev. 8 Page 6-8
6.2 Ground Checks (Normal Mode)
For the following checks, cycle power on the GTN Xi and power it on in Normal mode.
6.2.1 Display of Self-Test Data

Following normal power-up, the database pages are displayed, followed by the Instrument Panel
Self-Test page. Touching Continue displays the Instrument Panel Self-Test page. During this time, the
electrical outputs are activated and set to the values listed in Table 6-1. These values will also be displayed
on a GDU interfaced to the GTN Xi during self-test. Touch Continue to acknowledge the Instrument
Panel Self-Test page. This is not a required check, although this page can be useful for troubleshooting
installation problems.
Table 6-1 Self-Test Values
Parameter Self-Test Value
Course Deviation Half-scale left deviation, TO indication, flag pulled
Glideslope/Vert. Deviation Half-scale up deviation, flag pulled
Annunciators All On
The GTN Xi displays the OBS value (149.5° if interfaced to an HSI with
Selected Course (OBS)
driven course pointer).
Desired Track 149.5° (Displayed as 150°)
Items below are not displayed on the Instrument Panel Self-Test page
Distance to Go 10.0 nautical miles
Time to Go 3m:59s
Bearing to Waypoint (RMI) 135°
Active Waypoint “GARMN”
Groundspeed 150 knots
Present Position N 39°04.05’, W 94°53.86’
Waypoint Alert Active
Phase of Flight En Route
Message Alert Active
Leg/OBS Mode Leg Mode
GPS Integrity Invalid
Flight Director commands 0° bank (level flight) for 5 seconds; commands
Roll-Steering increasing right bank at 1°/sec for 5 seconds; commands 5° right bank for
(if applicable) 5 seconds; commands decreasing right bank at 1°/sec for 5 seconds, until
command is 0° bank again. This cycle repeats continuously

Rev. 8 Page 6-9
6.2.2 Signal Acquisition Check
NOTE
All other avionics should be turned off at the start of this test with the GTN Xi powered on.
NOTE
After installation, the initial acquisition of position can take up to 20 minutes. Subsequent
acquisitions will not take as long.
Ensure the GTN Xi is able to acquire sufficient satellites to compute a GPS position. From the home page,
touch the System key and then touch the GPS Status key. Under GPS Solution, ensure that a 3D Fix or
3D Diff Fix is obtained. If the unit is unable to acquire satellites, move the rotorcraft away from
obstructions that might be shading GPS reception. If the GPS solution does not improve, check the GPS
antenna installation.
Once GPS position information is available, perform the following steps:
1. On the GPS Status page, verify the LAT/LON agree with a known reference position.
2. While monitoring the GPS Status page, turn on other avionics one at a time.
3. Check the GPS signal reception to ensure sure there is no significant signal degradation.
4. Before proceeding with the VHF COM Interference Check (Section 6.2.3), ensure that any
connected equipment is transmitting and/or receiving data from the GTN Xi and is functioning
properly.
6.2.3 VHF COM Interference Check

Certain non-aviation radios, including marine transceivers, can interfere with civil aviation navigation and
surveillance equipment, including the GTN Xi. When installing GTN Xi equipment, it is the responsibility
of the installer to ensure the GTN Xi modification is compatible with all previous rotorcraft modifications.
Garmin recommends that whenever a GTN Xi is installed in a rotorcraft that has been modified with non-
aviation radios, particular care should be exercised to verify these do not interfere with proper function of
the GTN Xi.
Special care should also be taken to ensure there is no interference with the GTN Xi if non-aviation radios
are installed in a rotorcraft after a GTN Xi has been installed. If interference is found, it can be addressed
by relocating antennas, rerouting cables, using filters to attenuate unintentional harmonic frequency
transmissions, or using various other techniques to eliminate the interference. It may be necessary to
remove or replace the interfering radio with a model that does not interfere with the proper functioning of
the GTN Xi. If any EMI/RFI is present, it must be resolved prior to returning the rotorcraft to service.
If you are testing a transmitter from a non-aviation device, each frequency must be verified by transmitting
for at least 30 seconds on each channel.
Once the Signal Acquisition Test (Section 6.2.2) has been completed, perform the following steps:
1. Navigate to the Satellite Status page and verify that at least seven satellites have been acquired by
the GTN Xi.
2. Verify the GPS “LOI” flag is out of view.
3. Select 121.150 MHz on the COM transceiver to be tested.
4. Transmit for a period of 35 seconds.
5. Verify the GPS “LOI” flag does not come into view.

Rev. 8 Page 6-10
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the following frequencies:
a. 25 kHz COM Channel Spacing:
121.15 MHz 131.22 MHz
121.17 MHz 131.25 MHz
121.20 MHz 131.27 MHz
121.22 MHz 131.30 MHz
121.25 MHz 131.32 MHz
131.20 MHz 131.35 MHz
b. For VHF radios with 8.33 kHz channel spacing, include the following frequencies in addition
to those listed above:
121.185 MHz 130.285 MHz
121.190 MHz 131.290 MHz
7. Repeat steps 3 through 6 for all remaining COM transceivers installed in the rotorcraft.
8. If the rotorcraft is TCAS-equipped, turn on the TCAS system and verify that GPS position remains
valid (if position is lost, the status on the GPS Status page will change to “ACQUIRING”).
9. If rotorcraft is SATCOM-equipped, use the SATCOM system and verify that GPS position remains
valid (if position is lost, the status on the GPS Status page will change to “ACQUIRING”).
10. If the GPS “LOI” flag comes into view, refer to Section 3.3.11 for options to improve
performance.
6.2.4 VHF NAV Checkout (GTN 650Xi/750Xi Only)

Touch the CDI key to select VLOC mode, which is indicated by a green “VLOC” annunciation on the
bottom-center of the display. Check the VOR reception with ground equipment, operating VOT or VOR,
and verify audio and Morse code ID functions (if possible). Tune a localizer frequency and verify the CDI
needle and NAV flag, and VDI needle and GS flag operation.
6.2.4.1 NAV Audio Check (For Non-GMA 35 Installations)

1. Ensure the audio panel is powered on.
2. Plug in a headset at pilot and co-pilot position.
3. Tune the GTN 650Xi/750Xi NAV receiver to a local VOR station.
4. Ensure the Morse code identifier is being received over the crew headsets.
5. If the audio is not audible, verify the wiring connections to the audio panel.
6. Ensure the audio volume is sufficient for all anticipated cockpit noise conditions.
7. Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each installed GTN Xi NAV receiver.

Rev. 8 Page 6-11
6.2.5 VHF COM Checkout (GTN 635Xi/650Xi/750Xi Only)
6.2.5.1 Antenna Check
If desired, the antenna VSWR can be checked using an in-line wattmeter in the antenna coaxial using
frequencies near both ends of the band. The VSWR should be < 2:1. A VSWR of 2:1 will cause a drop in
output power of approximately 12%.
6.2.5.2 Receiver/Transmitter Operation

Tune the unit to a local VHF frequency and verify the receiver output produces a clear and understandable
audio output. Verify the transmitter functions properly by contacting another station and getting a report of
reliable communications.
6.2.6 Lighting Bus Operation Check

For each lighting input source, verify the following:
• Each installed GTN Xi display is bright enough to allow the displayed data on the map page to be
easily discernible in direct sunlight
• Each installed GTN Xi display can be dimmed to a level that is comfortable in full dark operating
conditions while still allowing the data displayed on the map page to be easily discernible (e.g., a
dark hangar)
• The brightness of each installed GTN Xi display is acceptable when the lighting bus is varied from
full bright to full dim
• Each installed GTN Xi display brightness matches the brightness of other installed avionics
displays in the cockpit
6.2.7 GMA 35 Audio Panel Checkout (GTN 7XX Xi Only)

6.2.7.1 Failsafe Operation Check
NOTE
Use of a true mono headset is required for this check to ensure proper wiring even if a
stereo jack is provided in the installation. Wiring left channel (tip contact) and right
channel (ring contact) backwards will cause Failsafe mode not to function with mono
headsets. Use of a true mono headset is required for this check (not a stereo headset with a
mono/stereo switch because headset manufactures differ on how they accomplish this
switching). This will guarantee the condition of the right channel (ring terminal) being
shorted to the return (sleeve terminal) by the mono headset’s plug. During power-on
operation, this short will not damage the audio panel.
NOTE
In the following procedural steps outlined below, allow for variation in the configuration
settings for the particular installation.
NOTE
If the configuration setting COM 1 is Connected as COM 2 is set to “True” then the
COM 2 microphone should be exercised rather than COM 1. Refer to Section 5.4.6.6.1.

Rev. 8 Page 6-12
1. Remove power from the GMA 35.
2. Check the failsafe operation by exercising the COM1 microphone, microphone key, and audio
over the pilot’s headphones.
3. Verify that COM1 can key and transmit the pilot’s mic audio by verifying received sidetone or
checking reception of the transmission with another radio tuned to receive this transmission (verify
Pilot PTT and mic operation is delivered to this transceiver).
4. If the failsafe warning alert input is connected, verify the audio source connected to the failsafe
warn input can be heard while the GMA 35 is powered off.
5. Power back on the unit to continue the checkout procedure.
6.2.7.2 COM Transceiver Operational Check
NOTE
Depending on configuration settings, the mic-selected COM radio may mute audio from
other COM radios.
NOTE
Depending on configuration settings, other transceivers may be muted during transmit.
Also, the audio panel may mute the speaker during PTT.
1. Connect a headset to the pilot’s headset output and mic input jack.
2. Verify that each installed transceiver (COM) can be heard when selected.
3. Verify that COM radio sidetone is appropriate and can be heard under all operating conditions.
4. Verify that each installed transceiver keys for transmission and transmits clear audio from the
pilot’s mic when selected for transmission and the Pilot PTT key is pressed. Because the audio
panel can be configured to simulate received sidetone internally, verifying transmission with a
separate radio not in the system is recommended.
5. Move the headset to the co-pilot’s headset jacks and verify that any one of the installed
transceivers (testing each is not necessary) receives and transmits co-pilot mic properly as above.
6.2.7.3 NAV Audio Check

Ensure the GMA 35 and each installed NAV receiver is powered on.
1. Tune the NAV receiver to a local VOR station.
2. Verify the Morse code identifier is being received over the crew headsets.
3. If the audio is not heard, verify the wiring to the audio panel.
4. Verify the audio volume is sufficient for all anticipated cockpit noise conditions.
5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for each installed NAV receiver.

Rev. 8 Page 6-13
6.2.7.4 Alert Audio Check
If there is an alert audio source connected to the GMA 35, the interface should be verified as described
below:
1. Trigger the alert audio source to produce audio (e.g., if a traffic system is installed, command the
traffic system into Self-test mode; if an HTAWS system is installed, command the HTAWS system
into Self-test mode).
2. Verify the alert audio source is heard in the pilot and co-pilot headsets and the audio volume is
sufficient for all anticipated cockpit noise conditions. Adjust the audio volume level as needed,
following the instructions in Section 5.4.6.6.1.2.
3. If the alert audio source is not heard in the crew headsets, check the wiring from the source to the
GMA 35 alert audio inputs.
4. Repeat this procedure for each alert audio source connected to the GMA 35.
6.2.7.5 Intercom System (ICS) Check
NOTE
If a monaural headset is plugged into any stereo phone jack position, no damage will occur to
the GMA 35. In the case of plugging a monaural headset into any passenger position, any
stereo listener will lose one channel when another passenger plugs in a monaural headset.
1. Place the audio panel into ALL ICS mode (refer to GTN Xi Series Pilot’s Guide) so all ICS
positions hear all others.
2. De-select or turn off other audio sources (e.g., marker beacon, transceivers, receivers, alerts).
Some configurations may mute passenger intercom audio to crew when rotorcraft audio is present.
3. From the pilot headset position, verify the pilot, co-pilot, and all passenger mic inputs can be heard
in the pilot’s headset when speaking into the mic input under test (adjust pilot ICS volume, if
necessary).
4. Speak into the pilot’s mic and verify that pilot mic audio is heard in the co-pilot headset (adjust
co-pilot ICS volume, if necessary) and in each passenger headset (adjust passenger ICS volume, if
necessary).
6.2.7.6 Rotorcraft Receivers Check
1. Select the audio source for each avionics unit installed in the rotorcraft and check for audio over
the headsets.
2. Touch the Cabin Speaker key and verify that any selected audio is heard over the speaker.
6.2.7.7 Music System Check (If Installed)

1. Set the intercom to the ALL mode.
2. Connect a stereo audio source to Music 1 or Music 2. Verify that stereo audio is heard over the
pilot headset position.
3. Tune a station on COM 1 and verify the sound is muted by active COM 1 audio (break squelch on
COM 1, if necessary).
4. Verify that stereo audio is also heard in the passenger headsets.

Rev. 8 Page 6-14
6.2.7.8 Bluetooth Audio Check (GMA 35c Only)
While on the ground, power on the GTN 725Xi/750Xi and GMA 35c. A compatible Android or iOS PED
is required.
NOTE
To ensure telephone audio is available, a Bluetooth-compatible phone is needed.
1. Navigate to the GMA 35c page by touching System → Connext Setup → GMA 35c.
2. Verify Bluetooth is enabled.
3. On the PED, view the list of available Bluetooth devices.
4. Select the device that matches the Bluetooth name shown on the GTN Xi screen.
5. Ensure the PED is paired with the GTN Xi. A green checkmark is displayed by the paired device.
6. Touch Intercom on the GTN Xi.
7. Touch Bluetooth Audio and set distribution to Pilot, Co-pilot, and Passenger.
8. Touch Radio to mute Bluetooth during radio transmissions.
9. Touch Intercom to mute Bluetooth during intercom transmissions.
10. Verify the audio from the PED is distributed to the selected positions.
11. Tune and monitor a COM frequency to make sure the communications over the radio are easily
heard over the audio.
NOTE
If different values are used for the telephone and audio volume settings, repeat this
procedure while making a call from a Bluetooth-compatible phone.
12. Adjust the Bluetooth volume as necessary.
6.2.8 HTerrain/HTAWS System Check (For Units with HTerrain Alerting/HTAWS Only)
NOTE
A 3D GPS position fix is required to conduct this check.
While on the ground, power on the GTN Xi and audio panel following normal power-up procedures.
1. Navigate to the Terrain page from the home page.
2. Touch the Menu key.
3. Touch the Test Terrain or Test HTAWS key.
4. Wait until the HTerrain Alerting/HTAWS self-test completes (10-15 seconds) to hear the HTerrain/
HTAWS system status aural message.
a. The aural message “Terrain system test OK” or “HTAWS system test OK” will be
annunciated if the HTerrain/HTAWS system is functioning properly.
b. The aural message “Terrain system failure” or “HTAWS system failure” will be annunciated
if the HTerrain/HTAWS system is not functioning properly. Also, “Terrain Fail” or
“HTAWS FAIL” will appear in amber on the screen.
5. If no audio message is heard, then a fault exists within the audio system or associated wiring and
the HTerrain/HTAWS capability must be considered non-functional. Verify the wiring to the audio
panel.

Rev. 8 Page 6-15
6.2.9 Interface Checks
6.2.9.1 GMA 35 Interface Check
1. With both the GTN Xi and GMA 35 powered on, navigate to the home page and touch the Audio
Panel key.
2. Ensure that a red “X” is not displayed over the Audio Panel key.
After configuring the audio panel, an in-rotorcraft checkout may be performed with a good microphone,
headset, speaker, and avionics receivers. For testing the marker beacon, use a ramp tester that transmits a
75 MHz marker beacon test signal or perform the flight check outlined in Section 6.3.6.
For instructions on how to operate the GMA 35 in Normal mode during the installation checkout
procedures, refer to GTN Xi Series Pilot’s Guide/GMA 35 Pilot’s Guide. Verify every function of the
GMA 35 operates correctly. Ensure the GMA 35 circuit breaker is pressed in and is receiving power.
6.2.9.2 GSR 56 Iridium® Check
NOTE
When testing the GSR 56, the rotorcraft must be located outside and have an unobstructed
view of the sky.
NOTE
For additional information on using the GSR 56 features, refer to GTN Xi Series Pilot’s
Guide.
NOTE
To use the position reporting feature of the GSR 56, a short burst data (SBD) Iridium
account is required. To use the phone feature of the GSR 56, an Iridium voice account is
required. To use the SMS feature of the GSR 56, an Iridium SMS account is required. To
use the weather feature of the GSR 56, an Iridium RUDICS account is required. For more
information on how to subscribe to the services offered by the GSR 56, refer to GSR 56
Installation Manual.
If the GSR 56 Iridium transceiver is installed and connected to the GTN Xi, check the operation as follows:
2. If position reporting is enabled, navigate to the Iridium page in the Utilities page group and touch
the Position Reporting key.
3. Verify the Reporting Status is not “Unavailable.”
4. If the Iridium phone is enabled, navigate to the Iridium Phone page in the Iridium page group.
5. Verify the Phone Status is not “Unavailable.”
6. Verify a phone call can be placed.
NOTE
The following steps should only be completed if CONNEXT Weather is enabled. In order
to receive weather updates, the GSR 56 being tested must be registered and the
registration access code must be entered into the GSR 56 using the GTN Xi.
7. Navigate to the Connext page in the Weather page group.

Rev. 8 Page 6-16
8. Verify the Connext settings can be found by touching Menu.
9. If the GSR 56 is registered, touch the Menu key and select the CONNEXT Data Request option
under CONNEXT Settings.
10. Verify that weather is displayed on the map. Refer to GTN Xi Series Pilot’s Guide for information
on requesting Connext data.
6.2.9.3 Ryan TCAD Traffic System Interface Check

If a Ryan TCAD has been connected to the GTN Xi, the traffic interface should be verified as described in
this section:
1. Navigate to the Traffic page by touching the Traffic key on the GTN Xi home page.
2. Verify that “NO DATA” is not displayed in yellow on the center of the Traffic page.
3. Using the Shield Setup under the Traffic menu, verify the shield mode can be changed.
6.2.9.4 ARINC 429 Traffic System Interface Check

If a Garmin GTS 8XX Traffic system, L-3 Communications SKY497/SKY899 SkyWatch sensor, or a
Honeywell (Bendix/King) KTA 810 TAS/KMH 820 IHAS has been connected to the GTN Xi via
ARINC 429, the traffic interface should be verified as described in this section:
1. Navigate to the Traffic page by touching the Traffic key on the GTN Xi home page.
2. Verify “NO DATA” is not displayed in yellow on the center of the Traffic page.
3. If the GTN Xi is configured to control the traffic system, verify the traffic system mode can be
changed from STBY to OPER. Refer to Section 5.4.3.9.
4. Switch the traffic system mode to STBY, and then run the traffic self-test from the menu.
5. Verify the traffic system executes a self-test and that a self-test pattern is displayed on the GTN Xi
traffic display.
6. Restart the GTN Xi in Configuration mode.
7. On the Traffic page in the External Systems page group, verify there is data displayed in the
Altitude field.
6.2.9.5 GDL 69/69A Interface Check

If a Garmin GDL 69 has been connected to the GTN Xi, the interface should be verified as described in
Section 6.2.9.5.1. If a Garmin GDL 69A has been connected to the GTN Xi, the interface should be
verified as described in Section 6.2.9.5.1 and Section 6.2.9.5.2. Each of these procedures involves
verifying the satellite signal is acquired and tracked. Locate the rotorcraft where there is a clear view of the
southeastern or southwestern sky. SiriusXM Satellite radio satellites are located above the equator over the
eastern and western coasts of the continental United States.
NOTE
The following sections only verify the correct interface of GDL 69/69A to the GTN Xi. It
does not activate the GDL 69 SiriusXM data link radio. Complete instructions for
activating the SiriusXM data link radio can be found in GDL 69 Series SiriusXM Satellite
Radio Activation Instructions.

Rev. 8 Page 6-17
6.2.9.5.1 SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Weather Checkout Procedure
1. On the home page, touch the System key.
2. Touch the External LRUs key.
3. Touch the More Info key next to GDL 69.
4. Verify the Data Radio ID field has a valid ID. For a GDL 69A, the Audio Radio ID field should
also display a valid ID.
5. Verify that at least one subscribed weather product turns green on the GDL 69 Status page. This
may take several minutes. This will indicate the weather products are being received.
During SiriusXM activation, “Detecting Activation” will be displayed in the Subscription Level field on
the SiriusXM Information page, and “Aviator” or “Aviator Pro” will be displayed once the SiriusXM
signal is detected.
6.2.9.5.2 SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Audio Checkout Procedure (GDL 69A Only)
NOTE
If the SiriusXM Satellite Radio audio subscription has not been activated, audio is
available only on Channel 1. If the audio subscription has been activated, audio should be
available on multiple channels.
1. On the home page, touch the Music key.
2. Ensure the GDL 69A audio is not muted.
3. Verify that audio can be heard over the headsets.
4. Adjust the volume to verify the data path is working correctly.
5. Ensure the volume is at an appropriate level.
6.2.9.6 External RMI/OBI Interface Check (GTN 650Xi/750Xi Only)

The GTN Xi VOR RMI/OBI output can be used to drive an RMI (or OBI) navigation indicator. This check
verifies the RMI/OBI is receiving data from the GTN Xi. If the following steps do not perform correctly,
check the electrical connections and configuration setup.
NOTE
The rotorcraft heading system must be operating properly in order for the RMI needle to
point correctly.
6.2.9.6.1 VOR OBI Output

If the VOR OBI output from the GTN Xi is connected to an RMI navigation indicator verify the interface
as described in this section.
1. Power on the equipment.
2. If installed, set the RMI select switch to the VLOC position.
3. Tune a local VOR station or use a simulated signal from an approved VOR Test System.
4. Verify the RMI needle swings and points toward the VOR station.

Rev. 8 Page 6-18
6.2.9.7 TIS (Garmin GTX 33/330/335/335R) Interface Test
If a Garmin GTX 33/330/335/335R has been connected to the GTN Xi, the traffic interface should be
verified as described in this section:
1. On the home page, touch the Traffic key.
2. Verify “TIS FAIL” is not displayed in the upper-left corner under Traffic Status.
3. Verify “NO DATA” is not displayed in yellow over the ownship symbol.
4. On the upper-left corner of the Traffic Map page, verify the status of the traffic system is either
“TIS Standby” or “TIS Operating/Unavailable” (i.e., “TAS” should not be displayed).
The following additional steps should only be completed if the GTN Xi is controlling the traffic system:
5. Pull the transponder circuit breaker and verify the air data fields have a red “X”.
6. If a squat switch or airspeed switch is connected to the GTX, ensure that it is in AIR mode.
7. Alternate touching the STANDBY key and OPERATE key to change the mode of the traffic
system. It may take several seconds for the traffic system to change modes.
8. Verify the mode of the traffic system can be changed.
6.2.9.8 Transponder Interface Check

If the GTN Xi is interfaced to a GTX 32/33/335R/345R remote transponder or a GTX 327/328/330/335/
345 configured as a remote transponder, the following checks must be completed with the GTN Xi in
Normal mode:
1. Power on the transponder.
2. On the GTN Xi home page, ensure there is no red “X” over the transponder data field.
3. Touch the XPDR key.
4. Enter a code using the keypad and then touch Enter. Verify the code that was entered is displayed
in the Transponder data field.
5. If dual transponders are installed, select the second transponder by touching the Active button and
perform steps 1 through 4.
6. Pull the Transponder #1 circuit breaker and ensure the Transponder 1 data field has a red “X”
rather than the Transponder 2 data field to verify the wiring is not crossed (i.e., Transponder #1 is
incorrectly connected to Transponder #2 circuit breaker).
7. Repeat the preceding steps for GTN Xi #2.
6.2.9.9 GTX 345/345R Interface Check

When testing the GTX 345/345R, the rotorcraft must be located outside and have an unobstructed view of
the sky. If the GTX is installed and connected to the GTN Xi as the ADS-B In Source, check the operation
as follows:
1. Power on the GTN Xi in Normal Mode.
2. Power on the GTX.
3. Touch the System button and then the External LRUs button.
4. Verify the status for the GTX is a green checkmark.
5. Touch the More Info button for the GTX.
6. Verify the GPS status and software versions are reported.
7. Repeat steps 1 through 6 for GTN 2, if installed.

Rev. 8 Page 6-19
If HTAWS is configured on the GTN Xi in addition to the interface to the GTX 345/345R, check the
operation as follows:
8. Monitor the Audio Inhibt discrete input on the Discrete Diagnostics page in Configuration on the
GTX using the bezel controls (GTX 345) or GTX 3X5 Install Tool (GTX 345R).
9. Verify the Audio Inhibit discrete input indicates Active when the HTAWS system is playing audio
and Inactive otherwise. Refer to Section 6.1.7.
6.2.9.10 GDL 88H Interface Check

When testing the GDL 88H, the rotorcraft must be located outside and have an unobstructed view of the
sky. If the GDL 88H is installed and connected to the GTN Xi, check the operation as follows:
2. Navigate to the GDL 88 page from the External Systems page.
3. Touch the Diagnostics button.
4. Touch the GPS/SBAS Data button.
5. Verify the GDL 88H is receiving valid position source data.
6. Verify the status of the External GPS connection(s) is valid.
If HTAWS is configured on the GTN Xi in addition to the interface to the GDL 88H, check the operation as
follows:
7. Navigate to the GDL 88 Discrete Inputs page from the GDL 88 Diagnostics page.
8. Verify the Audio Inhibit 1 discrete input indicates Active when the HTAWS system is playing
audio and Inactive otherwise. Refer to Section 6.1.7.
6.2.9.11 Flight Stream 510 Interface Check
NOTE
A compatible PED with the Garmin Pilot application is required to perform the ground
check. Visit Garmin’s website for a list of compatible devices.
For this checkout, the Flight Stream 510, GTN Xi, GDL 69 (if installed), and GDL 88H (if installed) need
to be powered on in Normal mode. Pair the Flight Stream to a PED per the instructions in Section 5.5.
After pairing the Flight Stream 510, ensure the device is communicating with the GTN Xi, GDL 88H (if
installed), and GDL 69A (if installed). The following checks should be performed outside with a clear
view of the sky and away from buildings and large obstructions. If any of the tests below are unsuccessful,
refer to GTN Xi Part 27 AML STC Maintenance Manual and ICA (P/N 190-01007-D1) for troubleshooting
information.
GTN Xi Interface Check

1. On the PED’s Garmin Pilot application, navigate to the Flight Plan page and create a flight plan.
2. Select the Connext icon at the top of the page.
3. Select the option to send the flight plan to the GTN Xi. If successful, a message will be available
on the GTN Xi.
GDL 88H Interface Check (If Installed)

1. On the GTN Xi, navigate to the Traffic page from the home screen.

Rev. 8 Page 6-20
2. On the PED’s Garmin Pilot application, navigate to the Traffic page.
3. On the GTN Xi, touch the Menu button on the Traffic page.
4. Touch the Test button. If the Test button is grayed out, ADS-B Status must be turned off.
5. Verify that the traffic targets are displayed on the PED.
GDL 69/69A Interface Check (If Installed)

1. On the PED’s Garmin Pilot application, navigate to the Connext page.
2. Select SiriusXM under Status and verify that weather data is available.
6.2.9.12 Fan Interface Check

The fan that is mounted to the GTN Xi backplate must be checked. With the GTN Xi in Normal mode and
the fan powered on and running, navigate to the home page and touch the Message Queue key. Ensure the
“COOLING FAN- the cooling fan has failed” message is not displayed. The fan may take a few minutes to
power on if the unit is below normal operating temperature.
6.2.10 Magnetic Compass Check

A Compass Swing should be performed at the completion of the installation in accordance with
AC 43.13-1B, Chapter 12, Section 3, paragraph 12-37.
6.2.11 EMI/RFI Check

After installation of the GTN Xi, GMA 35, and Flight Stream 510, all interfaces to external equipment
must be verified. Once that is complete, an EMI/RFI check must be conducted. This check verifies that the
GTN Xi does not produce unacceptable interference in other avionics systems and other avionics systems
do not produce unacceptable interference in the GTN Xi.
1. Set up a VHF NAV test set to transmit simulated glideslope and localizer signals.
2. Start the rotorcraft engines using normal operating procedures.
3. Power on all avionics installed in the rotorcraft.
4. Verify the GTN Xi self-test indications are correct.
5. Set the VHF NAV frequency to the frequency transmitted by the VHF NAV test set.
6. Select the display of VHF navigation data on the connected external CDI or HSI, if installed.
7. Select the GPS Status page for display on the GTN Xi.
8. Select a COM frequency with minimal voice traffic.
9. Monitor the VHF COM and intercom and verify that no interference is present from any of the
other installed avionics.
10. Set the rotor RPM to normal operating RPM for flight.

Rev. 8 Page 6-21
6.2.11.1 GTN Xi as an EMI/RFI Victim Check
Observe the course deviation indications and GPS status on the GTN Xi while conducting the following
procedures. Verify there are no false course deviation indications on the external CDI/HSI, loss of GPS
position, or breaking of squelch on the VHF COM radio.
1. View the Satellite Status page and verify that at least seven satellites have been acquired on each
installed GTN Xi.
2. Verify the GPS “LOI” flag is out of view.
3. Turn on and off each rotorcraft system controllable by the pilot including the following:
a. Lights.
b. Environmental Systems.
c. Ice protection equipment.
d. Other installed avionics and systems.
4. On each installed, non-GTN Xi COM transceiver, transmit on each of the following frequencies
for at least 20 seconds each:
a. VHF frequencies (25 kHz channels):
• 121.150 MHz
• 121.175 MHz
• 121.200 MHz
• 131.250 MHz
• 131.275 MHz
• 131.300 MHz
b. VHF radios with 8.33 kHz channel spacing, evaluate the following additional VHF
frequencies:
• 121.185 MHz
• 121.190 MHz
• 130.285 MHz
• 131.290 MHz
5. Vary the rotor RPM through the normal power-on operating range.
6. If the rotorcraft is TCAS-equipped, turn on the TCAS system and verify that GPS position remains
valid (if position is lost, the status on the Satellite Status page will change to “ACQUIRING”).
7. If the rotorcraft is SATCOM-equipped, use the SATCOM system and verify that GPS position
remains valid (if position is lost, the status on the Satellite Status page will change to
“ACQUIRING”).

Rev. 8 Page 6-22
6.2.11.2 GTN Xi as an EMI/RFI Source Check (GTN 635Xi/650Xi/750Xi Only)
Monitor the function of other rotorcraft systems, engine and rotor indications, installed avionics, and
various other equipment while doing the following:
1. Check for interference in other installed equipment when power is applied to each installed
GTN Xi and GMA 35.
2. Select 121.150 MHz on the GTN Xi COM transceiver to be checked and transmit for a period of
30 seconds and verify the following:
a. The GPS “LOI” flag does not come into view.
b. No interference is present in other installed equipment, avionics, and instruments during the
transmission.
3. Repeat step 2 for the following frequencies:
a. 25 kHz COM Channel Spacing:
121.150 MHz 131.225 MHz
121.175 MHz 131.250 MHz
121.200 MHz 131.275 MHz
121.225 MHz 131.300 MHz
121.250 MHz 131.325 MHz
131.200 MHz 131.350 MHz
b. 8.33 kHz COM Channel Spacing (if applicable):

121.185 MHz 130.285 MHz
121.190 MHz 131.290 MHz
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each GTN Xi COM transceiver.
6.2.12 Database Check

Check the navigation database to ensure it is current. The database information is displayed during the unit
display start-up sequence. To check the database:
1. Cycle power on the GTN Xi. The GTN Xi will go through its normal start-up sequence.
2. Wait for the Database Verification page to be displayed.
3. Verify the expiration dates displayed have not passed for each database.
4. The database expiration date can also be viewed in the System Status page, which is accessed from
the System page in Normal mode. If the database has expired, then update the database per
Section 1.5.
6.2.13 Magnetic Compass Recalibration

If the GTN Xi is mounted less than 12 inches from the compass, recalibrate the compass and make the
necessary changes for noting correction data.

Rev. 8 Page 6-23
6.3 Flight Checks
All GTN Xi functions that cannot be adequately checked on the ground will require a flight check. Even if
all functions can be verified on the ground, a flight check is required as final installation verification.
Verify system operation as described in the following sections.
The analog deviation (LEFT/RIGHT and UP/DOWN), TO/FROM, and FLAG (lateral and vertical)
outputs to a CDI or HSI should be verified in-flight with potential sources of electrical noise, such as cabin
lighting, heater blowers, etc., operating.
Lateral deviation and flags may be checked with either GPS or VOR/ILS, and vertical deviation and flags
must be checked with glideslope. Verify the flags are hidden at the correct times and the flag is in view at
the correct times. Also verify during flight that any placards and labels added as part of the GTN Xi
installation are readable in all anticipated cockpit lighting conditions.
6.3.1 GPS Flight Check

1. Verify that GPS position is not lost during normal rotorcraft maneuvering (e.g., hovering and pitch
angles associated with take-off, departures, approaches, landings, and missed approaches as
applicable). If GPS position is lost, a “Loss of GPS Navigation” message will be displayed.
2. Enter and activate a flight plan on the GTN Xi by touching the Direct-To key and entering a
waypoint. Fly the flight plan and verify the display of flight plan data is consistent with the CDI
indication (e.g., deviation, TO/FROM, etc.) in the pilot’s primary field-of-view.
6.3.2 VHF COM Flight Check (GTN 635Xi/650Xi/750Xi Only)

To check the communications transceiver, complete the following procedure:
1. Maintain an appropriate altitude and contact a ground station facility at a range of at least
50 nautical miles.
2. Press the COM volume knob to select manual squelch and listen for any unusual electrical noise,
which would increase the squelch threshold. If possible, verify the communications capability on
the high, low, and mid bands of the VHF COM band. It may be required by the governing
regulatory agency to verify operation of the COM transmitter and receiver at the extents of a
ground facility’s service volume (e.g., FAA AC 23-8A).
3. Verify that the COM sidetone volume is sufficiently loud to be heard without causing feedback or
distortion.
4. Ensure that airframe warnings are audible when the headset is in use. If the warnings are not
audible, then the GTN Xi volume must be adjusted.
6.3.3 VOR Flight Check (GTN 650Xi/750Xi Only)

1. Tune a local VOR station at least 50 miles distant.
2. Verify the audio IDENT and voice quality and verify that no objectionable electrical interference
such as magneto noise is present.
3. Verify the Morse code decoder IDs the station (95% probability).
4. Fly to and from the station.
5. Verify NAV flag, TO/FROM flag, and CDI are operational.
It may be required by the governing regulatory agency to verify operation of the VOR receiver at the
extents of a ground facility’s service volume (e.g., FAA AC 23-8A).

Rev. 8 Page 6-24
6.3.4 ILS Flight Check (GTN 650Xi/750Xi Only)
1. Tune an ILS at a local airport.
2. Ensure the audio IDENT and audio quality are satisfactory.
3. Ensure there is no objectionable electrical interference.
4. Ensure the Morse code decoder identifies the station (95% probability).
5. Fly the approach.
6. Make sure NAV flag, GS flag, and CDI and VDI are operational.
If an undesirable oscillation of the VDI is observed, Filtered LOC/GS can be enabled to address the
behavior. Refer to Section 5.4.3.12 for filtered LOC/GS configuration.
6.3.5 HTerrain/HTAWS Audio Flight Check (HTerrain/HTAWS-Equipped Units Only)
NOTE
The HTerrain/HTAWS volume should be loud enough to ensure that aural alerts are loud
and attention-getting under all anticipated noise environmental conditions, including with
cockpit doors and windows both open and closed. This check verifies that HTerrain/
HTAWS aurals can be heard during flight.
1. Take off and ascend to altitude. During the ascent, in a high ambient noise condition with full
power, eject the SD card from the slot. A HTerrain Alerting or HTAWS fail audio message should
be generated.
2. Evaluate the volume of the audio message. Ensure the HTerrain/HTAWS audio can be heard
clearly and intelligibly during high-power, high-noise flight and with the pilot headset volume set
to minimum. If the volume is too low, adjust as described in Section 6.1.7.
3. After re-inserting the SD card into the slot, reboot the GTN Xi by pulling the GTN Xi circuit
breaker(s) and pushing it back in.
4. After this check, during the approach, at approximately 500 ft AGL, the “five hundred” callout
will occur. Verify that “five hundred” can be easily heard and understood.
5. If the HTerrain/HTAWS volume requires in-flight adjustment, adjust using the procedure in
Section 6.1.7.
NOTE
It is acceptable to complete the procedure in Section 6.1.7 while in the air.

Rev. 8 Page 6-25
6.3.6 Marker Beacon Receiver Flight Check (GMA 35)
1. Set up for an approach to the airport with the marker beacon set to low sensitivity.
2. During the approach, verify the marker beacon annunciator light is illuminated for a ground
distance of 2,000 to 3,000 feet when flying at an altitude of 1,000 ft AGL on the localizer
centerline.
An acceptable means to determine ground distances of 2,000 to 3,000 feet is to fly at a specified
groundspeed and time the duration the marker beacon light is illuminated. The values listed in Table 6-2
can be used.
If the marker beacon annunciator lights do not remain illuminated for the required time, adjust the marker
beacon low sensitivity threshold as described in Section 5.4.6.6.1.4, and then repeat steps 1 and 2.
Table 6-2 Marker Beacon Annunciator Light Duration

Groundspeed Light Time (seconds)
(kts) 2,000 ft 3,000 ft
90 13 20
110 11 16
130 9 14
150 8 12

Rev. 8 Page 6-26
6.4 Documentation Checks
6.4.1 Rotorcraft Flight Manual Supplement
Ensure the Rotorcraft Flight Manual Supplement (RFMS) is completed and inserted in the Rotorcraft
Flight Manual (RFM) or Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH). Refer to the following sections for
information about completing the RFMS.
1. Fill in the required rotorcraft information in the RFMS.
2. Mark the appropriate checkboxes in Section 1.3, System Capabilities, to indicate the capability of
the installed equipment.
3. Insert the completed RFMS into the RFM or POH.
6.4.1.1 System Capabilities

The Capabilities section of the GTN Xi RFMS contains the following list of system capabilities of the
installed GTN Xi system and associated navigation interface:
[1] VHF Communication Radio
[2] VHF Navigation
[3] HTAWS
Box [1] is checked if a GTN 635Xi/650Xi/750Xi is installed.
Box [2] is checked if a GTN 650Xi/750Xi is installed.
Box [3] is check if the GTN Xi installation has the HTAWS feature enabled. Refer to Section 5.4.4.1 for
more information.
6.4.1.2 Traffic System Interface

The Traffic System section of the GTN Xi RFMS contains the following list of traffic system interface
options for the GTN Xi installation:
[1] No traffic system is interfaced to the GTN Xi
[2] A TAS/TCAS I traffic system is interfaced to the GTN Xi
[3] A TIS traffic system is interfaced to the GTN Xi
[4] A TCAD traffic system is interfaced to the GTN Xi
[5] A Garmin ADS-B traffic system is interfaced to the GTN Xi
[6] A Garmin ADS-B traffic system is interfaced to the GTN Xi. The ADS-B traffic system is
also interfaced to an on-board traffic system
Check the applicable box. Check only one box in this list.

Rev. 8 Page 6-27
6.4.1.3 Datalink Interface
The Datalink section of the GTN Xi RFMS contains the following list of datalink interface options for the
GTN Xi installation:
[1] No datalink is interfaced to the GTN Xi
[2] A GDL 69/69A SiriusXM datalink is interfaced to the GTN Xi
[3] A GSR 56 Iridium datalink is interfaced to the GTN Xi
[4] A GDL 88H Dual-Link ADS-B solution is interfaced to the GTN Xi
Check the applicable boxes.
6.4.1.4 Lighting Controls

The Lighting Control section of the GTN Xi RFMS contains the following list of lighting control options
for the GTN Xi installation:
[1] The GTN Xi photocell
[2] The rotorcraft instrument dimmer system
6.4.1.5 HTAWS
The HTAWS section of the GTN Xi RFMS contains the following list of HTAWS options for the GTN Xi
installation:
[1] This installation includes Terrain Proximity. No aural or visual alerts for terrain or
obstacles are provided
[2] This installation includes Terrain Alerting. Aural and visual alerts will be provided.
[3] This installation includes HTAWS. Aural and visual alerts will be provided
6.4.2 Instructions for Continued Airworthiness (ICA)

Ensure the applicable rotorcraft information in Appendix A of GTN Xi Part 27 AML STC Maintenance
Manual and ICA (P/N 190-01007-D1) is filled in completely and inserted into the rotorcraft permanent
records.
1. Fill in the Rotorcraft Make, Model, Registration Number, and Serial Number information.
2. Fill in the GTN Xi and GMA 35 (if installed) unit data.
3. Fill in the Configuration Log.
4. Fill in the applicable wire routing and installed locations.
5. Create new wiring diagrams or mark-up the interconnect diagrams from Appendix B of this
manual detailing which equipment was installed and how it was connected.
6. Insert the Instructions for Continued Airworthiness (Section 4) and the completed Appendix A of
the maintenacne manual into the rotorcraft’s permanent records.

Rev. 8 Page 6-28
6.4.3 Checkout Log
The following completed Checkout Log should be performed for each installation but does not need to be
maintained with the rotorcraft permanent records.
Table 6-3 GTN Xi Checkout Log

Date: By:
Installation Information
 GTN Xi #1  GTN Xi #2
Rotorcraft Model: Unit P/N:

Rotorcraft S/N: Unit Mod Level:
Unit Model: GPS Antenna Model:
Unit S/N: GPS Antenna P/N:
Check Task Section Reference

Ground Checks (Configuration Mode)
Main Indicator (Analog) Check
Lateral (Max Left, Full Left, Center, Full Right, Max Right)
To/From (From, Hidden, To)
 Vertical (Max Up, Full Up, Center, Full Down, Max Down)
Section 6.1.1
Valid/Invalid Flags
OBS Resolver Setting
VOR/ILS Indicator (Analog)
Lateral (Max Left, Full Left, Center, Full Right, Max Right)
To/From (From, Hidden, To)
 Vertical (Max Up, Full Up, Center, Full Down, Max Down)
Section 6.1.2
Valid/Invalid Flags
Selected Course
Discrete Inputs (complete all applicable checks)
OBS Mode Select
TAWS Audio Input
TAWS Audio Inhibit
Air/Ground
CDI Source Selection
GSR Status
 MIC1 Transmit Section 6.1.3
MIC2 Transmit
COM Remote Transfer
COM Remote Tune Up
COM Remote Tune Down
NAV Remote Transfer
Synchro Valid – Low
Synchro Valid – High

Rev. 8 Page 6-29
Discrete Outputs (complete all applicable checks)
OBS Annunciate
GPS Annunciate
Waypoint Annunciate
Terminal Annunciate
TAWS Audio Active Annunciate
VLOC Annunciate
LOI Annunciate
Message Annunciate
Approach Annunciate
ILD/GPS Annunciate
 TAWS/Terrain Inhibit Annunciate
Section 6.1.4
TAWS Warning Annunciate
Terrain Not Available Annunciate
TAWS Caution Annunciate
GPS Select Annunciate
Traffic Test Annunciate
Traffic Standby/Operate
Suspend Annunciate
GSR Remote Power
NAV/ILS Energize
Radar On
HSDB Wiring
 Connected and receiving
Section 6.1.5
GTN Xi Crossfill
 Connected and receiving
Section 6.1.6
HTerrain/HTAWS Audio
 Audio checked Section 6.1.7
Audio level adjusted
Radar Altimeter
 Valid height displayed
Section 6.1.8
Lighting Bus
 Rotorcraft lighting bus
Section 6.1.9
Air/Fuel Data
Air data computer
 Altitude encoder Section 6.1.10
Fuel sensor
Fuel/air data computer
Ground Checks (Normal Mode)
Signal Acquisition
Position
 Signal reception
Section 6.2.2
Interference from other avionics
 VHF COM Interference Section 6.2.3
VHF NAV
VOR reception
 Localizer reception
Section 6.2.4
Deviation needle and flags

Rev. 8 Page 6-30
VHF COM
 Receiver/transmitter operation Section 6.2.5
Antenna VSWR
Lighting Bus Operation
Direct sunlight
 Dark operating conditions Section 6.2.6
Full bright to full dim
Comparisons to other installed avionics
GMA 35 Audio Panel (GTN 7XX Xi only)
COM transceiver
Alert audio
Intercom system
 Failsafe operation Section 6.2.7
NAV audio
Rotorcraft receivers
Music system
Bluetooth audio
HTerrain Alerting/HTAWS System
 Terrain/HTAWS system test OK
Section 6.2.8
Interface Checks
GMA 35
GSR 56
Ryan TCAD Traffic
ARINC 429 Traffic
GDL 69/69A
 External RMI/OBI Section 6.2.9
TIS
Transponder
GTX 345/345R
GDL 88H
Flight Stream 510
Fan
Magnetic Compass
 Compass swing
Section 6.2.10
EMI/RFI
 EMI/RFI Victim Section 6.2.11
EMI/RFI Source
 Database Section 6.2.12
 Magnetic Compass Recalibration Section 6.2.13
Flight Checks
GPS
 GPS position Section 6.3.1
Flight plan data
VHF COM
Communication capability on high, low, and mid bands
 COM sidetone volume
Section 6.3.2
Audible airframe warnings

Rev. 8 Page 6-31
VOR
Audio IDENT and audio quality
 Morse code decoder
Section 6.3.3
ILS
Audio IDENT and audio quality
 Morse code decoder
Section 6.3.4
HTerrain/HTAWS Audio
 Fail audio message volume Section 6.3.5
“Five hundred” callout
Marker Beacon Receiver
 Annunciator light duration
Section 6.3.6
Documentation Checks
 Rotorcraft Flight Manual Supplement Section 6.4.1
 Instructions for Continued Airworthiness Section 6.4.2

Rev. 8 Page 6-32
APPENDIX A CONNECTOR INFORMATION
A.1 GTN Xi ...........................................................................................................................................A-2

A.1.1 J1001 .....................................................................................................................................A-3
A.1.2 J1002 .....................................................................................................................................A-5
A.1.3 J1003 COM Connector (GTN 635Xi/650Xi/750Xi Only) ................................................... A-6
A.1.4 J1004 NAV Connector (GTN 650Xi/750Xi Only) ...............................................................A-7
A.1.5 J1005 (GTN 7XX Xi Only) ..................................................................................................A-8
A.2 GMA 35 ..........................................................................................................................................A-9
A.2.1 J3501 Connector .................................................................................................................A-10
A.2.2 J3502 Connector .................................................................................................................A-11
This appendix contains connector diagrams and pinout tables for each connector on the GTN Xi. The
connector diagrams show contact orientation for the GTN Xi (J) connector.

Rev. 8 Page A-1
A.1 GTN Xi
All GTN Xi rear D-sub connectors have socket contacts. GTN Xi rear connectors are shown in Figure A-1.
J1001 J1006 GPS

MAIN
J1002
J1007
COM
J1003
*71;L;LRQO\
J1008
NAV
*71;LRQO\ J1004
GTN 6XX Xi
J1005 I/O
J1001 J1006 GPS

MAIN
J1002
J1007
COM
J1003 *71;LRQO\
J1008
NAV
*71;LRQO\ J1004
GTN 7XX Xi
NOTE
The COM board is not present in the GTN 625Xi/725Xi. The NAV board is not present in
the GTN 625Xi/635Xi/725Xi. Empty COM and NAV board connector positions on the
these models are concealed with cover plates.
Figure A-1 GTN Xi Rear Connectors

Rev. 8 Page A-2
A.1.1 J1001
ϮϬ ϭϵ ϭϴ ϭϳ ϭϲ ϭϱ ϭϰ ϭϯ ϭϮ ϭϭ ϭϬ ϵ ϴ ϳ ϲ ϱ ϰ ϯ Ϯ ϭ
ϯϵ ϯϴ ϯϳ ϯϲ ϯϱ ϯϰ ϯϯ ϯϮ ϯϭ ϯϬ Ϯϵ Ϯϴ Ϯϳ Ϯϲ Ϯϱ Ϯϰ Ϯϯ ϮϮ Ϯϭ
:ϭϬϬϭ
ϰϮ ϰϭ ϰϬ
ϱϵ ϱϴ ϱϳ ϱϲ ϱϱ ϱϰ ϱϯ ϱϮ ϱϭ ϱϬ ϰϵ ϰϴ ϰϳ ϰϲ ϰϱ ϰϰ ϰϯ ;'dEͿ
ϳϴ ϳϳ ϳϲ ϳϱ ϳϰ ϳϯ ϳϮ ϳϭ ϳϬ ϲϵ ϲϴ ϲϳ ϲϲ ϲϱ ϲϰ ϲϯ ϲϮ ϲϭ ϲϬ
J1001/P1001
Pin Pin Name I/O Pin Pin Name I/O
1 MAIN OBS ROTOR H (GND) -- 40 MAIN OBS STATOR E (GND) --
2 MAIN OBS ROTOR C OUT 41 MAIN OBS STATOR F IN
3 TIME MARK OUT A OUT 42 LIGHTING BUS 2 LO IN
4 AUDIO OUT HI OUT 43 FAN GROUND --
5 RS-232 OUT 4 OUT 44 RS-232 GND 3/4 --
6 RS-232 OUT 3 OUT 45 RS-232 GND 2 --
7 RS-232 OUT 2 OUT 46 RS-232 GND 1 --
8 RS-232 OUT 1 OUT 47 ARINC 429 IN 2A IN
9 ARINC 429 OUT 2A OUT 48 ARINC 429 IN 1A IN
10 ARINC 429 OUT 1A OUT 49 MAIN LATERAL +LEFT OUT OUT
11 MAIN +TO OUT OUT 50 MAIN LATERAL +FLAG OUT OUT
12 MAIN VERTICAL +UP OUT OUT 51 MAIN VERTICAL +FLAG OUT OUT
MAIN LATERAL SUPERFLAG
13 OUT 52 VLOC ANNUNCIATE* OUT
OUT
14 OBS ANNUNCIATE*[1] OUT 53 LOI ANNUNCIATE*[1] OUT
15 GPS ANNUNCIATE* OUT 54 MESSAGE ANNUNCIATE*[1] OUT
16 OBS/SUSP MODE SELECT*[1] IN 55 APPROACH ANNUNCIATE*[1] OUT
17 LIGHTING BUS 1 LO IN 56 ILS/GPS APPROACH* OUT
TAWS/TERRAIN INHIBIT
18 LIGHTING BUS 1 HI IN 57 OUT
ANNUNCIATE*[1]
19 AIRCRAFT POWER IN 58 FAN TACH IN IN
20 AIRCRAFT POWER IN 59 FAN POWER OUT (12 VDC) OUT
21 MAIN OBS STATOR D IN 60 MAIN OBS STATOR G (GND) --
22 TIME MARK OUT B OUT 61 LIGHTING BUS 2 HI IN
23 AUDIO OUT LO OUT 62 CONFIG MODULE DATA I/O
24 RS-232 IN 4 IN 63 CONFIG MODULE CLOCK OUT
25 RS-232 IN 3 IN 64 CONFIG MODULE GND OUT
26 RS-232 IN 2 IN 65 CONFIG MODULE POWER OUT
27 RS-232 IN 1 IN 66 ARINC 429 IN 2B IN
28 ARINC 429 OUT 2B OUT 67 ARINC 429 IN 1B IN

Rev. 8 Page A-3
29 ARINC 429 OUT 1B OUT 68 MAIN LATERAL +RIGHT OUT OUT
30 MAIN +FROM OUT OUT 69 MAIN LATERAL -FLAG OUT OUT
31 MAIN VERTICAL +DOWN OUT OUT 70 MAIN VERTICAL -FLAG OUT OUT
MAIN VERTICAL SUPERFLAG TAWS WARNING
32 OUT 71 OUT
OUT ANNUNCIATE*[1]
TERRAIN NOT AVAILABLE
33 WAYPOINT ANNUNCIATE*[1] OUT 72 OUT
ANNUNCIATE*[1]
TAWS CAUTION
34 TERMINAL ANNUNCIATE*[1] OUT 73 OUT
ANNUNCIATE*[1]
35 TAWS AUDIO ACTIVE OUT*[1] OUT 74 GPS SELECT*[1] OUT
36 AUDIO INHIBIT IN*[1] IN 75 TRAFFIC TEST*[1] OUT
37 TAWS INHIBIT IN*[1] IN 76 TRAFFIC STANDBY*[1] OUT
38 AIR/GROUND*[1] IN 77 AIRCRAFT GND --
39 CDI SOURCE SELECT*[1] IN 78 AIRCRAFT GND --
Notes:
[1] This discrete may be configured to perform another function. Refer to Section 5.4.3.14 for
details.
An asterisk (*) following the pin description denotes the signal is an Active-Low, requiring a ground to
activate or supplying a ground when active. If there is no asterisk following the pin description, then the
signal is an Active-High.

Rev. 8 Page A-4
A.1.2 J1002
ϵ ϴ ϳ ϲ ϱ ϰ ϯ Ϯ ϭ
ϭϴ ϭϳ ϭϲ ϭϱ ϭϰ ϭϯ ϭϮ ϭϭ ϭϬ :ϭϬϬϮ
Ϯϲ Ϯϱ Ϯϰ Ϯϯ ϮϮ Ϯϭ ϮϬ ϭϵ ;'dEͿ
J1002/P1002
1 DEMO MODE SELECT* IN 14 ETHERNET IN 4B IN
2 RESERVED IN 15 ETHERNET IN 2A IN
3 SUSPEND ANNUNCIATE* [1] OUT 16 ETHERNET IN 2B IN
4 ETHERNET OUT 4A OUT 17 ETHERNET OUT 2A OUT
5 ETHERNET OUT 4B OUT 18 ETHERNET OUT 2B OUT
6 ETHERNET IN 1A IN 19 RESERVED IN
7 ETHERNET IN 1B IN 20 RESERVED IN
8 ETHERNET OUT 1A OUT 21 RESERVED OUT
9 ETHERNET OUT 1B OUT 22 RESERVED OUT
10 SPARE INPUT* [1] [2] IN 23 ETHERNET IN 3A IN
11 GSR STATUS IN* [1] IN 24 ETHERNET IN 3B IN
12 GSR REMOTE POWER OUT* [1] OUT 25 ETHERNET OUT 3A OUT
13 ETHERNET IN 4A IN 26 ETHERNET OUT 3B OUT
Notes:
[1] This discrete may be configured to perform another function. Refer to Section 5.4.3.14 for
details.
[2] Dual GTN 6XX/7XX installations with software earlier than v5.00 grounded this pin to
identify the unit as GTN 2. When replacing one such unit with a GTN Xi, this pin can
instead be utilized as a spare discrete. Refer to Section 5.4.3.10 for information on
configuring System ID and Section 5.4.3.14 for information on configuring discretes.

Rev. 8 Page A-5
A.1.3 J1003 COM Connector (GTN 635Xi/650Xi/750Xi Only)
ϭϱ ϭϰ ϭϯ ϭϮ ϭϭ ϭϬ ϵ ϴ ϳ ϲ ϱ ϰ ϯ Ϯ ϭ
ϯϬ Ϯϵ Ϯϴ Ϯϳ Ϯϲ Ϯϱ Ϯϰ Ϯϯ ϮϮ Ϯϭ ϮϬ ϭϵ ϭϴ ϭϳ ϭϲ :ϭϬϬϯ
ϰϰ ϰϯ ϰϮ ϰϭ ϰϬ ϯϵ ϯϴ ϯϳ ϯϲ ϯϱ ϯϰ ϯϯ ϯϮ ϯϭ ;'dEͿ
J1003/P1003
1 RESERVED OUT 23 RESERVED OUT
2 RESERVED IN 24 RESERVED OUT
3 RESERVED -- 25 RESERVED OUT
4 RESERVED -- 26 RESERVED --
5 COM MIC 1 AUDIO IN HI IN 27 COM REMOTE TRANSFER* IN
6 RESERVED -- 28 COM REMOTE TUNE UP* IN
7 500 Ω COM AUDIO HI OUT 29 COM REMOTE TUNE DOWN* IN
8 RESERVED IN 30 AIRCRAFT POWER IN
9 RESERVED IN 31 RESERVED --
11 COM MIC 1 KEY* IN 33 RESERVED --
15 RESERVED OUT 37 AIRCRAFT GND --
16 RESERVED IN 38 AIRCRAFT GND --
18 500 Ω COM AUDIO LO -- 40 AIRCRAFT GND --
19 RESERVED -- 41 RESERVED IN
20 MIC AUDIO IN LO IN 42 RESERVED IN
21 RESERVED -- 43 AIRCRAFT POWER IN
22 RESERVED IN 44 AIRCRAFT POWER IN

Rev. 8 Page A-6
A.1.4 J1004 NAV Connector (GTN 650Xi/750Xi Only)
ϰϯ ϰϰ ϰϱ ϰϲ ϰϳ ϰϴ ϰϵ ϱϬ ϱϭ ϱϮ ϱϯ ϱϰ ϱϲ ϱϳ ϱϴ ϱϵ ϲϬ ϲϭ ϲϮ
ϮϮ Ϯϯ Ϯϰ Ϯϱ Ϯϲ Ϯϳ Ϯϴ Ϯϵ ϯϬ ϯϭ ϯϮ ϯϯ ϯϰ ϯϱ ϯϲ ϯϳ ϯϴ ϯϵ ϰϬ ϰϭ ϰϮ :ϭϬϬϰ
ϭ Ϯ ϯ ϰ ϱ ϲ ϳ ϴ ϵ ϭϬ ϭϭ ϭϮ ϭϯ ϭϰ ϭϱ ϭϲ ϭϳ ϭϴ ϭϵ ϮϬ Ϯϭ ;'dEͿ
J1004/P1004
1 VOR/LOC +TO OUT PAR DME 1MHZ-D/
33 OUT
2 VOR/LOC +FROM OUT SERIAL DME ON
3 VOR/LOC +FLAG OUT 34 GLIDESLOPE +UP OUT
4 VOR/LOC -FLAG OUT 35 VOR/ILS ARINC 429 IN B IN
5 VOR/LOC +LEFT OUT 36 VOR/ILS ARINC 429 IN A IN
6 VOR/LOC +RIGHT OUT PAR DME 100KHZ-A/
37 OUT
7 RESERVED --- SERIAL DME HOLD
8 VOR/LOC COMPOSITE OUT OUT 38 GLIDESLOPE SUPERFLAG OUT
9 VOR OBS ROTOR C OUT 39 PAR DME 100KHZ-B OUT
10 VOR OBS ROTOR H (GND) --- 40 PAR DME 100KHZ-C OUT
11 VOR OBS STATOR E (GND) --- 41 DME COMMON IN
12 VOR OBS STATOR F IN 42 PAR DME 100KHZ-D OUT
13 VOR OBS STATOR D IN 43 PAR DME 50KHZ OUT
14 VOR OBS STATOR G (GND) --- 44 SERIAL DME – DME REQUEST I/O
15 VOR/LOC SUPERFLAG OUT 45 PAR DME 1MHZ-A OUT
16 500 Ω VOR/LOC AUDIO OUT HI OUT 46 PAR DME 1MHZ-B OUT
17 500 Ω VOR/LOC AUDIO OUT LO OUT 47 PAR DME 1MHZ-C OUT
18 SERIAL DME – CLOCK I/O 48 RESERVED --
19 SERIAL DME – DATA I/O 49 AIRCRAFT GND --
20 SERIAL DME – RNAV/CH REQ IN 50 RESERVED --
21 SERIAL DME – RNAV MODE IN 51 AIRCRAFT POWER IN
22 AIRCRAFT GND -- 52 AIRCRAFT POWER IN
23 VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT B OUT 53 GLIDESLOPE -FLAG OUT
24 VOR/ILS ARINC 429 OUT A OUT 54 PAR DME 100KHZ-E OUT
25 VOR OBI CLOCK OUT 55 GLIDESLOPE +DOWN OUT
26 VOR OBI SYNC OUT 56 PAR DME 1MHZ-E OUT
27 VOR OBI DATA OUT 57 RESERVED --
28 VLOC REMOTE TRANSFER IN 58 RESERVED OUT
29 ILS ENERGIZE OUT 59 RESERVED OUT
30 RESERVED -- 60 AIRCRAFT GND --
31 RESERVED -- 61 AIRCRAFT GND --
32 GLIDESLOPE +FLAG OUT 62 AIRCRAFT GND --

Rev. 8 Page A-7
A.1.5 J1005 (GTN 7XX Xi Only)
ϰϯ ϰϰ ϰϱ ϰϲ ϰϳ ϰϴ ϰϵ ϱϬ ϱϭ ϱϮ ϱϯ ϱϰ ϱϱ ϱϲ ϱϳ ϱϴ ϱϵ ϲϬ ϲϭ ϲϮ
ϮϮ Ϯϯ Ϯϰ Ϯϱ Ϯϲ Ϯϳ Ϯϴ Ϯϵ ϯϬ ϯϭ ϯϮ ϯϯ ϯϰ ϯϱ ϯϲ ϯϳ ϯϴ ϯϵ ϰϬ ϰϭ ϰϮ :ϭϬϬϱ
ϭ Ϯ ϯ ϰ ϱ ϲ ϳ ϴ ϵ ϭϬ ϭϭ ϭϮ ϭϯ ϭϰ ϭϱ ϭϲ ϭϳ ϭϴ ϭϵ ϮϬ Ϯϭ ;'dEͿ
J1005/P1005
SYNCHRO VALID INPUT
2 RESERVED -- 33 IN
(ACTIVE-LOW)
3 RESERVED -- 34 SPARE OUTPUT C OUT
4 RESERVED -- 35 SYNCHRO X IN
5 RESERVED -- 36 SYNCHRO REF HIGH IN
6 RESERVED -- 37 ARINC 429 IN 3A IN
7 ARINC 429 OUT 3B OUT 38 ARINC 429 IN 4A IN
8 RS-232 OUT 5 OUT 39 RESERVED --
9 RS-232 OUT 6 OUT 40 ARINC 453/708 TERM 1A --
11 RESERVED -- 42 ARINC 453/708 TERM 2A IN
13 RADAR ON* OUT 44 RESERVED --
14 SYNCHRO Y IN 45 RESERVED --
15 SYNCHRO REF LO IN 46 RESERVED --
16 ARINC 429 IN 3B IN 47 RESERVED --
17 ARINC 429 IN 4B IN 48 RESERVED --
18 ARINC 453/708 IN 1A IN 49 RS-232 GND 5 --
19 ARINC 453/708 TERM 1B -- 50 RS-232 GND 6 --
20 ARINC 453/708 IN 2A IN 51 RESERVED --
21 ARINC 453/708 TERM 2B -- 52 RESERVED --
22 RESERVED -- 53 SPARE INPUT 1 --
SYNCHRO VALID INPUT
23 RESERVED -- 54 IN
(ACTIVE-HIGH)
25 RESERVED -- 56 SYNCHRO Z IN
28 ARINC 429 OUT 3A OUT 59 RESERVED --
29 RS-232 IN 5 IN 60 ARINC 453/708 IN 1B IN
30 RS-232 IN 6 IN 61 RESERVED --
31 RESERVED -- 62 ARINC 453/708 IN 2B IN

Rev. 8 Page A-8
A.2 GMA 35
Both GMA 35 rear connectors have socket contacts. GMA 35 rear connectors are shown in Figure A-2.
J3502 J3501
Figure A-2 GMA 35 Rear Connectors

Rev. 8 Page A-9
A.2.1 J3501 Connector
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 J3501
44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 (GMA 35)
J3501/P3501
1 MARKER ANTENNA IN HI IN 23 RCVR 5 AUDIO IN HI IN
2 MARKER ANTENNA IN LO IN 24 COM ACTIVE* OUT OUT
3 COM 3 AUDIO IN HI IN 25 TEL 4 AUDIO IN HI IN
4 COM 3 AUDIO LO -- 26 TEL 4 AUDIO IN LO IN
5 COM 3 MIC AUDIO OUT HI OUT 27 TEL 4 MIC OUT HI OUT
6 COM 3 MIC KEY* OUT OUT 28 TEL 4 MIC OUT LO OUT
7 RCVR 4 AUDIO IN HI IN 29 ALERT 3 AUDIO IN HI IN
8 RCVR 4 AUDIO IN LO IN 30 COM 2 MIC KEY* OUT OUT
9 COM 1 AUDIO IN HI IN 31 ALERT 1 AUDIO IN HI IN
10 COM 1 AUDIO LO -- 32 ALERT 1 AUDIO IN LO IN
11 COM 1 MIC AUDIO OUT HI OUT 33 PILOT MIC AUDIO IN HI IN
12 COM 1 MIC KEY* OUT OUT 34 PILOT MIC KEY* IN IN
13 COM 2 AUDIO IN HI IN 35 PILOT MIC AUDIO IN LO IN
14 COM 2 AUDIO LO -- 36 INNER MARKER LAMP OUT OUT
15 COM 2 MIC AUDIO OUT HI OUT 37 OUTER MARKER LAMP OUT OUT
PILOT PUSH-TO-COMMAND
16 IN 38 MIDDLE MARKER LAMP OUT OUT
KEY* IN [1]
17 NAV 1 AUDIO IN HI IN 39 MIDDLE MARKER SENSE OUT OUT
PASS HEADSET AUDIO OUT
18 NAV 1 AUDIO IN LO IN 40 OUT
LEFT
PASS HEADSET AUDIO OUT
19 NAV 2 AUDIO IN HI IN 41 OUT
RIGHT
20 NAV 2 AUDIO IN LO IN 42 PASS HEADSET AUDIO OUT LO OUT
21 RCVR 3 AUDIO IN HI IN 43 ALERT 2,3,4 AUDIO IN LO IN
ALERT 4 (TEL RING) AUDIO IN
22 RCVR 3 AUDIO IN LO IN 44 IN
HI
Notes:
[1] This pin may be configured to perform a different function. Refer to Section 5.4.6.6.2.

Rev. 8 Page A-10
A.2.2 J3502 Connector
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 J3502
44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 (GMA 35)
J3502/P3502
1 PILOT HEADSET AUDIO OUT LO OUT 23 MUSIC 1 IN LEFT IN
2 COPILOT HEADSET AUDIO OUT OUT 24 MUSIC 1 IN RIGHT IN
3 COPILOT HEADSET AUDIO OUT OUT 25 MUSIC 1 IN LO IN
4 COPILOT HEADSET AUDIO OUT OUT 26 MUSIC 2 IN LEFT IN
5 RESERVED IN 27 MUSIC 2 IN RIGHT IN
6 RESERVED -- 28 MUSIC 2 IN LO IN
7 RESERVED IN 29 FAILSAFE WARN AUDIO IN HI IN
8 AIRCRAFT POWER IN 30 COPILOT PUSH-TO-COMMAND IN
9 AIRCRAFT POWER IN 31 PILOT HEADSET AUDIO OUT OUT
10 AIRCRAFT GROUND -- 32 COPILOT MIC AUDIO IN HI IN
11 AIRCRAFT GROUND -- 33 COPILOT MIC KEY* IN IN
12 PASSENGER ADDRESS MUTE* OUT 34 COPILOT MIC AUDIO IN LO IN
13 MARKER HI SENSE* IN IN 35 PASS 1 MIC AUDIO IN HI IN
14 PASS ICS KEY* IN [1] IN 36 PASS 1 MIC AUDIO IN LO IN
15 ALERT 2 AUDIO IN HI IN 37 PASS 2 MIC AUDIO IN HI IN
16 PILOT HEADSET AUDIO OUT OUT 38 PASS 2 MIC AUDIO IN LO OUT
17 RS-232 IN IN 39 PASS 3 MIC AUDIO IN HI IN
18 RS-232 OUT OUT 40 PASS 3 MIC AUDIO IN LO IN
19 PA MODE SELECTED* OUT OUT 41 PASS 4 MIC AUDIO IN HI IN
20 COM CYCLE* IN IN 42 PASS 4 MIC AUDIO IN LO IN
21 RESERVED -- 43 SPEAKER AUDIO OUT LO IN
22 CLEARANCE RECORDER IN 44 SPEAKER AUDIO OUT HI OUT
Notes:
[1] These pins may be configured to perform a different function. Refer to Section 5.4.6.6.2.

Rev. 8 Page A-11
APPENDIX B INTERCONNECT DRAWINGS
B.1 GTN Xi Interconnect Drawings ...................................................................................................... B-2

Figure B-1 GTN Xi System Interface Diagram ................................................................................ B-2
Figure B-2 GTN 650Xi/750Xi Typical Installation Interconnect ..................................................... B-3
Figure B-3 GTN 625Xi/725Xi Typical Installation Interconnect ..................................................... B-5
Figure B-4 Power, Lighting, Configuration Module, HSDB Interconnect ....................................... B-7
Figure B-5 CDI Interconnect ............................................................................................................ B-9
Figure B-6 VOR-ILS Indicator Interconnect .................................................................................. B-12
Figure B-7 Transponder Interconnect ............................................................................................. B-14
Figure B-8 Traffic Interconnect ...................................................................................................... B-20
Figure B-9 Audio Panel Interconnect ............................................................................................. B-24
Figure B-10 GDL 69 Interconnect .................................................................................................... B-27
Figure B-11 GDL 88H Interconnect ................................................................................................. B-28
Figure B-12 Antenna Interconnect .................................................................................................... B-30
Figure B-13 HTAWS Annunciator Interconnect .............................................................................. B-35
Figure B-14 Switches Interconnect ................................................................................................... B-38
Figure B-15 RS-232 Serial Data Interconnect .................................................................................. B-40
Figure B-16 Air Data Interconnect ................................................................................................... B-42
Figure B-17 GTN Xi - GTN Xi or GTN 6XX/7XX Crossfill Interconnect ..................................... B-44
Figure B-18 GSR 56 Interconnect .................................................................................................... B-45
Figure B-19 GDU 620 Interconnect ................................................................................................. B-46
Figure B-20 GDU 700/1060 Interconnect ........................................................................................ B-48
Figure B-21 Radar Altimeter Interconnect ....................................................................................... B-49
B.2 GMA 35 Interconnect Drawings ................................................................................................... B-50
Figure B-22 GMA 35 COM/NAV Interconnect ............................................................................... B-50
Figure B-23 GMA 35 Power Interconnect ........................................................................................ B-52
Figure B-24 GMA 35 Microphone and Headset Interconnect .......................................................... B-54
Figure B-25 GMA 35 Other Audio Sources Interconnect ................................................................ B-56
Figure B-26 GMA 35 Discretes Interconnect ................................................................................... B-58

Rev. 8 Page B-1
B.1 GTN Xi Interconnect Drawings
GTN Xi
CONNECTOR P1001
AIRCRAFT POWER & GROUND POWER & GROUND LAT DEVIATION & FLAGS
AIRCRAFT LIGHTING BUS LIGHTING BUS TO/FROM
MAIN CDI/HSI
EXTERNAL INSTRUMENTATION TIME MARK OUT VERT DEVIATION & FLAGS
SUPERFLAGS
(GPS/VOR/ILS)
MAIN OBS
ARINC 429 IN
FUEL/AIR DATA TRAFFIC
DISCRETES
OR RS-232 IN
SWITCHES SWITCHES/
SERIALIZER
ANNUNCIATORS ANNUNCIATORS
RADAR
ARINC 429 IN
ALTIMETER EXTERNAL MAP
RS-232 OUT
DISPLAY
RS-232 IN GARMIN
RS-232 OUT TRANSPONDER
RS-232 IN RS-232 IN
RS-232 OUT RS-232 OUT GSR 56
GTN Xi
CONNECTOR P1002
SECOND GTN Xi
ETHERNET IN DISCRETES
or GTN 6XX/7XX ETHERNET OUT
(CROSSFILL)
GTN 635Xi/650Xi/750Xi
CONNECTOR P1003
AIRCRAFT POWER & GROUND POWER & GROUND COM MIC AUDIO MICROPHONE
COM REMOTE TRANSFER COM REMOTE TRANSFER SWITCH
COM REMOTE TUNE UP
COM REMOTE TUNE SWITCHES
COM REMOTE TUNE DOWN
COM MIC KEY
AUDIO PANEL COM MIC AUDIO
COM AUDIO
(RS-232 INTERFACE ANALOG AUDIO
IS ONLY APPROVED
FOR THE GTN 7XX XI
WITH THE GMA 35)
GTN 650Xi/750Xi
CONNECTOR P1004
VLOC AUDIO LAT DEVIATION & FLAGS
TO/FROM
AIRCRAFT POWER & GROUND POWER & GROUND VERT DEVIATION & FLAGS
CDI/HSI
SUPERFLAGS
VOR OBS
(VOR/ILS ONLY)
VLOC COMPOSITE OUT
NAV ILS ENERGIZE
NAV REMOTE TRANSFER NAV REMOTE TRANSFER SWITCH
GTN Xi GPS/SBAS ANTENNA

CONNECTOR P1006
GTN 635Xi/650Xi/750Xi COM ANTENNA

CONNECTOR P1007
GTN 650Xi/750Xi NAV ANTENNA

CONNECTOR P1008
Figure B-1 GTN Xi System Interface Diagram

Rev. 8 Page B-2
GTN 650Xi/750Xi
NAVIGATION
P1001 INDICATOR
MAIN LATERAL +LEFT OUT 49 CDI+ L
MAIN LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 68 CDI+ R
s
MAIN +TO OUT 11 +TO FLAG
MAIN +FROM OUT 30 +FROM FLAG
s
MAIN LATERAL +FLAG OUT 50 NAV+ FLAG
MAIN LATERAL -FLAG OUT 69 NAV- FLAG
s
MAIN VERTICAL +UP OUT 12 + UP
MAIN VERTICAL +DOWN OUT 31 + DOWN
s
MAIN VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 51 G/S+ FLAG
MAIN VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 70 G/S- FLAG
s
MAIN OBS ROTOR H (GND) 1 OBS RESOLVER {H/A}
MAIN OBS ROTOR C 2 OBS RESOLVER {C}
s
MAIN OBS STATOR D 21 OBS RESOLVER {D}
MAIN OBS STATOR E (GND) 40 OBS RESOLVER {E}
s
MAIN OBS STATOR F 41 OBS RESOLVER {F}
MAIN OBS STATOR G (GND) 60 OBS RESOLVER {G}
s FAN
FAN POWER OUT (12 VDC) 59 RED
FAN GROUND 43 BLACK
FAN TACH IN 58 YELLOW
CONFIG MODULE POWER 65 RED 4

CONFIG MODULE GND 64 BLK 1 CONFIG
MODULE
CONFIG MODULE DATA 62 YEL 3
CONFIG MODULE CLOCK 63 WHT 2 GPS/NAV
GARMIN
AIRCRAFT POWER 19 AVIONICS BUS
5A (28 VDC) GTX 33
AIRCRAFT POWER 20 AIRCRAFT TRANSPONDER
GROUND 7.5A (14 VDC)
AIRCRAFT GND 77
AIRCRAFT GND 78 P3301
RS-232 IN 1 27 23 RS232 OUT 1

RS-232 OUT 1 8 22 RS232 IN 1
RS-232 GND 1 46 51 SIGNAL GROUND
s s
P1003 COM
AIRCRAFT POWER 43 5A (28 VDC)
AIRCRAFT POWER 44 10A (14 VDC) GARMIN
GMA 35/35c 5
AIRCRAFT GND 37 AIRCRAFT AUDIO PANEL
AIRCRAFT GND 38 GROUND (GTN 7XX Xi ONLY)
AIRCRAFT GND 40 P3501
500 COM AUDIO HI 7 9 COM 1 AUDIO IN HI

500 COM AUDIO LO 18 10 COM 1 AUDIO LO
MIC AUDIO IN LO 20
s
COM MIC 1 AUDIO IN HI 5 11 COM 1 MIC AUDIO OUT HI
COM MIC 1 KEY* 11 12 COM 1 MIC KEY* OUT
s
P1001
AUDIO OUT LO 23 43 ALERT 2 AUDIO IN LO
AUDIO OUT HI 4
s P3502
RS-232 OUT 2 7 17 RS-232 IN
RS-232 IN 2 26 18 RS-232 OUT
RS-232 GND 2 45 15 ALERT 2 AUDIO IN HI
s
P1004 s P3501
500 VOR/LOC AUDIO OUT HI 16 17 NAV 1 AUDIO IN HI
500 VOR/LOC AUDIO OUT LO 17 18 NAV 1 AUDIO IN LO
s
AIRCRAFT GND 61 AIRCRAFT
AIRCRAFT GND 62 GROUND
AIRCRAFT POWER 51 AIRCRAFT
6 GROUND
AIRCRAFT POWER 52 GPS/SBAS ANTENNA
P1006
GPS/SBAS ANTENNA COM ANTENNA
P1007
COM ANTENNA
NAV ANTENNA
P1008
NAV ANTENNA
AIRCRAFT
6 GROUND
Figure B-2 GTN 650Xi/750Xi Typical Installation Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 8 Page B-3
NOTES
1 REFER TO DETAIL DRAWINGS FOR WIRE GAUGE INFO.
2 GROUND DESIGNATIONS: S SHIELD BLOCK GROUND AIRFRAME GROUND
AT GTN Xi, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL. THE SHIELD TERMINATION
LEADS MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES. CONNECT OTHER END OF THE SHIELD PER THE REMOTE
3 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. IF NO SHIELD TERMINATION REQUIREMENT EXISTS FOR
THE REMOTE EQUIPMENT, TERMINATE SHIELDS AS SHORT AS POSSIBLE, NOT TO EXCEED 3.0 INCHES.
REFER TO SECTION 4.7.2.1.
THIS DIAGRAM PROVIDES AN OVERVIEW OF A TYPICAL GTN Xi INSTALLATION. REFER TO APPROPRIATE

4
INTERCONNECT DIAGRAMS FOR SPECIFIC EQUIPMENT.
THE GMA 35 CAN ONLY BE INTERFACED AND CONTROLLED WITH THE GTN 7XX Xi VIA RS-232. IF A
5 GTN 6XX Xi IS INSTALLED WITHOUT A GTN 7XX Xi IN THE ROTORCRAFT, USE AN ALTERNATE AUDIO
PANEL. REFER TO APPENDIX SECTION C.1.1 FOR A LIST OF APPROVED AUDIO PANELS.
6 VERIFY ROTORCRAFT GROUND MEETS BONDING REQUIREMENTS IN SECTION .

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 8 Page B-4
NAVIGATION
GTN 625Xi/725Xi P1001
INDICATOR
MAIN LATERAL +LEFT OUT 49 CDI+ L
MAIN LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 68 CDI+ R
s
MAIN +TO OUT 11 +TO FLAG
MAIN +FROM OUT 30 +FROM FLAG
s
MAIN LATERAL +FLAG OUT 50 NAV+ FLAG
MAIN LATERAL -FLAG OUT 69 NAV- FLAG
s
MAIN VERTICAL +UP OUT 12 + UP
MAIN VERTICAL +DOWN OUT 31 + DOWN
s
MAIN VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 51 G/S+ FLAG
MAIN VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 70 G/S- FLAG
s
MAIN OBS ROTOR H (GND) 1 OBS RESOLVER {H/A}
MAIN OBS ROTOR C 2 OBS RESOLVER {C}
s
MAIN OBS STATOR D 21 OBS RESOLVER {D}
MAIN OBS STATOR E (GND) 40 OBS RESOLVER {E}
s
MAIN OBS STATOR F 41 OBS RESOLVER {F}
MAIN OBS STATOR G (GND) 60 OBS RESOLVER {G}
s
GPS
AIRCRAFT POWER 20 5A
AIRCRAFT GROUND
AIRCRAFT GND 77
AIRCRAFT GND 78
GARMIN
CONFIG MODULE POWER 65 RED 4 GTX 33
CONFIG MODULE GND 64 BLK 1 CONFIG TRANSPONDER
CONFIG MODULE DATA 62 YEL 3 MODULE
CONFIG MODULE CLOCK 63 WHT 2 P3301
RS-232 IN 1 27 23 RS-232 OUT 1

RS-232 OUT 1 8 22 RS-232 IN 1
RS-232 GND 1 46 51 GROUND
s s
FAN
FAN GROUND 43 BLACK GARMIN
FAN TACH IN 58 YELLOW GMA 340
J1 AUDIO PANEL
AUDIO OUT HI 4 31 HI ALERT 1
AUDIO OUT LO 23 32 LO AUDIO IN
s
GPS/SBAS ANTENNA
P1006
GPS/SBAS ANTENNA
AIRCRAFT
5 GROUND

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 8 Page B-5
NOTES
1 REFER TO DETAIL DRAWINGS FOR WIRE GAUGE INFO.
THIS DIAGRAM PROVIDES AN OVERVIEW OF A TYPICAL GTN Xi INSTALLATION. REFER TO APPROPRIATE

4
INTERCONNECT DIAGRAMS FOR SPECIFIC EQUIPMENT.
5 VERIFY ROTORCRAFT GROUND MEETS BONDING REQUIREMENTS IN SECTION 4.3.

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 8 Page B-6
GTN Xi P1001 8
GPS/NAV 11
AIRCRAFT POWER 19 20 AWG AVIONICS BUS
3 7.5A (14 VDC)
AIRCRAFT GND 77 20 AWG AIRCRAFT
5
CONFIG MODULE POWER 65 RED 4
CONFIG MODULE GND 64 BLK 1 CONFIG
CONFIG MODULE DATA 62 YEL 3 MODULE
CONFIG MODULE CLOCK 63 WHT 2
4
LIGHTING BUS 1 HI 18
TO DISPLAY DIMMER
LIGHTING BUS LO 17
LIGHTING BUS 2 HI 61
6 LIGHTING BUS 2 LO TO KEYPAD DIMMER
42
10
FAN
9
FAN GROUND 43 BLACK
FAN TACH IN 58 YELLOW
12
P1004
AIRCRAFT POWER 51
AIRCRAFT POWER 52
3
AIRCRAFT GND 61 20 AWG
AIRCRAFT GND 62 AIRCRAFT
GROUND
13 7
P1003 COM 11
AIRCRAFT POWER 30 20 AWG AVIONICS BUS
3
AIRCRAFT GND 37 20 AWG AIRCRAFT
AIRCRAFT GND 40
AIRCRAFT
14 GROUND
Figure B-4 Power, Lighting, Configuration Module, HSDB Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 8 Page B-7
NOTES
1 ALL WIRES 22 AWG OR LARGER UNLESS OTHERWISE SPECIFIED.
ALL POWER LEADS AND GROUND LEADS ARE REQUIRED. USE 22 AWG WIRE FOR THE SPLICE. USE HEAT
3
SHRINK TUBING TO PROVIDE SUFFICIENT INSULATION FROM SURROUNDING CONTACTS.
4 CONFIGURATION MODULE IS MOUNTED IN THE BACKSHELL OF THE P1001 CONNECTOR.
CONFIGURATION MODULE HARNESS USES 28 AWG WIRES. CONTACTS SUPPLIED WITH CONFIGURATION
5 MODULE INSTALLATION KIT MUST BE USED FOR CONNECTING THE HARNESS TO P1001.
OPTIONAL CONNECTION. LIGHTING CAN BE CONTROLLED BY THE INTEGRATED PHOTOCELL, A SINGLE

6 LIGHTING BUS, OR DUAL LIGHTING BUSES. IF THE ROTORCRAFT HAS A SINGLE LIGHTING BUS, ONLY
LIGHTING BUS 1 NEEDS TO BE WIRED. REFER TO SECTION 5.4.3.6 FOR CONFIGURATION DETAILS.
CIRCUIT BREAKER SHOULD BE LABELED AS “COM”, “COM1”, OR “COM2” DIRECTLY ADJACENT TO THE
7 CIRCUIT BREAKER. THE CIRCUIT BREAKER MUST BE READILY ACCESSIBLE TO THE PILOT. ALTERNATE
SPELLINGS OF COM (E.G., “COMM”) ARE ACCEPTABLE.
CIRCUIT BREAKER SHOULD BE LABELED AS “GPS”, “GPS1”, OR “GPS2” FOR GTN 625Xi/635Xi/650Xi UNITS
OR LABELED AS “GPS/NAV”, “GPS/NAV 1”, OR “GPS/NAV2” FOR GTN 650Xi/750Xi, AND BE DIRECTLY
8 ADJACENT TO THE CIRCUIT BREAKER. THE CIRCUIT BREAKER MUST BE READILY ACCESSIBLE TO THE
PILOT.
IF MODIFICATION OF THE HARNESS FROM THE FAN TO THE P1001 CONNECTOR IS NECESSARY, THE
9 MODIFIED LENGTH MUST NOT BE LONGER THAN 8 INCHES. THE FAN HARNESS (P/N 320-00600-00) IS
SUPPLIED AS PART OF THE CONNECTOR KIT.
10 FAN SUPPLIED AS PART OF BACKPLATE ASSEMBLY.
REFER TO SECTION 3.3.3 FOR SPECIFIC INSTRUCTIONS ON POWER DISTRIBUTION TO THE GTN Xi FOR
11 SINGLE AND DUAL INSTALLATIONS.
12 GTN 650Xi/750Xi ONLY.
13 GTN 635Xi/650Xi/750Xi ONLY.
14 VERIFY ROTORCRAFT GROUND MEETS BONDING REQUIREMENTS IN SECTION 4.3.
Figure B-4 Power, Lighting, Configuration Module, HSDB Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 8 Page B-8
HONEYWELL
NAVIGATION
MID-CONTINENT GARMIN INDICATOR
(BENDIX/KING)
KPI 552 6
GI 106 KPI 552B
MD200- MD200- MD222- MD222- GI 102 GI 106A
KI 525A KPI 553
306/307 302/303 402 406 GI 102A GI 106B KI 206 KPI 553A
GTN Xi KPI 553B
P1001 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P2061 P1 P2 P101
MAIN LATERAL +LEFT OUT 49 11 11 22 22 11 11 n V - i CDI+ L
MAIN LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 68 12 12 23 23 12 12 j b - h CDI+ R
s
MAIN +TO OUT 11 9 9 16 16 9 9 e Z - j +TO FLAG

MAIN +FROM OUT 30 10 10 17 17 10 10 S T - k +FROM FLAG
s
MAIN LATERAL +FLAG OUT 50 7 7 20 20 7 7 N K - f NAV+ FLAG

MAIN LATERAL -FLAG OUT 69 8 8 21 21 8 8 F F - g NAV- FLAG
s
MAIN VERTICAL +UP OUT 12 13 - - 25 - 13 k - E JJ + UP
MAIN VERTICAL +DOWN OUT 31 14 - - 24 - 14 m - B HH + DOWN
s
MAIN VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 51 15 - - 18 - 15 H - J FF G/S+ FLAG

MAIN VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 70 16 - - 19 - 16 J W - GG G/S- FLAG
s
MAIN OBS ROTOR H (GND) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 c - X W OBS RESOLVER {H/A}

MAIN OBS ROTOR C 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Z - a N,V OBS RESOLVER {C}
s
MAIN OBS STATOR D 21 3 3 3 3 3 3 L - V Z OBS RESOLVER {D}
MAIN OBS STATOR E (GND) 40 5 5 5 5 5 5 P - Y a OBS RESOLVER {E}
s
MAIN OBS STATOR F 41 4 4 6 6 4 4 T - b Y OBS RESOLVER {F}

MAIN OBS STATOR G (GND) 60 6 6 4 4 6 6 W - e X OBS RESOLVER {G}
s
GPS ANNUNCIATE* 15 17 17 15 15 - 17 5 - - - - GPS ANNC
VLOC ANNUNCIATE* 52 24 24 8 8 - 18 5 - - - - NAV ANNC
Figure B-5 CDI Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 3

Rev. 8 Page B-9
NAVIGATION
S-TEC SPERRY ROCKWELL COLLINS CENTURY INDICATOR
NSD 1000
GTN Xi ST 180 RD 444 RD 550A RD 650 331A-6P 331A-9G PN-101 IND 351D
NSD 360A
P1001 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P2 P1 P1 P2 P1 P1 CD132
MAIN LATERAL +LEFT OUT 49 27 - F - F - 4 29 - 4 j 11 17 CDI+ L
MAIN LATERAL +RIGHT OUT 68 43 - E - E - 3 28 - 3 i 12 18 CDI+ R
s
MAIN +TO OUT 11 26 - A - A - 1 26 - 1 n 9 33 +TO FLAG

MAIN +FROM OUT 30 42 - B - B - 2 27 - 2 p 10 34 +FROM FLAG
s
MAIN LATERAL +FLAG OUT 50 37 - - - - - - 31 - - k 7 31 NAV+ FLAG
MAIN LATERAL -FLAG OUT 69 38 - - - - - - 32 - - m 8 32 NAV- FLAG
s
MAIN LAT SUPERFLAG OUT 13 - - P - P 39 - - - 37 - - - NAV SUPERFLAG
- - S - S - 36 - - 38 - - - NAV SUPERFLAG LO
MAIN VERTICAL + UP OUT 12 44 - C - C - 5 33 - 5 r 13 27 + UP
MAIN VERT + DOWN OUT 31 28 - D - D - 6 34 - 6 q 14 28 + DOWN
s
MAIN VERTICAL +FLAG OUT 51 36 - - - - - - 35 - - s 15 30 GS+ FLAG

MAIN VERTICAL -FLAG OUT 70 35 - - - - - - 36 - - t 16 29 GS- FLAG
s
MAIN VERTICAL
32 - - U - U 38 - - - 7 - - - GS SUPERFLAG
SUPERFLAG OUT
- - W - W - 8 - - - - - - GS SUPERFLAG LO
MAIN OBS ROTOR H (GND) 1 22 DD - DD - 6 - 1 1 - a 19 15 OBS RESOLVER {H/A}

MAIN OBS ROTOR C 2 24 FF - FF - 8 - 3 3 - c 2 16 OBS RESOLVER {C}
s
MAIN OBS STATOR D 21 25 z - z - 9 - 4 4 - d 3 24 OBS RESOLVER {D}

MAIN OBS STATOR E (GND) 40 39 AA - AA - 10 - 5 5 - e 5 23 OBS RESOLVER {E}
s
MAIN OBS STATOR F 41 40 BB - BB - 11 - 6 6 - f 4 26 OBS RESOLVER {F}

MAIN OBS STATOR G (GND) 60 41 CC - CC - 12 - 7 7 - g 6 25 OBS RESOLVER {G}
s
ILS/GPS APPROACH 56 - a - - - - 47 - - - - - - ILS ENERGIZE

Sheet 2 of 3

Rev. 8 Page B-10
NOTES
AT GTN Xi, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL . THE SHIELD TERMINATION
4 NOT USED.
5 ROTORCRAFT POWER INPUT TO THE MAIN, COM, AND NAV BOARDS MUST BE 11-33 VDC.
THE OBS INTERFACE TO THE GTN Xi WORKS ONLY FOR KPI 552/553/553A UNITS THAT HAVE A COURSE
6
KNOB.
IT IS NOT RECOMMENDED TO USE EXTERNAL CDIs IN CONJUNCTION WITH THE G500H OR G500H TXi
SYSTEMS. IF DESIRED TO UTILIZE ONE OR MORE EXTERNAL CDIs, THE CDI(s) CAN ONLY BE USED TO
DISPLAY VOR/ILS INFORMATION. REFER TO SECTION 2.5.5 OF G500H ROTORCRAFT STC INSTALLATION
7 MANUAL (P/N 190-01150-06) OR SECTION 3.3.2 OF G500H TXI PART 27 AML STC INSTALLATION MANUAL
(P/N 190-02401-00) FOR ADDITIONAL DETAILS REGARDING EXTERNAL CDI INTERFACES WHEN THIS
SYSTEM IS INSTALLED.

Sheet 3 of 3

Rev. 8 Page B-11
GTN 650Xi/750Xi NAVIGATION
GARMIN BENDIX/KING INDICATOR
GI 102/A GI 106/A KI 202 KI 203 KI 204 KI 206 KI 208 KI 209 KI 208A KI 209A
P1004 P1 P1 P2021 P2031 P2041 P2061 P2081 P2091 P208A1 P209A1
VOR/LOC +LEFT 5 11 11 n - - n - - - - +LEFT

VOR/LOC +RIGHT 6 12 12 j - - j - - - - +RIGHT
s
VOR/LOC +TO 1 9 9 e - - e - - - - +TO
VOR/LOC +FROM 2 10 10 S - - S - - - - +FROM
s
VOR/LOC +FLAG 3 7 7 N - - N - - - - NAV +FLAG
VOR/LOC -FLAG 4 8 8 F - - F - - - - NAV -FLAG
s
VOR/LOC COMPOSITE OUT 8 - - - Y Y - 2 2 6 6 VOR/LOC COMPOSITE
s
ILS ENERGIZE 29 - - - K K - 4 4 10 10 ILS ENERGIZE
GLIDESLOPE +UP 34 - 13 - - k k - 3 - 29 +UP

GLIDESLOPE +DOWN 55 - 14 - - m m - 6 - 28 +DOWN
s
GLIDESLOPE +FLAG 32 - 15 - - H H - 9 - 25 GLIDESLOPE +FLAG

GLIDESLOPE -FLAG - 16 - - J J - 12 - 24 GLIDESLOPE -FLAG
s
VOR OBS ROTOR H (GND) 10 1 1 c - - c - - - - OBS A/H

VOR OBS ROTOR C 9 2 2 Z - - Z - - - - OBS C
s
VOR OBS STATOR D 13 3 3 L - - L - - - - OBS D (COS HI)

VOR OBS STATOR E (GND) 11 5 5 P - - P - - - - OBS E (COS LO)
s
VOR OBS STATOR F 12 4 4 T - - T - - - - OBS F (SIN HI)

VOR OBS STATOR G (GND) 14 6 6 W - - W - - - - OBS G (SIN LO)
s
Figure B-6 VOR-ILS Indicator Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 8 Page B-12
NOTES
REFER TO MANUFACTURER’S DOCUMENTATION FOR COMPLETE PINOUT AND INTERCONNECT

4 INFORMATION. PINOUTS OF OTHER UNITS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
THIS INTERCONNECT APPLIES ONLY WHEN IT IS DESIRED FOR A SEPARATE INDICATOR TO DISPLAY
5 GTN 650Xi/750Xi VOR/ILS INFORMATION REGARDLESS OF THE GTN Xi UNIT’S CDI SELECTION (GPS OR
VLOC).
Figure B-6 VOR-ILS Indicator Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 8 Page B-13
SINGLE GTN Xi/SINGLE GTX WITH OR WITHOUT TIS
GARMIN GTX
GTX 32 TRANSPONDER
GTN Xi #1 GTX 328 GTX 33 GTX 335
GTX 327 GTX 330
6
P1001 P3271 P3281 P3301 P3251
4 RS-232 IN 1 27 20 23 23 9 RS232 TxD1
RS-232 OUT 1 8 19 22 22 31 RS232 RxD1
RS-232 GND 1 46 25 51 51 52 SIGNAL GROUND
s
SINGLE GTN Xi/DUAL GTXs WITH OR WITHOUT TIS

GARMIN GTX
TRANSPONDER
GTN Xi #1 GTX 32
GTX 328
GTX 33
GTX 335 #1
GTX 327 GTX 330
P1001 6 P3271 P3281 P3301 P3251
RS-232 IN 1 27 20 23 23 9 RS232 TxD1
RS-232 OUT 1 8 19 22 22 31 RS232 RxD1
4
s
GARMIN GTX
TRANSPONDER
GTX 32 GTX 328 GTX 33 GTX 335 #2
GTX 327 GTX 330
6 P3271 P3281 P3301 P3251
RS-232 IN 2 26 20 23 23 9 RS232 TxD1
RS-232 OUT 2 7 19 22 22 31 RS232 RxD1
4
s
Figure B-7 Transponder Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 6

Rev. 8 Page B-14
DUAL GTN Xi/SINGLE GTX WITH OR WITHOUT TIS
GARMIN GTX
GTN Xi #1 GTX 32 GTX 33 TRANSPONDER
GTX 327 GTX 328 GTX 330 GTX 335
P1001 P3271 P3281 P3301 P3251

6
RS-232 IN 1 27 20 23 23 9 RS232 TxD1
7
4 RS-232 OUT 1 8 19 22 22 31 RS232 RxD1

s 5
GTN Xi #2
P1001 6
RS-232 IN 1 27 24 25 25 8 RS232 TxD2
7
4 RS-232 OUT 1 8 2 24 24 30 RS232 RxD2

s 5
DUAL GTN Xi/DUAL GTX WITHOUT TIS

GARMIN GTX
TRANSPONDER
GTN Xi #1 GTX 32 GTX 33 #1
GTX 327 GTX 328 GTX 330 GTX 335
P3271 P3281 P3301 P3251
P1001 6 20 23 23 9 RS232 TxD1
RS-232 IN 1 27
19 22 22 31 RS232 RxD1
4 RS-232 OUT 1 8
25 51 51 52 SIGNAL GROUND
RS-232 GND 1 46
s
GARMIN GTX
TRANSPONDER
GTN Xi #2 GTX 32 GTX 33
#2
GTX 327 GTX 328 GTX 330 GTX 335
P1001 P3271 P3281 P3301 P3251

6
RS-232 IN 1 27 20 23 23 9 RS232 TxD1
4 RS-232 OUT 1 8 19 22 22 31 RS232 RxD1

s

Sheet 2 of 6

Rev. 8 Page B-15
DUAL GTN Xi/DUAL GTXs WITH TIS
GARMIN GTX
TRANSPONDER
GTN Xi #1 GTX 33 #1
GTX 330 GTX 335
P1001 P3301 P3251
6
RS-232 IN 1 27 23 9 RS232 TxD1
4 RS-232 OUT 1 8 22 31 RS232 RxD1
RS-232 GND 1 46 51 52 SIGNAL GROUND

s 6
RS-232 IN 2 26
4 RS-232 OUT 2 7
RS-232 GND 2 45
s
GTN Xi #2
P1001
6
RS-232 IN 1 27 25 8 RS232 TxD2
4 RS-232 OUT 1 8 24 30 RS232 RxD2

s
GARMIN GTX
TRANSPONDER
GTX 33 #2
GTX 335
GTX 330
P3301 P3251
23 9 RS232 TxD1
22 31 RS232 RxD1
51 52 SIGNAL GROUND
6
RS-232 IN 2 26 25 8 RS232 TxD2
4 RS-232 OUT 2 7 24 30 RS232 RxD2

s

Sheet 3 of 6

Rev. 8 Page B-16
Single GTN Xi/Single GTX 345
GTN Xi #1 P3251
GTX 345
P1001 6 12
RS-232 IN 1 27 7 RS232 TxD3
4 10
RS-232 OUT 1 8 29 RS232 RxD3
s
TAWS AUDIO ACTIVE 35 GTN TAWS UNITS ONLY 37 AUDIO INHIBIT
P1002 P3252
ETHERNET OUT 3A 25 7 ETHERNET IN 1A
ETHERNET OUT 3B 26 2 ETHERNET IN 1B
ETHERNET IN 3A 23 6 ETHERNET OUT 1A
s
ETHERNET IN 3B 24 1 ETHERNET OUT 1B
s
Dual GTN Xi/Single GTX 345 GTX 345

GTN Xi #1 P1002 P3252
s s
P1001 6 12 P3251
RS-232 IN 1 27 7 RS232 TxD3

4 10
RS-232 OUT 1 8 29 RS232 RxD3
s
TAWS AUDIO ACTIVE 35 GTN TAWS UNITS ONLY 37 AUDIO INHIBIT
P1002
ETHERNET OUT 1A 8
ETHERNET OUT 1B 9
ETHERNET IN 1A 6
ETHERNET IN 1B 7
s
GTN Xi #2 P1002
ETHERNET OUT 1B 9
ETHERNET OUT 1A 8
ETHERNET IN 1B 7
ETHERNET IN 1A 6
s

Sheet 4 of 6

Rev. 8 Page B-17
Single GTN Xi with GTX 345 and 335
GTN Xi P1002 P3252 GTX 345
s s
P1001 12 P3251
RS-232 OUT 1 8 29 RS-232 IN 3
RS-232 IN 1 27 7 RS-232 OUT 3 10
SIGNAL GROUND 46 50 RS-232 GND 3
s s
RS-232 OUT 2 7 37 AUDIO MUTE 11

RS-232 IN 2 26
RS-232 GND 2 45
s
P3251 GTX 335

29 RS-232 IN 3
7 RS-232 OUT 3 10
50 RS-232 GND 3
s
TAWS AUDIO ACTIVE 35

Sheet 5 of 6

Rev. 8 Page B-18
NOTES
3
EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. IF NO SHIELD TERMINATION REQUIREMENT EXISTS FOR
ANY RS-232 PORT MAY BE CONNECTED IN LIEU OF THESE PORTS. REFER TO SECTION 5.4.3.2 FOR RS-232
4 SETTINGS.
5 SPLICE BOTH RS-232 SIGNAL GROUND WIRES TOGETHER AND TERMINATE INTO PIN 25.
IF THIS INSTALLATION IS REPLACING A GNS 400W/500W SERIES UNIT, THE RS-232 DATA PATH REPLACES
6 THE ARINC 429 AND DISCRETE SIGNALS PREVIOUSLY USED TO INTERFACE THE TRANSPONDER TO THE
GNS 400W/500W SERIES.
CONNECTOR P3271 PIN 24 IS APPLICABLE TO THE GTX 32 ONLY. FOR THE GTX 327, SPLICE CONNECTOR
7
P3271 PIN 20 TO BOTH GTN Xi UNITS.
8 TIS TRAFFIC IS NOT AVAILABLE FROM THE GTX 32, 327, OR 328.
9 REFER TO APPENDIX SECTION C.1.5 FOR TRANSPONDER RS-232 PORT SETTINGS.
10 RS-232 PORTS 1 THROUGH 3 AVAILABLE.
11 ANY AUDIO MUTE CONFIGURABLE DISCRETE CAN BE USED.
12 RS-232 IS NOT NECESSARY IF GTN Xi CONTROL OF GTX 345 IS NOT DESIRED.

Sheet 6 of 6

Rev. 8 Page B-19
CONNECTIONS TO ARINC 429 TRAFFIC SOURCE
10
TRAFFIC ADVISORY
8 RYAN SYSTEM
6 L3 COMM HONEYWELL
TRC 497 TRC 899 KTA 870 KTA 970 9900BX

GTN Xi 4 KMH 880 KMH 980
P1001 P1 P1 J10 J10 P1
ARINC 429 IN 1A 48 34 42 54 54 8 A
ARINC 429 OUT
ARINC 429 IN 1B 67 33 43 55 55 9 B
s
TRAFFIC TEST* 75 85 19 2 2 - TAS TEST IN

(OPTIONAL) 7 8
TRAFFIC STANDBY* 76 82 21 23 23 - STANDBY / OPERATE
TAWS AUDIO ACTIVE OUT* 35 32 34 22 22 - TA INHIBIT*
(TAWS UNITS ONLY)
CONNECTIONS TO TIS SOURCE

TIS SOURCE
GARMIN (TRANSPONDER)
GTN Xi 13
GTX 330
4 GTX 33
P1001 P3301
RS-232 OUT 1 8 22 RS-232 IN 1
RS-232 IN 1 27 23 RS-232 OUT 1
RS-232 GND 1 46 51 SIGNAL GND
s s
Figure B-8 Traffic Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 4

Rev. 8 Page B-20
CONNECTIONS TO GARMIN GTS TRAFFIC SOURCE
GTN Xi GTS 8X0/8X5
4 14
P1001 P8001
ARINC 429 IN 1A 48 14 A
ARINC 429 IN 1B 67 15 ARINC 429 OUT
B
s s
ARINC 429 OUT 2A 9 16 A

ARINC 429 OUT 2B 28 17 GPS ARINC 429 IN 1
B
s s
P8002
TRAFFIC TEST* 75 74 TAS TEST IN

(OPTIONAL) 7
TRAFFIC STANDBY* 76 75 STANDBY / OPERATE
TAWS AUDIO ACTIVE OUT* 35 11 TA INHIBIT*
(TAWS UNITS ONLY)
GTN Xi GTS 800/8X5

4 15
P1002 P8001
ETHERNET IN 4A 13 ETHERNET OUT A
ETHERNET IN 4B 14 ETHERNET OUT B
13 ETHERNET OUT 4A 4 ETHERNET IN A
ETHERNET OUT B 5 ETHERNET IN B
s s

Sheet 2 of 4

Rev. 8 Page B-21
CONNECTION TO RS-232 TRAFFIC SOURCE
RYAN 9900B/BX
GTN Xi TCAD PROCESSOR
P1001 P1
RS-232 IN 1 27 17 RS-232 OUT 2
12 RS-232 OUT 1 8 19 RS-232 IN 2
RS-232 GND 1 46 18 RS-232 GND 2

s
11 16 SWITCH
DUAL GTN CONNECTION TO RS-232 TRAFFIC SOURCE

GTN Xi #1 RYAN 9900B/BX
TCAD PROCESSOR
P1001 P1
RS-232 IN 1 27 17 RS-232 OUT 2
12 RS-232 OUT 1 8 19 RS-232 IN 2
RS-232 GND 1 46 18 RS-232 GND 2

s
GTN Xi #2
P1001
RS-232 IN 1 27 20 RS-232 OUT 3
12 RS-232 OUT 1 8 22 RS-232 IN 3
RS-232 GND 1 46 21 RS-232 GND 3

s
11 16 SWITCH

Sheet 3 of 4

Rev. 8 Page B-22
NOTES
AT THE GTN Xi, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL. THE SHIELD LEADS MUST
3 BE LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES. CONNECT OTHER SHIELD GROUNDS TO ROTORCRAFT GROUND WITH AS
SHORT A CONDUCTOR AS PRACTICAL.
ONLY ONE TRAFFIC SOURCE MAY BE CONNECTED TO THE GTN Xi. IN DUAL GTN Xi INSTALLATIONS, THE
4 SAME TRAFFIC SOURCE SHOULD BE CONNECTED TO EACH GTN Xi ON WHICH TRAFFIC IS TO BE
DISPLAYED.
5 REFER TO SECTION 5 FOR GTN Xi CONFIGURATION SETUP.
6 SOFTWARE v1.6 OR HIGHER REQUIRED FOR THE TRC 497.
THESE OPTIONAL DISCRETE CONNECTIONS ARE NOT REQUIRED IF THE GTN Xi IS CONFIGURED FOR
7 “GTN Xi CONTROL OF TRAFFIC SYSTEM=NO.” IN THIS CASE, THE GTN Xi WILL ONLY BE A TRAFFIC
DISPLAY AND WILL NOT CONTROL THE TRAFFIC ADVISORY SYSTEM OPERATION.
FOR HONEYWELL TRAFFIC SYSTEMS, THE “FUNCTIONAL TEST” AND “STBY/OPERATE” DISCRETE INPUTS
8 TO THE TRAFFIC COMPUTER MUST BE CONNECTED TO ONE DISPLAY ONLY.

9
INFORMATION. PINOUTS OF OTHER UNITS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
FOR NEW RYAN 9900BX INSTALLATIONS, IT IS RECOMMENDED TO USE THE RS-232 INTERFACE. WHEN
INTERFACING THE GTN Xi TO THE RYAN 9900BX VIA ARINC 429, THE “GTN Xi CONTROL OF TRAFFIC
10 SYSTEM” CONFIGURATION SETTING MUST BE SET TO “NO.” THE RYAN 9900BX DOES NOT INCLUDE THE
NECESSARY DISCRETE INPUTS TO CONTROL THE TRAFFIC SYSTEM MODE.
THE RYAN TCAD PROCESSOR SWITCH PIN (P1-16) SHOULD BE GROUNDED TO TURN THE PROCESSOR
UNIT ON AND OPEN TO TURN THIS UNIT OFF. IF A RYAN TCAD DISPLAY UNIT IS NOT IN THE INSTALLATION,
11 A DEDICATED SWITCH MAY BE REQUIRED TO TURN THE TCAD PROCESSOR UNIT ON AND OFF. REFER TO
THE 9900BX INSTALLATION MANUAL (P/N 32-2351) FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.
IF THESE RS-232 PORTS ARE ALREADY USED FOR ANOTHER PURPOSE, ANY RS-232 PORT MAY BE
12 CONNECTED IN LIEU OF THESE PORTS. REFER TO SECTION 5.4.3.2 FOR RS-232 SETTINGS.
13 ANY AVAILABLE ETHERNET PORT MAY BE USED.
IF GTS IS CONFIGURED TO PROVIDE ACTIVE SURVEILLANCE TRAFFIC ONLY, WIRE PER THIS DIAGRAM
14
AND CONFIGURE THE GTN Xi AS DESCRIBED IN SECTION 5.4.3.1.
IF GTS IS CONFIGURED TO PROVIDE ADS-B TRAFFIC, WIRE PER THIS DIAGRAM AND CONFIGURE THE
15
GTN Xi AS DESCRIBED IN SECTION 5.4.3.4.4.

Sheet 4 of 4

Rev. 8 Page B-23
AUDIO PANEL INTERCONNECT
9 AUDIO PANEL
GTN Xi GARMIN PS ENGINEERING BENDIX/KING
3
SL 10 SERIES PMA 6000 KMA 24H
GMA 340 GMA 347 PMA 8000 KMA 24 KMA 26 KMA 28
SL 15 SERIES PMA 7000 -70/-71
P1003
5
BOTTOM J1 J3471 J1 (BOTTOM) BOTTOM P241 P261 J1 (BOTTOM) P241
3 500 COM AUDIO HI 7 9/(10) 9/(13) 7/(12) 9/(13) 9/(10) 9/(10) 4/(5) 9/(10) T/(16) COM 1/(COM 2) AUDIO HI
500 COM AUDIO LO 18 GND LUG 10/(14) 8/(13) 10/(14) GND LUG GND LUG 21/(22) GND LUG GND LUG COM 1/(COM 2) AUDIO LO
COM MIC 1 AUDIO IN HI 5 P/(H) 11/(15) 26/(32) 11/(15) P/(H) P/(H) 37/(39) P/(H) 3/(E) COM 1/(COM 2) MIC AUDIO
6 COM MIC 1 KEY* 11 R/(V) 12/(30) 27/(33) 12/(30) R/(V) R/(V) 38/(40) R/(V) C/(H) COM 1/(COM 2) MIC KEY
MIC AUDIO IN LO 20 GND LUG 10/(14) 8/(13) GND LUG GND LUG GND LUG GND LUG GND LUG GND LUG COM 1/(COM 2) MIC AUDIO LO
7 7
P1001
AUDIO OUT HI 4 T 31 54 31 T T 14 T 10 UNSWITCHED AUDIO IN HI
AUDIO OUT LO 23 GND LUG 32 55 32 GND LUG GND LUG 31 GND LUG 14 UNSWITCHED AUDIO IN LO
8
P1004
500 VOR/LOC AUDIO OUT HI 16 12/(13) 17/(19) 6/(14) 17/(19) 12/(13) 12/(13) 7/(8) 12/(13) P/(13) NAV 1/(NAV 2) AUDIO HI
500 VOR/LOC AUDIO OUT LO 17 GND LUG 18/(20) 25/(34) 18/(20) GND LUG GND LUG 24/(25) GND LUG GND LUG NAV 1/(NAV 2) AUDIO LO
3
MIXING AUDIO SIGNALS USING RESISTORS 8
BEFORE MODIFICATION AFTER MODIFICATION
EXISTING LRU AUDIO PANEL EXISTING LRU R AUDIO PANEL
AUDIO OUT HI UNSWITCHED AUDIO OUT HI UNSWITCHED

LO AUDIO IN LO AUDIO IN
R
GTN Xi
AUDIO OUT
Figure B-9 Audio Panel Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 3

Rev. 8 Page B-24
GMA 350 INTERCONNECT
GMA 350/350H/
GTN Xi 3 350c/350Hc
P1003 P3501
5
3 500  COM AUDIO HI 7 9/(13) COM 1/(COM 2) AUDIO HI
500  COM AUDIO LO 18 10/(14) COM 1/(COM 2) AUDIO LO
s
COM MIC 1 AUDIO IN HI 5 11/(15) COM 1/(COM 2) MIC AUDIO
6 COM MIC 1 KEY* 11 12/(30) COM 1/(COM 2) MIC KEY 7
MIC AUDIO IN LO 20 10/(14) COM 1/(COM 2) MIC AUDIO LO
s
P1004
500 VOR/LOC AUDIO OUT HI 16 17/(19) NAV 1/(NAV 2) AUDIO HI

3
500  VOR/LOC AUDIO OUT LO 17 18/(20) NAV 1/(NAV 2) AUDIO LO
s
P1001
AUDIO OUT HI 4 31 ALERT 1 AUDIO IN HI
AUDIO OUT LO 23 32 ALERT 1 AUDIO IN LO 8
s

Sheet 2 of 3

Rev. 8 Page B-25
NOTES
THE 500Ω AUDIO OUTPUTS ARE BALANCED OUTPUTS, AND THE LO OUTPUTS MUST BE CONNECTED. IF THE
3 AUDIO PANEL DOES NOT HAVE A LO INPUT, THE LO OUTPUT SHOULD BE CONNECTED TO A GROUND LUG AT
THE AUDIO PANEL.
REFER TO MANUFACTURER’S DOCUMENTATION FOR COMPLETE PINOUT AND INTERCONNECT INFORMATION.

4 PINOUTS OF OTHER UNITS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
SHIELDS FOR AUDIO CABLES SHOULD BE GROUNDED AT ONE END (WITH LEADS LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES)
5 AND LEFT FLOATING AT THE OTHER END. IF SHIELDED AUDIO CABLE IS CARRIED THROUGH A
DISCONNECT, CARRY THE SHIELD GROUND THROUGH THE DISCONNECT ON A SEPARATE PIN.
CONNECTING TWO MICROPHONES TO MIC AUDIO HI/LO AT THE SAME TIME MAY RESULT IN WEAK OR
6 DISTORTED AUDIO. MIC ISOLATION RELAYS ARE RECOMMENDED SO THAT ONLY ONE MIC IS ACTIVE AT A TIME.
7 SPLICE 500Ω COM AUDIO LO AND MIC AUDIO IN LO TOGETHER INTO THE SAME PIN ON AUDIO PANEL.
IT IS ACCEPTABLE TO USE OTHER AVAILABLE UNSWITCHED, UNMUTED INPUTS. IF AUDIO PANEL DOES
NOT HAVE AN AVAILABLE UNSWITCHED INPUT, AUDIO FROM THE GTN Xi MUST BE MIXED WITH AN
8 EXISTING AUDIO SOURCE USING RESISTORS TO ISOLATE THE AUDIO OUTPUT FROM EACH LRU. A
TYPICAL VALUE FOR MIXING RESISTORS IS 390Ω ¼ W. THE AUDIO LEVELS OF EXISTING AUDIO SOURCES
WILL HAVE TO BE RE-EVALUATED AFTER MIXING RESISTORS ARE INSTALLED.
9 FOR GMA 35 INTERCONNECT WIRING, REFER TO APPENDIX SECTION B.2.

Sheet 3 of 3

Rev. 8 Page B-26
GTN Xi GDL 69/69A
7
P1002 P691
5
4 25 23 6
ETHERNET OUT 3A ETHERNET IN 1A
s s
GDL 69/69A BLK 1 CM GROUND

RED 21 CM POWER OUT
CONFIGURATION YEL 40 CM DATA
MODULE WHT 60 CM CLOCK
NOTES
AT THE GTN Xi, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL. THE SHIELD LEADS MUST
3 BE LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES. CONNECT THE SHIELD GROUNDS AT THE GDL 69/69A TO ITS CONNECTOR
BACKSHELL IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE GDL 69/69A INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS.
ANY AVAILABLE ETHERNET PORT MAY BE USED IN LIEU OF ETHERNET PORT 3. IF THERE ARE NO FREE
PORTS ON THE GTN Xi, AN LRU CAN BE DISCONNECTED FROM THE GTN Xi AND THE GDL 69/69A CAN BE
4 CONNECTED TO THE GTN Xi IN ITS PLACE. THE DISCONNECTED LRU CAN THEN BE CONNECTED TO
ETHERNET PORT 2, 3, OR 4 ON THE GDL 69/69A.
5 USE AIRCRAFT GRADE CATEGORY 5 ETHERNET CABLE. REFER TO SECTION 3.2.2 FOR PART NUMBERS.
ETHERNET PORTS 2, 3, OR 4 MAY BE USED LIEU OF PORT 1. IF A PORT OTHER THAN 1 IS USED, IT MUST
6 BE ENABLED IN CONFIGURATION MODE. REFER TO GDL 69/69A INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL
DETAILS.
ONLY ONE GTN Xi NEEDS TO BE CONNECTED TO THE GDL 69/69A IN DUAL GTN Xi INSTALLATIONS.
7 GDL 69/69A DATA WILL BE FORWARDED TO THE OTHER GTN Xi VIA THE GTN Xi-TO-GTN Xi HSDB
CONNECTION.
Figure B-10 GDL 69 Interconnect

Rev. 8 Page B-27
DUAL GTNs AND GDL 88H
GTN Xi #1 3
TO EXISTING GDL 88H/88DH
P1001 AIRCRAFT WIRING
P881
S
TIME MARK OUT A 3 22 TIME MARK 1A
TIME MARK OUT B 22 3 TIME MARK 1B

S S
7
TAWS AUDIO ACTIVE OUT* 35 22 AWG 37 AUDIO INHIBIT #1*
(GTN Xi TAWS UNITS ONLY)
P1002
4 5 6
S S
ETHERNET IN 4A 13
ETHERNET IN 4B 14
4
ETHERNET OUT 4A 4
ETHERNET OUT 4B 5
S
GTN Xi #2 6
P1002
ETHERNET IN 3B 24
ETHERNET IN 3A 23
4
ETHERNET OUT 3B 26
ETHERNET OUT 3A 25
S
SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* 10 22 AWG
3
TO EXISTING
P1001 AIRCRAFT WIRING
S
TIME MARK OUT A 3 28 TIME MARK 2A
TIME MARK OUT B 22 9 TIME MARK 2B

S S
Figure B-11 GDL 88H Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 8 Page B-28
NOTES
IF GTN Xi TIME MARK OUTPUT IS ALREADY CONNECTED TO ROTORCRAFT WIRING, SPLICE INTO THIS
3
WIRING FOR THE CONNECTION TO THE GDL 88H.
IF ETHERNET PORT IS ALREADY USED FOR ANOTHER PURPOSE, ANY ETHERNET PORT MAY BE
4 CONNECTED. REFER TO APPENDIX A FOR PINOUT INFORMATION.
5 CONNECTION MAY BE MADE TO GTN Xi #2 INSTEAD OF GTN Xi #1.
DEFAULT DISCRETE FUNCTION FOR THIS PIN IS SHOWN. THIS PIN FUNCTION IS CONFIGURABLE AS
7 DESCRIBED IN SECTION 5.4.3.14.
Figure B-11 GDL 88H Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 8 Page B-29
SINGLE GTN INSTALLATION 1
VOR/LOC/GS Antenna
GTN Xi COM Antenna

P1008
NAV GPS/WAAS Antenna 2
P1007
COM
P1006
GPS/WAAS
DUAL GTN INSTALLATION 1
COM Antenna
GPS/WAAS Antenna 2
GTN Xi #1
P1007
COM
P1006
VOR/LOC/GS
GPS/WAAS
Antenna
P1008
NAV 3
1
Splitter S
2
GTN Xi #2 COM Antenna

P1008
NAV GPS/WAAS Antenna 2
P1007
COM
P1006
GPS/WAAS
Figure B-12 Antenna Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 5

Rev. 8 Page B-30
SINGLE GTN/DUAL NAV ANTENNA INSTALLATION
G/S Antenna
VOR/LOC
1 Antenna
4 6
G/S
ANT Diplexer
VOR
GTN Xi COM Antenna

P1008
GPS/WAAS
NAV Antenna 2
P1007
COM
P1006
GPS/WAAS
DUAL GTN/DUAL NAV ANTENNA INSTALLATION

COM Antenna
1 GPS/WAAS
Antenna 2
GTN Xi #1
P1007
COM
P1006
GPS/WAAS
P1008 G/S Antenna
NAV
VOR/LOC
Antenna
3 4 6
1 G/S
Splitter S ANT Diplexer
2 VOR
GTN Xi #2 COM Antenna

P1008
GPS/WAAS
NAV Antenna 2
P1007
COM
P1006
GPS/WAAS

Sheet 2 of 5

Rev. 8 Page B-31
SINGLE GTN, OTHER RADIO (SEPARATE G/S AND VOR/LOC
ANTENNA PORTS), AND SINGLE ANTENNA
VOR/LOC/
GS Antenna
GTN 650Xi/750Xi P1008
NAV 3
1
Splitter S
VHF NAV RADIO WITH 2
SEPARATE G/S AND
VOR/LOC ANTENNA
PORTS G/S
G/S
Diplexer ANT
VOR
VOR/LOC
REFERENCE ONLY
SINGLE GTN, OTHER RADIO (SEPARATE G/S AND VOR/LOC

ANTENNA PORTS) AND DUAL ANTENNAS
G/S Antenna
GTN 650Xi/750Xi 3
4 6 VOR/LOC
P1008 Antenna
G/S 1
ANT Diplexer Splitter S
NAV
VOR 2
VHF NAV RADIO WITH 1

SEPARATE G/S AND Splitter S
VOR/LOC ANTENNA 2
PORTS G/S
VOR/LOC
REFERENCE ONLY

Sheet 3 of 5

Rev. 8 Page B-32
SINGLE GTN, OTHER RADIO, AND SINGLE ANTENNA
VOR/LOC/GS
Antenna
GTN 650Xi/750Xi
P1008
NAV 3
1
Splitter S
2
VHF NAV RADIO WITH

COMBINED VOR/LOC/
GS ANTENNA PORTS
NAV
REFERENCE ONLY
SINGLE GTN, OTHER RADIO, AND DUAL ANTENNAS

GTN 650Xi/750Xi G/S Antenna
P1008
NAV
VOR/LOC
Antenna
3 4 6
1 G/S
Splitter S ANT Diplexer
2 VOR
VHF NAV RADIO WITH

COMBINED VOR/LOC/
GS ANTENNA PORTS
NAV
REFERENCE ONLY

Sheet 4 of 5

Rev. 8 Page B-33
NOTES
1 REFER TO SECTION 4 FOR ANTENNA CABLE SPECIFICATIONS.
THE GPS ANTENNA COAXIAL CABLE MUST BE DOUBLE OR TRIPLE SHIELDED AND THE LOSS (INCLUDING
2 CONNECTORS) MUST USUALLY BE GREATER THAN 1.5 dB AND LESS THAN 6.5 dB. REFER TO
SECTION 4.2.1 FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION.
3 GARMIN P/N 013-00112-00 (MINI-CIRCUITS SPLITTER P/N ZFSC-2-1B+) MUST BE USED.
4 COMANT DIPLEXER P/N CI 507 MUST BE USED.
5 REFER TO SECTION 4.2.2 AND SECTION 4.2.3 FOR SPLITTER AND DIPLEXER INSTALLATION GUIDANCE.
THE DIPLEXER IS INSTALLED BACKWARDS FROM TRADITIONAL APPLICATIONS. WHEN A G/S AND VOR/
6 LOC ANTENNA IS INSTALLED, IT IS REQUIRED TO JOIN THE SIGNALS OF BOTH ANTENNAS WITH THE
CI-507 DIPLEXER.

Sheet 5 of 5

Rev. 8 Page B-34
EXTERNAL HTWAS ANNUNCIATORS
AIRCRAFT WITH DIMMER CIRCUIT & DAY/NIGHT SWITCH
HTAWS CAUTION/WARNING ANNUNCIATOR

(RED) HTAWS
GTN Xi (ORANGE) HTAWS
P1001 HTAWS (R)
HTAWS WARNING 71 B C
1
6
LAMP VOLTAGE FROM
G
28V TERMINAL BOARD
HTAWS CAUTION 73 A D
HTAWS (O)
HTAWS CAUTION/WARNING
HTAWS STATUS ANNUNCIATOR
(WHITE OR YELLOW)
HTAWS
(W) (Y) N/A
B C
GTN Xi
P1001
HTAWS INHIBIT 57 A D
6 G 5
LAMP VOLTAGE FROM

TERRAIN N/A 72 J1 J4
28V TERMINAL BOARD
J2 J3
DL2
K1 K4
K2 K3
HTAWS STATUS
RP MODE SWITCH
(WHITE – ALWAYS ON) RP MODE
GTN Xi (WHITE – ENERGIZED) ON
P1001
G 5
RP MODE ANNUN 34 A 1A
6 18‐200
RP MODE IN 36 3A
B
Figure B-13 HTAWS Annunciator Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 3

Rev. 8 Page B-35
EXTERNAL HTWAS ANNUNCIATORS
AIRCRAFT WITHOUT DAY/NIGHT SWITCH
HTAWS CAUTION/WARNING ANNUNCIATOR

(RED) HTAWS
GTN Xi (ORANGE) HTAWS
P1001 HTAWS (R)
HTAWS WARNING 71 B C
1
LAMP VOLTAGE FROM
6 G
28V TERMINAL BOARD
HTAWS CAUTION 73 A D
HTAWS (O)
HTAWS CAUTION/WARNING
HTAWS STATUS ANNUNCIATOR
(WHITE OR YELLOW)
HTAWS
N/A
(W) (Y)
B C
GTN Xi
D
P1001
HTAWS INHIBIT 57 A G
6
LAMP VOLTAGE FROM
TERRAIN N/A 72 J1 J4
28V TERMINAL BOARD
J2 J3
DL2
K1 K4
K2 K3
2
LAMP VOLTAGE FROM
HTAWS STATUS 28V TERMINAL BOARD
4
LAMP VOLTAGE FROM
28V TERMINAL BOARD
RP MODE SWITCH
3
GTN Xi
P1001
G
RP MODE ANNUN 34 A 1A
6 18‐200
RP MODE IN 36 3A
B
(WHITE – ALWAYS ON) RP MODE

(WHITE – ENERGIZED) ON

Sheet 2 of 3

Rev. 8 Page B-36
NOTES
1 USE 500 OHMS FIXED HERMETICALLY SEALED RESISTOR, MIL-PRF-55182.
4 USE DAY/NIGHT SWITCH (ON-NONE-ON), MIL-DTL-83731, P/N M83731/10-231.
CONNECT THE LAMP VOLTAGE TO THE ROTORCRAFT DIMMING CIRCUIT AS CONTROLLED BY THE
5
INSTALLED DAY/NIGHT SWITCH.
CONFIGURABLE DISCRETE. REFER TO SECTION 5.4.3.14 FOR INFORMATION ON CONFIGURING DISCRETE

6
FUNCTIONS.

Sheet 3 of 3

Rev. 8 Page B-37
GTN Xi 3
P1001
CDI 4
CDI SOURCE SELECT* 39
OBS/SUSP 5
OBS/SUSP MODE SELECT* 16
AIR/GROUND* 38 6 DAY
7
DAY/NIGHT* 12
NIGHT
RP MODE 8
RP MODE* 12
MOT 9
MARK ON TARGET* 12
HTAWS ALERT ACK

HTAWS ALERT
ACKNOWLEDGEMENT* 12
P1003
COM RMT XFR
COM REMOTE TRANSFER* 27
COM CHAN UP
COM REMOTE TUNE UP* 28
COM REMOTE TUNE DOWN* 29 10

COM CHAN DN
P1004
NAV RMT XFR
11
VLOC REMOTE TRANSFER 28
Figure B-14 Switches Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 8 Page B-38
NOTES
DEFAULT DISCRETE PINOUT IS SHOWN. ANY AVAILABLE CONFIGURABLE DISCRETE MAY BE USED. REFER
TO SECTION 5.4.3.14 FOR MORE INFORMATION ON CONFIGURING DISCRETES. REFER TO APPENDIX A
3
FOR SPECIFIC PINOUT INFORMATION. CONFIGURABLE DISCRETES ARE AVAILABLE ON THE GTN Xi P1001
AND P1002 CONNECTORS.
THE CDI SOURCE SELECT INPUT MAY BE USED TO TOGGLE BETWEEN GPS AND VLOC COURSE
DEVIATION SOURCES. REFER TO SECTION 3.3.9 FOR SWITCH INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. THIS
4 SWITCH MUST NOT BE INSTALLED IF A REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR PANEL WITH A CDI SWITCHING FUNCTION
IS CONNECTED TO THE GTN Xi.
OBS/SUSP MODE SELECT* MAY BE USED TO REMOTELY TOGGLE BETWEEN GPS AUTO AND GPS OBS/
SUSP MODE. REFER TO SECTION 3.3.9 FOR SWITCH INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. THIS SWITCH MUST
NOT BE INSTALLED IF A REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR PANEL WITH AN OBS/SUSP SWITCHING FUNCTION IS
5
CONNECTED TO THE GTN Xi. ETHERNET PORTS 2, 3, OR 4 MAY BE USED LIEU OF PORT 1. IF A PORT
OTHER THAN 1 IS USED, IT MUST BE ENABLED IN CONFIGURATION MODE. REFER TO GDL 69/69A
INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR ADDITIONAL DETAILS.
FOR GTN Xi INSTALLATIONS WITH SOFTWARE v20.30 OR LATER, THIS INPUT MUST BE CONNECTED TO A
SQUAT/COLLECTIVE SWITCH TO SIGNAL WHEN THE HELICOPTER IS AIRBORNE. THIS IS TO PREVENT THE
6 GTN Xi FROM AUTOMATICALLY POWER CYCLING IF THE PILOT TAKES OFF DURING DATABASE UPDATES.
THE AIR/GROUND* INPUT IS USED TO CONTROL THE AIR/GROUND STATUS OF THE GTN Xi. THIS INPUT
MUST BE GROUNDED TO ACTIVATE. REFER TO SECTION 5.4.3.10 FOR CONFIGURATION.
THE DAY/NIGHT INPUT MAY BE USED TO SELECT GTN Xi LIGHTING CURVES WHEN THE ENHANCED
LIGHTING CONFIGURATION IS ENABLED. REFER TO SECTION 3.3.9 FOR SWITCH INSTALLATION
7 REQUIREMENTS, OR USE AN AVAILABLE POLE ON AN EXISTING INSTALLED INSTRUMENT DIMMING
SWITCH.
THE RP MODE SWITCH MAY ONLY BE INSTALLED IN THE ROTORCRAFT IF A G500H OR G500H TXi IS ALSO
INSTALLED IN THE ROTORCRAFT AND PROVIDES THE APPROPRIATE RP MODE ANNUNCIATION. THE RP
8 MODE INPUT MAY BE USED TO PLACE THE HTERRAIN/HTAWS SYSTEM INTO REDUCED PROTECTION
MODE. REFER TO SECTION 3.3.9 FOR SWITCH INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS.
THE MARK ON TARGET INPUT MAY BE USED TO CREATE A USER WAYPOINT AT THE ROTORCRAFT’S
9
PRESENT LOCATION. REFER TO SECTION 3.3.9 FOR SWITCH INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS.
COM REMOTE TUNE UP AND COM REMOTE TUNE DOWN MAY BE USED TO SCROLL THROUGH A LIST OF
10 PRESET COM FREQUENCIES. REFER TO SECTION 3.3.9 FOR SWITCH INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS.
VLOC REMOTE TRANSFER MAY BE USED TO TRANSFER THE STANDBY NAV FREQUENCY TO THE ACTIVE
11 NAV FREQUENCY TO THE ACTIVE NAV FREQUENCY VIA REMOTE SWITCH. REFER TO SECTION 3.3.9 FOR
SWITCH INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS.
THIS FUNCTION IS NOT ONE OF THE DEFAULT DISCRETE PIN FUNCTIONS. TO UTILIZE THIS INPUT,
12 RECONFIGURE ONE OF THE AVAILABLE DISCRETE INPUT PINS ON THE P1001 OR P1002 CONNECTORS.
REFER TO SECTION 5.4.3.14 FOR MORE INFORMATION ON CONFIGURING DISCRETES.
SWITCHES LABEL TEXT MUST BE AS SHOWN IN THE DIAGRAM. REFER TO SECTION 3.3.9 FOR ADDITIONAL
13
SWITCH INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS.
Figure B-14 Switches Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 8 Page B-39
7 6 ALTITUDE
ACK Trans-Cal Shadin Icarus ENCODER
GTN Xi Sandia
Technologies IA-RS232-X 8800T/9000T Instruments SAE5-35
A-30 SSD-120 9200T 3000
P1001
10 DB15 DB9 DB15 P3 (DB9) J5
4 RS-232 IN 2 26 7 (14) 4 (9) 7 2 1 (2) RS-232 OUT HI
RS-232 GND 2 45 SHELL 5 15 SHELL 5 RS-232 OUT LO
s s s
s
TO GTN #2 - 1 - - - CONFIG JUMPER

(IF INSTALLED) 9 - 2 - - - (RESOLUTION)
8 - 7 - - - CONFIG JUMPER
9 - 8 - - - (OUTPUT FORMAT)
FUEL/AIR DATA
GARMIN ARNAV JP Instruments Shadin Shadin Shadin Shadin Shadin Shadin Electronics
GTX 327 FC-10 EDM-700
Miniflo-L Digiflo-L Digiflo-L Digidata F/ADC-2000 F/ADC-200 International
FT-10 91204XT(38)D 91053XP 91053XT-D 912802-( ) 962830A-( ) F/ADC-2000 FP-5L
P3271 J1 J2
RS-232 IN 1 27 20 2 1 6 5 J 5 39 6 15 RS-232 OUT HI
4
RS-232 GND 1 46 13 4 SHELL 2 2 D 2 23 9 SHELL RS-232 OUT LO
s
RS-232
RECEIVER
JP Shadin Shadin Shadin Shadin Shadin Shadin
GARMIN
Instruments Miniflo-L Digiflo-L Digiflo-L Digidata F/ADC-2000 F/ADC-200
GTX 327
EDM-700 91204XT(38)D 91053XP 91053XT-D 91802-( ) 962830A-() F/ADC-2000
P3271 J1 J2
RS-232 OUT 1 8 2 2 9 12 H 12 21 5 RS-232 IN HI
4 13 SHELL 2 2 D 2 23 9 RS-232 IN LO
s
Figure B-15 RS-232 Serial Data Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 8 Page B-40
NOTES
RS-232 CHANNEL PORTS 1 TO 3 ARE SHOWN. ANY AVAILABLE RS-232 PORT MAY BE USED. REFER TO
3
SECTION 5.4.3.2 FOR PORT CONFIGURATION INFORMATION.

4
INFORMATION. PINOUTS OF OTHER UNITS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
IF USING THE SERIAL PORT SOFTWARE METHOD TO CONFIGURE THE OUTPUT OF THE ENCODER,
5
ENSURE THE “TRIMBLE/GARMIN 9600 BPS” FORMAT IS SELECTED.
MOD LEVEL 8 (OR HIGHER) IS REQUIRED TO SUPPORT RS-232 INTERFACE. ENSURE THAT JUMPERS ARE
6 SET FOR “TRIMBLE/GARMIN 9600 BPS” AND “10 FOOT RESOLUTION.”
IN A DUAL GTN Xi INSTALLATION, CONNECT THE ALTITUDE SOURCE TO BOTH GTN Xi #1 AND GTN Xi #2.
7 USE NEXT AVAILABLE RS-232 IN PORT. ENSURE BOTH PORTS ARE CONFIGURED TO THE CORRECT DATA
FORMAT SETTING, AS DESCRIBED IN SECTION 5.4.3.2.
THE LENGTH OF THE STRAPS MUST BE LIMITED TO THE LENGTH SPECIFIED IN THE MANUFACTURER’S
8
INSTALLATION MANUAL.
THE SPLICE MUST BE PERFORMED AT THE GTN Xi CONNECTOR END OF THE WIRE. SPLICE AS SHOWN.
GTN P100X
9
s
s
Figure B-15 RS-232 Serial Data Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 8 Page B-41
AIR DATA
GTN Xi COMPUTER
Shadin Shadin B&D Bendix/King Bendix/King
ADC 2000 ADC 2000 90004-003 KDC 281 KDC 481
P1001
J2 (DB 15) J1 (MS CONN) P2811 P4811
ARINC 429 IN 1A 48 7 40 27 5 U TRANSMITTER A

5 8 22 9 6 i TRANSMITTER B
ARINC 429 IN 1B 67
s
GTN Xi AIR DATA

COMPUTER
Insight
TAS 1000
P1001 DSUB-25 PLUG
RS-232 OUT 1 8 23 RS-232 RXD
4 10 RS-232 TXD
RS-232 IN 1 27
s
Figure B-16 Air Data Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 8 Page B-42
NOTES
REFER TO SECTION 5.4.3.2 FOR RS-232 CHANNEL SETTINGS. RS-232 CHANNEL 1 PORT IS SHOWN. ANY
4
AVAILABLE RS-232 PORT MAY BE USED.
REFER TO SECTION 5.4.3.1 FOR ARINC 429 CHANNEL SETTINGS. IF ARINC 429 IN 1 PORT IS BEING USED
5 FOR ANOTHER PURPOSE, ANY AVAILABLE ARINC 429 IN PORT MAY BE CONNECTED INSTEAD. SOFTWARE
v1.6 OR HIGHER REQUIRED FOR THE TRC 497.

6 INFORMATION. PINOUTS OF OTHER UNITS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
Figure B-16 Air Data Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 8 Page B-43
GTN Xi #2 or
GTN Xi #1 P1002 P1002 GTN 6XX/7XX
4
s s
NOTES
3
LEADS MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES. REFER TO SECTION 4.7.2.1.
Figure B-17 GTN Xi - GTN Xi or GTN 6XX/7XX Crossfill Interconnect

Rev. 8 Page B-44
GARMIN GTN Xi GARMIN
GSR 56
P1002 P561
GSR AUDIO ATTENUATE* 3 18 ATTENUATE OUTPUT* 8
GSR STATUS IN* 11 31 STATUS DISCRETE* OUT
6
GSR REMOTE PWR* 12 16 IRIDIUM RMT PWR ON*
P1001
RS-232 IN 4 24 12 RS-232 OUT
7 RS-232 OUT 4 5 13 RS-232 IN
s s
AUDIO PANEL
4
TEL MIC AUDIO OUT HI 4 GSR 56 AUDIO IN HI
TEL MIC AUDIO OUT LO 5 GSR 56 AUDIO IN LO
(OPTIONAL)
TEL AUDIO IN HI
1 GSR 56 AUDIO OUT HI
TEL AUDIO IN LO 2 GSR 56 AUDIO OUT LO
s
NOTES
AT GTN Xi, CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL. THE SHIELD LEADS MUST BE
3 LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES. CONNECT THE SHIELD GROUNDS AT THE GSR 56 TO ITS CONNECTOR
BACKSHELL IN ACCORDANCE WITH GSR 56 INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS.
4 OPTIONAL AUDIO CONNECTIONS ARE REQUIRED IF THE PHONE FEATURE OF THE GSR 56 IS UTILIZED.
IF THIS RS-232 PORT IS ALREADY USED FOR ANOTHER PURPOSE, ANY RS-232 PORT MAY BE
5
CONNECTED IN LIEU OF THIS PORT. REFER TO SECTION 5.4.3.2 FOR RS-232 SETTINGS.
DEFAULT DISCRETE PINOUT IS SHOWN. ANY AVAILABLE CONFIGURABLE DISCRETE MAY BE USED. REFER
TO SECTION 5.4.3.14 FOR MORE INFORMATION ON CONFIGURING DISCRETES. REFER TO APPENDIX A
6
FOR SPECIFIC PINOUT INFORMATION. CONFIGURABLE DISCRETES ARE AVAILABLE ON THE GTN Xi P1001
AND P1002 CONNECTORS.
SELECT ANY AVAILABLE CONFIGURABLE DISCRETE OUTPUT. THIS OUTPUT SHOULD BE CONFIGURED AS
7
“OFF” AT THIS TIME.
8 ATTENUATE OUTPUT* IS NOT AVAILABLE ON GSR 56 (P/N 011-01706-00).
Figure B-18 GSR 56 Interconnect

Rev. 8 Page B-45
DUAL GTN Xi INTERCONNECT – SINGLE GDU
4
GTN Xi #1 P1004 P6202 GDU 620 PFD/MFD
VOR/ILS 429 OUT A 24 7 ARINC 429 IN 4A
VOR/ILS 429 OUT B NAV 1
23 24 ARINC 429 IN 4B
s s
P1002
6 P6201
s s
P1001 P6202
RS-232 OUT 2 7 12 RS-232 IN 3
RS-232 GND 2 45 46 RS-232 GND 3
s s
TIME MARK OUT A 3 40 TIME MARK IN 1A
GPS 1
TIME MARK OUT B 22 41 TIME MARK IN 1B
s s
ARINC 429 OUT 2A 9 6 ARINC 429 IN 3A
ARINC 429 OUT 2B 28 23 ARINC 429 IN 3B
s s
ARINC 429 IN 2A 47 3 ARINC 429 OUT 1A

ARINC 429 IN 2B 66 20 ARINC 429 OUT 1B
s s
GTN Xi #2
4 P1001
ARINC 429 IN 2A 47
ARINC 429 IN 2B 66
s
RS-232 OUT 2 7 13 RS-232 IN 4
RS-232 GND 2 45 47 RS-232 GND 4
s s
TIME MARK OUT A 3 42 TIME MARK IN 2A GPS 2

s s
ARINC 429 OUT 2A 9 8 ARINC 429 IN 5A
ARINC 429 OUT 2B 28 25 ARINC 429 IN 5B
s s
P1002 P6201
6
s s
8 SYSTEM ID PROGRAM* 10 22 AWG
s
P1004 P6202
VOR/ILS 429 OUT A 24 9 ARINC 429 IN 6A
VOR/ILS 429 OUT B NAV 2
23 26 ARINC 429 IN 6B
s s
Figure B-19 GDU 620 Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 8 Page B-46
NOTES
3 LEADS MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES. CONNECT OTHER END OF THE SHIELD PER THE GDU 620
INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS. REFER TO SECTION 4.7.2.1.
IF AN HTAWS-EQUIPPED GTN Xi IS INSTALLED, IT MUST BE CONNECTED AS GTN Xi #1. ONLY HTAWS
ANNUNCIATIONS FROM GTN Xi #1 ARE DISPLAYED ON THE PFD. IF TWO HTAWS-EQUIPPED UNITS ARE
4 INSTALLED, THE HTAWS-EQUIPPED UNIT THAT IS CONNECTED TO THE AUDIO PANEL MUST BE
CONNECTED AS GTN Xi #1.
REFER TO GDU 620 INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR COMPLETE PINOUT AND INTERCONNECT INFORMATION.
5
PINOUTS OF OTHER UNITS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
7 IF ONLY ONE GTN Xi IS INSTALLED, CONNECT AS SHOWN FOR GTN Xi #1.
THIS PIN IS NOT REQUIRED. DEFAULT DISCRETE FUNCTION FOR THIS PIN IS SHOWN. THE SYSTEM ID
8 FUNCTION IS CONFIGURABLE AS DESCRIBED IN SECTION 5.4.3.10.
ANY AVAILABLE RS-232 PORT MAY BE USED. REFER TO SECTION 5.4.3.2 FOR PORT CONFIGURATION
8
INFORMATION.
ANY AVAILABLE ARINC 429 PORT MAY BE USED. REFER TO SECTION 5.4.3.1 FOR PORT CONFIGURATION
9 INFORMATION.
Figure B-19 GDU 620 Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 8 Page B-47
DUAL GTN INTERCONNECT – SINGLE GDU
GTN Xi #1 GDU 700/1060 PFD
3 P1002
P2
5
s s
P1001 P3
s s
GTN Xi #2
3 P1001
s s
P1002 P2
5
s s
NOTES
IF HTAWS-EQUPPED GTN Xi UNIT IS INSTALLED, OR HTERRAIN ALERTING ENABLED, IT MUST BE

3 CONNECTED AS GTN Xi #1. ONLY HTAWS/HTERRAIN ALERTING ANNUNCIATIONS FROM GTN 1 ARE
DISPLAYED ON THE PFD.
REFER TO G500H TXI PART 27 AML STC INSTALLATION MANUAL (P/N 190-02401-00) FOR COMPLETE
4 PINOUT AND INTERCONNECT INFORMATION. PINOUTS OF OTHER UNITS SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY.
CONNECT SHIELD GROUNDS TO THE CONNECTOR BACKSHELL. THE SHIELD LEADS MUST BE LESS THAN
6
3.0 INCHES.
Figure B-20 GDU 700/1060 Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 8 Page B-48
RADAR
GARMIN ALTIMETER
GRA 55/5500
GTN Xi
P1001 P55001
ARINC 429 IN 1A 48 52 ARINC 429 OUT A
ARINC 429 IN 1B 67 55 ARINC 429 OUT B
s s
NOTES
3 LEADS MUST BE LESS THAN 3.0 INCHES. SHIELD CONNECTIONS AT THE RADAR ALTIMETER CONNECTOR
ARE CONNECTED PER THE RADAR ALTIMETER INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS.
Figure B-21 Radar Altimeter Interconnect

Rev. 8 Page B-49
B.2 GMA 35 Interconnect Drawings
GMA 35/35c Garmin COM 1

Audio Panel 420W/ Transceiver*
SL 30/SL GTN 635/ GTN 635Xi/ 430W/
40 650/750 650Xi/750Xi 530W
P4002/ 3
P1 P1003 P1003
5 P5002
P3501
COM 1 AUDIO IN HI 9 14 7 7 7 500  COM AUDIO HI
COM 1 AUDIO LO 10 13 18 18 19 500 COM AUDIO LO
s
7 20 20 18 COM MIC AUDIO LO
COM 1 MIC KEY OUT* 12 4 11 11 4 COM MIC KEY
COM 1 MIC AUDIO OUT HI 11 8 5 5 6 COM MIC AUDIO HI
s
Garmin COM 2
SL 30/SL GTN 635/ GTN 635Xi/ 420W/ Transceiver*
430W/
40 650/750 650Xi/750Xi 530W 3
P4002/
P1 P1003 P1003
5 P5002
COM 2 AUDIO LO 14 13 18 18 19 500  COM AUDIO LO
s
COM 2 MIC AUDIO OUT HI 15 8 5 5 6 COM MIC AUDIO HI
s
COM 3
Garmin Transceiver
420W/
SL 30/SL GTN 635/ GTN 635Xi/ 430W/
40 650/750 650Xi/750Xi
530W
P4002/
P1 P1003 P1003
5 P5002
COM 3 AUDIO LO 4 13 18 18 19 500 COM AUDIO LO
s
XCVR 3 MIC AUDIO OUT HI 5 8 5 5 6 COM MIC AUDIO HI
s
NAV 1
Garmin
Receiver
SL 30 GTN GTN 650Xi/ GNS 430W/
650/750 750Xi 530W
37-Pin P4006/
5 Connector P1004 P1004
P5006
NAV 1 AUDIO IN HI 17 23 16 16 16 500  VLOC AUDIO OUT HI
NAV 1 AUDIO IN LO 18 20 17 17 17 500 VLOC AUDIO OUT LO
s
RCVR 3 AUDIO IN HI 21
RCVR 3 AUDIO IN LO 22 4 5
s
RCVR 4 AUDIO IN HI 7 NAV 2
4 5 Garmin
RCVR 4 AUDIO IN LO 8 Receiver
s
SL 30 GTN GTN 650Xi/ GNS 430W/
RCVR 5 AUDIO IN HI 23 650/750 750Xi 530W
4 5 37-Pin P4006/
P1004 P1004
s 5 Connector P5006
NAV 2 AUDIO IN HI 19 23 16 16 16 500 VLOC AUDIO OUT HI
NAV 2 AUDIO IN LO 20 20 17 17 17 500  VLOC AUDIO OUT LO
s
Figure B-22 GMA 35 COM/NAV Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 8 Page B-50
GTN 750/GTN 750Xi Installation with Second COM 3
COM 1 Transceiver
GMA 35/35c Garmin Garmin (Connected as COM 2)
GTN GTN
Audio Panel 750 750Xi
P3501 P1003 P1003
COM 2 AUDIO IN HI 13 7 7 500 COM AUDIO HI
COM 2 AUDIO LO 14 18 18 500 COM AUDIO LO
s
20 20 COM MIC AUDIO LO
COM 2 MIC KEY OUT* 30 11 11 COM MIC KEY
COM 2 MIC AUDIO OUT HI 15 5 5 COM MIC AUDIO HI
s
COM 2 Transceiver
Garmin (Connected as COM 1)
GNS 530W
P5002
COM 1 AUDIO IN HI 9 7 500  COM AUDIO HI
COM 1 AUDIO LO 10 19 500  COM AUDIO LO
s
18 COM MIC AUDIO LO
COM 1 MIC KEY OUT* 12 4 COM MIC KEY
COM 1 MIC AUDIO OUT HI 11 6 COM MIC AUDIO HI
s
NOTES
WHEN A SECOND COM RADIO IS INSTALLED WITH THE GTN 750Xi AND GMA 35, THE GTN 750Xi SHOULD BE
CONNECTED TO THE GMA 35 COM 2 PINS AND THE OTHER RADIO SHOULD BE CONNECTED TO COM 1
PINS. THIS WILL PREVENT LOSS OF BOTH COM RADIOS IN THE EVENT THE GTN 750Xi LOSES RS-232
3 COMMUNICATION WITH THE GMA 35. A FAILSAFE CIRCUIT IN THE GMA 35 CONNECTS THE PILOT’S
HEADSET AND MICROPHONE DIRECTLY TO COM 1 IN CASE POWER TO THE GMA 35 OR RS-232
COMMUNICATION WITH THE GTN 750Xi IS LOST. REFER TO SECTION 5.4.6.6.1 FOR CONFIGURATION
SETTINGS. REFER TO SECTION 3.3.6 FOR ADDITIONAL CONSIDERATIONS FOR FAILSAFE OPERATION.
THESE INPUTS CAN BE USED FOR ANALOG AUDIO, SUCH AS ADF OR DME ANALOG AUDIO. THESE INPUTS
4 ACCEPT UP TO 15 MW INTO A 600 OHM LOAD. REFER TO SECTION 5.4.6.6.3 TO CONFIGURE EACH
RECEIVER INPUT.
TO PREVENT COUPLED INTERFERENCE AND GROUND LOOPS FROM BEING INJECTED INTO THE AUDIO
5
INPUTS, GROUND THE SHIELDS AT ONLY ONE END.
ALL HEADSET, MICROPHONE, AND MUSIC PHONE PLUGS MUST BE ELECTRICALLY ISOLATED FROM
6 GROUND. THIS MAY REQUIRE THE USE OF INSULATING WASHERS WHEN MOUNTING THE PHONE PLUGS.
ADDITIONALLY, THE SPEAKER RETURN MUST BE ISOLATED FROM GROUND.
Figure B-22 GMA 35 COM/NAV Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 8 Page B-51
GMA 35/35c Audio Panel 7
P3502 AUDIO
14/28 VDC ROTORCRAFT
AIRCRAFT POWER 8 20 AWG POWER
AIRCRAFT POWER 9 3A (14/28 VDC)
AIRCRAFT GROUND 10 20 AWG ROTORCRAFT

AIRCRAFT GROUND 11 GROUND
GTN 7XX or
3 P1001 GTN 7XX Xi
RS-232 IN 17 7 RS-232 OUT 2

RS-232 OUT 18 26 RS-232 IN 2 8
45 RS-232 GND 2
s s
Marker Beacon
Antenna
P3501
5
MARKER ANTENNA IN HI 1
MARKER ANTENNA IN LO 2
INNER MARKER LAMP OUT 36

MIDDLE MARKER LAMP OUT 38 6
OUTER MARKER LAMP OUT 37
Figure B-23 GMA 35 Power Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 8 Page B-52
NOTES
THE RS-232 CONNECTION TO THE GTN 7XX Xi IS REQUIRED FOR COMMAND AND CONTROL OF THE
3
GMA 35 AUDIO PANEL FUNCTIONS. THE GTN 7XX Xi IS THE CONTROLLER FOR THE GMA 35.
4 NOT USED.
5 REFER TO SECTION 4.2.5 FOR INSTRUCTIONS ON WIRING THE ANTENNA CONNECTIONS TO THE GMA 35.
6 THESE OUTPUTS CAN BE USED TO DRIVE EXTERNAL MARKER LAMPS, IF DESIRED.
THE CIRCUIT BREAKER SHOULD BE LABELED AS SHOWN DIRECTLY ADJACENT TO THE CIRCUIT
7 BREAKER. THE CIRCUIT BREAKER MUST BE READILY ACCESSIBLE TO THE PILOT.
IF THIS RS-232 PORT IS ALREADY USED FOR ANOTHER PURPOSE, ANY RS-232 PORT MAY BE CONNECTED
8
IN LIEU OF THIS PORT. REFER TO SECTION 5.4.3.2 FOR RS-232 SETTINGS.
Figure B-23 GMA 35 Power Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 8 Page B-53
GMA 35/35c Audio Panel
P3501
MIC JACK
PILOT MIC KEY IN* 34
PILOT MIC AUDIO IN HI 33 PILOT PTT
PILOT MIC AUDIO IN LO 35
s
P3502 MIC JACK

COPILOT MIC KEY IN* 33
COPILOT MIC AUDIO IN HI 32 COPILOT PTT
COPILOT MIC AUDIO IN LO 34
s
PASS 1 MIC AUDIO IN HI 35 PASS 1 MIC JACK

PASS 1 MIC AUDIO IN LO 36
s

s

s

s
PILOT HEADSET AUDIO OUT L 16

PILOT HEADSET AUDIO OUT R 31 PILOT HEADSET
PILOT HEADSET AUDIO OUT LO 1
s
COPILOT HEADSET AUDIO OUT L 3

COPILOT HEADSET AUDIO OUT R 4 COPILOT HEADSET
COPILOT HEADSET AUDIO OUT LO 2
s
SPEAKER AUDIO OUT HI 44 +

SPEAKER AUDIO OUT LO 43 - COCKPIT SPEAKER
s
P3501
PASS HEADSET AUDIO OUT L 40
PASS HEADSET AUDIO OUT R 41 PASS 1 HEADSET
PASS HEADSET AUDIO OUT LO 42
s
PASS 2,3,4 HEADSETS 3
Figure B-24 GMA 35 Microphone and Headset Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 8 Page B-54
NOTES
3 UP TO FOUR PASSENGER HEADSETS MAY BE WIRED IN PARALLEL.
Figure B-24 GMA 35 Microphone and Headset Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 8 Page B-55
GMA 35/35c Traffic Advisory
Audio Panel L3 COMM HONEYWELL RYAN GARMIN System
KTA 870 KTA 970 GTX GTS 8XX GDL 88
TRC 497 TRC 899 KMH 880 KMH 980 9900B 9900BX 330/33
P3501 P1 P1 J10 J10 P1 P1 P3301 P8002 P881
4
ALERT 1 AUDIO IN HI 31 92 89 20 20 3 3 15 58 4 ALERT AUDIO OUT HI
3
ALERT 1 AUDIO IN LO 32 90 91 21 21 4 4 16 59 23 ALERT AUDIO OUT LO
s
POTS Telephone
4
TEL AUDIO IN HI 25 AUDIO OUT HI
TEL AUDIO IN LO 26 AUDIO OUT LO
s
TEL MIC OUT HI 27 AUDIO IN HI
TEL MIC OUT LO 28 AUDIO IN LO
s
ALERT 4 (TEL RING)
44 TEL RING AUDIO OUT HI
AUDIO IN HI
ALERT 2,3,4 AUDIO IN LO 43 TEL RING AUDIO OUT LO
s
GDU 700/ GDU 5

GDU 620
1060
P2 P6201
9 29 AUDIO OUT LO
ALERT 3 AUDIO IN HI 29 10 28 AUDIO OUT HI
s
4 P1001 GTN Xi
P3502 23 AUDIO OUT LO
ALERT 2 AUDIO IN HI 15 4 AUDIO OUT HI
s
FAILSAFE WARN TO FAILSAFE AUDIO SOURCE 6

29
AUDIO IN HI s
MUSIC 2 IN LEFT 26
MUSIC 2 IN RIGHT 27 TO OTHER STEREO AUDIO SOURCE GDL 69/69A
MUSIC 2 IN LO 28 P691
s 4
MUSIC 1 IN LEFT 23 19 AUDIO OUT LEFT
MUSIC 1 IN RIGHT 24 18 AUDIO OUT RIGHT
MUSIC 1 IN LO 25 17 AUDIO OUT LO
s
Figure B-25 GMA 35 Other Audio Sources Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 8 Page B-56
NOTES
THE GMA 35 HAS FOUR UNSWITCHED ALERT AUDIO INPUTS FOR ALERT AUDIO SOURCES SUCH AS
3
HTAWS OR TRAFFIC.
TO PREVENT COUPLED INTERFERENCE AND GROUND LOOPS FROM BEING INJECTED INTO THE AUDIO
4 INPUTS, GROUND THE SHIELDS AT ONLY ONE END. EITHER END OF THE SHIELD MAY BE GROUNDED.
FOR REFERENCE ONLY. REFER TO G500H ROTORCRAFT STC INSTALLATION MANUAL OR G500H TXi
5
PART 27 AML STC INSTALLATION MANUAL FOR MORE DETAIL.
FAILSAFE WARN AUDIO IN HI IS HEARD DURING NORMAL OPERATION AS A FIFTH ALERT INPUT. DURING
FAILSAFE MODE, BOTH FAILSAFE WARN AUDIO IN HI AND COM 1 AUDIO INPUT ARE CONNECTED TO THE
PILOT HEADSET LEFT OUTPUT. DURING THIS TIME, THE OUTPUT OF THE COM 1 RADIO AND THE OUTPUT
OF THE DEVICE CONNECTED TO FAILSAFE WARN AUDIO IN HI WILL BECOME SHORTED TOGETHER,
6 POTENTIALLY CAUSING DAMAGE OR INTERFERENCE. IF THE FAILSAFE WARN AUDIO IN HI IS USED,
INSTALL SUMMING RESISTORS IN SERIES BETWEEN THESE SOURCES AND THE INPUTS TO THE AUDIO
PANEL TO PROTECT THE OUTPUTS FROM DAMAGE. A TYPICAL VALUE FOR MIXING RESISTORS IS
390Ω ¼ W. THE AUDIO LEVELS OF EXISTING AUDIO SOURCES WILL HAVE TO BE RE-EVALUATED AFTER
MIXING RESISTORS ARE INSTALLED.
Figure B-25 GMA 35 Other Audio Sources Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 8 Page B-57
GMA 35/35c
Audio Panel
PTC
P3501
PILOT PUSH-TO- 3
16
COMMAND KEY* IN
COM ACTIVE* OUT 24 5
P3502 4
PASS ICS KEY* IN 14
PA MUTE* OUT 12 6
PA MODE SELECTED* OUT 19 7
COM CYCLE* IN 20
4
CLEARANCE RECORDER
22
PLAYBACK* IN
PTC
COPILOT PUSH-TO- 3
30
COMMAND KEY* IN
Figure B-26 GMA 35 Discretes Interconnect

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 8 Page B-58
NOTES
USE GRAYHILL SWITCH P/N 30-3 OR C&K 8631ZBD2. THE SWITCH MUST BE LABELED AS SHOWN DIRECTLY
ADJACENT TO THE SWITCH. WHEN THE PTC SWITCH IS INSTALLED, THE PUSH-TO-TALK SWITCH MUST BE
3
LABELED AS “PTT.” REFER TO SECTION 4.8 AND SECTION 3.3.9 FOR ADDITIONAL SWITCH INSTALLATION
REQUIREMENTS.
THESE SWITCHES ARE SHOWN FOR REFERENCE ONLY. INSTALLATION OF THESE SWITCHES IS NOT
4 COVERED BY THIS STC.
THIS OUTPUT MAY BE USED BY OTHER SYSTEMS TO MUTE APPLICABLE AUDIO SOURCES WHEN COM
5 RECEIVE IS ACTIVE. REFER TO THE MANUFACTURER’S DOCUMENTATION FOR THESE SYSTEMS FOR
MORE DETAIL.
THIS OUTPUT MAY BE USED BY EXTERNAL PA SYSTEMS TO MUTE THE PA WHEN PA MODE IS ACTIVE AND
6 THE PTT BUTTON IS PRESSED. REFER TO THE EXTERNAL PA SYSTEM DOCUMENTATION FOR MORE
DETAIL.
THIS OUTPUT MAY BE USED BY EXTERNAL PA SYSTEMS TO ENABLE THE EXTERNAL PA SYSTEM WHEN PA
7 MODE IS ACTIVE. REFER TO THE EXTERNAL PA SYSTEM DOCUMENTATION FOR MORE DETAIL.
Figure B-26 GMA 35 Discretes Interconnect

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 8 Page B-59
APPENDIX C EQUIPMENT COMPATIBILITY AND CONFIGURATION
C.1 GTN Xi Equipment ......................................................................................................................... C-2

C.1.1 Audio Panel ........................................................................................................................... C-2
C.1.2 Air Data Computer ................................................................................................................ C-3
C.1.3 Altitude Serializer or Fuel/Air Data ...................................................................................... C-4
C.1.4 EFIS Displays ....................................................................................................................... C-5
C.1.5 Transponder .......................................................................................................................... C-7
C.1.6 NAV Indicator ....................................................................................................................... C-9
C.1.7 Weather, Traffic, and Terrain ............................................................................................. C-10
C.1.8 Iridium Transceiver ............................................................................................................. C-10
C.1.9 ADS-B Traffic and FIS-B Weather Sources ....................................................................... C-11
C.1.10 Radar Altimeters ................................................................................................................. C-11
C.1.11 Flight Stream ....................................................................................................................... C-11
C.2 GMA 35 Equipment Compatibility .............................................................................................. C-12
C.2.1 COM Radios ....................................................................................................................... C-12
C.2.2 NAV Radios ........................................................................................................................ C-12
The following equipment listed in this appendix is compatible with the GTN Xi system when configured as
described herein. For detailed configuration information, refer to Section 5.4.

Rev. 8 Page C-1
C.1 GTN Xi Equipment
C.1.1 Audio Panel
Audio panels not listed below can still be approved for interface to the GTN Xi under this GTN AML STC
if all of the following conditions are met:
• The installation of the audio panel was previously FAA-approved
• VHF COM audio and VHF NAV audio (if applicable) must be verified as described in
Section 6.2.4 and Section 6.2.5
• The audio panel must have an unswitched audio input that is used for the GTN Xi audio
Table C-1 Compatible Audio Panel Models
Manufacturer Model Data Format Notes
SL10 Analog Audio
SL10MS Analog Audio
SL10M Analog Audio
SL10S Analog Audio
SL15 Analog Audio
SL15M Analog Audio
GMA 340 Analog Audio
Garmin GMA 347 Analog Audio

GTN Xi RS-232 format should be configured
GMA 35 Analog Audio
for GMA Format 1. GMA software v4.20A is
(P/N 011-02299-00) RS-232
required.
GMA 35 Analog Audio
(P/N 011-02299-20) RS-232
GMA v4.21C is required.
GMA 35c Analog Audio
(P/N 011-02299-40) RS-232
GMA 350/350H/ Analog Audio RS-232 connection is provisional for future
350c/350Hc RS-232 use.
KMA 24 Analog Audio
Honeywell KMA 24H-70/71 Analog Audio

(Bendix/King) KMA 26 Analog Audio
KMA 28 Analog Audio
PMA 6000 Analog Audio
PS Engineering PMA 7000 Series Analog Audio
PMA 8000 Series Analog Audio

Rev. 8 Page C-2
C.1.2 Air Data Computer
Air data computers not listed below can still be approved for interface to the GTN Xi under this GTN
AML STC if all of the following conditions are met:
• The air data computer provides the following labels:
203 – Pressure Altitude
204 – Barometric-Corrected Altitude
210 – True Airspeed
• The interface check for the altitude encoder described in Section 6.2.9 must be successfully
completed
• The installation of the air data computer was previously FAA-approved
• The air data computer is TSO approved
• The connections to the GTN Xi must utilize shielded wiring of the type specified in this manual.
Shields must be terminated on the GTN Xi side to connector shield block ground and on the air
data computer side in accordance with the air data computer installation data. If the air data
computer installation data does not specify a shielding method, then terminate the shield at the air
data computer using the guidelines provided in Section 4.1.1.2
If these conditions are met, the interface is approved under this GTN AML STC.
Table C-2 Compatible Air Data Computer Models
Manufacturer Model Data Format Configuration
B&D 90004-003 ARINC 429 Airdata, low speed
Honeywell KDC 281 ARINC 429 Airdata, low speed

(Bendix/King) KDC 481 ARINC 429 Airdata, low speed
Insight TAS 1000 RS-232 FADC Format 1

Rev. 8 Page C-3
C.1.3 Altitude Serializer or Fuel/Air Data
Altitude serializers/encoders not listed below are approved under this GTN AML STC if all of the
following conditions are met:
• The altitude serializer/encoder is TSO-approved
• The installation of the altitude serializer/encoder was previously FAA-approved
• The interface check for the altitude serializer/encoder described in Section 6.1.10 must be
successfully completed
Table C-3 Compatible Altitude Serializer and Fuel/Air Data Models

Manufacturer Model Data Format Configuration
ACK Technologies A-30 (Mod 8 and above) RS-232 Altitude Format 1
FC-10
ARNAV RS-232 Fuel Format 1
FT-10
Electronics International FP-5L RS-232 Fuel Format 1
Garmin GTX 327 RS-232 Altitude Format 1
Icarus Instruments 3000 RS-232 Altitude Format 1
JP Instruments EDM-700 RS-232 Fuel Format 2
Sandia SAE 5-35 RS-232 Altitude Format 1
8800T
9000T [1] Altitude Format 3
9200T [1]
F/ADC-200
Airdata Format 1
Shadin F/ADC-2000 RS-232
91204XT(38)D (Miniflo-L)
91053XP (Digiflo-L)
Fuel Format 2
91053XT-D (Digiflo-L)
912802-( ) (Digidata)
IA-RS232-X
Trans-Cal Industries RS-232 Altitude Format 1
SSD120
Notes:
[1] This source must not be connected to the GTN Xi if the GTN Xi is the pressure altitude source
for a Mode S transponder.

Rev. 8 Page C-4
C.1.4 EFIS Displays
Table C-4 Garmin G500H EFIS Display
Garmin GDU 620 ARINC 429, RS-232, HSDB [1] [2]
GDU 620 Configuration Settings:
ARINC 429 INPUT: IN 3: High, GPS1
IN 4: Low, NAV1
ARINC 429 OUTPUT: OUT 1: Low, GPS NAVIGATOR
RS-232: CHNL 3: GPS1
SYSTEM GPS1: (PRESENT) TYPE:
UNIT TYPE
CONFIGURATION:
625Xi GPS 400W
INTERFACING
SYSTEMS 635Xi GNC 420W
650Xi GNS 430W
725Xi GNC 500W
750Xi GNS 530W
NAV1: (PRESENT) TYPE:

UNIT TYPE
650Xi GNS 430W
750Xi GNS 530W
GTN Xi Configuration Settings:

Interfaced Equipment GDU #1: Present Settings: GDU 620
ARINC 429 Setup: IN: Low, GDU Format 1
OUT: High, GAMA Format 1
SDI: LNAV 1 (for GPS 1)
LNAV 2 (for GPS 2)
RS-232 Setup: OUT: MapMX Format 1
Main Indicator (Analog)
CDI: CDI Key: Enabled (for single GDU install)
(i.e., Main CDI/VDI outputs can be GPS or VLOC)
Disabled (for Dual GDU install)
(i.e., Main CDI/VDI outputs can only be GPS)
VOR/LOC/GS Setup: ARINC 429 Config: Tx Speed: Low
SDI: VOR/ILS 1 (for NAV 1)
VOR/ILS 2 (for NAV 2)
Notes:
[1] GDU 620 settings are for reference only. To ensure all configuration items for the GDU 620 are
set in accordance with the G500H Part 27 STC, refer to G500H Rotorcraft STC Installation
Manual (Garmin P/N 190-01150-06).
[2] GDU 620 software v7.30 or later is required for the GDU 620 to receive VNAV features
from a GTN Xi.

Rev. 8 Page C-5
Table C-5 Garmin G500H TXi EFIS Display
Garmin GDU 700/1060 HSDB [1] [2] [3]
GDU 700/1060 Configuration Settings:
GDU 1/2/3/4 Interfaces:
GPS 1 GTN 6XX or GTN 7XX
NAV 1 GTN 650 or GTN 750

Interfaced Equipment GDU #1: Present Settings: GDU TXi
Main Indicator (Analog)
CDI: CDI Key: Enabled/Disabled [4]
Selected Course for GPS: Allowed
Selected Course for VLOC: Allowed
V-Flag State: Normal
Notes:
[1] GDU 700/1060 settings are for reference only. To ensure all configuration items for the
GDU 700/1060 are set in accordance with the G500H TXi Part 27 STC, refer to
G500H TXi Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual (Garmin P/N 190-02401-00).
[2] GDU 700/1060 software v2.30 or later is required.
[3] Set each GPS/NAV format for the number of GTN Xi units present for each GDU. Set
GDU TXi on the GTN Xi for each interfaced GDU.
[4] For GDU 700/1060 software prior to v3.10, set CDI Key to Disabled. For GDU 700/1060
software v3.10 or later, set CDI Key to Enabled to enable localizer autoswitch.

Rev. 8 Page C-6
C.1.5 Transponder
Table C-6 Compatible Transponder Models
GTX 32 GTX software v2.10 or later is
RS-232
GTX 327 requried.
GTX 328
GTX 33/33D
GTX software v6.11 or later is
GTX 33/33D with ES RS-232
Garmin required.
GTX 330/330D
GTX 330/330D with ES
GTX 335/335R RS-232
GTX software v2.02 or later is
RS-232 required.
GTX 345/345R
HSDB
GTX 32: GTX MODE C #1 OR #2
GTX 327: GTX MODE C #1 OR #2 (GTN Xi CONTROL OF GTX 327)
AVIATION OUTPUT 1 - OUTPUT (NO GTN Xi CONTROL OF GTX 327) TO
SEND GPS GROUNDSPEED
ALTITUDE FORMAT 1 - INPUT OPTIONAL (NO GTN Xi CONTROL OF
GTX 327) TO RECEIVE PRESSURE ALTITUDE
GTX 328: GTX MODE S #1 OR #2
GTX 33/33D: GTX (MODE S OR W/TIS) #1 OR #2
GTX 33/33D with ES: GTX (MODE S OR W/TIS) #1 OR #2
GTX 330/330D: GTX (MODE S OR W/TIS) #1 OR #2 (GTN Xi CONTROL OF GTX 330)
PANEL GTX W/TIS #1 OR #2 (NO GTN Xi CONTROL OF GTX 330)
ADS-B (NO CONTROL OF GTX 330 AND NO TIS)
GTX 330/330D with ES: GTX (MODE S OR W/TIS) #1 OR #2 (GTN Xi CONTROL OF GTX 330)
PANEL GTX W/TIS #1 OR #2 (NO GTN Xi CONTROL OF GTX 330)
ADS-B (NO CONTROL OF GTX 330 AND NO TIS)
GTX 335/335R: GTX MODE S+ #1 OR #2 OR GTX W/TIS+ #1 OR #2 (GTN XI CONTROL
OF GTX 335/335R)
PANEL GTX W/TIS+ #1 OR #2 (NO CONTROL OF GTX 335)
GTX 345/345R: GTX MODE S+ #1 OR #2 OR GTX W/TIS+ #1 OR #2 (GTN XI CONTROL
OF GTX 345/345R)
HSDB: INTERFACED EQUIPMENT ADS-B IN SOURCE: GTX #1 OR #2

Rev. 8 Page C-7
Transponder RS-232 Port Settings:
GTX 32: IN: REMOTE
OUT: REMOTE
GTX 33: IN: REMOTE
OUT: REMOTE (FOR NON-TIS) OR REMOTE W/TIS (FOR TIS
UNITS)
GTX 327 (GTN Xi CONTROL): IN: REMOTE
OUT: REMOTE
GTX 327 (NO GTN Xi CONTROL): IN: GPS
OUT: ICARUS ALT (WHEN THE GTX 327 IS NOT BEING
CONTROLLED BY THE GTN Xi, CONNECT THE OUTPUT OF
THE TRANSPONDER TO THE GTN Xi AND USE ICARUS ALT AS
THE OUTPUT FORMAT ONLY IF THE TRANSPONDER IS USED
TO SUPPLY PRESSURE ALTITUDE TO THE GTN Xi).
GTX 328: IN: REMOTE
OUT: REMOTE
GTX 330: IN: REMOTE
OUT: REMOTE
GTX 335/335R: IN: REMOTE
OUT: REMOTE
GTX 345/345R: IN: REMOTE
OUT: REMOTE

Rev. 8 Page C-8
C.1.6 NAV Indicator
Table C-7 Compatible NAV Indicator Models
Data
Manufacturer Model Notes
Format
Honeywell KI 202A, KI 203, KI 204, KI 206, KI 208/A,
(Bendix/King) KI 209/A, KI 525A, KPI 552/B, KPI 553/A/B
Century NSD 360A, NSD 1000
331A-6P, 331A-9G, PN101 (331A-3F/3G),
Collins [1]
IND-351D
Analog
Garmin GI 102/102A, GI 106/106A/106B
MD222-402, MD222-406,
Mid Continent
MD200-302/303/306/307
Sperry RD 444, RD 550A, RD 650
S-TEC ST 180
Notes:
[1] Interface to the Collins IND-351D (P/N 622-2083-001) is not covered by this STC.

Rev. 8 Page C-9
C.1.7 Weather, Traffic, and Terrain
Table C-8 Compatible Weather, Traffic, and Terrain
Data
Manufacturer Model Configuration Notes
Format
Minimum GDL 69( )
GDL 69( ) HSDB software version is
4.02.
GTX 33( )/330( ) Refer to Appendix
RS-232
with or without ES Section C.1.5.
Garmin GTS 800 Traffic Format 1 High Speed

GTS 820/825/850/855 Traffic Format 2 High Speed
ARINC 429
Any GAMA Format
GTS 8X0/8X5 High Speed
1 through 6
ADS-B In Source
GTS 8X0/8X5 HSDB
“GTS”
KTA 870 (KTA 810),
Honeywell KMH 880 (KMH 820),
ARINC 429 Traffic Format 4 High Speed
(Bendix/King) KTA 970 (KTA 910),
KMH 980 (KMH 920)
TAS 6XX (TCAD
9900BX)
Avidyne
(Ryan) TCAD 9900B Traffic Format 7
RS-232
TCAD 9900BX Traffic Format 8
High Speed, software
SKY497 (Skywatch) ARINC 429 Traffic Format 6
L-3 v1.6 or later.
Communications SKY899
(Skywatch HP)
C.1.8 Iridium Transceiver

Table C-9 Compatible Iridium Transceiver
Manufacturer Model Data Format Configuration Notes
Garmin GSR 56/56H RS-232 GSR Format 1

Rev. 8 Page C-10
C.1.9 ADS-B Traffic and FIS-B Weather Sources
Table C-10 Compatible Traffic and Weather Sources
Refer to Section 5.4.3.4.
GDL 88H/DH HSDB HSDB GDL 88H software v2.06 or
later is required.
Garmin
Refer to Section 5.4.3.4. GTX
RS-232, RS-232,
GTX 345/345R software v2.02 or later is
HSDB HSDB
required.
C.1.10 Radar Altimeters

Table C-11 Compatible Radar Altimeters
Garmin GRA 55/5500 ARINC 429 Radar Altimeter Low Speed
C.1.11 Flight Stream
Table C-12 Compatible Flight Stream Models

Flight Stream
automatically configures
Garmin Flight Stream 510 N/A N/A
when inserted into the
data card slot.

Rev. 8 Page C-11
C.2 GMA 35 Equipment Compatibility
The following equipment listed in this appendix is compatible with the GMA 35/35c Audio Panel when
configured as described herein. For detailed configuration information, refer to Section 5.4.6.6.
C.2.1 COM Radios

COM radios not listed below are approved under this GTN AML STC if all of the following conditions are
met:
• The COM radio is TSO-approved
• The installation of the COM radio was previously FAA-approved
• The operational check for the COM radio described in Section 5.4.3.11 must be successfully
completed
Table C-13 Approved COM Radios

Manufacturer Model Data Format
GNS 430W
GNS 530W
GTN 635/650/750
Garmin Analog Audio
GTN 635Xi/650Xi/750Xi
SL 30
SL 40
C.2.2 NAV Radios

NAV radios not listed below can still be approved under this GTN AML STC if all of the following
conditions are met:
• The NAV radio is TSO-approved
• The installation of the NAV radio was previously FAA-approved
• The audio check for the NAV radio described in Section 5.4.3.12 must be successfully completed
Table C-14 Approved NAV Radios

Manufacturer Model Data Format
GNS 430W
GNS 530W
Garmin GTN 650/750 Analog Audio
GTN 650Xi/750Xi
SL 30

Rev. 8 Page C-12
APPENDIX D MODEL-SPECIFIC INSTALLATION DATA
D.1 Bell 206 ..............................................................................................................................................D-2

D.2 Bell 407 ..............................................................................................................................................D-4
D.3 Eurocopter AS350 ..............................................................................................................................D-6
D.4 Eurocopter EC130 ............................................................................................................................D-10
D.5 Airbus EC120B ................................................................................................................................D-16
D.6 MD 369E ..........................................................................................................................................D-17
D.7 Enstrom 280 .....................................................................................................................................D-19
D.8 Enstrom 480B .................................................................................................................................. D-21

Rev. 8 Page D-1
D.1 Bell 206
GTN 7XX Xi
GTN 6XX Xi
*71;,,167$//$7,21(;$03/(%(//%
''$57/2:6/23($9,21,&6&2162/(6+2:1
''$57$1'$1'%(//&2162/(6,0,/$5
127(6
237,216)25*71;,1$9,*$725 V ,167$//$7,21,152725&5$)7&2162/($66(0%/<,1&/8'(
(;,67,1*6833257$66(0%/<%(//31 %(///6(5,(621/< $1'
%(///6(5,(621/<
''$57/2:6/23($9,21,&6&2162/( 35()(5('237,21 5(3/$&,1*(;,67,1*6833257
$66(0%/<25
''$57+,*+6/23($9,21,&6&2162/(5(3/$&,1*(;,67,1*6833257$66(0%/<
Figure D-1 GTN Xi Example Installation - Bell 206B

Rev. 8 Page D-2
A B
0.70
+0.75 TYP
0.70
0.94 0.50 0.00
TYP 0.06
R0
.
TY 04
E
0.20
0.20
4
.0
R0 YP
T
DETAIL A DETAIL B
HTAWS RP MODE SWITCH HTAWS CAUTION/WARNING
AND HTAWS STATUS ANNINCIATORS
ANNUNCIATOR INSTALLATION - BELL 206 SERIES
Figure D-2 HTAWS Annunciator Example Installation - Bell 206 Series

Rev. 8 Page D-3
D.2 Bell 407
GTN 7XX Xi
GTN 6XX Xi
*71;,,167$//$7,21(;$03/(%(//
%(//6833257$66(0%/<&$17('3$1(/6+2:1
'$57'/2:6/23($9,21,&6&2162/('$57'+,*+6/23($9,21,&6&2162/(
$1'$(521$87,&$/$&&(6625,(6&2162/(6,0,/$5
127(6
237,216)25*71;,1$9,*$725 V ,167$//$7,21,152725&5$)7&2162/($66(0%/<,1&/8'(
(;,67,1*6833257$66(0%/<&$17('3$1(/ 6+2:1 %(//31
'$57'/2:6/23($9,21,&6&2162/( 35()(5('237,216 5(3/$&,1*(;,67,1*6833257$66(0%/<25
'$57'+,*+6/23($9,21,&6&2162/(5(3/$&,1*(;,67,1*6833257$66(0%/<25
$(521$87,&$/$&&(6625,(6$9,21,&6&2162/(5(3/$&,1*(;,67,1*6833257$66(0%/<
Figure D-3 GTN Example Installation - Bell 407

Rev. 8 Page D-4
A C
B
9.95
3.50
0.13 0.70
0.70
0.70 0.16
1 0.30
R0.
04
TY .04
TYP R0
R0
.0
4
0.29
DETAIL A DETAIL B DETAIL C

HTAWS STATUS INDICATOR HTAWS RP MODE SWITCH HTAWS CAUTION/WARNING
ANNUNCIATOR
ANNUNCIATOR INSTALLATION - BELL 407
NOTES:
1 HTAWS STATUS ANNUNCIATOR CUTOUT IS CENTERED ON EXISTING CIRCULAR

CUTOUT IN ROTORCRAFT CAUTION AND WARNING PANEL BRACKET.
Figure D-4 HTAWS Annunciator Example Installation - Bell 407

Rev. 8 Page D-5
D.3 Eurocopter AS350
GTN 7XX Xi
GTN 6XX Xi
*71;,,167$//$7,21(;$03/((852&237(5$6%%
*(1(9$*$&2162/(6+2:1(852&237(5$08/7,%/2&.
&2162/((852&237(5$&2162/($1'67$1'$5')$&725<&2162/(
35(02' $5(6,0,/$5
127(6
,167$//$7,212)*71;;;,1$9,*$725,17+(&2162/(5(48,5(67+(52725&5$)772%(
(48,33(':,7+(;7(1'('*/$5(6+,(/'$1'(852&237(5$&2162/(25*(1(9$
*$&2162/(
Figure D-5 GTN Xi Example Installation - Eurocopter AS350B2, B3

Sheet 1 of 4

Rev. 8 Page D-6
127(6
212))6:,7&+,65(48,5(')25*71;;1$9,*$725,167$//(',1,167580(173$1(/
86(066:,7&+2152725&5$)7(48,33(':,7+*(1(9$&2162/(
86(.255<6:,7&+2152725&5$)7(48,33(':,7+08/7,%/2&.&2162/(326,7,21
7+(6:,7&+,1$1<$9$,/$%/(/2&$7,21,152725&5$)7(;,67,1*$/3+$6:,7&+
3$1(/25$/3+$237,21$/6:,7&+3$1(/
$ 6:,7&+ *36 ,65(48,5(')25*711$9,*$725,167$//$7,21 5()$/3+$
% 6:,7&+ *36&20 ,65(48,5(')25*711$9,*$725,167$//$7,21 6:,7&+3$1(/
35(3$5((/(&75,&$/%21'%(7:((16:,7&+02817,1*6/((9($1'7+(%$&.6,'(
2) (;,67,1* ,167580(17 3$1(/ 6833257 ,1 $&&25'$1&( :,7+ (852&237(5
67$1'$5'35$&7,&(60$18$/6(&7,2107&%21',1*352&('85(
(/(&75,&$/%21'%(7:((1*36212))6:,7&+
6/((9( $1' 7+( ,167580(17 3$1(/ 6833257
0867%(P2+025/(66
*7181,7212))6:,7&+,167$//$7,21
08/7,%/2&.&2162/($66(0%/<

Sheet 2 of 4

Rev. 8 Page D-7
/
0
;

*361$9
/
0 $:*
6:,7&+ $
,167580(173$1(/ *36

/ 127(1(5*,=(' (1(5*,=(' &20

0 *36

*36

*36
&20 &20 :+,7( &20 *5((1
$ 21 %/$1. 21 *5((1 $:*
$

,167580(173$1(/

*71;; 86($1<$9$,/$%/(3,1
81,7 3 (1(5*,=('

33%869'&
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:* $:*
,167580(173$1(/ $
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:* $
$
$,5&5$)7*1' $:* $:* $:* %
% $:* $:*
$,5&5$)7*1' $:* %
$:* &
& $:*
&
'
'
'
$/3+$%5($.(53$1(/
5+%$**$*(&203$570(17
'(/7$&21752/%2;25
'(/7$237,21$/&21752/
%2;,108/7,%/2&.&2162/(
/,*+7,1*%86+, $:*
*361$9
/,*+7,1*%86/2 $:* $:*
$:*
$
*7121/< 3
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:* $:*

$,5&5$)732:(5 $:* &20
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:*
'(/7$
$:*
$,5&5$)7*1' $:* $:* $
$,5&5$)7*1' $:*
$,5&5$)7*1' $:*
'
3 +
*7121/< 5$',20$67(55(/$<
33%869'&

5
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:* *71;; 126(&203$570(17
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:* 81,7 3 $1</2&$7,21
$9$,/$%/(
$,5&5$)7*1' $:* $:* $,5&5$)732:(5 $:* $:*
$,5&5$)7*1' $:* $,5&5$)732:(5 $:*
$:*
$,5&5$)7*1' $:* $:*
$,5&5$)7*1' $:*
,167580(173$1(/ $/3+$%5($.(53$1(/
/,*+7,1*%86+, $:* ,108/7,%/2&.&2162/(
/,*+7,1*%86/2 $:* $:*
3
*7121/< 81'(5&$%,1)/225
*361$9
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:*
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:*
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:* $:*
$
$,5&5$)7*1' $:* $:*
$,5&5$)7*1' $:*
$,5&5$)7*1' $:* &20
3 $:*
*7121/< $
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:*
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:*
$,5&5$)7*1' $:* $:*
33%869'&
$,5&5$)7*1' $:*
08/7,%/2&.&2162/(
$/3+$%5($.(53$1(/
,1,167580(173$1(/6833257

Sheet 3 of 4

Rev. 8 Page D-8
5()066:,7&+)25
*7181,71232:(5
5()(;,67,1*%86%$5
*7181,712212))6:,7&+
$1'&,5&8,7%5($.(5,167$//$7,21
*(1(9$*$&2162/($66(0%/<
'8$/*71;;;;1$9,*$725:,7+237,21$/
*0$$8',23$1(/,167$//$7,216+2:1

Sheet 4 of 4

Rev. 8 Page D-9
D.4 Eurocopter EC130
,167580(173$1(/7<3,&$/$
25$
GTN 6XX Xi
GTN 7XX Xi
&2162/(7<3&,$/$25$
*71;L,167$//$7,21(;$03/((852&237(5(&6(5,(6
(&76+2:1
Figure D-6 GTN Xi Example Installation - Eurocopter EC130 Series

Sheet 1 of 6

Rev. 8 Page D-10
GTN 6XX XI
GTN XI INSTALLATION EXAMPLE - EUROCOPTER EC130B4
(&%6+2:1
NOTES:
,167$//$7,212)*71;,1$9,*$7256 6 ,17+((&%&2162/(,6/,0,7('727+(*71;;;,'8(72
63$7,$//,0,7$7,216

Sheet 2 of 6

Rev. 8 Page D-11
*71212))6:,7&+,167$//$7,21
(&7,167580(173$1(/6833257
'(/7$&21752/%2;6+2:1'(/7$&21752/%2;6,0,/$5

5()02817,1*6/((9(
3$572)7+(6:,7&+
5()
&211(&72502'8/(
35(:,5('(;,67,1*
5()'(/7$
&21752/%2;
5()'(/7$
&21752/%2;
5()$/3+$(66(17,$/
(48,30(17&,5&8,7
%5($.(53$1(/
127(6
212))6:,7&+,65(48,5(',102'(/(&7)25*71;;1$9,*$725,167$//(',1,167580(173$1(/6:,7&+&$1%(
/2&$7(',1$1<$9$,/$%/(/2&$7,21,152725&5$)7(;,67,1*'(/7$&21752/%2;25'(/7$237,21$/&21752/%2;
6:,7&+ *36 ,65(48,5(')25*711$9,*$725,167$//$7,21
6:,7&+ *36&20 ,65(48,5(')25*711$9,*$725,167$//$7,21
35(3$5((/(&75,&$/%21'%(7:((16:,7&+02817,1*6/((9($1'7+(%$&.6,'(2)(;,67,1*,167580(173$1(/6833257
,1$&&25'$1&(:,7+(852&237(567$1'$5'35$&7,&(60$18$/6(&7,2107&
(/(&75,&$/%21'%(7:((1*36212))6:,7&+6/((9($1',167580(173$1(/68332570867%(P2+025/(66

Sheet 3 of 6

Rev. 8 Page D-12

5
7<33/&6

$/3+$&,5&8,7%5($.(53$1(/
(&%,167580(173$1(/6833257
326702'&,5&8,7%5($.(53$1(/6+2:1
35(02')86(3$1(/6,0,/$5
127(6
212))6:,7&+,65(48,5(',102'(/(&%)25*71;;1$9,*$725,167$//(',1,167580(173$1(/35()(55('6:,7&+/2&$7,21,621
(,7+(56,'(2)(;,67,1*$/3+$',5(&7%$77(5<&,5&8,7%5($.(5'(3(1',1*21$9$,/$%/(63$&(
6:,7&+ *36 ,65(48,5(')25*711$9,*$725,167$//$7,21
6:,7&+ *36&20 ,65(48,5(')25*711$9,*$725,167$//$7,21
35(3$5((/(&75,&$/%21'%(7:((16:,7&+02817,1*6/((9($1'7+(%$&.6,'(2)(;,67,1*,167580(173$1(/6833257,1$&&25'$1&(:,7+
(852&237(567$1'$5'35$&7,&(60$18$/6(&7,2107&%21',1*352&('85(
(/(&75,&$/%21'%(7:((1*36212))6:,7&+6/((9($1'7+(,167580(173$1(/68332570867%(P2+025/(66

Sheet 4 of 6

Rev. 8 Page D-13
$1<$9$,/$%/(3,1:,7+ 15(&7,),(5',2'(
&217,18,7<72*
256:,7&+ *361$9
6:,7&+
&211(&7('72:/7
/ *36 $:*
7(67&,5&8,7 0
$

72/,*+7,1*32:(5
127(1(5*,=(' (1(5*,=('
/
*36 *36 *36

&20 &20 :+,7( &20 *5((1
0 &20
72,167580(173$1(/
81,7
/,*+7,1*32:(581,7
21 %/$1. 21 *5((1

$1'&2162/(
$:*
$
81'(5&$%,1 (1(5*,=('
)/225
*71;;
81,7 3 81'(5&$%,1
$
$
)/225 $
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:* $:* $:* $:* %
% $:* $:*
33%869'&
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:* %
$:* &
$,5&5$)7*1' $:* $:* & $:*
$,5&5$)7*1' $:* & 5()(;,67,1*:,5(6
$:* '
' $:*
7(55$,1:$51,1* $:* '
7(55$,1&$87,21 $:*
'(/7$&21752/%2;25
'(/7$237,21$/&21752/%2;,1
+7$:6,1+,%,7 $:* ,167580(173$1(/6833257
+7$:61$ $:* $/3+$%5($.(5
/ 3$1(/,15,*+7&$5*2
5302'($1181 $:* 0 +2/'
72/,*+7,1*
5302'(,1 $:*
32:(581,7
/
/,*+7,1*%86+, $:* 237,21$/ -
/,*+7,1*%86/2 $:* $:* 0
72/,*+7,1*

32:(581,7

3

237,21$/
*361$9
*
81'(5&$%,1
)/225
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:* $:* $:*
$
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:*
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:* 81'(5&$%,1
5$',20$67(55(/$<
)/225
$,5&5$)7*1' $:* $:* 5 $1</2&$7,21 &20

$,5&5$)7*1' $:* *71;; $9$,/$%/(
81,7 3 *361$9
$,5&5$)7*1' $:*
$:*
$:*
$
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:* $:*
3 $
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:*
$:*
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:* $,5&5$)7*1' $:* $:*
336+('%869'&
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:* $,5&5$)7*1' $:* &20
$,5&5$)7*1' $:* $:* /,*+7,1*%86+, $:*
/,*+7,1*%86/2 $:* $:* $:*
$,5&5$)7*1' $:* $
3 81'(5&$%,1)/225
,167580(173$1(/ $,5&5$)732:(5 $:*

$,5&5$)732:(5 $:*
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:*
33%869'&
$,5&5$)7*1' $:* $:*
$,5&5$)7*1' $:* $/3+$%5($.(5
$,5&5$)7*1' $:* 3$1(/,17$,/%220
3
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:*
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:*
$/3+$%5($.(5
$,5&5$)7*1' $:* $:* 3$1(/,1,167580(17
$,5&5$)7*1' $:* 3$1(/6833257
(&7:,5,1*',$*5$0
'8$/*71;;1$9,*$725,167$//$7,21
,167580(173$1(/
6833257 '8$/*71,167$//$7,216+2:1
*71,167$//$7,21,66,0,/$5

Sheet 5 of 6

Rev. 8 Page D-14
$1<$9$,/$%/(3,1:,7+
15(&7,),(5',2'(
&217,18,7<72*
'(/
6:,7&+
256:,7&+
$1</2&$7,21:,7+&217,18,7< 3
72/77(67&,5&8,7 *36
72/,*+7,1*32:(5

/
127(1(5*,=(' (1(5*,=('

81,7
0
72,167580(173$1(/
*36 *36 *36
/,*+7,1*32:(581,7

&20 &20 :+,7( &20 *5((1

$1'&2162/(
21 %/$1. 21 *5((1

81'(5&$%,1
)/225
(1(5*,=('

81'(5&$%,1
)/225 $
$ *361$9
$
$:* $:* %
% $:* $:* $:*
% $
*71;; $:* &
81,7 3 &
& $:*
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:* $:*

$:* '
' $:*
&20
'
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:*
1(;772$/3+$%5($.(53$1(/ $:*
$,5&5$)7*1' $:* $:* ,1(;,67,1*,167580(173$1(/
$
$,5&5$)7*1' $:* 6833257
7(55$,1:$51,1* $:*
7(55$,1&$87,21 $:*
+7$:6,1+,%,7 $:*
33%869'&
+7$:61$ $:*
5302'($1181 $:* '(/7$

5302'(,1 $:*

72/,*+7,1*
32:(581,7
/,*+7,1*%86+, $:* 237,21$/ $
/,*+7,1*%86/2 $:* $:*

3
237,21$/ '
$/3+$',5(&7
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:* $:* 3&2162/( %$77(5<%5($.(5
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:* 3$1(/,1,167580(17
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:* 3$1(/6833257
*71;;
$,5&5$)7*1' $:* $:* 81,7 3
$,5&5$)7*1' $:*
$,5&5$)7*1' $:* $,5&5$)732:(5 $:*
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:*
3
$,5&5$)7*1' $:* $:*
$,5&5$)7*1' $:*
5$',20$67(55(/$< $1</2&$7,21
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:* $9$,/$%/(
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:*
5
/,*+7,1*%86+, $:*
*361$9
/,*+7,1*%86/2 $:* $:*
$,5&5$)7*1' $:* $:*
$,5&5$)7*1' $:* $:* $:*
3 $

$,5&5$)732:(5 $:* $:*
,167580(173$1(/ $,5&5$)732:(5 $:*
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:* &20
$,5&5$)7*1' $:* $:* $:*

$,5&5$)7*1' $:* $
$,5&5$)7*1' $:*
81'(5&$%,1)/225
3
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:*
$,5&5$)732:(5 $:*
33%869'&
$,5&5$)7*1' $:* $:*
$,5&5$)7*1' $:*
,167580(173$1(/
6833257 (&%:,5,1*',$*5$0
'8$/*71;;1$9,*$725,167$//$7,21
'8$/*71,167$//$7,216+2:1 $/3+$(66(17,$/
%5($.(53$1(/,1
*71,167$//$7,21,66,0,/$5 ,167580(173$1(/
6833257

Sheet 6 of 6

Rev. 8 Page D-15
D.5 Airbus EC120B
GTN 6XX Xi
*71;,,167$//$7,21(;$03/($,5%86(&%
Figure D-7 GTN Xi Example Installation - Airbus EC120B

Rev. 8 Page D-16
D.6 MD 369E
GTN 7XX Xi
GTN 6XX Xi
*71;,,167$//$7,21(;$03/(0'(
Figure D-8 GTN Xi Example Installation - MD 369E

Sheet 1 of 2

Rev. 8 Page D-17
ANNUNCIATORS
GTN 7XX Xi
*71;,,167$//$7,21(;$03/(0'(
Figure D-8 GTN Xi Example Installation - MD 369E

Sheet 2 of 2

Rev. 8 Page D-18
D.7 Enstrom 280
GTN 6XX Xi
*71;,,167$//$7,21(;$03/((167520);))
)$&725<67$1'$5',167580(173$1(/6+2:1237,21$/:,'(
,167580(173$1(/6,0,/$5
Figure D-9 GTN Xi Example Installation - Enstrom 280FX / F-28F

Rev. 8 Page D-19
12.75
9.50
4.50
4.25
A B C
0.70
0.70 0.70
TYP
TYP TYP
R0 R0
. R0
.
TY 04 TY 04 .
P P TY 04
P
DETAIL A DETAIL B DETAIL C

HTAWS RP MODE SWITCH HTAWS STATUS INDICATOR HTAWS CAUTION/WARNING
INDICATOR
ANNUNCIATOR INSTALLATION - ENSTROM 280
Figure D-10 HTAWS Annunciator Example Installation - Enstrom 280

Rev. 8 Page D-20
D.8 Enstrom 480B
GTN 7XX Xi
GTN 6XX Xi
*71;,,167$//$7,21(;$03/((167520%
Figure D-11 GTN Xi Example Installation - Enstrom 480B

Rev. 8 Page D-21

GTN Xi: Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

GTN Xi: Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GTN Xi

Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual

190-01007-D0 May 2023 Revision 8

190-01007-D0 GTN Xi Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual

Software License Notification

190-01007-D0 GTN Xi Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual

3. Restrictions; Protection and Third Party Devices.

190-01007-D0 GTN Xi Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual

4. Term and Termination.

5. Disclaimer; Limitations of Liability; Indemnity.

190-01007-D0 GTN Xi Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual

190-01007-D0 GTN Xi Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual

190-01007-D0 GTN Xi Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual

190-01007-D0 GTN Xi Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual

190-01007-D0 GTN Xi Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual

190-01007-D0 GTN Xi Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual

190-01007-D0 GTN Xi Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual

190-01007-D0 GTN Xi Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual

190-01007-D0 GTN Xi Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual

190-01007-D0 GTN Xi Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual

190-01007-D0 GTN Xi Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual

190-01007-D0 GTN Xi Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual

190-01007-D0 GTN Xi Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual

190-01007-D0 GTN Xi Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual

190-01007-D0 GTN Xi Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual

1.1 Introduction ......................................................................................................................................1-2

190-01007-D0 GTN Xi Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual

190-01007-D0 GTN Xi Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual

190-01007-D0 GTN Xi Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual

1.3.1.1 GTN 6XX Xi Series

1.3.1.2 GTN 7XX Xi Series

190-01007-D0 GTN Xi Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual

190-01007-D0 GTN Xi Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual

Figure 1-1 GTN Xi System Interface Overview

190-01007-D0 GTN Xi Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual

GTN 7XX Xi RS-232

Figure 1-2 GMA 35 System Interface Overview

190-01007-D0 GTN Xi Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual

Figure 1-3 Interface Between One GTN Xi and One GTX

Figure 1-4 Interface Between One GTN Xi and Two GTXs

190-01007-D0 GTN Xi Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual

HSDB GTX 3X/3XX

RS-232 GTX 3X/3XX

190-01007-D0 GTN Xi Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual

RS-232 GTX 33/330/335

1.3.5.1 GTN Xi/GTX 345 Interface Overview

GTN Xi #1 GTX 345

GTN Xi #2 GTX 33/330/335

190-01007-D0 GTN Xi Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual

1.3.5.3 Installation without GTN Xi Control of GTX Transponder

190-01007-D0 GTN Xi Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual

Table 1-4 Garmin STC Documentation

Table 1-5 Garmin Reference Documentation

190-01007-D0 GTN Xi Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual

Table 1-6 Other Reference Documentation

190-01007-D0 GTN Xi Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual

190-01007-D0 GTN Xi Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual

1.5.2 Navigation Database

1.5.3 FliteCharts® Database (GTN 7XX Xi Only)

1.5.4 ChartView™ Database (GTN 7XX Xi Only)

1.5.5 SafeTaxi® Database

190-01007-D0 GTN Xi Part 27 AML STC Installation Manual

1.5.7 Obstacle Database